GENEX Probe User Guide-(V200R003_04)

GENEX Probe V200R003

User Guide Issue

04

Date

2011-02-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address:

Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

[email protected]

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

GENEX Probe User Guide

About This Document

About This Document Overview The document provides the guidelines for installing and using the GENEX Probe (hereinafter referred to as Probe) and methods for collecting the test data, analyzing the test data in real time, and replaying the test data.

Product Version The following table lists the product and version related to this guide. Product Name

Product Version

GENEX Probe

V200R003

Intended Audience This document is intended for: l

Network design engineers

l

Network monitoring engineers

l

System maintenance engineers

Change History Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.

04 (2011-02-15) This is the third commercial release. Compared with 03 (2010-08-10), this version has the following modifications: Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


iii


About This Document

Content

Description

2.5 Recommended Device List

New

7.1 Connectable External Devices

Added terminals.

7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically

New

11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test

New

13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?

New

13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?

New

13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?

New

14.5 PSTN SQE Server

New

03 (2010-08-10) This is the second commercial release. Compared with 02 (2010-06-25), this version has the following modifications: Content

Description

2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe

The content descriptions are changed.

2.3 Main Interface of the Probe


8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test


13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?

New

Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells


02 (2010-06-25) This is the first commercial release. Compared with 01 (2010-04-14), this version has the following modifications:

iv

Content

Description

1 New Features of the Probe V200R003



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


About This Document

Content

Description

7.2 Plugging in External Devices


8.4 Designing Test Plans


11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)


11.3 IP Analysis

New

13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test?

New

14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs


01 (2010-04-14) This is the first release. It is prepared for the Beta test version of V200R003.

Organization 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003 This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003. 2 Overview of the Probe The Probe is an air interface test software, which is used to collect the test data of the air interface of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+, CDMA2000 1x/EV-DO, WiMAX, and LTE network. Through the Probe, the network performance can be evaluated, the network optimization can be guided, and the fault can be rectified. The collected test data of the air interface on the radio network can be saved as the test logfile. This facilitates the data analysis after the logfile is imported to other post-processing software (such as GENEX Assistant) or the later data replaying. 3 Installing the Probe This section describes how to install the Probe and other assistants. To complete the installation of the Probe, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard. 4 Starting the Probe Once installed, the Probe application can be launched from the Start menu or the shortcut icon. 5 Managing the Map Window The map window displays map-related information in a test area and counter information such as cell information, event information, and IE information on the drive test route. You can add a layer, configure layer properties, and configure the legend properties of the IE layer in the map window. 6 Managing Engineering Parameters Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


v


About This Document

This chapter describes engineering parameters of different network systems supported by the Probe and the method for importing engineering parameters. You can learn about the details of base station parameters, antenna parameters, neighboring cell parameters, and various technology parameters of the current test area through the engineering parameters. 7 Connecting External Devices Connecting external devices involves connecting external devices to the PC and in the Probe, so that the external devices can work with the Probe to perform tests. When you use the Probe to replay data, you need not connect external devices. 8 Collecting Data The Probe collects the air interface test data through the test terminal and other external devices and records test data in logfiles. Before collecting the data, make sure that a computer installed with the Probe, the test terminal, the scanner, and the GPS are available and the dongle must be plugged in. You can also import engineering parameters for different network systems and map files, which helps to provide a vivid view of test data. 9 Managing Logfiles During tests, test data is saved in .gen files that are called logfiles. This chapter describes how to record, replay, segment, and export logfiles. 10 Managing View Windows This section describes how to view data in view windows and how to configure properties of view windows. View windows are key windows of the Probe. You can view IEs, events, Layer 2 or Layer 3 messages, and statistical values of indicators in view windows. 11 Typical Application This section describes typical test methods supported by the Probe. 12 Interface Reference of the Probe This describes the interface and parameters of the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect, view, and replay the data through the Probe. 13 FAQs This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the software and the corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills. 14 Appendix This describes the test items, information elements (IEs), predefined events, and keyboard shortcuts supported by the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect or view data through the Probe. 15 Technical Support

Conventions Symbol Conventions The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. vi


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


About This Document

Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

General Conventions The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in Courier New.

Command Conventions The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii


About This Document

Convention

Description

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Format

Description

Key

Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2

Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2

Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

viii

Action

Description

Click

Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click

Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag

Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Contents

Contents About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003.....................................................................................1-1 1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01.....................................................................................................1-2 1.2 New Features of the Probe V200R003C00.....................................................................................................1-2

2 Overview of the Probe...............................................................................................................2-1 2.1 Introduction to the Probe.................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe............................................................................................................................2-4 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.............................................................................................................................2-7 2.4 Working Mode of the Probe..........................................................................................................................2-18 2.5 Recommended Device List...........................................................................................................................2-19 2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA)..................................................................................2-19 2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE)....................................................................................................2-21 2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX).............................................................................................2-21 2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List.................................................................................................................2-22

3 Installing the Probe....................................................................................................................3-1 3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe.........................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Installing Shared Components........................................................................................................................ 3-3 3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.4 Plugging in a Dongle.......................................................................................................................................3-8

4 Starting the Probe.......................................................................................................................4-1 5 Managing the Map Window....................................................................................................5-1 5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps...........................................................................................................................5-2 5.2 Importing Maps...............................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps.................................................................................................................. 5-4 5.3 Adding Layers.................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.4 Configuring Layer Properties..........................................................................................................................5-6 5.5 Configuring Legend Properties.......................................................................................................................5-8

6 Managing Engineering Parameters........................................................................................6-1 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems................................................................6-2 6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters..................................................................................................................6-9 Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


ix


Contents

7 Connecting External Devices...................................................................................................7-1 7.1 Connectable External Devices.........................................................................................................................7-2 7.2 Plugging in External Devices........................................................................................................................7-11 7.3 Configuring External Devices.......................................................................................................................7-12 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically......................................................................................7-12 7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually..............................................................................................7-13 7.4 Enabling External Devices............................................................................................................................7-16 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected................................................................................................................7-17 7.6 Configuring Device Alarms..........................................................................................................................7-18

8 Collecting Data...........................................................................................................................8-1 8.1 Data Collection Process..................................................................................................................................8-3 8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection...............................................................................................................8-3 8.3 Creating a Project............................................................................................................................................8-4 8.4 Designing Test Plans.......................................................................................................................................8-5 8.5 Performing a Test Plan....................................................................................................................................8-7 8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA)........................................................................................................8-8 8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test.....................................................................................................................8-9 8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test.................................................................................................................8-10 8.5.4 Monitoring the Test..............................................................................................................................8-11 8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans..............................................................................................................................8-11

9 Managing Logfiles.....................................................................................................................9-1 9.1 Recording Logfiles..........................................................................................................................................9-2 9.2 Segmenting Logfiles.......................................................................................................................................9-3 9.3 Replaying Logfiles..........................................................................................................................................9-3 9.4 Exporting Logfiles...........................................................................................................................................9-5

10 Managing View Windows....................................................................................................10-1 10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events....................................................................................................................10-2 10.2 Browsing Data.............................................................................................................................................10-2 10.3 Configuring the View Window...................................................................................................................10-3 10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View.......................................................................................................10-3 10.3.2 Configuring the List View..................................................................................................................10-4 10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View...............................................................................................................10-5 10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View.......................................................................................................10-5

11 Typical Application...............................................................................................................11-1 11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA)...................................................................................11-2 11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test...................................................................................11-2 11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test.................................................................................11-3 11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server............................11-4 11.2 Forcing Function Tests................................................................................................................................11-6 11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters..........................................................................................11-6 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements................................................................................................11-7 x


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Contents

11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning..............................................................................................11-8 11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test.....................................................................................11-9 11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test............................................................................11-11 11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test....................................................................................11-13 11.3 IP Analysis................................................................................................................................................11-14

12 Interface Reference of the Probe.........................................................................................12-1 12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window....................................................................................12-4 12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window...................................................12-6 12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window...........................................................................................12-8 12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window............................................................................................12-13 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View......................................................................................................12-17 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View....................................................................................................12-18 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices...........................................................................................12-19 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data................................................................................................12-25 12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items...............................................................................................12-26 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test........................................................................................................12-26 12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters...........................................................................12-27 12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map.................................................................................12-29 12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties.................................................................................12-30 12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties......................................................................12-32 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event...........................................................................................12-34 12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm........................................................................................12-35 12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications...........................................................................................12-36 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings......................................................................................................12-36 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views.................................................................12-38 12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View........................................................12-40 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM........................................................................12-41 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test......................................................................................12-42 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test.................................................................................12-43 12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM..............................................................12-44 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data..........................................................................................................12-45 12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner......................................................12-51

13 FAQs.........................................................................................................................................13-1 13.1 Problems Related to Software Start............................................................................................................13-2 13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails?........................................................13-2 13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails?...........................................................................13-3 13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package?............................................................................13-3 13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program..................................................................................................13-3 13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components...........................................................................13-4 13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections...................................................................................................13-4 13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails?......................................................13-5 13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails?...............................................13-5 Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


xi


Contents

13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails?....................................................13-6 13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the PC?.......13-6 13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals?......................13-7 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?..........................................................................................................13-7 13.3 Problems Related to Views.......................................................................................................................13-10 13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails?.................................................................13-11 13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails?...............................................................13-11 13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails?...............................................13-11 13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?...............................13-12 13.4 Problems Related to Tests.........................................................................................................................13-13 13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail?...........................................................................13-13 13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated?......................................................13-15 13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test? .....................................................................................................................................................................13-16 13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)?.............................................................13-16 13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?.................13-17

14 Appendix..................................................................................................................................14-1 14.1 Description of Test Items............................................................................................................................14-2 14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks.....................................................................................14-2 14.1.2 Test Items of MSs..............................................................................................................................14-6 14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners..........................................................................................................14-60 14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners........................................................................................................14-65 14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners.......................................................................................14-91 14.2 Description of Predefined Events..............................................................................................................14-92 14.2.1 General Events.................................................................................................................................14-93 14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events...................................................................................................................14-94 14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events............................................................................................................14-98 14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events..............................................................................................................14-121 14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events...........................................................................................................14-126 14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events..................................................................................................................14-130 14.3 Description of Information Elements......................................................................................................14-131 14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs...............................................................................................14-132 14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs........................................................................................14-148 14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs...........................................................................................14-167 14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs.........................................................................................14-191 14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs................................................................................................14-228 14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners.................................................................................................14-273 14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements...............................................................................14-276 14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements.........................................................................14-282 14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements...................................................................................................14-282 14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts.................................................................................................................................14-283 14.5 PSTN SQE Server...................................................................................................................................14-284 xii


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Contents

14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server...............................................................................................14-285 14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server....................................................................................................14-295 14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server................................................................................................................14-301 14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server................................................................................14-306 14.5.5 FAQs..............................................................................................................................................14-309 14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server..............................................................................................14-311 14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server..................................................................................14-313

15 Technical Support..................................................................................................................15-1

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


xiii


Figures

Figures Figure 1-1 Synchronous speech quality evaluation test.......................................................................................1-3 Figure 1-2 Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test.....................................................................................1-4 Figure 1-3 Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server......................................1-4 Figure 2-1 System structure of the Probe.............................................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-2 Main interface of the Probe................................................................................................................2-7 Figure 2-3 Standard toolbar................................................................................................................................2-12 Figure 2-4 Replay toolbar...................................................................................................................................2-14 Figure 2-5 Navigation pane................................................................................................................................2-15 Figure 2-6 Shortcut menu of the status bar of the operation interface...............................................................2-17 Figure 2-7 System status bar..............................................................................................................................2-17 Figure 3-1 Customer Information.........................................................................................................................3-6 Figure 5-1 Cell layer.............................................................................................................................................5-2 Figure 7-1 Device Configure dialog box...........................................................................................................7-13 Figure 7-2 The example of COM port..............................................................................................................7-15 Figure 7-3 The example of Modem port...........................................................................................................7-15 Figure 12-1 Test Plan Control window............................................................................................................12-4 Figure 12-2 Engineering Parameter management window...........................................................................12-6 Figure 12-3 OutdoorMap window....................................................................................................................12-8 Figure 12-4 Map Layers window....................................................................................................................12-12 Figure 12-5 IndoorMap window.....................................................................................................................12-13 Figure 12-6 Map Layers window....................................................................................................................12-16 Figure 12-7 Interface of the test data view.......................................................................................................12-17 Figure 12-8 Line Chart window.....................................................................................................................12-18 Figure 13-1 Y-shaped cable...............................................................................................................................13-8 Figure 13-2 Querying the IP address of the host................................................................................................13-9 Figure 13-3 UARFCN definition (general)......................................................................................................13-17 Figure 13-4 UARFCN definition (additional channels)...................................................................................13-17 Figure 14-1 System structure of the PSTN SQE Server................................................................................14-287 Figure 14-2 Speech evaluation on the uplink.................................................................................................14-287 Figure 14-3 Speech evaluation on the downlink............................................................................................14-288 Figure 14-4 Main interface of the PSTN SQE Server....................................................................................14-290 Figure 14-5 Customer Information.................................................................................................................14-297 Figure 14-6 Test Plan Editor interface.........................................................................................................14-306 Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


xv


Tables

Tables Table 2-1 Description of the system structure of the Probe.................................................................................2-3 Table 2-2 Basic concepts of the Probe.................................................................................................................2-4 Table 2-3 Description of the main interface of the Probe....................................................................................2-8 Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar of the Probe............................................................................................2-8 Table 2-5 Description of the Project menu..........................................................................................................2-9 Table 2-6 Description of the Logfile menu..........................................................................................................2-9 Table 2-7 Description of the Configuration menu............................................................................................2-10 Table 2-8 Description of the View menu...........................................................................................................2-10 Table 2-9 Description of the Test menu.............................................................................................................2-11 Table 2-10 Description of the Window menu....................................................................................................2-11 Table 2-11 Description of the Help menu..........................................................................................................2-12 Table 2-12 Description of the standard toolbar..................................................................................................2-13 Table 2-13 Description of the replay toolbar......................................................................................................2-14 Table 2-14 Description of the icons under the Project tab................................................................................2-15 Table 2-15 Description of the icons under the Configuration tab....................................................................2-16 Table 2-16 Description of the system status bar.................................................................................................2-17 Table 2-17 Device status description..................................................................................................................2-18 Table 3-1 Hardware requirements of the Probe....................................................................................................3-2 Table 3-2 Software requirements of the Probe.....................................................................................................3-2 Table 3-3 Structure of the Probe installation folder.............................................................................................3-7 Table 7-1 Specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals..................................................................................7-2 Table 7-2 Specifications of CDMA test terminals...............................................................................................7-7 Table 7-3 Specifications of WiMAX test terminals.............................................................................................7-8 Table 7-4 Specifications of LTE test terminals....................................................................................................7-9 Table 8-1 Data collection procedure.....................................................................................................................8-3 Table 8-2 Requirements for the external devices.................................................................................................8-4 Table 12-1 Description of the Test Plan Control window................................................................................12-4 Table 12-2 Description of the Test Plan Control window toolbar...................................................................12-5 Table 12-3 Description of the Engineering Parameter management window...............................................12-6 Table 12-4 Toolbar description of the Engineering Parameter management window..................................12-7 Table 12-5 Description of the OutdoorMap window.......................................................................................12-9 Table 12-6 Description of the OutdoorMap window toolbar...........................................................................12-9 Table 12-7 Description of the Map Layers window.......................................................................................12-12 Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


xvii


Tables

Table 12-8 Description of the IndoorMap window........................................................................................12-14 Table 12-9 Description of the IndoorMap window toolbar............................................................................12-14 Table 12-10 Description of the Map Layers window.....................................................................................12-16 Table 12-11 Description of the test data view..................................................................................................12-17 Table 12-12 Description of the Line Chart window.......................................................................................12-19 Table 13-1 Data packets need to be selected....................................................................................................13-13 Table 13-2 Fault cause......................................................................................................................................13-14 Table 13-3 Fault cause......................................................................................................................................13-15 Table 14-1 Properties of the MMS test item....................................................................................................14-30 Table 14-2 Auxiliary parameters......................................................................................................................14-30 Table 14-3 Description of system structure of the PSTN SQE Server...........................................................14-287 Table 14-4 Speech evaluation on the uplink..................................................................................................14-288 Table 14-5 Speech evaluation on the downlink..............................................................................................14-288 Table 14-6 Basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.....................................................................................14-289 Table 14-7 Description of the main interface.................................................................................................14-290 Table 14-8 Description of the menu bar.........................................................................................................14-291 Table 14-9 Description of the File menu........................................................................................................14-291 Table 14-10 Description of the Configuration menu....................................................................................14-291 Table 14-11 Description of the View menu...................................................................................................14-292 Table 14-12 Description of the Test menu.....................................................................................................14-292 Table 14-13 Description of the Help menu....................................................................................................14-292 Table 14-14 Description of the toolbar...........................................................................................................14-292 Table 14-15 Description of the navigation pane of the operation interface...................................................14-293 Table 14-16 Operation procedures.................................................................................................................14-294 Table 14-17 Hardware requirements of the PSTN SQE Server.....................................................................14-295 Table 14-18 Software requirements of the PSTN SQE Server......................................................................14-296 Table 14-19 Description of the Test Plan Editor interface...........................................................................14-306 Table 14-20 Description of the Test Plan Editor Toolbar............................................................................14-307 Table 14-21 Fault cause..................................................................................................................................14-310

xviii


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



1

New Features of the Probe V200R003

About This Chapter This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003. 1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01 This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C01. 1.2 New Features of the Probe V200R003C00 This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C00.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


1-1



1.1 New Features of the Probe V200R003C01 This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C01.

Configuring External Devices Automatically For details, see 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically.

New Test Terminals The new test terminals of Probe V200R003C01 are as follows: l

GSM/WCDMA – Huawei U1280-5 – Huawei U8220 – Huawei U8226 – Huawei U7519 – Huawei U7517 – Huawei U3220 – Huawei E1823 Card – Huawei E372u-8 Card

l

LTE – Huawei UE 2.2 – Huawei B390 – Huawei E398 Card

For details, see Test Terminal.

New Scanners The new scanners of Probe V200R003C01 are as follows: l

PCTel PCT-505 (WCDMA)

l

PCTel PCT-520 (GSM/WCDMA)

1.2 New Features of the Probe V200R003C00 This section describes the new features of Probe V200R003C00. Compared with Probe V200R002, the new features of Probe V200R003C00 are as follows:

1-2

l

Supporting the WiMAX Beceem test and LTE TDD/FDD test.

l

Supporting the enhanced speech quality evaluation test. For details, see Speech Quality Evaluation Test.

l

Supporting more test items. For details, see New Test Items.

l

Supporting more forcing function tests. For details, see New Forcing Functions. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



l

Supporting the settings of the size of the TCP window. For details, see Setting the Size of the TCP Window.

l

Supporting more models of test terminals. For details, see New Test Terminals.

Speech Quality Evaluation Test Based on Probe V200R002, Probe V200R003 enhances the speech quality evaluation tests. The speech quality evaluation tests are categorized into the following types: l

Synchronous speech quality evaluation test One Probe is configured with the two PHU terminals. The Probe performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling a PHU terminal to call the other PHU terminal. During the test, the calling PHU terminal plays speech samples and the called PHU terminal records result files so that the uplink and downlink MOSs are obtained. For details, see Figure 1-1. In this case, only the test plan for the calling PHU terminal needs to be configured.

l

Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test The Probe is installed on two PCs. Each Probe is configured with a PHU terminal. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the two PHU terminals to call each other. During the test, the calling and called PHU terminals record and play speech files alternatively so that each Probe records the MOS. For details, see Figure 1-2. In this case, the test plans for the calling and called PHU terminals need to be configured separately.

l

Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server For two PCs, one is configured with the Probe that is configured with a PHU terminal, and the other is configured with the PSTN SQE Server. The Probe performs the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to call the PSTN SQE Server or the PSTN SQE Server to call the PHU terminal. During the test, the calling party plays voices and the called party records voices so that the MOS is obtained. For details, see Figure 1-3. In this case, the test plans for the calling and called parties need to be configured separately.

Figure 1-1 Synchronous speech quality evaluation test

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


1-3



Figure 1-2 Asynchronous speech quality evaluation test

Figure 1-3 Speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server

New Test Items The new test items of Probe V200R003 are as follows: l

GSM/WCDMA – Email, which indicates the email sending test. – Multi-FTP, which indicates that a test terminal performs the FTP download and upload tests at the same time. – Async SQE(MS-MS), which indicates the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. – AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS), which indicates the AMR end-to-end delay test.

l

WiMAX NetSearch, which indicates the WiMAX Beceem frequency scan test.

l

LTE – Frequency Scan, which indicates the LTE RRC spectrum scan test. – Cell Scan, which indicates the LTE RRC cell scan test. – Iperf, which indicates the LTE TCP or UDP network performance test.

1-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



New Forcing Functions l

GSM nonvolatile parameter setting

l

GSM frequency scan test

l

WCDMA UARFCN locking and scrambling code locking tests

l

LTE EARFCN locking and scrambling code locking tests

Setting the Size of the TCP Window You can change the size of the TCP window to decrease the delay in the data transmission. The size of the TCP window can be set in System Configure.

New Test Terminals The new test terminals of Probe V200R003 are as follows: l

GSM/WCDMA – Huawei U6100 PHU – Huawei U1251 PHU – Huawei E270+ Card

l

WiMAX – Huawei Beceem BM328 – Huawei Beceem BM338 – Huawei Sequans BM358

l

LTE – Huawei UE 1.0 – Huawei UE 1.1 – Huawei UE 2.0

For details, see Test Terminal.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


1-5


2 Overview of the Probe

2

Overview of the Probe

About This Chapter The Probe is an air interface test software, which is used to collect the test data of the air interface of the GSM/GPRS/EDGE, WCDMA/HSPA/HSPA+, CDMA2000 1x/EV-DO, WiMAX, and LTE network. Through the Probe, the network performance can be evaluated, the network optimization can be guided, and the fault can be rectified. The collected test data of the air interface on the radio network can be saved as the test logfile. This facilitates the data analysis after the logfile is imported to other post-processing software (such as GENEX Assistant) or the later data replaying. 2.1 Introduction to the Probe The Probe supports multiple network systems, device types, features powerful service test function, and data management function. In addition, the Probe is easy to operate. 2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe This describes certain central concepts of the Probe, such as external device, logfile, test plan, signaling, and air interface parameters. These concepts help you better use the Probe to collect, view, and analyze the test data of the air interface. 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe This section describes the main interface of the Probe, including the menu bar, toolbar, navigation pane, operation interface, status bar, and entries to perform related operations by using the Probe. 2.4 Working Mode of the Probe The Probe can work in two different working modes. One for testing and recording data. The other is for replaying and analyzing data. 2.5 Recommended Device List This section describes the recommended devices, including UEs, data cards, and scanners.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


2-1



2.1 Introduction to the Probe The Probe supports multiple network systems, device types, features powerful service test function, and data management function. In addition, the Probe is easy to operate.

Features The features of the Probe are as follows: l

Supports the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems.

l

Supports multiple device types, including: – Multiple types of test terminals. – Multiple types of scanners. – Multiple types of GPS.

l

Supports multiple tests of the voice service and the data service, including the voice service test, scanner test, data service test, and concurrent test of the voice and data service.

l

Supports multiple speech quality evaluation tests. For details, see 1 New Features of the Probe V200R003.

l

Supports forcing function test. For details, see 11.2 Forcing Function Tests.

l

Supports the geographic display of the wireless measurement data. The Probe can dynamically display the test parameters, test routes, and neighboring connection line and display events by using graphics. In addition, the Probe supports the geographic display of the MapInfo map, raster map, and site information.

l

Supports recording and saving logfiles in real time and replaying the test procedure through the replay function. In addition, during the test, the logfiles can be sliced to facilitate the management of the logfiles recorded in different time segments.

l

Supports displaying key events in real time, such as handover and call drops during the test. The statistics of key events and KPIs in real time during the test facilitates the detection of problems.

l

Supports the data view synchronization of the message view, map view, and event view facilitate the problem location and analysis.

Application Scenarios The Probe can be used at every stage of the network lifecycle, such as the network planning, network construction, network capacity expansion, and network optimization. l

Exploring propagation environment During the network planning, the Probe uses the scanner to perform the continuous wave (CW) test to obtain the test data of the radio signal space fading in typical running environment. The data can be used to calibrate propagation models and function as a guide to the network planning.

l 2-2

Performance test and evaluation Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



During network construction and capacity expansion, you can evaluate the network performances by the Probe. The evaluation result functions as a guide to adjusting and optimizing network parameters. l

Network problem identification During the network maintenance or optimization, the test process can be replayed through the replay function of the Probe. The network problems can be quickly identified through the replay function of the Probe and the post-processing data analysis software (such as GENEX Assistant).

System Structure The Probe system consists of the test terminal, scanner, GPS, PC installed with the Probe, and dongle. It supports simultaneous testing on the test terminal, scanner, and GPS. During the test, up to six test terminals, one scanner, and one GPS can be connected to the PC. Figure 2-1 shows the system structure of the Probe. Table 2-1 describes the physical entities shown in Figure 2-1. Figure 2-1 System structure of the Probe

Table 2-1 Description of the system structure of the Probe

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Physical Entity

Description

PC

Refers to a desktop or laptop. The PC is used to install the main program of the Probe, the GENEX shared components, and the driver of certain devices to provide the data test platform of the air interface. In addition, the PC can be connected to the GPS, scanner, test terminal, or dongle through the serial port, USB port, IEEE 1394 port, or ethernet port.

Dongle

Refers to the hardware device with the license information. The dongle is used to control the usage rights to the Probe.

GPS

The GPS is used to record outdoor test tracks.

Scanner

Refers to the scanner. The scanner can record the spectrum of the air interface data and import the spectrum to Probe for observation. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3



Physical Entity

Description

Test terminal

Refers to the MS or PC card.

2.2 Basic Concepts of the Probe This describes certain central concepts of the Probe, such as external device, logfile, test plan, signaling, and air interface parameters. These concepts help you better use the Probe to collect, view, and analyze the test data of the air interface. Table 2-2 describes the basic concepts of the Probe. Table 2-2 Basic concepts of the Probe Basic Concepts

Description

Remarks

External device

The external device refers to the test terminal, scanner, and Global Positioning System (GPS).

For types and specifications of the external device supported by the Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.

l Test terminal The test terminal includes the test mobile phone and PC card. l Scanner The scanner can record the spectrum of the air interface data and import the spectrum to Probe for observation. l GPS The GPS is used to record outdoor test tracks. Logfile

The logfile is the record of the collected information during the drive test. During the drive test, the test data can be saved in a file, and the file is called logfile (a .gen file). Through the logfile, you can replay the test procedure. This facilitates observing and analyzing the data.

-

When recording a logfile, the Probe automatically saves a .tab file with the same name with the logfile. The .tab file is used to store GPS information.

2-4

Project

The Probe manages test items based on projects. You can configure multiple external devices and other system parameters and design the test plan for one project.

-

Test plan

The test plan is a customized test task and consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can design test plan for the test terminal and scanner according to your requirements to guide the test of each data service and voice service during the drive test.

For the test items provided by the Probe, see 14.1 Description of Test Items.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Basic Concepts

Description

Indoor test The difference between the indoor test and the outdoor test lies in the methods of obtaining the test tracks. In the case of the outdoor test, the test tracks are obtained through the dot trace by the GPS. In the case of the indoor test, the test tracks are obtained through the manual dot trace.

Remarks -

The indoor test consists of horizontal test and vertical test. l In the case of the horizontal test, the fixed points are selected according to the floor plan of the equipment room. The horizontal test consists of automatic test and manual test. The automatic test is performed according to the tracks entered beforehand. The manual test is performed by manually controlling the tracks of points. l In the case of the vertical test, the signal distribution in the vertical direction between floors is tested. Statistic Report of Event

By using the air interface message or Layer2/Layer3 signaling, the Probe can judge the events in accordance with the event definition rules and help in locating radio network problems. The Probe provides predefined events of the system. Through the event view window, you can browse the predefined events of the system or check the events in the map view.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

For the predefined events provided by the Probe, see 14.2 Description of Predefined Events.

Device alarm

During the drive test, when the device is unexpectedly disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak, the Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode. You can set alarm events for special situations and alarm modes.

-

Message

The message provided by the Probe refers to the air interface message, generally the layer 2 message and the layer 3 message. In the message view window, you can browse air interface messages or the messages from various protocols or events.

-

Air interface parameter s

Air interface parameters refer to the information elements (IEs) of the test terminal. The air interface parameters of each network protocol are displayed in the air interface parameter view or map view in digital or text mode.

For the air interface parameters that can be collected by the Probe, see 14.3 Description of Information Elements.

Data service

The session of the data service can be performed through the setup of the Packet Switched (PS) connection.

-


2-5



Basic Concepts

Description

Remarks

Voice service

The voice service or the video call service can be tested through the setup of the Circuit Switched (CS) connection.

-

Data view

The data view is used to display the test data. The data views provided by the Probe include the IE view, message view, event view, map view, KPI statistic view, and GPS view.

-

These data views are displayed on the Probe in chart, list, text, line chart, or mixed mode. Engineeri ng parameter s

Engineering parameters include base station (BS) engineering parameters, BS technical parameters, antenna parameters, and neighboring cell parameters. After the engineering parameters are imported, the system can find the information about the best matched site in time and consider the engineering parameters as network parameters for analysis.

For the engineering parameters supported by the Probe, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems.

Map

The map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo map and the raster map. The map information is displayed in the map window on the Probe. The map information involves the test area, test routes, events, and engineering parameters.

-

l MapInfo Map A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The files supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special type of workspace used for map layers and saves the configurations including layer order, labels, and legends. l Raster map The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. The raster map supported by the Probe is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png format. Layer

A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layers: map layers and indicator layers.

-

l A map consists of multiple map layers. l An indicator layer consists of events, IEs, and cells. A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering parameters.

2-6


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Basic Concepts

Description

Remarks

Label

The labels indicates the objects in various layers of maps in text form. The objects include field names of engineering parameters in cell layers, IE values and numbers in IE layers, and names of buildings in building layers.

-

Filemark

The filemark is used to record the geographic information about the test location in texts. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference source.

-

The filemarks can be displayed as events in view windows. You can search for filemark events to locate the filemark area during the data replay.

2.3 Main Interface of the Probe This section describes the main interface of the Probe, including the menu bar, toolbar, navigation pane, operation interface, status bar, and entries to perform related operations by using the Probe. Figure 2-2 shows the interface after the Probe is started. Table 2-3 describes the items shown in Figure 2-2. Figure 2-2 Main interface of the Probe

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


2-7



Table 2-3 Description of the main interface of the Probe No.

Name

Description

1

Menu bar

Displays the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu Bar.

2

Toolbar

Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For details, see Toolbar.

3

Navigation pane

Provides shortcut icons for the main operations of the system. For details, see Navigation Pane.

4

Operation interface

Displays different view windows and configuration interfaces. For details, see Operation Interface.

5

Status bar of the operation interface

Displays the worksheet that is added by users. For details, see Operation Interface.

6

System status bar

Displays the status information about the system, including the current status of the system and the device. For details, see System Status Bar.

Menu Bar The menu bar of the Probe shows the main menu of the system. The menus on the menu bar are arranged according to the main functions of the Probe to facilitate your operations. Table 2-4 describes the menu bar of the Probe and the corresponding functions. Table 2-4 Description of the menu bar of the Probe

2-8

Main Menu

Description

Project

Provides entries for operations related to the project management. For details, see Table 2-5.

Logfile

Provides entries for operations related to the management of the logfile. For details, see Table 2-6.

Configuration

Provides entries for operations such as configuring external devices, engineering parameters, test plans, and the system. For details, see Table 2-7.

View

Provides entries for operations related to the view management. For details, see Table 2-8.

Test

Provides entries for certain basic operations during data collection. For details, see Table 2-9.

Window

Provides entries for operations such as arranging view windows. For details, see Table 2-10. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Main Menu

Description

Help

Provides entries for the system help and operations related to the license management. For details, see Table 2-11.

Table 2-5 Description of the Project menu Menu Item

Description

New

Enables you to create a project.

Open

Enables you to open a project under a specified path.

Open From

Enables you to open projects of different types. The menu items are as follows: Site Verification, Optimize, Benchmark, Acceptance, and Customize.

Close

Enables you to close the project that is opened currently.

Remove

Enables you to delete a project.

Save

Enables you to save a project.

Save As

Enables you to save the current project as another one.

Exit

Enables you to exit the main program of the Probe.

Table 2-6 Description of the Logfile menu

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Menu Item

Description

Open Logfile

Enables you to open a logfile.

Close Logfile

Enables you to close a logfile.

Play

Enables you to replay a logfile.

Pause

Enables you to pause the logfile replay.

Stop

Enables you to stop the logfile replay.

Speed Up

Enables you to accelerate the replay of a logfile.

Speed Down

Enables you to slow down the replay of a logfile.

Export Data

Enables you to convert the test data format.


2-9



Table 2-7 Description of the Configuration menu Menu Item

Description

Device Configure

Enables you to configure external devices.

Engineering Parameter management

Enables you to manage engineering parameters.

Test Plan Control

Enables you to design a test plan.

System Configure

Enables you to set configuration items of the system.

Table 2-8 Description of the View menu

2-10

Menu Item

Description

Toolbars

Enables you to set whether to display the standard toolbar, replay toolbar, and navigation pane. By default, these items are displayed.

Status Bar

Enables you to set whether to display the system status bar. By default, the system status bar is displayed.

GSM

Enables you to open the view of GSM/GPRS air interface parameters.

WCDMA

Enables you to open the view of WCDMA air interface parameters.

CDMA

Enables you to open the view of CDMA2000 1X/EVDO air interface parameters.

WiMAX

Enables you to open the view of WiMAX air interface parameters.

LTE

Enables you to open the view of LTE air interface parameters.

GPS

Enables you to open the GPS view.

Service Quality

Enables you to open the view of data service parameters.

MOS

Enables you to open the view of speech quality evaluation.

Statistic

Enables you to open the event statistics view and KPI statistics view.

Message

Enables you to open the Layer 2 or Layer 3 message view.

Event List

Enables you to open the event list view.

Information

Enables you to open the information view.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Menu Item

Description

OutdoorMap

Enables you to open the outdoor map view.

IndoorMap

Enables you to open the indoor map view.

Scanner

Enables you to open the scanner view.

Custom Line Chart

Enables you to open the line chart view.

Table 2-9 Description of the Test menu Menu Item

Description

Start Test Plan

Enables you to start a test plan.

Stop Test Plan

Enables you to stop a test plan.

Start Record

Enables you to start or stop the logfile recording.

Pause Record

Enables you to pause or resume the logfile recording.

Slice Record

Enables you to slice a logfile.

File Mark

During the test, the Probe records the geographic information about the test location in texts and automatically saves the information in DT logfiles. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference source. During the data replay or data analysis, the Probe can quickly locate the user-concerned area based on the Filemark event. This menu is available after the Probe starts the DT logfile recording.

Forcing Function

Enables you to controls a terminal to perform the forcing feature test, including the GSM, WCDMA, and LTE forcing feature test, GSM Carrier-to-Adjacent (CA) measurement, and GSM NV parameter setting.

LTE Send Command

Enables you to control a LTE terminal to perform the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) frequency hopping test. For details about the hopping group information, see Radio Parameters.

Table 2-10 Description of the Window menu

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Menu Item

Description

Cascade

Enables you to arrange view windows in cascade mode.


2-11



Menu Item

Description

Tile Horizontally

Enables you to arrange view windows in horizontal tile mode.

Tile Vertically

Enables you to arrange view windows in vertical tile mode.

Close All

Enables you to close all the view windows of the currently active worksheet.

NOTE

The Window menu enables the system to display the names of the opened view windows of the currently active worksheet.

Table 2-11 Description of the Help menu Menu Item

Description

Contents

Enables you to open the Help of the Probe.

License Info

Enables you to view the license information.

Update License

Enables you to update the license.

View ESN

Enables you to obtain the electronic serial number (ESN).

Check License

Enables you to check whether the dongle is connected properly.

About Probe

Enables you to view the version information about the Probe.

Tech Support

Enables you to view the technical support information.

Toolbar The toolbar on the main interface of the Probe consists of the standard toolbar and the replay toolbar. By clicking the icon on the toolbar, you can switch to the corresponding interface or perform the corresponding operation quickly. l

Standard toolbar Figure 2-3 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 2-12 describes the icons shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Standard toolbar

2-12


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


2 Overview of the Probe NOTE

You can choose View > Toolbars > Standard to set whether to display the standard toolbar.

Table 2-12 Description of the standard toolbar Icon

Name

Description

New Project

Enables you to create a project.

Open Project

Enables you to open a project in .xml format.

Save

Enables you to save the current project.

External Device Configuratio n

Enables you to configure external devices.

Auto Connect

Enables the Probe to automatically connect to an external device added in the Device Configure dialog box so that the external device can be used.

Disconnect

Enables the Probe to disconnect an external device added in the Device Configure dialog box.

Test Plan Control

Enables you to design a test task. In the Test Plan Control dialog box displayed after you click this icon, you can design test plans, configure test items, and view the execution status of the test items.

Map Window Management

Enables you to open the OutdoorMap window.

Engineering Parameter Management

Enables you to open the Engineering Parameter management window.

Record Start/ Stop

Enables you to start or stop the logfile recording. When the logfile recording is started, this icon becomes the icon.

Record Pause/ Resume

Enables you to pause or resume the logfile recording. If KPIs are required to be evaluated, it is recommended that you do not pause the logfile recording. When the logfile recording is paused, this icon becomes the icon.

Record Segment

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Enables you to slice a logfile. If you click this icon, the system closes the currently recorded logfile and creates a new logfile to slice the corresponding logfile while performing the ongoing tests.


2-13



Icon

Name

Description

Filemark

During the test, the Probe records the geographic information about the test location in texts and automatically saves the information in DT logfiles. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference source. During the data replay or data analysis, the Probe can quickly locate the user-concerned area based on the Filemark event. This icon is available after the Probe starts the DT logfile recording.

l

Start Test Plan

Enables you to start a test plan.

Stop Test Plan

Enables you to stop a test plan.

Online Help

Enables you to open the Help of the Probe.

Replay toolbar Figure 2-4 shows the icons on the replay toolbar. Table 2-13 describes the icons shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Replay toolbar

NOTE

You can choose View > Toolbars > Replay to set whether to display the replay toolbar.

Table 2-13 Description of the replay toolbar Icon

2-14

Name

Description

Open Logfile

Enables you to open a drive test file in .gen format.

Play Logfile

Enables you to replay a logfile. This icon is available only after a logfile is opened.

Pause Logfile Playing

Enables you to pause the logfile replay.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Icon

Name

Description

Stop Playing Logfile

Enables you to stop the logfile replay. Stopping the logfile replay does not close the logfile. You can choose Logfile > Close Logfile to close a logfile.

Locate

Enables you to search for an event in a logfile and find the location where the event occurs on the map.

Replay rate dropdown list box

Enables you to adjust the replay speed. The range is from 1/8speed to 32-speed.

Slide bar

Enables the logfile to be replayed from a specified position. CAUTION The Probe does not count the key events or KPIs when you move the slide bar.

Navigation Pane The navigation pane, located in the left pane of the main interface, provides shortcut icons for the main operations of the system. The navigation pane consists of four tabs, namely, Project, Control, Configuration, and View, as shown in Figure 2-5. Click

in the upper right corner of the navigation pane to hide the navigation pane.

Figure 2-5 Navigation pane

l

Project tab Table 2-14 describes the shortcut icons under this tab. Table 2-14 Description of the icons under the Project tab Icon

Description Enables you to create a project.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


2-15



Icon

Description Enables you to open the project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Site Verification. Enables you to open the project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Optimize. Enables you to open the benchmark project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Benchmark. Enables you to open the project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Acceptance. Enables you to open the project file in the following path: software installation path \Projects\Customize.

l

Control tab Table 2-12 describes the shortcut icons under this tab.

l

Configuration tab Table 2-15 describes the shortcut icons under this tab. Table 2-15 Description of the icons under the Configuration tab Icon

Description Enables you to configure external devices. After you click this icon, the Device Configure dialog box is displayed for you to configure external devices. Enables you to design a test plan. After you click this icon, the Test Plan Control dialog box is displayed for you to design a test plan. Enables you to set configuration items of the system. After you click this icon, the System Configure dialog box is displayed for you to modify the pre-defined event attributes, alarm mode when the device is abnormal, and attributes of the logfile.

l

View tab The icons under this tab provide operation entries for various view windows, engineering parameter windows, and test plan control windows. For details, see Table 2-8.

2-16


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Operation Interface The operation interface is used to display various view windows and configuration windows. The operation interface consists of multiple worksheets. You can add multiple worksheets as required. Right-click the status bar of the operation interface shown in Figure 2-2. Then, you can add, delete, or rename a worksheet through the options displayed in the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 2-6. Figure 2-6 Shortcut menu of the status bar of the operation interface

System Status Bar The system status bar, located at the bottom of the main interface, displays the current status of the system and the device, as shown in Figure 2-7. For descriptions on the Figure 2-7, see Table 2-16. Figure 2-7 System status bar

Table 2-16 Description of the system status bar

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

No.

Name

Description

(1)

Menu description

This area displays the function description of a menu when the menu is in use.

(2)

System status

This area displays the current status of the system. The status can be Idle, Testing, or Replay.


2-17



No.

Name

Description

(3)

Device status

This area displays the connection status of the currently configured devices. If you place the mouse pointer on the status indicator, the name of the device that the indicator stands for is displayed. Different colors represent different status, as shown in Table 2-17. l

indicates the MS.

l

indicates the GPS.

l

indicates the Scanner.

Table 2-17 Device status description Icon

Meaning Red indicator: l The external device is connected to the PC properly but the connection displayed on the Probe is broke down or abnormal. l The external device is disconnected from the PC or the connection to the PC is abnormal. The green indicator indicates that the external device connected to the PC and the connection displayed on the Probe is normal. The yellow indicator indicates that the signals of the external device are insufficient or the device is in the Searching state.

2.4 Working Mode of the Probe The Probe can work in two different working modes. One for testing and recording data. The other is for replaying and analyzing data. The Probe can work in the following working modes: l

Drive test mode By working with the test terminal and other external devices, the Probe collects the air interface data and records the test data (saving the test data in logfiles). During the data collection, you can also observe the test data in real time. For details, see 8 Collecting Data.

l

Replay mode The Probe reads the test data from logfiles and replays logfiles for inspection and analysis. During the replay, you can adjust the replay speed and assign the replay start point to facilitate the problem identification and analysis. For details, see 9.3 Replaying Logfiles.

2-18


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



The minimum replay rate and the maximum rate supported by the Probe are 1/8 and 32 times of the test rate.

The preceding two working modes are mutually exclusive: l

When the system is in the drive test mode, if the working mode needs to be switched to the replay mode, the test must be stopped before the logfile is opened.

l

When the system is in the replay mode, if the working mode needs to be switched to the drive test mode, the replay must be stopped and the logfile must be closed before the external device is connected to the Probe.

2.5 Recommended Device List This section describes the recommended devices, including UEs, data cards, and scanners. 2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA) This section describes the recommended GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards and the features supported by these GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards. 2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE) This section describes the recommended LTE data cards and the features supported by these LTE data cards. 2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX) This section describes the recommended WiMAX data cards and the features supported by these WiMAX data cards. 2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List This section describes the recommended scanner list and the features supported by these scanners.

2.5.1 Recommended Terminal List (GSM/WCDMA) This section describes the recommended GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards and the features supported by these GSM/WCDMA terminals and data cards. NOTE

l √: Supported. l ×: Not supported.

Recommended terminal list (GSM/WCDMA)

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Feature/Terminal

U6100

U1251

U1280-5

GSM 850

×

×

√

GSM 900

√

√

×

GSM 1800

√

√

√

GSM 1900

√

√

√

WCDMA 850

×

×

√


2-19



Feature/Terminal

U6100

U1251

U1280-5

WCDMA 900

×

√

×

WCDMA 1900

×

×

√

WCDMA 2100

√

√

×

WCDMA AWS

×

×

×

EDGE

√

×

√

HSDPA (Mbit/s)

×

×

×

HSUPA (Mbit/s)

×

×

×

External Antenna

×

×

×

Video Phone

√

√

√

SQE(MS-MS)

√

√

√

SQE(MS-PSTN)

√

√

√

GSM Cell Locking

√

√

√

GSM Forced Handover/Prohibited Handover

√

√

√

GSM ARFCN/Band Locking

√

√

√

GSM CBA Turnover

√

√

√

GSM Frequency Scan

√

√

√

WCDMA UARFCN Locking

√

√

√

WCDMA Scrambling Code Locking

√

√

√

Recommended data card list (GSM/WCDMA)

2-20

Feature/Data Card

E372u-8

GSM 850

√

GSM 900

√

GSM 1800

√

GSM 1900

√


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Feature/Data Card

E372u-8

WCDMA 850

√

WCDMA 900

√

WCDMA 1900

√

WCDMA 2100

√

WCDMA AWS

×

HSDPA (Mbit/s)

21.6

HSUPA (Mbit/s)

5.76

MIMO

×

MIMO+64QAM

×

HSPA+

√

DC-HSPA+

42

PC Voice

×

2.5.2 Recommended Terminal List (LTE) This section describes the recommended LTE data cards and the features supported by these LTE data cards. NOTE


Feature/Data Card

Huawei B390

Huawei E398

2100

×

√

2650

×

√

900

×

√

800

√

×

Band 64 TDD

√

×

2.5.3 Recommended Terminal List (WiMAX) This section describes the recommended WiMAX data cards and the features supported by these WiMAX data cards.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


2-21




Feature/Data Card

Huawei Sequans BM358

Seowon GCT SWU3120

Seowon GCT SWU3220

2.3 (GHz)

√

×

×

2.5 (GHz)

×

√

√

3.5 (GHz)

×

×

×

External Antenna

√

×

×

MIMO

√

√

√

FFR

√

√

√

2.5.4 Recommended Scanner List This section describes the recommended scanner list and the features supported by these scanners. NOTE


2-22

Feature/Scanner

PCTEL SeeGull Ex

TSMQ/TSML

GSM 850 (MHz)

√

×

GSM 900 (MHz)

√

×

GSM 1800 (MHz)

√

×

GSM 1900 (MHz)

√

×

WCDMA 850 (MHz)

√

√

WCDMA 900 (MHz)

√

√

WCDMA 1900 (MHz)

√

√

WCDMA 2100 (MHz)

√

√

WCDMA AWS (MHz)

√

√

WiMAX 2.3 (GHz)

×

×

WiMAX 2.5 (GHz)

√

×

WiMAX 3.5 (GHz)

√

×

CW

√

×


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Feature/Scanner

PCTEL SeeGull Ex

TSMQ/TSML

RSSI Scanning

√

×

GSM Scanning

√

×

Spectrum Analysis

√

√

TopN Pilot Scanning (WCDMA)

√

×

TopN Preamble Index Scanning (WiMAX)

×

√

External Antenna

√

√

External GPS

√

√


2-23


3 Installing the Probe

3

Installing the Probe

About This Chapter This section describes how to install the Probe and other assistants. To complete the installation of the Probe, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard.

Context After the Probe is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license. 3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe Before installing the Probe, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The installation requirements are as follows: The software package of the Probe is available. The software package of the shared components is available. The configuration of the PC meets the requirement for the installation. 3.2 Installing Shared Components The GENEX Shared components provide functions for map processing and view editing. Therefore, the Shared components must be installed to ensure normal running of the Probe. 3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program The Probe main program must be installed on the computer used for the test and must be active during the test. 3.4 Plugging in a Dongle The dongle is a device that provides the user with the authorization to use the GENEX series products. License is integrated with the dongle. Therefore, you must plug the dongle into the computer before using the Probe to collect data or using the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate speech quality. If you only use the Probe to replay data, the dongle is not required.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


3-1



3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe Before installing the Probe, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The installation requirements are as follows: The software package of the Probe is available. The software package of the shared components is available. The configuration of the PC meets the requirement for the installation.

Hardware Requirements of the Probe Table 3-1 lists the hardware requirements for the PC. Table 3-1 Hardware requirements of the Probe Configuration Item

Configuration Requirement

CPU

It is recommended that the processor be Intel 1.8 GHz Dual-Core.

Memory

The minimum memory is 1 GB and it is recommended that the memory be 2 GB or larger.

Hard disk

It is recommended that the free hard disk space be 10 GB or larger.

PC port

l If a scanner is connected to the PC, one USB port, one serial port, or one IEEE 1394 port is required. l If a test terminal is connected to the PC, at least one USB port, one USB hub, one serial port, or one PCI slot is required. l If a GPS is connected to the PC, one USB port or one serial port is required. l If a dongle is connected to the PC, at least one USB port is required.

Operating System

Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 7

Software Requirements of the Probe Table 3-2 lists the software and the corresponding configurations required for the drive test. Table 3-2 Software requirements of the Probe

3-2

Configuration Item

Obtaining Method


Remarks

Operating system

-

Microsoft Windows XP or Microsoft Windows 7

Mandatory


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Configuration Item

Obtaining Method


Remarks

Operating software

-

Microsoft Office 2003 or Microsoft Office 2007

If the Microsoft Office is not installed, the engineering parameter file in xls or xlsx format cannot be imported.

GENEX Probe V200R003C01 software installation package

l Download the software package from http:// support.huawei.co m.

The user must have an account for the http:// support.huawei.com. In addition, the user must be authorized to download the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 software installation package or the user purchased the GENEX Probe V200R003C01.

Mandatory

The user must have an account for the http:// support.huawei.com. In addition, the user must be authorized to download the software installation package of the GENEX shared components or the user purchased the GENEX Probe V200R003C01.

If the GENEX Shared components are not installed, the Probe cannot be used normally.

The GENEX Probe V200R003C01 is purchased.

If the dongle is not installed, only the replay function of the Probe can be used.

l Obtain from the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 software installation CDROM. Software installation package of the GENEX shared components

l Download the software package from http:// support.huawei.co m. l Obtain from the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 software installation CDROM.

License

The license is integrated in the dongle.

3.2 Installing Shared Components The GENEX Shared components provide functions for map processing and view editing. Therefore, the Shared components must be installed to ensure normal running of the Probe. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


3-3



Context If the computer is already installed with the Probe before, you need not to install the Shared components again. For an upgrade version of the Probe, the GENEX Shared components also need to be upgraded. Therefore, you need to install an upgraded GENEX Shared components if you install an upgrade version of the Probe.

Procedure Step 1 Obtain the installation program of GENEX Shared components. If ...

Then ...

The installation program is downloaded from http://support.huawei.com.

Decompress the downloaded package and perform Step 2.

The installation CD-ROM of GENEX Probe V200R003 is available.

Perform Step 2.

Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe. The installation interface is displayed. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click Yes. Step 5 After the installation is complete, click Finish. Step 6 Check whether the GENEX Shared components are successfully installed. Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. In the displayed Add or Remove Programs window, check whether the software information about the GENEX Shared components is listed. If ...

Then ...

The software information about the GENEX Shared components is listed.

The GENEX Shared components are installed successfully.

The software information about the GENEX Shared components is not listed.

Perform Step 1 through Step 6.

----End

3.3 Installing the Probe Main Program The Probe main program must be installed on the computer used for the test and must be active during the test.

3-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Prerequisite Get the Probe installation program ready and check whether the computer meets the hardware requirements for installing the Probe. For details about the hardware requirements, see 3.1 Preparations Before Installing the Probe.

Context During the installation of the Probe, the system installs the PSTN SQE Server by default. You can install the two softwares according to your requirements. If you need to perform the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink, you must install the PSTN SQE Server. For details about the PSTN SQE Server, see the corresponding user guide.

Procedure Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Probe V200R003C01 installation program. If ...

Then ...



The installation CD-ROM of GENEX Probe V200R003C01 is available.

Perform Step 2.

Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe. The installation interface is displayed. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license agreement. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the dialog box as shown in Figure 3-1, specify User Name and Company Name.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


3-5



Figure 3-1 Customer Information

NOTE

l Anyone who uses this computer (all users): Authorize all users of this computer to use the Probe. l Only for me (user): Authorize only the current user to use the Probe.

Step 7 Click Next. Step 8 Select the installation mode. l Complete: Installs the Probe and the PSTN SQE Server at a time. l Custom: Refers to the custom installation mode. You can choose to install the PSTN SQE server. Step 9 Click Browse to select the installation directory. Step 10 Click Next. If ...

Then ...

The Complete installation mode is used

Perform Step 11.

The Custom installation mode is used

1. In the displayed dialog box, select Probe. 2. Click Next. 3. Perform Step 11.

Step 11 After the installation is complete, you can select Yes, I want to restart my computer now or No, I will restart my computer later. Then click Finish. 3-6


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



It is recommended that you select Yes, I want to restart my computer now. Step 12 Check whether the Probe is installed successfully. Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Probe and check whether the shortcut for the Probe exists. If ...

Then ...

The shortcut for the Probe exists.

The Probe is installed successfully.

The shortcut for the Probe does not exist.

Perform Step 1 through Step 12 again.

After the Probe main program is installed, the generated Probe installation folder is in a structure described in Table 3-3. Table 3-3 Structure of the Probe installation folder Folder Probe 2.3

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Description Bin

Fonts

Saves the fonts used by the Probe.

HelpManual

Saves the help documents.

Language

Saves the supported language resources.

MsgDecoder

Saves the data used for decoding.

PLUGIN

Saves the plug-ins supported by the Probe.

SQE

Saves the sample files and the destination files of the speech quality evaluation test.

Voice

Saves the voice files.

Config

Saves the system configuration files.

EventConfig

Saves the configuration files that serve as the principle for event handling.

Log

Saves the logfiles recording history operations.

Map

Saves the map files.


3-7



Folder

Description Projects

Save project files. By default, the following folders are contained: l Acceptance: Saves the project files for acceptance tests. l Benchmark: Saves the project files for benchmark tests. l Customize: Saves the customized project files. l Optimize: Saves the project files for optimization tests. l Site Verification: Saves the project files for site verification tests.

Temp

Saves the temporary files.

Template

Saves the templates of projects and engineering parameters.

----End

Follow-up Procedure After the Probe is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.

3.4 Plugging in a Dongle The dongle is a device that provides the user with the authorization to use the GENEX series products. License is integrated with the dongle. Therefore, you must plug the dongle into the computer before using the Probe to collect data or using the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate speech quality. If you only use the Probe to replay data, the dongle is not required.

Procedure Step 1 Plug in the dongle. If ...

Then ...

The software is being used for the first time Plug the dongle into the USB port of the PC. and the dongle is available. The dongle expires.

3-8

Perform Step 2 through Step 5 to obtain a valid license and update the license for the dongle.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > corresponding software name (such as Probe or PSTN SQE Server) to run the main program. Step 3 On the displayed main interface, choose Help > View ESN. Step 4 Send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new license. Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days. Step 5 Update the new license for the dongle. 1.

On the main interface, choose Help > Update License.

2.

In the Open dialog box, select the new license.

3.

Click Open.

4.

In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.

CAUTION When updating the new license for the dongle, ensure that only the dongle for the corresponding software is plugged into the computer. Step 6 Optional: Choose Help > License Info to check the authorization information of the dongle. ----End

Follow-up Procedure If the dongle can not be used normally, the dongle driver should be installed. You can obtain the dongle driver through the following modes: l

Huawei website: http://support.huawei.com

l

GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CD-ROM

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


3-9


4 Starting the Probe

4

Starting the Probe

Once installed, the Probe application can be launched from the Start menu or the shortcut icon.

Procedure l

Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Probe to open the main interface of the Probe. For details about the main interface of the Probe, see 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.

l

Double-click

to open the main interface of the Probe.

----End

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


4-1


5 Managing the Map Window

5

Managing the Map Window

About This Chapter The map window displays map-related information in a test area and counter information such as cell information, event information, and IE information on the drive test route. You can add a layer, configure layer properties, and configure the legend properties of the IE layer in the map window.

Context l

To open an indoor map window, choose View > IndoorMap.

l

To open an outdoor map window, choose View > OutdoorMap.

5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps This section describes the basic concepts about maps. It is recommended that you perform relevant operations in the map window to learn the relevant concepts of maps. 5.2 Importing Maps You can import a map through the indoor map window or outdoor map window. In this manner, you can directly know the wireless environment of the test area and easily analyze the test data. 5.3 Adding Layers This section describes how to add map layers or counter layers such as IE layer, cell layer, and event layer to an indoor map or an outdoor map so that you can view and analyze test data. 5.4 Configuring Layer Properties Layer properties consist of layer display properties and layer label properties. Layer display properties specify the display modes of the objects on a layer. Layer label properties specify the labeling modes of the objects on a layer. You can configure layer offset properties and adjust the projection of map layers in the outdoor map window. You can also configure the offset properties of IE layers in the indoor or outdoor map window. The configuration of layer properties is temporary and is not saved in projects. 5.5 Configuring Legend Properties Legend properties include the colors, shapes, and fonts of legends. You can configure the IE legend properties of MSs in the indoor or outdoor map window so that IEs are displayed on the map as dots according to different legends. If legend properties are not configured, the Probe displays IEs according to the default legend. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


5-1



5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps This section describes the basic concepts about maps. It is recommended that you perform relevant operations in the map window to learn the relevant concepts of maps.

Map The map consists of a series of map elements and involves the MapInfo map and the raster map. The map information is displayed in the map window on the Probe. The map information includes the map information about the test area, test routes, events, and engineering parameters. l

MapInfo map A MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The files supported by the MapInfo map are in .tab or .gst (GeoSet) format. A GeoSet is a special type of workspace used for map layers and saves the configurations including layer order, labels, and legends.

l

Raster map The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. The raster map supported by the Probe is in .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png format.

Layer A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layers: map layers and indicator layers. l

A map consists of multiple map layers.

l

An indicator layer includes the information related to events, IEs, and cells.

A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer (see Figure 5-1) contains multiple engineering parameters. Figure 5-1 Cell layer

5-2


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Label Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each layer in the map window. For example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and indexes of the IEs on an IE layer, and the names of the buildings on a building layer.

5.2 Importing Maps You can import a map through the indoor map window or outdoor map window. In this manner, you can directly know the wireless environment of the test area and easily analyze the test data.

Context After the Probe is installed, the system automatically installs the world map. If no other maps are imported, the system displays the world map by default each time you open the outdoor map window. If engineering parameters are imported, the Probe automatically loads the engineering parameters and displays them as a layer of the map after you open the outdoor map window. The indoor map window and the outdoor map window are mutually exclusive. Therefore, you must close the outdoor map window before opening the indoor map window. Similarly, you must close the indoor map window before opening the outdoor map window. 5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps The MapInfo map and raster map can be imported. The MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. You can import outdoor test map during the outdoor test to facilitate the data browse in the outdoor map view. 5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps Only the raster indoor map can be imported. You can import indoor test map during the indoor test to facilitate the data browse in the indoor map view.

5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps The MapInfo map and raster map can be imported. The MapInfo map consists of multiple layers, and each layer is saved in a file. The entire raster map can be considered as a layer. You can import outdoor test map during the outdoor test to facilitate the data browse in the outdoor map view.

Procedure l

Import a MapInfo map. 1.

Choose View > OutdoorMap from the system menu, or double-click OutdoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area.

2.

In the OutdoorMap window displayed, click the

3.

Select one or more outdoor map files in .tab format or .gst format.

icon.

You can select multiple map files by holding down Ctrl. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


5-3



4. l

Click Open.

Import a raster map. 1.

Choose View > OutdoorMap from the system menu, or double-click OutdoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area.

2.

In the OutdoorMap window displayed, click the

3.

Select a .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png file and then click Open.

4.

In the Raster Image dialog box, click on the map to add a reference point.

icon.

NOTE

The imported raster map does not contain geographical information; therefore, reference points must be added for determining geographic locations on the map.

5.

In the Add Control Point dialog box, enter the name of the reference point, longitude, latitude, and location information. Click OK.

6.

Perform Step 4 through Step 5 repeatedly to add at least three reference points. The reference points should not be in the same line.

7.

Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can add layers or configure the display properties of layers in an active outdoor map. For details, see 5 Managing the Map Window.

Related References 12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window 12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map

5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps Only the raster indoor map can be imported. You can import indoor test map during the indoor test to facilitate the data browse in the indoor map view.

Procedure Step 1 Choose View > IndoorMap from the system menu, or double-click IndoorMap on the View tab page in the navigation area. Step 2 In the IndoorMap window displayed, click the

icon.

Step 3 Choose a .tif file or a .bmp file. Step 4 Click Open. ----End

Follow-up Procedure You can add layer or configure the legends properties of the layer in an active indoor map. For details, see 5 Managing the Map Window. 5-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Related References 12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window

5.3 Adding Layers This section describes how to add map layers or counter layers such as IE layer, cell layer, and event layer to an indoor map or an outdoor map so that you can view and analyze test data.

Prerequisite l

If you want to add map layers, the map files in .tab format must be ready.

l

If you want to add counter layers, make preparations as follows: – If you want to add IE layers and event layers, external devices must be configured. – If you want to add cell layers, engineering parameters must be imported.

Context A layer is a set of data displayed in the map window. There are two main types of layer, namely, map layer and counter layer. Map layers form the map. Counter layers consist of information about event, IE, cell, alarm, and GPS counters. A layer may contain multiple objects. For example, a map layer contains all the roads and water areas on the map; a cell layer contains multiple engineering parameters.

Procedure Step 1 Determine the type of layers to be added. If you need to...

Then ...

Add map layers


Add counter layers


Step 2 In the outdoor map window, click or right-click in the map display area and then choose Layer Control from the shortcut menu. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Click Add. Step 4 Select one or more .tab files, and then click Open. NOTE

You are advised to add only necessary layers such as base stations, test routes, and main roads on the map.

Step 5 Optional: In the Layer Control dialog box, click Up or Down to move a layer forward or backward. Step 6 Click OK. Step 7 In the Map Layers window of the indoor or outdoor map view, click Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


. 5-5



Step 8 In the Add Layer dialog box, select the layers to be added. Step 9 Click OK. ----End

5.4 Configuring Layer Properties Layer properties consist of layer display properties and layer label properties. Layer display properties specify the display modes of the objects on a layer. Layer label properties specify the labeling modes of the objects on a layer. You can configure layer offset properties and adjust the projection of map layers in the outdoor map window. You can also configure the offset properties of IE layers in the indoor or outdoor map window. The configuration of layer properties is temporary and is not saved in projects.

Prerequisite l

If you want to configure the properties of cell layers, ensure that engineering parameters are imported.

l

If you want to configure the properties of counter layers during a test, ensure that external devices are configured.

l

If you want to configure the properties of counter layers during a replay, ensure that the logfile used for the replay contains the information about external devices. Choose View > Information. Then, you can view the contents in the logfile in the displayed Information window.

Context l

Labels are the texts that represent the objects contained on each type of layer in a map. For example, the fields of the engineering parameters on a cell layer, the values and numbers of the IEs on an IE layer, and the names of the buildings on a building layer. – For the GSM system, the BTSName and BTSID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields BTSName and BCCHNO are labeled. – For the WCDMA system, the NodeBName and NodeBID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields NodeBName and P-SC are labeled. – For the CDMA system, the Site Name and Site ID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields Site Name and PN are labeled. – For the WiMAX system, the BS Name and BS ID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields BSName and Preamble Index are labeled. – For the LTE system, the eNodeBName and eNodeBID can be labeled for the base station. By default, engineering parameter fields eNodeBName and PCI are labeled.

l

The map projection refers to the method of projecting the points on the spheroid earth to the plane coordinates. The projection varies with layers, and thus a standard is required to normalize the projection, namely, to adjust the map projection.

l

5-6

Layer offset refers to the method of making an offset of certain distance on an IE layer in the longitude or latitude direction so that the objects on each layer can be displayed clearly. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Procedure l

Configuring layer display properties 1.

In the outdoor map window, click or right-click the map, and then choose Layer Control from the shortcut menu. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed.

2.

In the Layers area, select a layer for which the display properties are to be configured.

3.

In the Properties area, select Visible to display the selected layer on the map.

4.

Click Display to configure the display properties of this layer. For details about the relevant parameters, see Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog Box.

l

5.

After the configuration is complete, click OK. The Layer Control dialog box is displayed.

6.

Repeat Step 2 through Step 5 until the display properties of all the required layers are configured.

7.

In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK.

Configuring layer label properties You can configure layer label properties by using either of the following methods: – In the outdoor map window, click Cell Label Setting dialog box.

, and then configure layer label properties in the

You can choose to label a base station field or the imported engineering parameter fields. – In the outdoor map window, click or right-click the map, and then choose Layer Control from the shortcut menu. Configure the layer label properties in the Layer Control dialog box. For details, see Step 1 through Step 6. 1.

In the Layers area of the Layer Control dialog box, select a layer for which the label properties are to be configured.

2.

In the Properties area, select Visible and Automatic Labels to display the labels of the selected layer on the map.

3.

Click Labels to configure the label properties of this layer. For details about the relevant parameters, see Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box.

4.

After the configuration is complete, click OK. Then, the Layer Control dialog box is displayed.

5.

Repeat Step 1 through Step 4 until the label properties of all the required layers are configured.

6.

In the Layer Control dialog box, click OK. The labels of the configured layers are displayed in the map.

l

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Adjusting the projection of a map layer 1.

In the outdoor map window, right-click the map, and then choose Projection from the shortcut menu. The Choose Projection dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select a projection mode from the Category drop-down list and select an adjustment mode in the Category Members area.

3.

Click OK. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7



l

Configuring the offset properties of IE layers 1.

In the Map Layers window of an indoor or outdoor map view, right-click the IE layer, and then choose Offset Layer from the shortcut menu. The Layer Offset dialog box is displayed.

2.

Set the offset. For detailed description about the parameters, see Parameters for Configuring the Layer Offset.

3.

After the configuration is complete, click OK.

----End

5.5 Configuring Legend Properties Legend properties include the colors, shapes, and fonts of legends. You can configure the IE legend properties of MSs in the indoor or outdoor map window so that IEs are displayed on the map as dots according to different legends. If legend properties are not configured, the Probe displays IEs according to the default legend.

Prerequisite l

If you want to configure IE legend properties during a test, ensure that the MS is configured.

l

If you want to configure IE legend properties during a replay, ensure that the logfile used for the replay contains the information about the MS. Choose View > Information. Then, you can view the contents in the logfile in the displayed Information window.

Procedure Step 1 In the Map Layers window of the indoor or outdoor map view, select an IE layer. or right-click the IE layer, and then choose Edit Layer from the shortcut menu. Step 2 Click the The Layer Parameter dialog box is displayed. Step 3 Set the relevant parameters in the Layer Parameter dialog box. For detailed description about the parameters, see Parameters of the Layer Parameter Dialog Box. Step 4 After the configuration is complete, click OK. ----End

Related References 12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties

5-8


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


6 Managing Engineering Parameters

6

Managing Engineering Parameters

About This Chapter This chapter describes engineering parameters of different network systems supported by the Probe and the method for importing engineering parameters. You can learn about the details of base station parameters, antenna parameters, neighboring cell parameters, and various technology parameters of the current test area through the engineering parameters. 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported in different network system. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters of different network protocol. 6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters You can import engineering parameters of the test area before the test or replay. After the engineering parameters are imported, the system detects the best matched BTS from the imported BTS information according to the network parameter values of the Probe.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


6-1



6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems This describes mandatory fields and optional fields of the engineering parameters supported in different network system. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters of different network protocol. l

For details on GSM engineering parameters, see GSM Engineering Parameters.

l

For details on WCDMA engineering parameters, see WCDMA Engineering Parameters.

l

For details on CDMA engineering parameters, see CDMA Engineering Parameters.

l

For details on WiMAX engineering parameters, see WiMAX Engineering Parameters.

l

For details on LTE engineering parameters, see LTE Engineering Parameters.

The default saving path of the engineering parameters is as follows: Software Installation Directory\Template\Engineering Parameters.

GSM Engineering Parameters Field

6-2

Description

Value

Azimuth

Azimuth (degree)

Data type: integer. Range: 0 to 360.

Yes

CI

Cell ID

Data type: double. Range: 0 to 65535.

Yes

LAC

Location area code


Yes

BCCHNo

Absolute radio frequency channel number of the broadcast control channel


Yes

Longitude

Longitude (degree)

Data type: double. Range: -180.0 to 180.0.

Yes

Latitude

Latitude (degree)


Yes

BTSID

Base transceiver station (BTS) ID

Data type: character string.

No

BTSName

BTS name


No

CellName

Cell name


No

CGI

Cell global identification


No

TCHList

Traffic channel (TCH) list


No


Mandat ory (Yes/ No)

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Field

Description

Value

BSIC

Base station identity code, consisting of network color code (NCC) and base station color code (BCC)

Data type: character string. Range of the NCC and BCC: 0 to 7.

No

AntHeight

Antenna height

Data type: float.

No

MechTilt

Machine downTilt angle (degree)

Data type: float.

No

ElecTilt

Electronic downTilt (degree)

Data type: float.

No

Altitude

Antenna altitude

Data type: float.

No

GprsSuppo rt

Indicates whether the general packet radio service (GPRS) is supported


No

Polarizatio n

Polarization type


No

AntGain

Antenna gain

Data type: float.

No

FreqBand

Band


No

EdgeSupp ort

Indicates whether the EDGE is supported


No

FH Mode

Frequency hopping mode


No

SiteConfig

NodeB Type


No

City

City


No

Region

Region


No

BTSType

NodeB type

Data type: character string. Value: Macrocell and Microcell.

No

AntType

Antenna type


No

BSCName

Base station controller (BSC) name


No

ProjectPha se

Indicates to which phase the project belongs


No

RAC

Routing area code


No

MA

Mobile allocation


No

TMAType

Tower amplification (TMA) type


No



6-3



Field

Description

Value


TMAGain

TMA gain

Data type: integer.

No

WCDMA Engineering Parameters

6-4

Field

Description

Value


CellID

Cell ID


Yes

UARFCN

Carrier frequency point


Yes

P-SC

Primary scrambling code


Yes

Azimuth

Azimuth (degree)


Yes

Longitude

Longitude


Yes

Latitude

Latitude


Yes

RNCID

Radio network controller (RNC) ID


No

NodeBID

NodeB ID


No

NodeBNa me

NodeB name


No

NodeBTyp e

NodeB type

Data type: character string. Value: Macrocell and Microcell.

No

SectorID

Sector ID


No

CellName

Cell name


No

DownTilt

Downtilt (degree)

Data type: float. Range: 0 to 90.

No

EDownTilt

Internal E-downTilt (degree)


No

MDownTilt



No

GroudHeig ht

Antenna height above the ground

Data type: float.

No


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Field

Description

Value


Altitude

Antenna altitude

Data type: float.

No

AntennaTy pe

Antenna type


No

AntennaG ain

Antenna gain

Data type: float.

No

HBeamwidt h

Width of horizontal halfpower beam


No

VBeamwidt h

Width of vertical half-power beam


No

FeederTyp e

Feeder type


No

FeederLen gth

Feeder length

Data type: float.

No

NodeBCE

Number of NodeB CEs

Data type: integer.

No

ActiveStat us

Cell status (active or not)


No

Outdoor

Outdoor station


No

TMA

Tower mounted amplifier


No

CDMA Engineering Parameters

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Field

Description

Value


PN

Pseudo-random number


Yes

Longitude

Longitude


Yes

Latitude

Latitude


Yes

Azimuth

Azimuth (degree)


Yes

Cell ID

Cell ID

Data type: integer.

Yes


6-5



Field

Description

Value


ARFCN

Frequency number

Data type: integer.

Yes

Sector ID

Sector ID

Data type: integer.

Yes

DownTilt

Downtilt (degree)


No

Site ID

Site ID

Data type: integer.

No

Site Name

Site name


No

Carrier ID

Carrier ID

Data type: integer.

No

SID

System ID

Data type: integer.

No

NID

Network ID

Data type: integer.

No

Antenna Height

Antenna height (m)

Data type: integer.

No

BeamWidt h

Angle of the horizontal lobe (degree)


No

WiMAX Engineering Parameters

6-6

Field

Description

Value


BSID

Base station ID, including Operator ID and Sector ID


Yes

Longitude

Longitude


Yes

Latitude

Latitude


Yes

Freq

Frequency (kHz)

Data type: integer.

Yes

Azimuth

Azimuth of an antenna (degree)


Yes

Preamble Index

Preamble index, corresponding to Segment and Cell ID


Yes

FA Index

Frequency allocation index

Data type: integer.

No

Operator ID

Operator ID corresponding to BSID

Data type: integer.

No


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Field

Description

Value


Sector ID

Sector ID

Data type: integer.

No

Cell ID

Cell ID

Data type: integer.

No

Cell Name

Cell name


No

BS Name

Base station name


No

Antenna Height

Antenna height (m)

Data type: integer.

No

DownTilt

Azimuth of an antenna (degree)


No

Angle

Width of the antenna main lobe (degree)

Data type: double. Range: 0 to 360, where, 0 indicates the omnidirectional antenna.

No

PermBase

PermBase in the cell


No

LTE Engineering Parameters

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Field

Description

Value

Mandato ry (Yes/ No)

eNodeBID

LTE eNodeB ID


Yes

eNodeBNa me

LTE eNodeB name


Yes

SectorID

Sector ID


Yes

Local CellID

Local cell ID


Yes

CellID

Cell ID


Yes

UARFCN

Carrier frequency point


Yes

PCI

ID of the primary cell


Yes

Longitude

Longitude


Yes

Latitude

Latitude


Yes


6-7



6-8

Field

Description

Value

Mandato ry (Yes/ No)

Azimuth

Azimuth (degree)


Yes

eNodeBTy pe

LTE eNodeB type


No

CellName

Cell name


No

DownTilt

Downtilt (degree)


No

EDownTilt

Internal E-downTilt (degree)


No

MDownTilt



No

GroudHei ght

Antenna height above the ground

Data type: float.

No

Altitude

Antenna altitude

Data type: float.

No

AntennaT ype

Antenna type


No

AntennaG ain

Antenna gain

Data type: float.

No

HBeamwidt h

Width of horizontal halfpower beam


No

VBeamwidt h

Width of vertical half-power beam


No

FeederTyp e

Feeder type


No

FeederLen gth

Feeder length

Data type: float.

No

ActiveStat us

Cell status (active or not)

The value is Yes or No.

No

Outdoor

Station type (outdoor or not)

The value is Yes or No.

No

TMA

The tower mounted amplifier is available or not


No


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters You can import engineering parameters of the test area before the test or replay. After the engineering parameters are imported, the system detects the best matched BTS from the imported BTS information according to the network parameter values of the Probe.

Context According to service requirements, engineering parameters are classified into mandatory parameters, optional parameters, and neighboring cell parameters. For details, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. You can click the icon to view engineering parameter templates of different networks in the default path provided by the Probe. In addition, you can modify the format of the current engineering parameter table based on the project reference template to ensure that the format of the engineering parameter table meets the requirements of the Probe. l

The mandatory fields must be totally matched. Otherwise, the corresponding engineering parameter cannot be imported.

l

In the case of the optional fields, you can perform the match operation according to the actual situation. If the optional field is not matched, the Probe does not import the data in the corresponding column as the engineering parameter.

l

Neighboring cells are classified into horizontal neighboring cells and vertical neighboring cells. – Horizontal neighboring cell The engineering parameter fields of the serving cell and the cell fields are in the same line of the same table. Horizontal neighboring cells support only the GSM network system. In this case, engineering parameter fields contain neighboring cell fields. – Vertical neighboring cell Each line in the table indicates a neighboring cell relation. Vertical neighboring cells support the GSM, WCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems. In this case, engineering parameter fields do not contain neighboring cell fields, and you need to import the corresponding engineering parameter when importing a neighboring cell. NOTE

In the case of importing vertical neighboring cell fields, pay attention to the following points: l In GSM network system, LAC and CI of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NLAC and NCI of the neighboring cell field must be matched. l In WCDMA network system, RNCID and CellID of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NRNCID and NcellID of the neighboring cell field must be matched. l In WiMAX network system, BSID of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NBSID of the neighboring cell field must be matched. l In LTE network system, CellID and PCI of the engineering parameter field must be matched, and NcellID and NPCI of the neighboring cell field must be matched.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Engineering Parameter management. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


6-9



Step 2 In the Engineering Parameter management window, click displayed.

. The Select File dialog box is

Step 3 Select the network mode of the imported engineering parameter in Protocol. Step 4 Perform the operation according to the type of the imported data. If ...

Then...

The engineering parameter is imported, Open an engineering parameter file in but no neighboring cell field is imported. Engineering parameter file. The engineering parameter and the horizontal neighboring cell field are imported.

The engineering parameter and the vertical neighboring cell field are imported.

1. Select Config Neighboring Cell. 2. Choose Horizontal. 3. Open an engineering parameter file (containing neighboring cell fields) in Engineering parameter file. 1. Select Config Neighboring Cell. 2. Choose Vertical. 3. Open an engineering parameter file in Engineering parameter file. 4. Open a neighboring cell parameter file in Neighboring cell file.

Step 5 Click Next. The Match Parameters dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Select the sheet that the engineering parameter or neighboring cell field is located in Select sheet. Step 7 Click Finish. The Probe starts to match the engineering parameters in the Probe Param and Excel Param lists automatically. Then, the engineering parameters are displayed in the Engineering Parameter management window.

6-10


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



If ...

Then...

The Probe displays a dialog box

You can infer that the mandatory parameters in the Probe Param and Excel Param lists do not match. In this case, you must manually match these mandatory parameters. 1. Click OK. 2. Select the line in which the field does not match. 3. Click Match Date. The Match dialog box is displayed. 4. Select the correct field name and click OK. 5. To match other fields, perform 7.2 through 7.4 repeatedly. 6. Click Finish, and then wait until importing the engineering parameters is complete. 7. Perform Step 8.

The Probe doe not display any dialog box You do not need to manually match the engineering parameters. After the engineering parameters are imported, go to Step 8. Step 8 Optional: Edit the engineering parameters. 1.

In the Engineering Parameter management window, select the parameters to be edited, and then type the new values in the table.

2.

Click

for the new values to take effect.

----End

Follow-up Procedure In addition, you can click future use.

to export engineering parameters to XLS file or CSV file for

After importing engineering parameters, you can add engineering parameter layers or view the engineering parameters and neighboring cell connection line information in the map window.

Related References 12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window 12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


6-11


7 Connecting External Devices

7

Connecting External Devices

About This Chapter Connecting external devices involves connecting external devices to the PC and in the Probe, so that the external devices can work with the Probe to perform tests. When you use the Probe to replay data, you need not connect external devices. 7.1 Connectable External Devices The Probe supports various types of external devices, such as test terminal, scanner, and GPS. This describes the types and specifications of external devices used in the data collection. 7.2 Plugging in External Devices Before a test is performed, ensure that the external devices are properly plugged into the PC and are correctly positioned. 7.3 Configuring External Devices This section describes how to configure external devices. After external devices are connected to the PC installed with the Probe, you need to add and configure related parameters in the Device Configure window of the Probe so that external devices work with the Probe to collect data. 7.4 Enabling External Devices Enabling external devices refers to connecting external devices in the Probe so that the Probe can recognize the configured external devices. 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected Selecting the data to be collected refers to the process in which the Probe selectively collects the data reported by test terminals. In this case, the logfile records only the selected data. For the data that is frequently read, you can set data sampling intervals. This avoids the receipt of redundant data and increases the speed of reading data. 7.6 Configuring Device Alarms The Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode, when the device is unexpectedly disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak. You can set alarm events or alarm modes for special situations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


7-1



7.1 Connectable External Devices The Probe supports various types of external devices, such as test terminal, scanner, and GPS. This describes the types and specifications of external devices used in the data collection.

Test Terminal l

Table 7-1 shows the types and specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals. Table 7-1 Specifications of GSM/WCDMA test terminals Type of the Test Terminal

Supported Band

Detect Automatically (Yes/No)

Remarks

Huawei U120e

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 900/1800/1900

Yes

Support the following test items: l Forcing function test

WCDMA (MHz): 2100

l Speech quality evaluation test l Video Phone test

Huawei U1205


Yes


WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900


Huawei U6100


Yes


WCDMA (MHz): 2100


Huawei U1211

GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/2100

Yes

-

WCDMA (MHz): 900/1800/2100

7-2


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Type of the Test Terminal

Supported Band


Remarks

Huawei U1251

GSM/GPRS (MHz): 850/1800/1900

Yes


WCDMA (MHz): 900/2100

l Speech quality evaluation test l Video Phone test Huawei U1307


Yes

-

Yes

Not support the following test items:

WCDMA (MHz): 850/2100 Huawei U8220

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900

l MMS test

WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100

l Video Phone test l KeyEmul test l Multi-RAB test l Async SQE(MSMS) test l SQE(MS-PSTN) test

Huawei U8226

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900

No

WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100

Not support the following test items: l MMS test l Video Phone test l KeyEmul test l Multi-RAB test l Async SQE(MSMS) test l SQE(MS-PSTN) test

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


7-3




Supported Band


Remarks

Huawei U7519


Yes

Not support the following test items: l MMS test

WCDMA (MHz): 2100


Huawei U7517


Yes

Not support the following test items: l MMS test

WCDMA (MHz): 850/2100


Huawei U526

GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/1800/1900

No

-

No

-

No

-

No

-

WCDMA (MHz): 2100 Huawei U535

GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 2100

Huawei U550

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 900/1800/1900 HSDPA/WCDMA (MHz): 2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 3.6

Huawei U626

GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/1800 WCDMA (MHz): 2100

7-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)




Supported Band


Remarks

Huawei U636

GSM/GPRS (MHz): 900/1800

No

-

No

Support the following test items:

WCDMA (MHz): 2100 Huawei U1280-5


l Speech quality evaluation test

WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900 Huawei U3220

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900

l Video Phone test Yes

Not support the following test items: l Speech quality evaluation test

WCDMA/HSPA+ (MHz): 1700/1900

l Video Phone test l MMS test

Huawei E176 Card

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900

Yes

-

Yes

-

Yes

-

HSPA/WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2 Huawei E180 Card

GSM (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA/WCDMA (MHz): 900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2

Huawei E270 Card

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA/WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


7-5




Supported Band


Remarks

Huawei E270+ Card

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900

Yes

Support the Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) test.

Yes

Support the MIMO test.

Yes

Support the MIMO test.

Yes

-

HSPA+/WCDMA (MHz): 1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 7.2 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 2 Huawei E1820 Card

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/WCDMA (MHz): 2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 21.6

Huawei E182E Card

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/HSPA/ WCDMA (MHz): 850/900/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 21.6 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 5.76

Huawei E1823 Card

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900 HSPA+/HSPA/ WCDMA (MHz): 850/900/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 21.6 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 5.76

7-6


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)




Supported Band


Remarks

Huawei E372u-8 Card

GSM/GPRS/EDGE (MHz): 850/900/1800/1900

No

Support the DCHSDPA test.

No

-

No

-

No

-

No

-

HSPA+/HSPA/ WCDMA (MHz): 850/900/1900/2100 HSDPA (Mbit/s): 21.6 HSUPA (Mbit/s): 5.76 DC-HSPA+ (Mbit/ s): 43.2 Qualcomm TM6200


Qualcomm TM6250


Qualcomm TM6275

GSM (MHz): 900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 2100

Qualcomm TM6280

GSM (MHz): 900/1800/1900 WCDMA (MHz): 850/1900/2100

l

Table 7-2 shows the types and specifications of CDMA test terminals. Table 7-2 Specifications of CDMA test terminals

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Supported Band


Huawei C300

1x 800 MHz

No

Huawei C506

1x 800 MHz

No

Huawei C2860

1x 800 MHz

No

Huawei C5005

1x 800 MHz

No


7-7



l


Supported Band


Huawei C5588

1x 800 MHz

No

Huawei C7100

1x 800 MHz

No

Huawei C7168

1x 800 MHz

No

Huawei C7188

1x 800 MHz

No

Huawei C7200

1x 800 MHz

No

Huawei EC360 Card

1x/DO0/DOA: 800 MHz, 1900 MHz

No

Qualcomm QTP-6800

1x/DO0/DOA: 800 MHz, 1900 MHz

No

LG KX206

1x 800 MHz

No

LG KX236

1x 800 MHz

No

Table 7-3 shows the types and specifications of WiMAX test terminals. Table 7-3 Specifications of WiMAX test terminals

7-8


Supported Band


Remarks

ZyXEL MAX100

2500 MHz

No

-

ZyXEL MAX210

3500 MHz

No

-

Seowon GCT SWU1100

2500 MHz, 3500 MHz

No

-

Seowon GCT SWU3020

2300 MHz

No

-

Seowon GCT SWU3120

2500 MHz

No

-

Seowon GCT SWU3220

3500 MHz

No

-


2500 MHz

No

-


2300 MHz

No

-


2300 MHz

No

-


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



l


Supported Band


Remarks


2500 MHz

No

Supports only the USB connection mode.


3500 MHz

No


Huawei Beceem BM328

2500 MHz

No


Huawei Beceem BM338

3500 MHz

No


Table 7-4 shows the specifications of LTE test terminals. Table 7-4 Specifications of LTE test terminals Type of the Test Terminal

Supported Band


Remarks

Huawei UE 1.0

Band 4: AWS

No

Supports only the network port connection mode.

No


No


Band 7: 2.6GHz Band 12: 700 MHz Band 40: 2.3 GHz DD: 800 MHz

Huawei UE 1.1

Band 4: AWS Band 7: 2.6 GHz Band 12: 700 MHz Band 40: 2.3 GHz DD: 800 MHz

Huawei UE 2.0

Band 1: 2.1 GHz Band 3: 1800 MHz Band 4: AWS Band 7: 2.6 GHz Band 8: 900 MHz Band 12: 700 MHz Band 38: 2.6 GHz Band 40: 2.3 GHz DD: 800 MHz

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


7-9




Supported Band


Remarks

Huawei B390

Band 38: 2.6 GHz

No


No


Band 40: 2.3 GHz Band 64: 2545 MHz to 2575 MHz Band 7: 2.6 GHz Band 20: 791 MHz to 821 MHz (Downlink), and 832 MHz to 862 MHz (Uplink)

Huawei E398 Card

Band 1: 2.1 GHz Band 7: 2.6 GHz Band 3: 1800 MHz

Scanner The followings scanners are supported by the Probe: l

GSM/WCDMA – PCTel SeeGull EX GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 900/2100 – PCTel SeeGull LX Tri-Band GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 900/2100 – PCTel PCT-505 – PCTel PCT-520 Tri-Band GSM 900/1800 WCDMA 2100 – Anritsu ML8720 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA 2100 – Anritsu ML8740 GSM 850/900/1800/1900 WCDMA 2100 – Anritsu ML8742A WCDMA 2100 – Rohde & Schwarz TSML-W It supports all the WCDMA band class defined by 3GPP by default.

l

CDMA – PCTel SeeGull LX Dual Mode Quad Band CDMA 850/1900 EV-DO 850/1900

l

WiMAX – PCTel SeeGull EX Mini Dual Band WiMAX 2500/3500

GPS The Probe supports the GPS that complies with the National Marine Electronics Association 0183 (NMEA0183) protocol. For example, the GARMIN series and supports the text format of the GARMIN series. NMEA0183, enacted by the NMEA, is a data protocol that complies with industrial standards. Based on all ASCII characters, this protocol adapt to custom options . Thus, this protocol is flexible. The following GPSs are supported by the Probe: 7-10


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



l

GARMIN GPS76

l

Huan Tian BU353

7.2 Plugging in External Devices Before a test is performed, ensure that the external devices are properly plugged into the PC and are correctly positioned.

Prerequisite The external devices and auxiliary equipment for a test are available. For details, see 8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection.

Context The connection modes that vary with the types of the external devices are as follows: l

Test terminal: USB, PCMCIA slot, or Ethernet port

l

Data card: USB or PCMCIA slot

l

PCTel SeeGull scanner and Anritsu scanner: USB or COM port

l

Rohde&Schwarz TSML-W scanner: FireWire (IEEE 1394 port)

l

GPS: USB or COM port NOTE

In the case that the Probe performs tests of multiple terminals at a time, the Belkin USB 7-port Hub must be used to ensure the proper connection between test terminals and a PC.

Procedure Step 1 Connect all required external devices to a PC and ensure that all cables are plugged in properly. For details about how to connect the external devices, see the installation guide of the corresponding external device.

CAUTION Required drivers of the external devices must be installed so that the PC can identify these devices. You can find drivers of a variety of external devices in the Accessory\Driver directory in the Probe software installation package. For details about how to install these drivers, see the user guide of the corresponding external device. Step 2 Ensure that the external devices are positioned correctly. l Ensure that the connection between the external devices and the PC is secure. l Ensure that the cables connected to the external devices bend naturally. l Ensure that the receive signals of the test terminals and the GPS are not blocked. Otherwise, the signals may be insufficient, which affects the data collection. ----End Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


7-11



Example For details about the connection mode of an LTE UE, see 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?.

Follow-up Procedure After the external devices are plugged into the PC, you must configure these devices on the Probe and ensure that the Probe identifies them so that they can work with the Probe to collect data.

7.3 Configuring External Devices This section describes how to configure external devices. After external devices are connected to the PC installed with the Probe, you need to add and configure related parameters in the Device Configure window of the Probe so that external devices work with the Probe to collect data. 7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically This section describes how to configure external devices automatically. The Probe automatically detects external devices that are connected to the PC and automatically adds the detected external devices to the Device Configure window. 7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually This section describes how to configure external devices manually. Devices which cannot be detected automatically must be added manually in the Device Configure window.

Related References 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices

7.3.1 Configuring External Devices Automatically This section describes how to configure external devices automatically. The Probe automatically detects external devices that are connected to the PC and automatically adds the detected external devices to the Device Configure window.

Context Currently, the Probe supports automatic detection of certain models of test terminals and does not support automatic detection of scanners and GPS. For details about test terminals that can be automatically detected by the Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.

Procedure l

7-12

in the main interface of the Probe. Click The detected external devices are automatically added to the Device Configure dialog box and Down is displayed in State, as shown in Figure 7-1.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Figure 7-1 Device Configure dialog box

NOTE

If automatic detection fails or external devices do not support automatic detection, you need to manually configure external devices. For details, see 7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually.

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can configure external devices that are connected to the PC on the Probe by referring to 7.4 Enabling External Devices.

7.3.2 Configuring External Devices Manually This section describes how to configure external devices manually. Devices which cannot be detected automatically must be added manually in the Device Configure window.

Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the Probe, click Step 2 In the displayed dialog box, click

.

.

Step 3 From the Type drop-down list box, select an external device such as the MS, GPS, or scanner to be configured. From the Model drop-down list box, select the model of the selected external device. Step 4 Click Next to set the relevant parameters. For details about the parameters, see 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


7-13


7 Connecting External Devices TIP

l You can view the value of COM port of the external device under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window. In a data service test, you can right-click an external device node under the Modem node in the Device Manager window and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Then, you can view the value of Modem port of the external device on the Modem tab page. You can enter the Device Manager window by clicking Configure window.

icon on the toolbar of Device

l You can click Filter to select the data to be received. For the description of the parameters, see 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data. l You can also select the data to be received after the external device is configured. For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected.

Step 5 Click OK. Step 6 Check the configuration status of the external device. In the Device Configure dialog box, if the value of the configured external device is Down in the State column, you can infer that the external device is configured in the Probe. If no value is displayed in the State column, you can infer that the external device is not configured in the Probe. In this case, repeat Step 2 through Step 5 to configure the external device based on the actual situation until the values of all the configured external devices are Down in the State column. Step 7 Optional: Synchronize the PC time with the GPS time. 1.

Choose Configuration > System Configure to open the System Configure dialog box.

2.

Click

3.

Select Synchronize PC Time with GPS Time, and then select the time zone of the place where you are located from the Time zone drop-down list box.

.

The range of time zone is GMT +12 to GMT -12. 4.

Click OK. NOTE

After synchronizing the time of the GPS with that of the PC, do not modify the system time, otherwise, the preset time is invalid.

----End

Example You can enter the Device Manager window by clicking icon on the toolbar of Device Configure window. You can view the value of COM port of the external device under the Ports (COM & LPT) node. In a data service test, you can right-click an external device node under the Modem node in the Device Manager window and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. Then, you can view the value of Modem port of the external device on the Modem tab page

7-14


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Figure 7-2 The example of COM port

Figure 7-3 The example of Modem port

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


7-15



Follow-up Procedure You need to connect the external devices in the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.

7.4 Enabling External Devices Enabling external devices refers to connecting external devices in the Probe so that the Probe can recognize the configured external devices.

Prerequisite The external devices are configured. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.

Procedure Step 1 On the main interface of the Probe, click

to open the Device Configure dialog box.

Step 2 Select an added external device. If ...

Then ...

Connect the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX external device

Skip to Step 3.

Connect the LTE external device

Skip to Step 5.

Step 3 Click If ...

, and then check whether the port of the external device is available. Then ...

The system displays Enable in the State In this case, you can infer that the port is list of the external device in the Device available. Configure dialog box. Perform Step 4. The system prompts you by displaying a In this case, you can infer that the port is dialog box. unavailable and cannot be connected properly. Perform the following steps: 1. Click OK. The system displays Disconnect in the State list of the external device in the Device Configure dialog box. 2. Re-set the port of the external device. For details, see 13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections. 3. Perform Step 4. 7-16


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Step 4 Repeat Step 2 to Step 3 until the system displays Enable in the State list of the added external devices in the Device Configure dialog box. Step 5 On the main interface of the Probe, click external devices.

. Then the Probe automatically connects to the

The system displays the connection status in the State list of the corresponding external device in the Device Configure dialog box. l Searching: indicates that the external device is being connected. l Disconnect: indicates that the external device is disconnected or the connection is abnormal. l Connected: indicates that the external device is connected. Step 6 Check the connection status of the external devices in the system status bar. For the description of the system status bar, see System Status Bar. ----End

7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected Selecting the data to be collected refers to the process in which the Probe selectively collects the data reported by test terminals. In this case, the logfile records only the selected data. For the data that is frequently read, you can set data sampling intervals. This avoids the receipt of redundant data and increases the speed of reading data.


Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > Device Configure, or click the

icon on the toolbar.

Step 2 In the Device Configure dialog box, double-click the configured test terminal. Step 3 Click Filter, and set the relevant parameters. For detailed description about the parameters, see 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data.

CAUTION When the AMR end-to-end delay test is performed, the calling and called terminals must be connected to the same Probe. In addition, when configuring the terminals, you must select the data packets related to the AMR in LogCode in the Filter dialog box. l For the calling terminal, Ox7143 need to be selected. l For the called terminal, 0x7144 need to be selected. Step 4 Click OK. ----End Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


7-17



Related References 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data

7.6 Configuring Device Alarms The Probe generates alarm in dialog box or voice mode, when the device is unexpectedly disconnected or the signal strength of the GPS is weak. You can set alarm events or alarm modes for special situations.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Click

.

Step 3 Set Language to specify the language type of the device alarm. You can set the language type of the device alarm to Chinese or English. Step 4 Set the device alarm mode. If ...

Then...

Generating alarms in voice mode

Choose Audio Alarm, and select a voice file (.wav file) in Sound.

Generating alarms in dialog box mode Choose Visual Alarm. Step 5 Click OK. ----End

Related References 12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm

7-18


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8 Collecting Data

8

Collecting Data

About This Chapter The Probe collects the air interface test data through the test terminal and other external devices and records test data in logfiles. Before collecting the data, make sure that a computer installed with the Probe, the test terminal, the scanner, and the GPS are available and the dongle must be plugged in. You can also import engineering parameters for different network systems and map files, which helps to provide a vivid view of test data.

Context You can start the data analysis through operations on the menu bar, toolbar, tabs in navigation pane, or view windows. This section describes the most commonly used methods on how to collect data by using the Probe.

CAUTION When you use the Probe to collect data, the dongle must be always connected to the USB port on the PC. Otherwise, the Probe cannot be used to collect data. You can choose Help > Check License to check whether the dongle is plugged in properly. 8.1 Data Collection Process The data collection function of the Probe is responsible for collection of the test data on the wireless air interface. 8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection Before data collection, you need to have the following items ready: Probe of the latest version, external devices and auxiliary equipment for the test. In addition, you need to ensure that the external devices are running properly. 8.3 Creating a Project All operations on the Probe are based on the project. Therefore, before the data collection or data analysis, you need to create a project or open an existing project. 8.4 Designing Test Plans Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8-1


8 Collecting Data

A test plan is a customized test task that consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can configure different test items for the MS or the scanner based on the actual situation to guide various data service tests and voice service tests during the drive test. 8.5 Performing a Test Plan Performing a test plan refers to performing the configured test items of the MS or scanner through the Probe to collect test data. You can use the Probe to perform indoor tests and outdoor tests. Before performing a test plan, ensure that external devices are properly connected and test plans are assigned for the scanner or MS. After the test plan is started, the system carries out the plan and records the test data. You can monitor the test process in real time during the test.

8-2


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8 Collecting Data

8.1 Data Collection Process The data collection function of the Probe is responsible for collection of the test data on the wireless air interface. Table 8-1 shows the procedure for data collection on the Probe. Table 8-1 Data collection procedure Proce dure

Operation

Description

1

Preparations Before Data Collection

Make preparations for the data collection to improve the data collection efficiency.

2

Connecting External Devices

Connect the external devices used for the data collection to the test PC and then configure the relevant parameters on the Probe.

3

Creating a Project

Create a project for data collection. You can also import the map or relevant engineering parameters to the project to facilitate data observation.

5

Designing a Test Plan

Design the test plan for the test terminal or scanner to test the voice service or data service.

6

Performing a Test Plan

Start a test plan and record a logfile.

7

Browsing Data in Real Time

During the test, you can view the test data in real time in the view window.

8.2 Preparations Before Data Collection Before data collection, you need to have the following items ready: Probe of the latest version, external devices and auxiliary equipment for the test. In addition, you need to ensure that the external devices are running properly. It is recommended that you perform the following operations before the drive test: l

Determine the test objective and test area, plan the test route, and update the base station information to improve the data collection efficiency.

l

Have the engineering parameter table and map for the drive test ready. – For the engineering parameters supported by the Probe, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. – For the maps supported by the Probe, see 5.1 Basic Concepts About Maps.

l

Have the Probe and GENEX Shared components of the latest version ready.

l

Have the relevant hardware and software ready. – A PC installed with the Probe and GENEX Shared components is available.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8-3


8 Collecting Data

– The dongle and the corresponding driver are available. – External devices and the corresponding auxiliary equipment and their drivers used for the drive test are available. Ensure that the external devices run properly. Table 8-2 describes the requirements for the external devices. Table 8-2 Requirements for the external devices Configu ration Item


Auxiliary Equipment

GPS

For the GPS supported by the Probe, see GPS.

External antenna

Scanner

For the scanner supported by the Probe, see Scanner.

Vehicle-mounted DC/ AC converter, external antenna, and so on

Test terminal

For the test MS and PC card supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.

Spare battery, charger, data cable, and so on

NOTE

During the drive test, ensure that the power supply of the connected devices is sufficient.

8.3 Creating a Project All operations on the Probe are based on the project. Therefore, before the data collection or data analysis, you need to create a project or open an existing project.

Context Upon the startup of the Probe, an empty project is created automatically by default. You can perform subsequent operations for this default project. The Probe can display only one project at a time. To open another project, you need to close the current project.

Procedure Step 1 In the navigation pane, expand the Project tab and then click the

icon.

Step 2 Choose a project template. l Empty Project: creates an empty project. l GSM View Template: project template used in GSM tests provided by the Probe. l WCDMA View Template: project template used in WCDMA tests provided by the Probe. l WiMAX Beceem View Template: project template used in WiMAX Beceem tests provided by the Probe. l LTE View Template: project template used in LTE tests provided by the Probe. 8-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8 Collecting Data

After a template is selected, the system automatically names the new project Untitled. NOTE

You can open an existing project through the Project tab in the navigation pane.

Step 3 Configure the related parameters. For example, configure data related to external devices, make test plan, or specify other system settings. Step 4 Optional: Save the current project as required. If you need to ...

Then ...

Directly save the current project

Choose Project > Save.

Rename and then save the current project

Choose Project > Save As.

The folders provided by the Probe for saving project files are under the following path: software installation path\Projects. The following folders are contained: l Site Verification Saves the project files for single-site verification tests. l Optimize Saves the project files for optimization tests. l Benchmark Saves the project files for benchmark tests. l Acceptance Saves the project files for acceptance tests. l Customize Saves the customized project files. ----End

Follow-up Procedure You can close or delete a project by choosing Project, clicking the corresponding icon on the toolbar, or clicking the corresponding icon under the Project tab in the navigation pane on the main interface. For details about the main interface of the Probe, see 2.3 Main Interface of the Probe.

8.4 Designing Test Plans A test plan is a customized test task that consists of test items provided by the Probe. You can configure different test items for the MS or the scanner based on the actual situation to guide various data service tests and voice service tests during the drive test.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8-5


8 Collecting Data

Context Ensure that the MS is properly connected and the related parameters are set. For details about how to configure the MS, see 7 Connecting External Devices.

Procedure Step 1 Choose ConfigurationTest Plan Control, or click on the Configuration tab page in the navigation pane to open the Test Plan Control window. Step 2 Click Click here to config in the left pane to add a test item, and then configure the properties of the added test item on the Config tab in the right pane. For the description of test items and related properties, see 14.1 Description of Test Items.

CAUTION l To perform a data service test, such as the Ping, FTP, HTTP, WAP, Video Streaming, or Email test, you must configure the Dial Up test item before configuring the test item required by the data service. l To perform a speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the test item according to the following situations: l To perform a synchronous speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item for the calling PHU terminal. l To perform an asynchronous speech quality evaluation test, you need to configure the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item for the two PHU terminals. l To perform a speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server, you need to configure the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item for the PHU terminal that is configured for the Probe and configure the SQE test item for the PSTN SQE Server. Step 3 Repeat Step 2 to add multiple test items. If the added test item need to be performed cyclically, you need to add the Loop Start test item. After the Loop Start test item is added, the Probe adds the Loop End test item automatically, which indicates that the test items between Loop Start and Loop End are performed cyclically. Step 4 Optional: Adjust the execution sequence of the test items. 1.

Select a test item whose execution sequence you want to adjust.

2.

Click

or

to move the test item up or down.

Step 5 Set whether to perform the added test item in Enable. Clicking Yes indicates that this test item is performed. Clicking No indicates that this test item is not performed. Step 6 Optional: Click

to save the configured test plan.

----End 8-6


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8 Collecting Data

Follow-up Procedure You can also click

to delete unnecessary test items.

Related References 12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window 12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items 14.1 Description of Test Items

8.5 Performing a Test Plan Performing a test plan refers to performing the configured test items of the MS or scanner through the Probe to collect test data. You can use the Probe to perform indoor tests and outdoor tests. Before performing a test plan, ensure that external devices are properly connected and test plans are assigned for the scanner or MS. After the test plan is started, the system carries out the plan and records the test data. You can monitor the test process in real time during the test.

Context

CAUTION Before performing the test plan, disable the call waiting function of the test terminal. 8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA) The APN represents the name of an external network that is connected through packet switched (PS) domain. The APN is used for initializing the modem port of the MS before a data service test is performed. Therefore, the APN must be set before a data service test is performed. 8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test The indoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals inside buildings. Indoor tests are classified into horizontal tests and vertical tests. The GPS is not required for locating the test route indoors. Therefore, the manual dot trace is used for indoor tests. Before performing an indoor test, you do not need to connect the GPS to the PC. 8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test An outdoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals outside buildings. In an outdoor test, the GPS is required to locate the test route. Therefore, you need to connect the GPS to the PC before an outdoor test. 8.5.4 Monitoring the Test You can check the progress and status of the test items and test plans during the test or the test replay. This enables you to observe and analyze the test procedure. 8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans If a test plan is complete or you are about to leave the test car for a long period, you need to stop the test plan and disconnect the external devices.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8-7


8 Collecting Data

8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA) The APN represents the name of an external network that is connected through packet switched (PS) domain. The APN is used for initializing the modem port of the MS before a data service test is performed. Therefore, the APN must be set before a data service test is performed.

Prerequisite The MS is connected and can be recognized by the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.

Context The APN can be set by using any of the following methods: l

Setting the APN in the operating system

l

Setting the APN in the MS

l

Setting the APN in the Probe NOTE

Among the three APN setting methods, settings in the operating system are of the highest priority and settings in the Probe are of the lowest priority. That is, if an APN is set in the operating system and in the Probe, settings in the operating system take effect. Likewise, the maximum uplink and downlink rates set in the operating system have higher priorities than those set in the Probe. If the APN or the maximum uplink and downlink rates do not work during the test, check whether they are set in the operating system. If they are not set, the Probe initialize the modem based on the latest successful setting.

Procedure l

Set the APN in the operating system. 1.

Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to open the System Properties dialog box.

2.

On the Hardware tab page, click Device Manager to open the Device Manager dialog box.

3.

Expand the Modem node and then double-click the modem to be set.

4.

Choose Advanced in the displayed Modem dialog box. Enter the initialized command in the Extra Initialized Command field. The format of the initialized command is at+cgdcont=1,"ip","APN". Here, APN is the access point name. For example, the APN of China Mobile is cmwap or cmnet.

5. l

Click OK.

Set the APN in the MS. For details about how to set the APN in the MS, see the user guide of the corresponding MS.

l

Set the APN in the Probe. In the Probe, to set the APN when configuring the properties of the Dial Up test item, perform the following steps: 1.

8-8

On the Probe main interface, click

icon to open the Test Plan Control dialog box.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8 Collecting Data

2.

Click Click here to config and choose the Dial Up test item.

3.

Set the PDP APN property of the Dial Up test item.

----End

8.5.2 Performing an Indoor Test The indoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals inside buildings. Indoor tests are classified into horizontal tests and vertical tests. The GPS is not required for locating the test route indoors. Therefore, the manual dot trace is used for indoor tests. Before performing an indoor test, you do not need to connect the GPS to the PC.

Context In horizontal tests, fixed points are selected according to the floor plan of a building. You can perform a horizontal test according to a predefined test route or according to the test route controlled manually. In vertical tests, the signal distribution in the vertical direction between floors is tested.

Procedure Step 1 On the View tab page in the navigation pane, double-click IndoorMap. The IndoorMap window is displayed. Step 2 Optional: Click

to open the indoor test map.

Step 3 Right-click on the map area and choose a type of indoor tests from the shortcut menu.

CAUTION The automatic horizontal type and manual horizontal type can be selected only when the external devices are disconnected from the PC. The vertical type can be chosen only when the external devices are connected to the PC. l To perform a horizontal test, you need to set the test type to the indoor test, connect external devices to the PC, and then perform subsequent operations. l To perform a vertical test, you need to connect external devices to the PC before setting the test type to the indoor test.

If you need to...

Then...

Start an automatic horizontal test 1. Choose Walking Test > Automatic from the shortcut menu. 2. Click

to draw the test route.

3. Perform Step 4 through Step 5. During the test, press the Spacebar. The test data that is already collected is displayed on the map. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8-9


8 Collecting Data

If you need to...

Then...

Start a manual horizontal test

1. Choose Walking Test > Manual from the shortcut menu. 2. Perform Step 4 through Step 5. 3. On the toolbar of the IndoorMap window, click to draw the test route manually.

Start a vertical test

1. Choose Vertical Test from the shortcut menu. The Floor dialog box is displayed. 2. In the displayed Floor dialog box, click Setting. The Floor Setting dialog box is displayed. 3. In the Floor Setting displayed dialog box, specify Min floor, Max floor, and Invalid floor. 4. Click OK to switch to the Floor dialog box. 5. Perform Step 4 through Step 5. 6. In the Floor dialog box, click route.

Step 4 On the main interface of the Probe, click

or

to draw a test

to start the test plan.

The Probe automatically displays a message for you to select whether to record logfiles. The default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the current PC time, which is precise to seconds, such as Probe_20100906135414.gen. Step 5 Optional: View the test data. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data. ----End

8.5.3 Performing an Outdoor Test An outdoor test is performed to test the quality of radio signals outside buildings. In an outdoor test, the GPS is required to locate the test route. Therefore, you need to connect the GPS to the PC before an outdoor test.


Procedure Step 1 Click

on the toolbar to start the test plan.

The Probe automatically displays a message for you to select whether to record logfiles. The default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the current PC time, which is precise to seconds, such as Probe_20100906135414.gen. 8-10


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8 Collecting Data NOTE

After the test plan is started, the Probe automatically saves a .tab file of which the name is same as the recorded logfile. The .tab file is used to store GPS information. You can set the attributes of the .tab file in the Route File Setting area in Other Settings of the System Configure dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings.

Step 2 Optional: View the test data. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data. ----End

8.5.4 Monitoring the Test You can check the progress and status of the test items and test plans during the test or the test replay. This enables you to observe and analyze the test procedure.

Procedure icon on the toolbar. The Test Plan Control window is displayed. Step 1 Click the For details about the parameters in the Test Plan Control window, see 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test. Step 2 Monitor the test. Then ...

If ...

You need to check the status of test items. Check the information about the test item progress at the bottom of the Test Plan Control window. You need to check the statistics of test plans.

Check the information listed on the Statistic tab page in the Test Plan Control window.

Step 3 Check the color of the device status indicator in the system status bar to monitor the connection status of the external devices. For details about the status bar, see System Status Bar. NOTE

If an external device is disconnected or the connection is abnormal and the connection cannot be enabled within 10 seconds, it is recommended that you stop the test, re-connect the external devices, and find and record the fault causes.

----End

Related References 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test

8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans If a test plan is complete or you are about to leave the test car for a long period, you need to stop the test plan and disconnect the external devices. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


8-11


8 Collecting Data

Context Before stopping a test, you need to terminate the call or disconnect the data service of the MS, stop the test plans, stop recording logfiles, and finally disconnect the external devices. In this way, the integrity of the recorded data is guaranteed.

Procedure Step 1 Disconnect the voice or data service interaction with the test terminal. Step 2 Stop the test plan by clicking

on the toolbar.

Step 3 Stop the logfile recording by clicking

on the toolbar.

Step 4 Disconnect the external devices by clicking

on the toolbar.

----End

Follow-up Procedure After a test plan is stopped, save the logfile properly to avoid data loss.

8-12


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


9 Managing Logfiles

9

Managing Logfiles

About This Chapter During tests, test data is saved in .gen files that are called logfiles. This chapter describes how to record, replay, segment, and export logfiles. 9.1 Recording Logfiles The logfile recorded during a test is used for replaying the test process or import the related data into the GENEX Assistant for further analysis. If the logfile recording is performed for an outdoor test, the Probe will automatically save a .tab file with the same name of the recorded logfile to store the GPS information. 9.2 Segmenting Logfiles You can segment logfiles as required. You can record logfiles of different sizes or different periods in different files for better management. The Probe supports automatic logfile segmentation and manual logfile segmentation. Automatic logfile segmentation had better be performed before the logfile is recorded, and manual logfile segmentation should be performed when the logfile is recorded. 9.3 Replaying Logfiles The purpose of replaying logfile is to reproduce the drive test process. Replay logfile does not require the dongle. Before replaying logfile, you can preview the drive test route and the key events in the map window. During a replay, you can adjust the replay rate and specify the start point for the replay. You can open only one logfile at a time. 9.4 Exporting Logfiles This describes how to export logfiles. You can convert a logfile to a binary file, .txt file containing separators, or an MDM file and convert a PHU file to a logfile for future analysis.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


9-1


9 Managing Logfiles

9.1 Recording Logfiles The logfile recorded during a test is used for replaying the test process or import the related data into the GENEX Assistant for further analysis. If the logfile recording is performed for an outdoor test, the Probe will automatically save a .tab file with the same name of the recorded logfile to store the GPS information.


Context l

The Probe supports the logfile segmenting, including the automatic segmenting and manual segmenting. For details, see 9.2 Segmenting Logfiles.

l

The Probe supports the recording of geographic information about the test location in texts and automatically saves the information in logfiles for further analysis and problem location. The geographic information includes the features of buildings and interference source. This type of text is called filemark.


to record a logfile.

You can specify the save path and logfile name as prompted. l The default save path is the same as the setting in the Logfile Setting area on the Other Settings tab page in the System Configure dialog box. It is recommended that logfiles are not saved in the system installation disk. l The default naming convention of a logfile is Probe_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.gen. YYYYMMDDHHMMSS indicates the current PC time, which is precise to seconds, such as Probe_20100906135414.gen. Logfile names must be easy to understand. For example, a logfile can be named as Probe_20100906135414_FTPDownload.gen. NOTE

You can also enable the Probe to record logfiles when the test plan is executed. In this case, the Probe records data of the test terminal in the service state. However, in the case specified in Step 1, the Probe records data of the test terminal in the idle state.

Step 2 Optional: Insert a filemark. .

1.

Click

2.

Type the filemark in the Filemark dialog box. The length of the filemark cannot exceed 30 Chinese characters.

3.

Click OK. The Probe automatically saves the typed filemark, including the information about the current time and longitude and altitude of current geographic location, in the logfiles.

----End 9-2


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


9 Managing Logfiles

9.2 Segmenting Logfiles You can segment logfiles as required. You can record logfiles of different sizes or different periods in different files for better management. The Probe supports automatic logfile segmentation and manual logfile segmentation. Automatic logfile segmentation had better be performed before the logfile is recorded, and manual logfile segmentation should be performed when the logfile is recorded.

Procedure l

Automatically segment logfiles. It is recommended that the logfile size be equal to or more than 10 MB. NOTE

If a logfile records more than 1048064 data packages, the logfile size is invalid, and the system automatically segments the logfile.

1.

Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click

3.

Set the relevant parameters in the Logfile Setting area.

.

For details about the parameters, see 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings. 4. l

Click OK.

Manually segment logfiles. . Then, the system closes the logfile being recorded and creates a logfile Click automatically. The new logfile is automatically stored to the path where the previous logfile is stored. The new logfile is named as name of the file before being segmented_N. The value of N is equal to or greater than 1, indicating the number of segmentation times.

----End

9.3 Replaying Logfiles The purpose of replaying logfile is to reproduce the drive test process. Replay logfile does not require the dongle. Before replaying logfile, you can preview the drive test route and the key events in the map window. During a replay, you can adjust the replay rate and specify the start point for the replay. You can open only one logfile at a time.

Prerequisite l

The ongoing test is stopped and the external devices are disconnected.

l

If you want to preview the drive test route before the replay, the logfile storing the test route must be available.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


9-3


9 Managing Logfiles

l

If you want to preview key events before the replay, the open logfile must contain the information about key events, and you must set the display mode of the events on the map in the System Configure dialog box.

Context The replay rate supported by the Probe ranges from 1/8 to 32 times of the test rate. Currently, you can preview only the key events and the drive test route that are in the outdoor test data.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Logfile > Open Logfile or click

on the replay toolbar.

Step 2 Select a logfile in .gen format. Then, click Open. l Preview Route in Map indicates that you can preview the drive test route in the OutdoorMap window. If you also select Clear Historical Info, the Probe will clear the test route in the logfile that is last imported. l Preview Event in Map indicates that you can preview the key events route in the OutdoorMap window. NOTE

You can also select both Preview Route in Map and Preview Event in Map to preview the drive test route and the key events in the OutdoorMap window.

Step 3 Optional: Search for an event in the logfile and find the location where the event occurs. . The Find Event dialog box is displayed.

1.


2.

Select a device from the Device drop-down list box and select an event to be searched for from the Event drop-down list box.

3.

Click Search. The Probe displays the search result in the Search Result area. If no information is displayed, you can infer that the logfile does not contain this event. NOTE

The Probe supports the searching of the filemark event so that the filemark area can be located for users to analyze the coverage status of the radio network.

4.

In the Search Result area, select the event that you want to locate on the map.

5.

Click Find. The Probe marks the location where the event occurs with

in the OutdoorMap window.

Step 4 Start the replay. Choose Logfile > Play or click

on the replay toolbar.

Step 5 Optional: Browse the test data. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data. ----End 9-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


9 Managing Logfiles

Follow-up Procedure You can click the corresponding icons on the replay toolbar to control the replay progress. For details, see Replay Toolbar.

9.4 Exporting Logfiles This describes how to export logfiles. You can convert a logfile to a binary file, .txt file containing separators, or an MDM file and convert a PHU file to a logfile for future analysis.

Prerequisite l

The ongoing test is stopped and the external devices are disconnected. For details, see 8.5.5 Stopping Test Plans.

l

The ongoing replay is stopped and the logfile is closed. The procedure is as follows: on the replay toolbar to stop a replay.

1.

Click

2.

Choose Logfile > Close Logfile to close the logfile.

Context l

A logfile can be converted to the file in the following formats: – Bin: indicates the binary file. The extension is .gen. The binary file can be directly imported to the Probe. – CSV: indicates the .txt file containing separators. The extension is .csv. In the exported .txt file, the test data is separated by separators such as the comma, semicolon, or colon. – MDM: indicates the Qualcomm file. The extension is .dlf. The logfile must contain the test data of the Qualcomm test terminal.

l

The PHU file contains the data collected by the PHU MS. The extension is .phu.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Logfile > Export Data. The wizard for exporting the test data is displayed. If you need to ...

Then ...

Convert a logfile to a binary file

Select Bin. l To export multiple logfiles as a binary file, select Multi-f. l To export a logfile as a binary file, clear Multif.

Convert a logfile to a .txt file containing Select Csv. separators

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


9-5


9 Managing Logfiles

If you need to ...

Then ...

Convert the messages and events in the Select Csv (Messages_Events). Logfile to a .txt file containing separators Convert a logfile to a Qualcomm file

Select MDM.

Convert a PHU file (.phu file) to a logfile Select PHU. (.gen file) Step 2 Click Next to set corresponding parameters. For details about parameters, see 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data. Step 3 Repeat Step 2 until Next in the dialog box is changed to Start. Step 4 Click Start and wait for data conversion. Step 5 In the displayed prompt box, click corresponding buttons to complete the data conversion. If you need to ...

Then ...

Continue to export data

Click Yes.

Exit the wizard for exporting data

Click No.

----End

Related References 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data 12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner

9-6


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


10 Managing View Windows

10

Managing View Windows

About This Chapter This section describes how to view data in view windows and how to configure properties of view windows. View windows are key windows of the Probe. You can view IEs, events, Layer 2 or Layer 3 messages, and statistical values of indicators in view windows. 10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events IEs and events are displayed in the Event List window and other IE views of the Probe. In addition, IEs and events can be presented as symbols and audio signals. 10.2 Browsing Data The view window is used to display test data. During a test or a replay, you can open the view window to browse data in the view as required. 10.3 Configuring the View Window You can customize the view window before a test or a replay. You can also modify the configuration of the view window during a test or a replay. The configuration of the view window is temporary and is not saved in projects.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


10-1



10.1 Presentation of IEs and Events IEs and events are displayed in the Event List window and other IE views of the Probe. In addition, IEs and events can be presented as symbols and audio signals. IEs and events can be presented as: l

Symbols on a map For details, see 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event.

l

Symbols and vertical lines in line charts For details, see 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View.

l

Audio signals For details, see 12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications and 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event.

10.2 Browsing Data The view window is used to display test data. During a test or a replay, you can open the view window to browse data in the view as required.

Prerequisite l

If you want to browsing data in a view during a test, ensure that external devices are connected and can be recognized by the Probe so that the open view window can display data. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.

l

If you want to browse data in a view during a replay, ensure that the replay is ongoing so that the open view window can display data. For details, see 9.3 Replaying Logfiles.

Context The views provided by the Probe consist of the air interface parameter view, data service view, signaling view, event list view, event statistics view, map view, KPI statistics view, scanner view, GPS view, line chart view, and information view. In the Probe, the views are displayed in chart, list, plain text, line chart mode or in chart-and-list mixed mode. For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View.

Procedure Step 1 Choose View or click the View tab in the navigation pane to display a view window. Then, browse data in the view window. Step 2 Optional: Configure the properties of the view window as required. For details, see 10.3 Configuring the View Window. ----End 10-2


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Related References 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View

10.3 Configuring the View Window You can customize the view window before a test or a replay. You can also modify the configuration of the view window during a test or a replay. The configuration of the view window is temporary and is not saved in projects. 10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View The line chart view can display the changes of IEs over time. You can configure two charts in the line chart view to facilitate the comparison between IEs. 10.3.2 Configuring the List View The list view displays test data in tables. You can configure the properties of the list view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis. 10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View The chart view displays test data in charts. You can configure the properties of the chart view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis. 10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View The plain test view displays the basic information about the logfile and the events and statistics in the logfile in plain texts. You can configure the properties of the plain text view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.

10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View The line chart view can display the changes of IEs over time. You can configure two charts in the line chart view to facilitate the comparison between IEs.

Context For the description of the line chart view, see 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View.

Procedure Step 1 Choose View > Custom Line Chart. Step 2 Right-click any area in the Custom Line Chart dialog box, and then choose Properties from the shortcut menu. l The Color shortcut menu item is used to configure the color properties of the line chart view. l The Time shortcut menu item is used to set the amount of that is allowed to be displayed in the current line chart. By default, the data within 60 seconds can be displayed. The data within 3600 seconds can be displayed at most. Step 3 In the Set Chart Properties dialog box, select the chart to be configured, and then click Edit. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set relevant parameters. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


10-3



For the description of the parameters, see Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box. Step 5 Click OK. The Set Chart Properties dialog box is displayed. Step 6 Repeat Step 3 through Step 5 until all the required chart properties are configured. Step 7 In the Set Chart Properties dialog box, click OK. ----End

Related References 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View 12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View

10.3.2 Configuring the List View The list view displays test data in tables. You can configure the properties of the list view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.

Prerequisite The view window to be configured is displayed. For details, see 10.2 Browsing Data.

Context For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View.

Procedure Step 1 Right-click any area in the list view, and then choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The ListView Custom Properties dialog box is displayed. l The Device shortcut menu item is used to display the parameters of different devices. If no device is added to the current system, the Device shortcut menu item does not provide any options. l The SetTitle shortcut menu item is used to change the title of the current list view. Step 2 Click the Mode tab and Cell Contents tab. Then configure the layout and appearance of the view window. For the description of the parameters, see 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views. TIP

Select an IE, and then click Edit. Alternatively, double-click an IE. In the IE Information dialog box, configure IE-related information.

Step 3 After the configuration, click OK. ----End

Related References 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views 10-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View The chart view displays test data in charts. You can configure the properties of the chart view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.


Context For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View.

Procedure Step 1 Right-click any area in the chart view, and then choose Custom from the shortcut menu. The ChartView Custom Properties dialog box is displayed. l The Legend shortcut menu item is used to display the legend of the current chart view. l The Color shortcut menu item is used to configure the legend properties of the current chart view. Step 2 Click the Chart General tab, and then set relevant parameters. Step 3 After the configuration, click OK. ----End

Related References 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views

10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View The plain test view displays the basic information about the logfile and the events and statistics in the logfile in plain texts. You can configure the properties of the plain text view as required to facilitate data browse and data analysis.


Context For the description of the view window, see 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View. The plain text views provided by the Probe consist of the information view, event list view, and statistics view. They are used to display the basic information about the logfile, the event information, and the statistics of events and KPIs in the logfile.

Procedure l

Configure the properties of the event list view and the statistics view. 1.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Right-click any area in the view, and then choose Event Filter or KPI Filter from the shortcut menu. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-5



The list in the left pane of the event list view or the statistics view displays the events or KPIs provided by the Probe.

l

2.

From the list in the left pane of the view, select the event or KPI to be displayed.

3.

Optional: During the test or replay, right-click any area in the view, and then choose Clear List from the shortcut menu. The displayed events or KPIs are cleared.

Configure the properties of the information view. 1.

Choose View > Information. The Information view window is displayed. NOTE

l The Log File tab page displays the information related to logfiles. l The FTP Info tab page displays the information related to FTP upload or download. l The PHU Info tab page displays the version of the PHU terminal. You can check the version of the PHU terminal during terminal connecting or data replaying. When the Probe can not get the version of the PHU terminal, the Unknown Version will be displayed. l The IE Audio Indications Info tab page displays the Information Elements (IEs) which played audio indications.

2.

Right-click any area in the Information view window, and then choose Font from the shortcut menu. Then, configure the fonts of the texts in the view window. The Copy menu item is used to copy the texts in the view window to the clipboard of the Windows. Then, the texts can be pasted to other documents conveniently.

----End

Related References 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View

10-6


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


11 Typical Application

11

Typical Application

About This Chapter This section describes typical test methods supported by the Probe. 11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA) The voice service is a basic radio network service. The Probe supports speech quality evaluation tests. The Probe uses the Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) algorithm to evaluate the speech quality by comparing the speech sample file and the speech result file. 11.2 Forcing Function Tests The Probe supports forcing function tests in GSM, WCDMA, and LTE modes. The forcing function test involves the setting of the GSM NV (Nonvolatile) parameter, carrier-to-adjacent (C/A) measurement, forcing feature test, and frequency scanning. 11.3 IP Analysis The Probe obtains the raw data packets of data service tests through the WinPcap tool and then obtains the information about the transport layer protocols and the network layer protocols through the IP analysis.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


11-1



11.1 Speech Quality Evaluation Tests (GSM/WCDMA) The voice service is a basic radio network service. The Probe supports speech quality evaluation tests. The Probe uses the Perceptual Evaluation of Speech Quality (PESQ) algorithm to evaluate the speech quality by comparing the speech sample file and the speech result file. 11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test This section describes the synchronous speech quality evaluation test. One Probe is connected with two PHU terminals and performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the calling PHU terminal to play speech sample and the called PHU terminal to record result file so that the MOS is obtained. 11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test This section describes the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. Two PHU terminals that are configured for different Probes call each other. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the PHU terminals to play and record speech files alternatively so that the MOS is obtained. 11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server This section describes the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal and performs the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to play voices and the PSTN SQE Server to record voices or enabling the PSTN SQE Server to play voices and the PHU terminal to record voices so that the uplink or downlink MOS is obtained.

11.1.1 Synchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test This section describes the synchronous speech quality evaluation test. One Probe is connected with two PHU terminals and performs the synchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the calling PHU terminal to play speech sample and the called PHU terminal to record result file so that the MOS is obtained.

Prerequisite The Probe is configured with two terminals installed with the PHU of V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.

Context The PHU terminals supported by the Probe are Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U1251, and Huawei U6100.

Procedure Step 1 Design the test plan. Only the test plan for the calling PHU terminal need to be designed.

11-2

1.

icon on the Configuration tab page of the navigation pane to open the Test Click the Plan Control window.

2.

On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the Sync SQE(MSMS) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



For details about the properties of the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item, see Sync SQE(MSMS) (GSM/WCDMA). Step 2 Perform the test plan. 1.

Click the

icon to start the logfile recording.

2.

Click the

icon to start the test plan.

Step 3 View the test data. Choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the IEs of the speech quality evaluation. Step 4 Optional: End the test plan. If the test is complete or you are carrying the PHU terminal far away from the test vehicle for a long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. 1.

Click

on the toolbar to stop the test plan.

2.

Click

on the toolbar to stop the logfile recording.

3.

Click

on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminals from the Probe.

----End

11.1.2 Asynchronous Speech Quality Evaluation Test This section describes the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test. Two PHU terminals that are configured for different Probes call each other. The Probes perform the asynchronous speech quality evaluation test by enabling the PHU terminals to play and record speech files alternatively so that the MOS is obtained.

Prerequisite 1.

The Probe is installed on two PCs.

2.

The terminals installed with the same PHU version are configured for the two Probes separately. The PHU version is V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.

3.

The PHU terminals quit from the PHU running mode.

Context The PHU terminals supported by the Probe are Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U1251, and Huawei U6100.

Procedure Step 1 Design the test plan. When designing the test plan, you need to design the test plan for the calling PHU terminal before designing the test plan for the called PHU terminal. 1.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

icon on the Configuration tab page of the navigation pane to open the Test Click the Plan Control window. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-3



2.

On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the Async SQE(MSMS) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page. For details about the properties of the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item, see Async SQE(MSMS) (GSM/WCDMA).

Step 2 Perform the test plan. When performing the test plan, you need to perform the test plan of the called PHU terminal before performing the test plan of the calling PHU terminal. 1.

Click the

icon to record the data in a logfile.

2.

Click the


Step 3 View the test data. In the two Probes, choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the IEs of the speech quality evaluation. Step 4 Optional: End the test plan. If the test is complete or you are carrying the PHU terminal far away from the test vehicle for a long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. Note that you need to stop the test plan of the calling PHU terminal first. 1.

Click


2.

Click


3.

Click

on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminals from the Probe.

----End

11.1.3 Speech Quality Evaluation Test Between PHU Terminal and PSTN SQE Server This section describes the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server. The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal and performs the speech quality evaluation test between an MS and the PSTN SQE Server by enabling the PHU terminal to play voices and the PSTN SQE Server to record voices or enabling the PSTN SQE Server to play voices and the PHU terminal to record voices so that the uplink or downlink MOS is obtained.

Prerequisite 1.

The two PCs are installed with the Probe and the PSTN SQE Server respectively. The system time of the two PCs is consistent.

2.

The Probe is configured with a PHU terminal. The PHU version is V100R002C01B010SPC120 or a later version.

3.

The coloring ring back tone (CRBT) services are disabled for the PHU terminal.

Context In the case of the uplink speech quality evaluation, the PHU terminal is used as the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server is used as the called MS. In the case of downlink speech quality evaluation, the PSTN SQE Server is used as the calling MS and the PHU terminal is used as the called MS. 11-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



The PHU terminals supported by the Probe are Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U1251, and Huawei U6100.

Procedure Step 1 Design the test plan for the PHU terminal on the Probe: 1.

Click the icon on the Configuration tab page of the navigation pane to open the Test Plan Control window.

2.

On the left pane of the window, click Click here to config to add the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item, and then set the properties of this test item on the Config tab page. For details about the properties of the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item, see SQE(MS-PSTN) (GSM/WCDMA).

Step 2 Perform the following operations on the PSTN SQE Server: For details, see 14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server. 1.

Configure a voice card.

2.

Configure a speech channel.

3.

Configure the SQE test item.

Step 3 Perform the test plan. When performing the test plan, you need to perform the test plan of the calling MS before performing the test plan of the called MS. This section takes the PHU terminal that is used as the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server that is used as the called MS as an example. 1.

2.

Perform the test plan on the Probe. a.

Click the

icon to start the logfile recording.

b.

Click the


Perform the test plan on the PSTN SQE Server. icon to start the test plan.

Click the Step 4 View the test data.

l If you perform the uplink speech quality evaluation, choose View > MOS > Speech Quality Evaluation to view the uplink MOS. l If you perform the downlink speech quality evaluation, choose View > Speech/TV to view the downlink MOS. Step 5 Optional: End the test plan. If the test is complete or you are carrying the PHU terminal far away from the test vehicle for a long time, the test plan needs to be stopped. Note that you need to stop the test plan of the PHU terminal before stopping the test plan of the PSTN SQE Server. This section takes the PHU terminal that is used as the calling MS and the PSTN SQE Server that is used as the called MS as an example. 1.

End the test plan on the Probe. a.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Click

on the toolbar to stop the test plan. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-5



2.

b.

Click


c.

Click

on the toolbar to disconnect the PHU terminal from the Probe.

End the test plan on the PSTN SQE Server. Click


----End

11.2 Forcing Function Tests The Probe supports forcing function tests in GSM, WCDMA, and LTE modes. The forcing function test involves the setting of the GSM NV (Nonvolatile) parameter, carrier-to-adjacent (C/A) measurement, forcing feature test, and frequency scanning. 11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to set Nonvolatile parameters, thus enabling the terminal to attach to the GPRS or EDGE. 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements This describes how to conduct the GSM C/A measurement. The C/A measurement is used to check whether the planning of the radio network frequency is reasonable and whether the adjacent-channel interference occurs on the network. In the GSM, the C/A indicates an amplitude of the level difference between the serving cell and the cell whose frequency is adjacent to the frequency of the serving cell. 11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to perform the frequency scanning test. You can perform the scanning test in the specified frequency range or band. 11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test This describes how to test the forcing functions of the GSM. The forcing functions include the handover feature, ARFCN control, band control, and cell bar access (CBA) inversion. The handover features must be performed on the MS in dedicated state. The ARFCN control and band control must be performed in idle state. 11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test The WCDMA forcing function involves locking the specified UARFCN and locking scramble codes. When locking frequencies or scramble codes, the test terminal must be in idle mode. 11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test This section describes how to perform the LTE forcing function test. The LTE forcing functions consist of locking network, frequency band, cells, turning over the cell bar access (CBA), and locking the transmit power of the PUSCH.

11.2.1 Setting the GSM Nonvolatile Parameters This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to set Nonvolatile parameters, thus enabling the terminal to attach to the GPRS or EDGE.

Prerequisite Test terminals are connected, and the Probe can enable the test terminals. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices. 11-6


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Procedure Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM NV Setting. The GSM Nonvolatile Parameters Setting dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select a test terminal in the Device Select drop-down list. Step 3 Select the forcing feature in MS NV Setting. If ...

Then...

Attach to the GPRS.

Choose GPRS.

Attach to the EDGE.

Choose EDGE.

Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the test terminal performs the forcing feature test. Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire MS State. Then, the latest forcing feature status of the test terminal is displayed in the MS Current State area. ----End

11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements This describes how to conduct the GSM C/A measurement. The C/A measurement is used to check whether the planning of the radio network frequency is reasonable and whether the adjacent-channel interference occurs on the network. In the GSM, the C/A indicates an amplitude of the level difference between the serving cell and the cell whose frequency is adjacent to the frequency of the serving cell.

Prerequisite Test terminals are connected, and the Probe can enable the test terminals. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM C/A Setting. The GSM C/A Setting dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters related to the GSM C/A Setting dialog box, see 12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM. Step 2 Select an MS from the Device Select drop-down list. Step 3 Select a C/A measurement type from the MS C/A State area. Objective

Action

Disable the C/A measurement

Choose OFF.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


11-7



Objective

Action

Calculate the C/A values of the two neighboring frequencies of the current serving cell

Choose 1 Channel (-1, +1).

Calculate the C/A values of the four neighboring frequencies of the current serving cell

Choose 2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2).

Step 4 Click Apply. The C/A measurement is performed on the MS. Step 5 Optional: Click Search MS State. The latest C/A state of the MS is displayed in the MS C/A State area. Step 6 Optional: Choose View > GSM > Interference > GSM C/A to browse the C/A measurement data in the displayed GSM C/A window. l SS: indicates the signal strengths of the four adjacent frequencies of the current serving cell. The range is -110 to -47 and the unit is dBm. l C/A, indicates the carrier-to-adjacent. The calculation method is to subtract the adjacentfrequency received signal strength from the received signal strength of the current serving ARFCN. ----End

Related References 12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM

11.2.3 Conducting GSM Frequency Scanning This describes how to use the GSM test terminal to perform the frequency scanning test. You can perform the scanning test in the specified frequency range or band.

Prerequisite The GSM test terminal is connected. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM Frequency Scan. The GSM Frequency Scan dialog box is displayed. Step 2 Select a test terminal in Device Select. Step 3 Choose the scanning mode.

11-8


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



If ...

Then...

Perform the scanning test in a specified frequency range.

Choose Specific Scan, and then enter the frequency value in From and To. The Probe supports the scanning in the frequency range 0 to 124, 512 to 885, 512 to 810, or 975 to 1023. CAUTION The value of (To - From) must be smaller than 32.

Perform the scanning test when no frequency range is specified.

Choose Unspecific Scan, and then select the band to be scanned in Scan Band. The Probe supports the scanning in the band GSM 900, DCS 1800, or PCS 1900. You can select All to scan all bands.

Recover the MS to the non-scanning status. Choose Disable. Step 4 Click Apply, and then the test terminal performs the scanning test. Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire Scan State, and then check the scanning status of the test terminal in the Scan State regional box. Step 6 Optional: Choose View > GSM > GSM Frequency Scan Result to browse the GSM scanning data in the GSM Frequency Scan Result view window. l ARFCN: Indicates the scanned frequency, which ranges from 0 to 1023. – GSM 900 MHz: 0 to 124 and 975 to 1023 – DCS 1800 MHz: 512 to 885 – PCS 1900 MHz: 515 to 810 l RxLev: Indicates the received signal level, which ranges from -110 to -47 (Unit: dBm). l BSIC: Indicates the base station identity code, which ranges from 00 to 77. l BAND: Indicates the scanned band. The value can be set to GSM 900 MHz, DCS 1800 MHz, or PCS 1900 (Unit: MHz). ----End

11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test This describes how to test the forcing functions of the GSM. The forcing functions include the handover feature, ARFCN control, band control, and cell bar access (CBA) inversion. The handover features must be performed on the MS in dedicated state. The ARFCN control and band control must be performed in idle state.

Prerequisite Test terminals are connected, and the Probe can enable the test terminals. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


11-9



Context l

Handover feature The handover feature consists of forcing handover and forbid handover. The forcing handover is used to check whether the neighboring relation between cells is added properly. The forbid handover is used to measure the coverage range of the newly constructed site. The forcing handover and forbid handover are independent of each other. – If the forbid handover is successfully performed, the MS in dedicated state is not switched until the MS is disconnected from the network. – If the forcing handover is successfully performed and the neighboring relation between the serving cell and the neighboring cells is normal, the MS can be switched to the destination cell other than the non-destination cell.

l

ARFCN control and band control After the ARFCN is controlled in idle state, the system automatically prohibits the handover if the MS originates a call. In such a case, the MS remains on the destination ARFCN. After the band is controlled in idle state, the band is controlled in dedicated state. In such a case, the system filters the neighboring cells of the non-destination band.

l

CBA inversion The CBA is a parameter set by the BSC in the GSM system and is used to control the access of a cell. When the cell is under construction, the value of the CBA cannot be accessed by common users. During this time, the MS can access the cell to verify the functions of the newly-constructed cell through the CBA inversion function.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > GSM Forcing Feature. The GSM Forcing Feature dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters related to the GSM Forcing Feature dialog box, see 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM. Step 2 Select an MS from the Device drop-down list. The ARFCNs of the current serving cell of the selected MS are displayed in Serving ARFCN. Step 3 Choose the forcing feature. If You Need To ...

Then ...

Perform the forcing handover

1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select Force HO (Dedicated) from the Function Select area. 3. Select Input ARFCN from the Target ARFCN Setting area. Then, enter the ARFCN in Target ARFCN or select Select Neighbor to select the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.

Perform the forbid handover

1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select Forbid HO (Dedicated) from the Function Select area.

11-10


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



If You Need To ...

Then ...

Control a band

1. Select Band Control. 2. Select a band from the Band Setting area.

Control the specified ARFCN

1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select Lock Specific ARFCN (Idle) from the Function Select area. 3. Select Input ARFCN from the Target ARFCN Setting area. Then, enter the ARFCN in Target ARFCN or select Select Neighbor to select the ARFCN of a neighboring cell.

Control the ARFCN of the serving cell 1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select Lock Serving ARFCN (Idle) from the Function Select area. Invert the CBA

1. Select Forcing Function. 2. Select CBA Invert from the Function Select area.

NOTE

l For the forcing handover, if the entered or selected ARFCN is not the ARFCN of a neighboring cell, the forcing handover fails. l If the specified ARFCN or the ARFCN of a serving cell is controlled successfully, the cell reselection is not performed on the MS in idle state until the MS is in non-dedicated state.

Step 4 Click Apply. The forcing feature is performed on the MS. Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire MS State. The latest forcing feature state of the MS is displayed in the MS Current State area. ----End

Related References 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM

11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test The WCDMA forcing function involves locking the specified UARFCN and locking scramble codes. When locking frequencies or scramble codes, the test terminal must be in idle mode.

Prerequisite Test terminals are connected, and the Probe can enable the test terminals. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


11-11



Context After the UARFCN is locked successfully, the test terminal can perform cell reselection or cell handover only in the cell that uses the locked UARFCN. The cell reselection or cell handover cannot be performed in the cell that spans UARFCN. When a scrambling code is locked, the corresponding UARFCN needs to be locked at the same time. After the scrambling code is locked successfully, the test terminal is not allowed to perform cell reselection or cell handover.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > WCDMA Forcing Feature. The WCDMA Forcing Feature dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test. Step 2 Select a test terminal in the Device Select drop-down list. Step 3 Select the forcing feature. If ...

Then ...

Lock the specified UARFCN 1. Choose Lock ARFCN. 2. Enter a UARFCN that exists on the current network in the Target ARFCN area. If the entered UARFCN does not exist on or covered by the current network, the UARFCN cannot be locked. Lock the scrambling code

1. Choose Lock ARFCN&PSC. 2. Select the mode for obtaining a scrambling code. l If you choose Select PSC, select a scrambling code among the scrambling codes under the current UARFCN. l If you choose Input PSC, enter a UARFCN that exists on the current network in the Target ARFCN area, and then enter the scrambling code in the Input PSC text box.

Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the test terminal performs the forcing feature test. You can click Default to recover the terminal status. Step 5 Optional: Click Inquire UE State. Then, the latest forcing feature status of the test terminal is displayed in the UE Current State area. ----End

Related References 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test

11-12


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test This section describes how to perform the LTE forcing function test. The LTE forcing functions consist of locking network, frequency band, cells, turning over the cell bar access (CBA), and locking the transmit power of the PUSCH.

Prerequisite The Probe is connected with UEs, and the UEs can be enabled by the Probe. For details, see 7.4 Enabling External Devices.

Context l

Locking the network According to the mobile country code (MCC) and mobile network code (MNC), the UE camps on a specific PLMN after the network is locked.

l

Locking EARFCN and band After the EARFCN is locked in idle state, the system automatically prohibits the handover if the UE originates a call. In such a case, the UE remains on the destination EARFCN. After the band is locked in idle state, the band is locked in dedicated state. In such a case, the system filters the neighboring cells of the non-destination band.

l

Locking a cell According to the EARFCN and physical cell identity (PCI), the UE camps on a specific serving cell after a cell is locked.

l

Turning over the CBA The CBA is a parameter configured for the LTE system to control whether the UE is allowed to access a cell. When the cell is under construction, the CBA value indicates that the common subscriber cannot access the cell. In this case, the UE can access this cell through the CBA turn-over function to verify the functions of this cell.

l

Locking the transmit power of the PUSCH According to the transmit power of the PUSCH within the specified range, perform the related operations. Then, the UE uses the constant transmit power to transmit signals and the power control function does not take effect. In this case, the cell performance can be evaluated.

Procedure Step 1 Choose Test > Forcing Function > LTE Forcing Feature. The LTE Forcing Feature dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box, see 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM. Step 2 Select a UE from the Device drop-down list. The EARFCN of the serving cell that the UE camps on is displayed in Serving ARFCN. The PCI of the serving cell is displayed in Serving PCI. Step 3 Select the forcing feature. For details about the parameters, see 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


11-13



Step 4 Click Apply. Then, the UE performs the forcing feature test. The latest forcing feature status of the UE is displayed in the MS Current State area. Click Reset. Then, the UE status is recovered. ----End

Related References 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test

11.3 IP Analysis The Probe obtains the raw data packets of data service tests through the WinPcap tool and then obtains the information about the transport layer protocols and the network layer protocols through the IP analysis.

Prerequisite l

The WinPcap tool is already installed on the PC.

l

The Network Monitor Driver protocol components are already installed. If the Network Monitor Driver protocol components are not installed, the network protocol analysis cannot be performed. The method for installing the Network Monitor Driver protocol components is as follows:

l

1.

Right-click Local Area Connection and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

2.

Choose Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) on the General tab page. Then, click Install.

3.

Double-click Protocol in the Select Network Component Type dialog box.

4.

Select Network Monitor Driver in the Select Network Protocol dialog box.

5.

Click OK. The installation is complete.

The test plan related to the data services is already configured on the Probe. For details, see 8.4 Designing Test Plans.

Context The Probe supports the analysis of the following network protocols: l

Transport layer protocols: Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP)

l

Network layer protocols: Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) and Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)

The Probe disables the IP analysis function by default.

Procedure Step 1 Enable the IP analysis function. 1.

11-14

Choose Configuration > System Configure. The System Configure dialog box is displayed. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



2.

Click

. The IP Settings dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select On in Packet Capture to enable the IP analysis function. Off indicates that the IP analysis function is disabled.

4.

Click OK.

Step 2 Execute the configured test plan. For details, see 8.5 Performing a Test Plan. Step 3 View the information about the protocols used by data packets. Choose View > Message > IP Messages. l Time: indicates the time for reporting data packets. l Source: indicates the source IP address. l Destination: indicates the destination IP address. l Protocol: indicates the used protocols. l Info: indicates the information about data packets. ----End

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


11-15


12 Interface Reference of the Probe

12

Interface Reference of the Probe

About This Chapter This describes the interface and parameters of the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect, view, and replay the data through the Probe. 12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window This describes the Test Plan Control window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window This describes the Engineering Parameter management window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window This describes the OutdoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window This describes the IndoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View This describes the test data view. You can learn the mode in which the Probe displays the data. 12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View This describes the Line Chart window and helps you understand the window components, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. 12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices This section describes the parameters for configuring external devices. You can refer to this section when configuring parameters for a test terminal, a GPS, or a scanner. 12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data This describes the parameters for filtering the original data in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you configure whether to report or collect the signaling on a test terminal. 12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-1



This describes the parameters for configuring the test items and attributes of the MS and scanner. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the MS or scanner test plan in the Test Plan Control window. 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test This describes the parameters for monitoring the test. During the test or replay, you can refer to these parameters when you query the status and statistics value of each test item in the test plan in the Test Plan Control window. 12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters This describes the parameters for importing the engineering parameters. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters. 12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map This describes the parameters for importing the outdoor raster map. You can refer to these parameters when you import the outdoor raster map or add the outdoor raster map. 12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties This describes the parameters for configuring the legend properties of the IE layer and layer offset properties. You can refer to the description when configuring the legend properties of the IE layer in the Layer Parameter dialog box or configuring the layer offset properties in the Layer Offset dialog box. 12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties This describes the parameters for configuring the layer control properties, such as layer display properties and layer label properties. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the layer display properties in the Layer Control dialog box. 12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event This describes the proprieties of the predefined event. You can refer to these parameters when you set the properties of the predefined event in the System Configure dialog box. 12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm This describes the parameters for configuring the device alarm. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the device alarm in the System Configure dialog box. 12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications This describes the parameters about setting audio indications for IEs. You can set related parameters according to the following information when configuring audio indications for IEs. 12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings This describes the parameters related to other system settings. You can refer to this part when synchronizing the external device time, setting logfile storage properties, or setting event replay mode. 12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the list view. You can refer to the description when configuring the properties of the list view. 12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the line chart view. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the properties of the line chart view. 12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM This describes the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM. You can refer to this part when setting the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM in the GSM Forcing Feature dialog box. 12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test 12-2


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



This describes the parameters related to the WCDMA forcing feature test. You can refer to this part when setting WCDMA forcing feature test parameters in the WCDMA Forcing Feature dialog box. 12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test This section describes the parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test. You can set parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box by referring to this section. 12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM This describes the parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM. You can refer to this part when setting parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM in the GSM C/A Setting dialog box. 12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data This describes the parameters for exporting data. You can refer to this part when converting a .gen file to the file in other formats or converting a .phu file to a .gen file. 12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner This describes the parameters for configuring the export format of the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner. You can refer to this part when exporting the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-3



12.1 Interface Description: Test Plan Control Window This describes the Test Plan Control window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-1 shows the Test Plan Control window and Table 12-1 provides the description of the Figure 12-1. Figure 12-1 Test Plan Control window

Table 12-1 Description of the Test Plan Control window

12-4

No.

Name

Description

1

Toolbar for Controlling the Test Plan

Provides the shortcut icon for editing the test item and controlling the test plan.

2

Test item list

Provides the default test item. You can select the test item according to requirements.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



No.

Name

Description

3

Attribute and statistics value list

Contains the Config and Statistic tab pages. l Config tab page: You can set the properties of each test item. l Statistic tab page: Displays the statistics value of the test item that is performed. For detailed description of the parameters, see 12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test.

4

List of the test item that is performed

Displays the test item that is performed.

Toolbar for Controlling the Test Plan You can edit the test item and control the test plan by clicking the corresponding icons. Table 12-2 shows the toolbar. Table 12-2 Description of the Test Plan Control window toolbar Icon

Name

Description

Importing the test plan

Enables you to open a configured test plan (in .xml format).

Exporting the test plan

Enables you to save a configured test plan (in .xml format).

Starting the test plan

Enables you to start performing the test item configured in the test plan.

Stopping the test plan

Enables you to stop all the test items that are being performed.

Moving the test item upward

Enables you to move the selected test item upward.

Moving the test item downward

Enables you to move the selected test item downward.

Deleting

Enables you to delete the selected test item.

Related Tasks 8.4 Designing Test Plans

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-5



12.2 Interface Description: Engineering Parameter management Window This describes the Engineering Parameter management window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-2 shows the Engineering Parameter management window. Table 12-3 provides the description of the Figure 12-2. Figure 12-2 Engineering Parameter management window

Table 12-3 Description of the Engineering Parameter management window

12-6

No.

Name

Description

1

Engineering Parameter toolbar

Provides shortcut icons for importing, exporting, adding, and deleting a row.

2

Field name of the engineering parameter

Displays the field name of the engineering parameter.

3

Engineering parameter list

Displays the value corresponding to each field name of the engineering parameter.

4

Status bar of the engineering parameter

Displays the network protocol corresponding to the imported engineering parameter.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Engineering Parameter Toolbar The engineering parameter toolbar is in the upper areal of the Engineering Parameter management window. The icon description is provided in Table 12-4. Table 12-4 Toolbar description of the Engineering Parameter management window Icon

Name

Description

Importing the engineering parameter

Enables you to import the engineering parameter. You can click the icon to open the Select File dialog box. For detailed description about the parameter, see 12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters.

Exporting the engineering parameter

Enables you to export the engineering parameter. After you click the icon, the xls or xlsx file is opened automatically. If the engineering parameters of multiple network protocols exist, the xls or xlsx file contains multiple sheets whose names are corresponding to the network protocols displayed in the status bar of the Engineering Parameter management dialog box.

Application

Enables you to make the editing operation to take effect. You can click the icon to apply the editing result to the file of the current engineer parameter.

Adding a row

Enables you to add a row in the sheet. You can click the icon to add a row in the engineer parameter sheet.

Checking the templates of engineering parameters

Enables you to view engineering parameter templates of different networks in the default path provided by the Probe. You can modify the format of the current engineering parameter table based on the project reference template to ensure that the format of the engineering parameter table meets the requirements of the Probe. The default path is as follows: Software Installation Directory \Template\Engineering Parameters.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-7



Icon

Name

Description

Deleting a row

Enables you to delete a row. You can click the icon to delete a row where the selected engineer parameter is located.

Related Tasks 6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters

12.3 Interface Description: OutdoorMap Window This describes the OutdoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-3 shows the OutdoorMap window. Table 12-5 provides the description of the Figure 12-3. Figure 12-3 OutdoorMap window

12-8


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Table 12-5 Description of the OutdoorMap window No.

Name

Description

1

Outdoor map toolbar

Provides the shortcut icons for common outdoor map operations.

2

Displaying area of the outdoor map

Displays the outdoor map imported, event occurred, and drive test route.

3

Map Layers window

Indicates the layer management window that provides the operation entry for the layer management of the device layer and air interface parameters.

4

Outdoor map status bar

Displays the longitude and latitude of the current position and distance of the test points on the map.

Outdoor Map Toolbar The OutdoorMap window provides the entry for common outdoor map operations. You can open the related window or perform related operations by clicking certain icons. For the description of the toolbar, see Table 12-6. Table 12-6 Description of the OutdoorMap window toolbar Icon

Map Shortcut Menu

Name

Description

-

Opening the MapInfo map

Enables you to open the MapInfo map. The extension is .tab or .gst.

-

Saving a map

Enables you to save the map to a .gst file.

-

Opening the raster map

Enables you to open the raster map. The extension is .tif, .bmp, .jpg, .gif, or .png.

Layer Control

Layer control

Enables you to manage layers or change displaying or labeling properties. For details, see 5.4 Configuring Layer Properties. Changes are only temporary and cannot be saved in the project.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-9



Icon

Map Shortcut Menu

Name

Description

-

Cell search

Searches for the information about a specified cell on the map. Currently, only the GSM and WCDMA network systems are supported. Search results are valid only engineering parameters are used.

12-10

Tools > Zoom In

Zooming in

Enables you to enlarge a portion of the map to view it in more detail.

Tools > Zoom Out

Zooming out

Enables you to view a larger area than the current map view.

Tools > Zoom

Zooming in or out

Enables you to zoom in or out in an area on the map. Clicking the map and then dragging the mouse rightward indicates zooming in on the map; clicking the map and then dragging the mouse leftward indicates zooming out on the map.

Tools > Pan

Moving the map

Enables you to move the map. You can click the map and hold down the mouse to move the map.

Tools > Center

Center map

Enables you to set any point on the map as the center. You can click the icon and then click a spot on the map. The map is centered around the spot.

Tools > Center

Selection tool

Enables you to select the object contained in the current layer. You can select multiple objects by holding down Ctrl.

Tools > Rectangle Select

Rectangle selection tool

Enables you to select all the objects in a rectangle. You can click the map and move the mouse to form a rectangle area.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Icon

Map Shortcut Menu

Name

Description

Tools > Distance

Ruler

Enables you to measure the distance between two points on the map. You can click a point on the map as the starting point and drag the mouse to any direction. The system displays the distance from the starting point to the point where the mouse stops on the status bar at the bottom of the outdoor map window.

Entire Map

Viewing

Enables you to view the map. You can open the Zoom to dialog box to selectively zoom out the selected layer.

Tools > Arrow

Arrow tool

Displays a position in the map. You can move the mouse to the position where you are interested in. Then, the name of the position is displayed.

-

Drawing a grid

Displays the grid and legend of a map.

-

Label

Enables you to label the engineering parameters on the map.

-

Clearing the map

Enables you to clear the IE or track information in the current map layer. The cell site information is not cleared.

Map Layers Window The Map Layers window is in the right pane of the OutdoorMap window. You can right-click the map and choose Layer Bar to configure whether to display the Map Layers window. Figure 12-4 shows the Map Layers window and Table 12-7 provides the description of Figure 12-4.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-11



Figure 12-4 Map Layers window

Table 12-7 Description of the Map Layers window

12-12

No.

Name

1

Layer toolbar

Icon

Map Shortcut Menu

Description

Add Layer

Enables you to add the air interface parameter layer. You can click the icon to open the Add Layer dialog box to add the air interface parameter layer.

Remove Layer

Enables you to remove a selected layer. After you click the icon, the layer node in the Map Layers window is deleted. In addition, the data that displays the layer on the map is deleted.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



No.

Name

Icon

Map Shortcut Menu

Description

Edit Layer

Enables you to edit the layer properties. You can click the icon to open the Layer Parameter dialog box to edit the layer properties. For details, see 5.5 Configuring Legend Properties.

2

Area of editing the layer

-

-

Enables you to edit the added layer.

Related Tasks 5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps

12.4 Interface Description: IndoorMap Window This describes the IndoorMap window and helps you understand the window component, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-5 shows the IndoorMap window. Table 12-8 provides the description of the Figure 12-5. Figure 12-5 IndoorMap window

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-13



Table 12-8 Description of the IndoorMap window No.

Name

Description

1

Indoor map toolbar

Provides the shortcut icons for common indoor map operations.

2

Displaying the display area of the indoor map

Displays the indoor map imported, event occurred, and drive test route.

3

Map Layers window

Indicates the layer management window that provides the operation entry for the layer management of air interface parameters.

Indoor Map Toolbar The IndoorMap window provides the entry for common map operations. You can open the related window or perform related operations by click certain icons. For the detailed description of the toolbar, see Table 12-9. Table 12-9 Description of the IndoorMap window toolbar Icon

12-14

Map Shortcut Menu

Name

Description

-

Opening the raster map

Enables you to open the grid map (the extension is .tif or .bmp.)

Localizer

Locating the point manually

-

Zoom In

Zooming in

Enables you to zoom in on the map.

Zoom Out

Zooming out

Enables you to zoom out on the map.

Pan

Zooming in or out

Enables you to zoom in or out in an area on the map. Clicking the map and then dragging the mouse rightward indicates zooming in on the map; clicking the map and then dragging the mouse rightward indicates zooming out on the map.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Icon

Map Shortcut Menu

Name

Description

Arrow

Arrow tool

Displays a position in the map. You can move the mouse to the position where you are interested in, and then the name of the position is displayed.

-

Viewing

Enables you to selectively zoom out the selected layer.

Undo

Undoing the last operation

Enables you to cancel the previous operations of locating the points. This tool is enabled to the drive test mode.

-

Clearing the map

Enables you to clear the IE or track information in the current map layer. During a horizontal test, the IE information and track information can be cleared when the tracks of points are controlled manually. When the tracks of points are controlled automatically, that is, the test is performed according to the predefined tracks, only IE information is cleared, and the track information is not cleared.

Map Layers Window The Map Layers window is in the right pane of IndoorMap. You can right-click the map and choose Layer Bar to configure whether to display the window. Figure 12-6 shows the Map Layers window. Table 12-10 provides the description of the Figure 12-6.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-15



Figure 12-6 Map Layers window

Table 12-10 Description of the Map Layers window No.

Name

1

Layer toolbar

Icon

Description Enables you to add the air interface parameter layer. Enables you to delete the layer. After you click the icon, the layer node in the Map Layers window is deleted. In addition, the data that displays the layer on the map is deleted. You can click the icon to add the layer that is deleted. Enables you to edit the layer properties. You can click the icon to open the Layer Parameter dialog box to edit the layer properties. For details, see5.5 Configuring Legend Properties.

2

Area of editing the layer

-

Displays the name of the layer that is added and configures whether to display the layer on the map.

Related Tasks 5.2.2 Importing Indoor Test Maps

12-16


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



12.5 Interface Description: Test Data View This describes the test data view. You can learn the mode in which the Probe displays the data. Figure 12-7 shows the test data view of the Probe. Table 12-11 shows the description of Figure 12-7. NOTE

Take the BA List, Radio Parameter, Information, and Power views as examples.

Figure 12-7 Interface of the test data view

Table 12-11 Description of the test data view

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

View Name

View Type

Description

BA List view

List view

Displays test data in tables.

Power view

Chart view

Displays test data in charts.

Radio Parameter view

Mixed view

Displays the changed value of each parameter directly by using the combination chart and list view.


12-17



View Name

View Type

Description

Information view

Plain text view

Displays the basic information about the logfile, the event information, and the statistics of events and KPIs in the logfile.

Related Tasks 10.2 Browsing Data 10.3.2 Configuring the List View 10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View 10.3.4 Configuring the Plain Text View

12.6 Interface Description: Line Chart View This describes the Line Chart window and helps you understand the window components, the function of each component, and the function of the shortcut icon. Figure 12-8 shows the Line Chart window. Table 12-12 provides the description of the Figure 12-8. Figure 12-8 Line Chart window

12-18


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Table 12-12 Description of the Line Chart window No.

Name

Description

1

Chart display area

Displays the IE information of each chart in a line chart or bar chart.

2

Axis display area

Displays the value range and color of the selected IE in the axes of each chart. You can change the properties of the IE through the shortcut menu in the view window. For the description of the shortcut menu, see 12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View.

3

Scroll bar of the chart display area

l If you click , the scroll bar moves leftwards by one second, and the data presented one second ago is displayed in the view. l If you click , the scroll bar moves rightwards by one second, and the data presented one second later is displayed in the view. and , the scroll l If you click the blank area between bar moves leftwards by one page, and the data presented 60 seconds ago is displayed in the view. l If you click the blank area between and , the scroll bar moves rightwards by one page, and the data presented 60 seconds later is displayed in the view. l If you click Lock, the system status is changed to UnLock. In this case, you can drag to check the data of the specific position. If you click UnLock again, the system status is changed to Lock. The Probe resumes the test or replay.

4

Legend area

Legend of an IE. You can double-click the name of an IE to change its properties.

5

Text display area

IE information displayed in text format, which consists of the IE name, value, and the name of the corresponding terminal.

Related Tasks 10.2 Browsing Data 10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View

12.7 Parameters for Configuring External Devices This section describes the parameters for configuring external devices. You can refer to this section when configuring parameters for a test terminal, a GPS, or a scanner.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-19



Parameters in the Device Configure Window Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of the added device.

Model

Indicates the model of the added device.

COMPort

Indicates the COM port of the added device.

ModemPort

Indicates the modem port number of the added device. If Modem port is not configured in the Device Configure dialog box, Not Configure is displayed.

State

Indicates the current state of the added device. l Down: The device is added but not connected. l Searching: The system is searching for the port corresponding to the device. l Disconnect: The device is disconnected. l Connected: The device is connected.

Common Parameters for Configuring External Devices Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of the external device. The system names the added device automatically and displays the name.

Type

Indicates device types. The options are as follows: l MS l GPS l Scanner

Model

Indicates the model of the external device. For the type and specifications of the external devices that are supported by the Probe, see 7.1 Connectable External Devices.

Parameters for Configuring GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA Test Terminals

12-20

Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of the currently added test terminal.

Type

Indicates the type of the currently added device: MS.

Model

Indicates the actual model of the MS. For the models of the test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Baud rate

Indicates the baud rate of the MS. It must be the same as the actual setting of the MS. The options are 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 128000, 230400, 256000, 460800, and 921600.

COM port

Indicates the actual COM port used by the MS after the MS is connected to the PC. You can view the actual port number of the MS under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window.

Modem port

Indicates the actual modem port used by the MS after the MS is connected to the PC. In the Device Manager window, right-click the corresponding device under the Modem node, and then select Properties. You can view the actual modem port number on the Modem tab page. If you want to perform a data service test or send AT commands, Modem port must be set. In other cases, Modem port need not be set.

Adjust antenna

Indicates the antenna gain of the MS. Only the GSM and WCDMA modes are supported. You can select either of the following values: l Disable: not set the antenna gain of the MS. l Enable: set the antenna gain of the MS. If you select Enable, you can set the antenna gain in the displayed UE External Antenna Setting dialog box. The value ranges from 1 to 100 and can be a decimal. The default value is Disable. CAUTION For the MS to which an external antenna is connected, you can set the antenna gain as required. For the MS to which an external antenna is not connected, if you set the antenna gain, the accuracy of counters such as the Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), Received Signal Level (RxLev), or Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) may be affected. Therefore, you are advised to select Disable.

Parameters for Configuring the WiMAX Test Terminal

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of the currently added MS.

Type


Model

Indicates the model of the WiMAX test terminal. For the models of the test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.


12-21



Parameter

Description

TE

Indicates the terminal that is connected to the PC. l WiMAX_GCT: Four GCT terminals can be configured. l WiMAX_Runcom: Only one terminal can be configured.

Card Index

Indicates the index of the terminal. The system allocates one index according to the selected TE. The index is allocated from 1.

Parameters for Configuring the LTE Test Terminal Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of the currently added MS.

Type


Model

Indicates the model of the LTE test terminal. For the models of the test terminals that are supported by the Probe, see Test Terminal.

OMAGENT IP address

Indicates the IP address of a PC that is connected to an LTE UE 1.X terminal. For LTE UE 2.0 terminals, this parameter is not required.

OMAGENT port

Indicates the port corresponding to OMAGENT IP address. You need not set this parameter manually. The default value, 3000, is recommended.

UE IP address

Query the IP address of the host through the HyperTerminal provided by the Windows operating system. For details, see 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?.

UE port

Indicates the port corresponding to UE IP address. You do not need to set this parameter manually. The default value, 5000, is recommended.

Parameters for Configuring the GPS

12-22

Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of the currently added GPS.

Type

Indicates the type of the currently added device: GPS.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Model

Indicates the protocol used for the communication with the configured GPS. You can select NMEA or TEXT. NMEA is the GPS protocol that is used internationally. TEXT is the protocol provided by GARMIN, and only support the GPS of the GARMIN series such as 12XL and Vista. NOTE If you select TEXT, you need to change the default output format of the GPS to TEXT.

For the GPS models supported by the Probe, see GPS. Baud rate

Indicates the baud rate of the GPS. The options are 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 38400, 56000, 57600, 115200, 128000, 230400, 256000, 460800, and 921600.

COM port

Indicates the actual COM port used by a GPS after the GPS is connected to the PC. You can view the actual port number of the GPS under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window.

Parameters for Configuring Scanners Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of the currently added scanner.

Type

Indicates the type of the currently added device: Scanner.

Model

Indicates the model of a scanner. Note that PCTEL EX scanners support multi-mode tests and multi-band tests. For the scanner models supported by the Probe, see Scanner.

COM port

Indicates the actual COM port used by the scanner after the scanner is connected to the PC. You can view the actual port number of the scanner under the Ports (COM & LPT) node in the Device Manager window.

Protocol

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Indicates the protocol that is supported by the connected scanner.


12-23



Parameter

Description

Band

Indicates the frequency band that is supported by the connected scanner. l GSM GSM850 (869 MHz to 894 MHz), E-GSM (925 MHz to 960 MHz), DCS1800 (1805 MHz to 1880 MHz), and PCS 1900 (1930 MHz to 1990 MHz). l WCDMA Band I DL (2110.0 MHz to 2170.0 MHz), Band I UL (1920.0 MHz to 1980.0 MHz), Band II (1930.0 MHz to 1990.0 MHz), Band III (1805.0 MHz to 1880.0 MHz), Band IV (2110.0 MHz to 2155.0 MHz), Band V (869.0 MHz to 894.0 MHz), and Band VIII (925.0 MHz to 960.0 MHz). l CDMA Band 0 (869.61 MHz to 893.40 MHz), Band 0 (860.64 MHz to 874.38 MHz), Band 1 (1930.65 MHz to 1989.35 MHz), Band 3 (860.6375 MHz to 869.3625 MHz), and BAND 5 (461.95 MHz to 466.85 MHz). l WiMAX 2.5 GHz (2498.50 MHz to 2687.50 MHz) and 3.5 GHz (3402.50 MHz to 3597.50 MHz).

Instance

Indicates the interface number that is used by the scanner of the Anritsu ML874X series (for example, ML8740 or ML8742) after the scanner is connected to the PC. You need to select an interface number that is not used by another scanner. If the scanner of the Anritsu ML874X series is not connected to the PC, select Not Configure.

1394

Indicates the interface number that is used by the scanner of the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX series after the scanner is connected to the PC. You need to select an interface number that is not used by another scanner. If only one TSMX scanner is connected, select 1. If the scanner of the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX series is not connected to the PC, select Not Configure.

12-24


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Adjust antenna

Indicates the antenna gain of the scanner. Only the scanners of the PCTel SeeGull LX series and the EX series are supported. You can select either of the following values: l Disable: not set the antenna gain of the scanner. l Enable: set the antenna gain of the scanner. If you select Enable, you can set the antenna gain in the displayed Scanner External Antenna Setting dialog box. The Probe may automatically compensate the antenna or cable loss of the scanner. The default value is Disable. CAUTION For the scanner to which an external antenna is connected, you can set the antenna gain as required. For the scanner to which an external antenna is not connected, if you set the antenna gain, the accuracy of indicators such as the RSSI, RxLev, or RSCP may be affected. Therefore, you are advised to select Disable.

Related Tasks 7.3 Configuring External Devices

12.8 Parameters for Filtering the Original Data This describes the parameters for filtering the original data in the Filter dialog box. You can refer to these parameters when you configure whether to report or collect the signaling on a test terminal. Parameter

Description

LogCode

Displays the name of the data package.

Select

Indicates that whether the test terminal reports the data package.

Filter

Indicates the mode that the Probe adopts to collect data packages: l No Filter: The Probe collects all the data packages reported by the terminal. l By Periods: The Probe collects the data packages reported by the terminal periodically. l All Filter: The Probe does not collect the data packages reported by the terminal.

Interval

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Indicates the sampling interval. The Probe collects data packets at the sampling intervals set here. Redundant data packets are discarded.


12-25



Related Tasks 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected

12.9 Parameters for Configuring the Test Items This describes the parameters for configuring the test items and attributes of the MS and scanner. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the MS or scanner test plan in the Test Plan Control window. Parameter

Description

Adds the parameters of the test item. Name

Displays the selected test item.

Status

Displays the current status of the test item. l Ready: Indicates the ready status. l Testing: Indicates the testing status. l Finish: Indicates the finish status.

Progress

Displays the count for which the test item is performed. The format is n/N. n indicates the count for which a test item is currently performed and N indicates the total count for which a test item is performed.

Parameters for setting the properties of the added test item. Property

Displays the property name of the test item.

Value

Enables you to set values of the Property.


12.10 Parameters for Monitoring the Test This describes the parameters for monitoring the test. During the test or replay, you can refer to these parameters when you query the status and statistics value of each test item in the test plan in the Test Plan Control window.

Parameters for Monitoring the Test The list for monitoring the test is in the lower pane of the Test Plan Control window to display the status of the test item.

12-26

Parameter

Description

Time

Displays the time for performing the current test item. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Name

Displays the name of the test item that is currently performed.

Info

Displays the status of the test item that is currently performed, containing begin, failure, and success.

Parameter Description of the Statistic Tab Page The Statistic tab is in the right pane of the Test Plan Control window to display the statistics value of the test item. Parameter

Description

Type

Displays the statistics type defined by the system. l Total Count: Indicates the total count for which the current test item is performed. l Success Count: Indicates the count for which the current test item is successfully performed. l Failure Count: Indicates the count for which the current test item fails to be performed. l Success Rate: Indicates the percentage of the count for which the current test item is performed to the total count for which the current test item is performed. Displays the statistics result of the test item that is currently performed.

Value

Related Tasks 8.5.4 Monitoring the Test

12.11 Parameters for Importing the Engineering Parameters This describes the parameters for importing the engineering parameters. You can refer to these parameters when you import the engineering parameters.

Parameters in the Select File Dialog Box

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Parameter

Description

Engineering parameter file

Enables you to choose the required engineering parameter file in xls, xlsx, or csv format.

Select Protocol

Enables you to select the network protocol corresponding to the engineering parameter, including GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, and LTE.


12-27



Parameter

Description

Config Neighboring Cell

Indicates whether to configure the neighboring cell parameters. l Horizontal: indicates the horizontal neighboring cell The engineering parameter fields of the serving cell and the cell fields are in the same line of the same table. Horizontal neighboring cells support only the GSM network system. In this case, engineering parameter fields contain neighboring cell fields. l Vertical: indicates the vertical neighboring cell Each line in the table indicates a neighboring cell relation. Vertical neighboring cells support the GSM, WCDMA, WiMAX, and LTE network systems. In this case, engineering parameter fields do not contain neighboring cell fields, and you need to import the corresponding engineering parameter when importing a neighboring cell.

Neighboring cell file

Enables you to choose the required vertical neighboring cell file.

Parameters in the Match Parameters Dialog Box

12-28

Parameter

Description

Select Sheet

Enables you to select the form where the project parameters are located.

Excel Param

Displays all the field names of the imported engineering parameter.

Probe Param

Displays the field name corresponding to the engineering parameters on the Probe.

Match

Enables you to match the field name in the form where the engineering parameters are located. You can select the row where the unmatched field is located, and then click Match to open the Match Data dialog box. Perform related matching operation. For the parameter description, see Parameters in the Match Data Dialog Box.

Cancel

Enables you to cancel the matching operation.

Customize

Enables you to customize the engineering parameters. You can click Customize to open the Customize Parameters dialog box. Perform related customizing operation. For the parameter description, see Parameters in the Customize Parameters Dialog Box.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameters in the Match Data Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Excel Parameter

Displays the selected field name in the Match Parameters that needs to be matched.

Param List

Displays the imported engineering parameters.

Parameters in the Customize Parameters Dialog Box Parameter Param List

Description Mandatory

Displays the mandatory field name of the engineering parameter. For the parameter description, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems.

Optional

Displays the optional field name of the engineering parameter. For the parameter description, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems.

Custom

Displays the customized field names of the engineering parameters.

Add

Enables you to add the customized field name.

Delete

Enables you to delete the customized field. You can choose the field under the Custom node. Click Delete to delete the customized field.

Related Tasks 6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters

12.12 Parameters for Importing the Outdoor Raster Map This describes the parameters for importing the outdoor raster map. You can refer to these parameters when you import the outdoor raster map or add the outdoor raster map.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Parameter

Description

Label

Indicates the name of the reference point.

Longitude

Indicates the longitude of the reference point. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-29



Parameter

Description

Latitude

Indicates the latitude of the reference point.

PixelX

Indicates the X coordinate value of the reference point. The range is the range of the pixel point of the imported raster map.

PixelY

Indicates the Y coordinate value of the reference point. The range is the range of the pixel point of the imported raster map.

Related Tasks 5.2.1 Importing Outdoor Test Maps

12.13 Parameters for Configuring the Legend Properties This describes the parameters for configuring the legend properties of the IE layer and layer offset properties. You can refer to the description when configuring the legend properties of the IE layer in the Layer Parameter dialog box or configuring the layer offset properties in the Layer Offset dialog box.

Parameters of the Layer Parameter Dialog Box Parameter Range List

12-30

Description Interval

Displays the range within which the legend is configured.

Symbol

Displays the symbol whose legend is configured.

Add

Enables you to add the legend. You can click the icon to open the Add Color Range dialog box to add the legend. For detailed description of the parameter, see Parameters for Editing the Legend Attributes.

Edit

Enables you to set the legend properties. You can click the icon to open the Edit Color Range dialog box to configure the properties for the legend that is selected. For detailed description of the parameters, see Parameters for Editing the Legend Attributes.

Remove

Enables you to remove a selected legend.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description Auto Setup

Enables you to set the color of the legend. You can click the icon to open the Color Range Auto Setup dialog box to configure the number of color ranges of the legend in Interval.

Parameters for Editing the Legend Attributes Parameter

Description

Start

Enables you to set the start value of the legend.

End

Enables you to set the end value of the legend.

Symbol

Font

Enables you to set the font of the legend.

Size

Enables you to set the size of the legend.

Shape

Enables you to set the shape of the legend.

Color

Enables you to set the color of the legend.

Example

Displays the example whose legend is configured.

Parameters for Configuring the Layer Offset Parameter

Description

X(m)

Indicates the distance (m) of the layer offset to the total length of the map.

Y(m)

Indicates the distance (m) of the layer offset to the total width of the map.

Lock X and Y

Indicates whether to zoom in or zoom out the map.

Related Tasks 5.5 Configuring Legend Properties

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-31



12.14 Parameters for Configuring the Layer Control Properties This describes the parameters for configuring the layer control properties, such as layer display properties and layer label properties. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the layer display properties in the Layer Control dialog box.

Parameters of the Layer Control Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Up

Enables you to move a selected layer upwards on the map.

Down

Enables you to move a selected layer downwards on the map.

Add

Enables you to add a layer above a selected layer. You can click Add, select a .tab file in the displayed dialog box, and then click Open.

Remove

Enables you to remove a selected layer.

Visible

Enables you to set whether the selected layer is visible.

Selectable

Enables you to set whether the selected layer is selectable.

Automatic Labels

Enables you to set whether the label of the selected layer is visible. If the label of the selected layer is visible, the layer must also be visible, that is, if you select Automatic Labels, you must select Visible at the same time.

Editable

Enables you to set whether the selected layer can be edited.

Display

Enables you to set the properties of the layer. In the Layers area, select a layer, and then click Display. The Display Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the display properties of the selected layer. For the description of the parameters, see Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog Box.

Labels

Enables you to set the label properties of the layer. In the Layers area, select a layer, and then click Labels. The Label Properties dialog box is displayed. Set the label properties of the selected layer. For the description of the parameters, see Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box.

12-32


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameters of the Display Properties Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Override style

Indicates whether to change the style of the selected layer. The style of a layer consists of areas, lines, symbols, and texts.

Zoom Layering

Display Within Zoom Range

Indicates whether to display map layer within the zooming range (Min Zoom to Max Zoom).

Min Zoom

Indicates the minimum zoom range. You can set the maximum zooming range after selecting Display Within Zoom Range.

Max Zoom

Indicates the maximum zoom range. You can set the maximum zooming range after selecting Display Within Zoom Range.

Parameters of the Label Properties Dialog Box Parameter

Description

Label with

Visibility

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

DataSet

Indicates the data contained in the selected layer.

Field

Indicates the label field list.

Display within Range

Whether to display layer within the zoom range (Min Zoom to Max Zoom).

Min Zoom

Indicates the minimum zooming range. You can set the maximum zooming range after selecting Display Within Zoom Range.

Max Zoom

Indicates the maximum zooming range. You can set the maximum zooming range after selecting Display Within Zoom Range.

Allow Overlapped Text

Indicates whether to allow overlapped texts.

Allow Duplicated Text

Indicates whether to allow duplicated texts.

Label Partial Objects

Indicates whether to label the partial object.


12-33



Parameter

Description

Maximum labels

Indicates the maximum number of labeled objects.

Styles

Enables you to set the style of the label text. Label Lines

Enables you select the label lines.

None

Indicates that no label line exists.

Simple

Indicates the simple label line.

Arrow

Indicates the label line with the arrow. Enables you to set the corresponding line style.

Position

Orientation

Indicates the direction of the anchor point.

Rotation

Enables you to set the rotating direction.

None

Indicates no rotation.

Parallel to One Segment

Enables you to rotate a text to make its direction parallel to one line segment.

Parallel to Multiple Segments

Enables you to rotate a text to make its direction parallel to all the line segments.

Label Offset

Enables you to set rotation offset of the label.

12.15 Parameters for Setting the Predefined Event This describes the proprieties of the predefined event. You can refer to these parameters when you set the properties of the predefined event in the System Configure dialog box.

12-34

Parameter

Description

Mute all event sounds

Indicates whether to disable the sounds of all predefined events.

Language

Displays the voice type. The Probe supports English and Chinese.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Restore properties of all events

Enables you to restore the properties of the all predefined events. You can click Reset to restore.

Property

EventName

Displays the name of a selected predefined event.

Shown in EventList

Indicates whether to display a predefined event in the Event List view window. You can select True or False.

Shown in Map

Indicates whether to display a predefined event in the indoor map window or outdoor map window. You can select True or False.

Icon

Indicates the icon displayed on the map after a predefined event is selected.

Voice enabled

Indicates whether to play voice when a selected predefined event occurs. You can select True or False.

Voice

Indicates the voice file that is used during voice playing. The parameter is valid when Voice enabled is set to True.

Value

Enables you to set the value of Property.

12.16 Parameters for Configuring the Device Alarm This describes the parameters for configuring the device alarm. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the device alarm in the System Configure dialog box. Parameter

Description

Icon

Indicates the alarm icon displayed on the map.

AlarmName

Indicates the list of alarms, including MS Disconnection, GPS Disconnection, Scanner Disconnection, Inadequacy of GPS Signal, and No Signal.

Setup

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Alarm Name

Displays the name of the selected device alarm.

Language

Displays the voice type. The Probe supports English and Chinese.


12-35



Parameter

Description Alarm Type

Visual Alarm

Indicates whether to inform you of the alarm event by visual alarm.

Audio Alarm

Indicates whether to inform you of the alarm event by audio alarm.

Sound

Enables you to select the audio alarm. If you select the audio alarm, select Audio Alarm and selects a voice file. Then, the system automatically plays the voice file when an alarm of the device occurs.

Description

Displays the details about the selected alarm.

Related Tasks 7.6 Configuring Device Alarms

12.17 Parameters for Setting IE Audio Indications This describes the parameters about setting audio indications for IEs. You can set related parameters according to the following information when configuring audio indications for IEs. Parameter

Description

System

Enables you to select the network system.

Condition Setting

Audio Indication Setting

IE Name

Enables you to select the IE name.

Operator

Enables you to select the operator.

Value

Indicates the IE value, which must be within the value range of the IE.

Play

Indicates whether to play the IE audio indication during data test or replay.

Sound

Indicates the audio indication file.

12.18 Parameter for Other System Settings This describes the parameters related to other system settings. You can refer to this part when synchronizing the external device time, setting logfile storage properties, or setting event replay mode.

12-36


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Logfile Time Setting

Event Replay Mode

Logfile Setting

Synchronize PC Time with GPS Time

Indicates whether to synchronize the PC time with the GPS time.

Time zone

Enables you to select the time zone of the district where you are located. The range is GMT +12 to GMT -12. After you select Synchronize PC Timewith GPS Time, Time Zone becomes available, and you can set the time zone.

Normal Replay

Replays the events recorded in the logfile.

Rejudge Event

Rejudges the occurred events according to the signaling messages in the logfile during the replaying process.

Limit type

Indicates how to slice the logfile. The options are as follows: l No limit: not to slice the logfile l By time: to slice the logfile by time (in minutes), working with File size limit l By file size: to slice the logfile by file size (in MB), working with File size limit

File size limit

Indicates the size of the sliced logfile. It is recommended that the value of this field be equal to or larger than 10 MB.

File name

Indicates the name of a logfile. It is recommended that its name illustrate the meaning of the logfile.

File directory

Indicates the path where the logfile is stored. The default path is C:\GENEX Logfile. You can click File directory on the right of to change the path for storing the logfile. It is not recommended that the file be stored in the system disk.

Operating System Setting

TCP window size

Indicates the TCP window size, which ranges from 1 to 65535 bytes. You are recommended to validate the settings by restarting the PC after the settings are complete.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-37



Parameter

Description

Route File Setting

Autosave

Indicates whether to automatically save the GPS information (.tab file) when recording the logfile. You can select Yes or No.

Autosave period

You can set this parameter when Autosave is Yes. The parameter specifies the automatic save period, and the value ranges from 1 to 300. The default value is 3, and the unit is second.

Rout file directory

Indicates the storage path of the .tab file containing GPS information. The name of the .tab file containing GPS information is the same as that of the logfile. The default path is C:\GENEX Logfile. You can click Rout file directory on the to change the path for storing right of the logfile. It is not recommended that the file be stored in the system disk.

12.19 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the List Views This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the list view. You can refer to the description when configuring the properties of the list view. Tab

Parameter

Description

Mode

Title

Indicates the title of the table in the list view. It can be set based on the actual situation.

Header

Indicates the header of the table in the list view. Select Header to display the header and deselect Header to hide the header. The contents of the header can be set on the Cell Contents tab page.

12-38

GridLines

Indicates whether to display the grid lines.

Columns

Indicates the number of columns of the table in the list view.

Rows

Indicates the number of rows of the table in the list view.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Tab

Parameter

Description

Font

Indicates the fonts of the texts in the table in the list view. Click Browse to set fonts.

Device

Indicates the device list. If you select a device from Device, the IEs that are currently displayed in the view window are collected by the device. The contents of each IE can be set on the Cell Contents tab page.

Cell Contents

Edit

Used to edit the information about a selected IE. Select an IE, and then click Edit. Modify the information about the IE in the displayed IE Information dialog box.

Description of the parameters in the IE Information dialog box Contents

Device

Indicates the device list. If you select a device from Device, the IEs that are currently displayed in the view window are collected by the device.

System

Indicates the network protocol of an IE.

Information

Indicates the IE list.

Text

Specifies the name or value of an IE. If you select Text, you need not set the parameters on the View and Color tab pages.

View

Value

Specifies the value of an IE in the form of letters and numbers. You can adjust alignment modes such as Left, Center, and Right of the value.

Bar

Displays the value of an IE through a bar. The options are as follows: l Constant Length: Draw a bar with constant length. Only a limited number of IEs can be displayed. l Max/Min Indicate: Use a vertical line to indicate an all-time-low or all-time-high value.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-39



Tab

Parameter

Description

Color

Use Default Color Ranges

Indicates the default color ranges of an IE. If Use Default Color Ranges is selected, it indicates that the default values are used. If Use Default Color Ranges is deselected, it indicates that the default values are not used. You can customize the color range according to your requirements.

Related Tasks 10.3.2 Configuring the List View 10.3.3 Configuring the Chart View

12.20 Parameters for Configuring the Properties of the Line Chart View This describes the parameters for configuring the properties of the line chart view. You can refer to these parameters when you configure the properties of the line chart view.

Parameter of the Set Chart Properties dialog box Parameter

Description

Add

Enables you to add a view. Currently, you can add two views at most.

Edit

Enables you to set the properties of the IE in the selected view. Click this button to open the Modify Chart Properties dialog box. Then you can set the properties of the IE in the dialog box. For details about parameters, see Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box.

Delete

Enables you to delete the selected view.

Parameter of the Modify Chart Properties dialog box Parameter

Description

System

Network protocol of the IE. The IE matching System is displayed in the Available area. For details about the IE, see 14.3 Description of Information Elements.

Model

12-40

Displays the name of the configured terminal.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Edit IE

Enables you to edit the IE selected in the Selected area. You can set the maximum value, minimum value, color, and style of the IE.

Add all

Enables you to add all the IEs in the Available area to the Selected area.

Add

Enables you to add the IEs selected in the Available area to the Selected area.

Remove

Enables you to remove the IEs selected in the Selected area to the Available area.

Remove all

Enables you to remove all the IEs in the Selected area to the Available area.

Selected

Displays the added IEs.

Related Tasks 10.3.1 Configuring the Line Chart View

12.21 Parameters for Testing the Forcing Feature of the GSM This describes the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM. You can refer to this part when setting the parameters for testing the forcing function of the GSM in the GSM Forcing Feature dialog box. Parameter

Description

Device

Indicates the drop-down list of MSs. You can select only one MS from the drop-down list at a time.

Serving ARFCN

Indicates the ARFCN of the current serving cell.

Forcing Function

Indicates whether to use the forcing function of the GSM.

Function Select

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Lock Serving ARFCN (Idle)

Indicates that the ARFCN of the serving cell is locked in idle state.

Lock Specific ARFCN (Idle)

Indicates that the specified ARFCN is locked in idle state. After selecting Lock Specific ARFCN (Idle), you can enter an ARFCN in the Target ARFCN Setting area or select the ARFCN of the neighboring cell from this area.

Forbid HO (Dedicated)

Indicates that the handover is forbidden in dedicated state.


12-41



Parameter

Description

Target ARFCN Setting

Forbid HO (Dedicated)

Indicates that the handover is performed forcibly in dedicated state.

CBA Invert

Indicates that the CBA is inverted.

Input ARFCN

This parameter is used to specify the destination ARFCN. After selecting Input ARFCN, enter an ARFCN in Target ARFCN.

Select Neighbor

This parameter is used to select the ARFCN of the destination neighboring cell. After selecting Select Neighbor, select the ARFCN of the neighboring cell from the text box at the bottom. The selected ARFCNs of the neighboring cell are displayed in the Target ARFCN area.

Target ARFCN

This area is used to enter the destination ARFCN.

Band Control

Indicates whether to use the band control function of the MS.

Band Setting

Indicates the controlled band. After selecting Band Control, you can select the controlled band from Band Setting.

MS Current State

Indicates the current forcing state of the MS.

Related Tasks 11.2.4 Conducting the GSM Forcing Function Test

12.22 Parameters for WCDMA Forcing Feature Test This describes the parameters related to the WCDMA forcing feature test. You can refer to this part when setting WCDMA forcing feature test parameters in the WCDMA Forcing Feature dialog box. Parameter

Description

Device Select

Indicates the drop-down list of the test terminals. You can select only one terminal each time.

Lock ARFCN

Locks the frequency point in idle status. You can enter the frequency point in Target ARFCN.

Lock ARFCN&PSC

12-42

Target ARFCN

Specifies the target frequency point.

Input PSC

Locks the scramble code in idle status. After choosing Lock ARFCN&PSC, you can enter or select the scramble code in PSC Setting.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description Select PSC

UE Current State

Specifies the target scramble code. After choosing Select PSC, you can select the scramble code in the text box below. Then, the selected scramble code is displayed in the Target PSC area. Displays the current forcing status of the UE. Click Inquire UE State. Then, the current forcing status of the UE is displayed.

Related Tasks 11.2.5 Conducting the WCDMA Forcing Function Test

12.23 Parameter Description: LTE Forcing Feature Test This section describes the parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test. You can set parameters related to the LTE forcing feature test in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box by referring to this section. Parameter

Description

Device Select

Indicates the drop-down list of the UEs. You can select only one UE each time.

Serving EARFCN

Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (EARFCN) used by the serving cell.

Serving PCI

Indicates the physical cell identifier (PCI) of the serving cell.

Setting

Function Select

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

EARFCN

Indicates the EARFCN used by the locked cell.

PCI

Indicates the PCI of the locked cell.

Upper Band

Indicates the upper threshold of the locked band.

Lower Band

Indicates the lower threshold of the locked band.

MCC

Indicates the mobile country code (MCC) for the locked public land mobile network (PLMN).

MNC

Indicates the mobile network code (MNC) for the locked public land mobile network (PLMN).

PUSCH Power

Indicates the transmit power of the locked physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).

Lock EARFCN

Indicates the locked EARFCN of the serving cell.


12-43



Parameter

Description Lock EARFCN and PCI

Indicates the specified EARFCN and PCI that are locked.

Lock Band

Indicates the locked frequency band.

Lock PLMN

Indicates the locked PLMN. According to the MCC and MNC, the UE camps on a specific PLMN after the network is locked.

CBA Invert

Indicates that the CBA turnover is performed on a cell or all cells.

Lock PUSCH Power

Indicates the transmit power of the locked PUSCH.

Related Tasks 11.2.6 Conducting the LTE Forcing Function Test

12.24 Parameters for Performing the C/A Measurement of the GSM This describes the parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM. You can refer to this part when setting parameters for performing the C/A measurement of the GSM in the GSM C/A Setting dialog box. Parameter

Description

Device Select

Indicates the drop-down list of MSs. You can select only one MS from the drop-down list at a time.

MS C/A State

12-44

OFF

Indicates that the C/A measurement is disabled.

1 Channel (-1, +1)

Indicates two neighboring ARFCNs of the current serving cell. For example, if the ARFCN of the current serving cell is 80, the level difference between the current serving cell and the cells whose ARFCNs are 79 and 81 is respectively calculated in C/A measurement.

2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2)

Indicates four neighboring ARFCNs of the current serving cell. For example, if the ARFCN of the current serving cell is 80, the level difference between the current serving cell and the cells whose ARFCNs are 78, 79, 81, and 82 is respectively calculated in C/A measurement.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Apply

Indicates that the parameters for performing the C/A measurement take effect, and then the MS performs the C/A measurement. l If the C/A measurement is successful, the system displays C/A Setting Command send successfully. l If the C/A measurement is failed, the system displays C/A Setting Command send unsuccessfully. In such a case, you need to set the parameters again to perform the C/A measurement. l If no response is received in two seconds, the system displays C/A Setting Command send Timeout. In such a case, you need to set the parameters or click Apply again to perform the C/A measurement.

Search MS State

Indicates the latest C/A state of the MS, which is displayed in the MS C/A State area. l If OFF is performed successfully, the system displays Phones C/A measurements NOT be set. l If 1 Channel (-1, +1) is performed successfully, the system displays Phones C/A measurements be set to measure 1 channel (±1). l If 2 Channel (+2, +1, -1, -2) is performed successfully, the system displays Phones C/A measurements be set to measure 2 channels (±1, ±2).

MS C/A State

Indicates the C/A measurement state of the current MS.

Related Tasks 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements

12.25 Parameters for Exporting the Data This describes the parameters for exporting data. You can refer to this part when converting a .gen file to the file in other formats or converting a .phu file to a .gen file.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-45



Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a Binary File (Clear Multi-f) Parameter

Description

Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box Source

Enables you to select the source file. You can click the icon next to Source to select the logfile to be exported.

Destination

Enables you to set the file name and the save path. You can click the icon next to Destination to set the save path and file name of the exported test data.

File Information area

Packet Selection area

Total

Indicates the number of data package contained in the selected logfile.

Start

Indicates the start time of recording the data of the selected logfile.

End

Indicates the end time of recording the data of the selected logfile.

Index

Enables you to set the range of the data package contained in the exported test data. Index indicates that the location of the data package is used as the range of the data package.

Time

Enables you to set the range of the data package contained in the exported test data. Time indicates that the record time of the data package is used as the range of the data package.

Start

Enables you to set the start value of the exported test data. If the data is exported by Index, you need to enter the location of the start data package. If the data is exported by Time, you need to enter the start time.

End

Enables you to set the end value of the exported test data. If the data is exported by Index, you need to enter the location of the end data package. If the data is exported by Time, you need to enter the end time.

Log Wizard - Step Three dialog box Log Selection area

12-46

Device

Indicates the list of the device contained in the logfile.

Log

Enables you to select the test data to be exported.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description

Explore the Exporting Destination

Enables you to set whether to automatically open the exported file. If you select Explore the Exporting Destination, the folder of the exported file is automatically opened after exporting data is complete.

Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a Binary File (Select Multi-f) Parameter

Description


Indicates the list of the selected logfile.

Add

Enables you to select the source file. You can click Add to select the logfile to be exported.

Delete

Enables you to delete the selected logfile in the Source area.

Destination area

Displays the save path and file name of the exported test data.

Open

Enables you to set the save path and file name of the exported test data.

Selected Source File Information area

File

Indicates the size of the selected logfile in the Source area. The unit is MB.

Total

Indicates the number of data packages contained in the selected logfile in the Source area.

Start

Displays the time at which the system completes recording the data in the logfile selected in the Source area.

End

Displays the time at which the system completes recording the data in the logfile selected in the Source area.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Device


Log



12-47



Parameter

Description



Parameters for Converting a Logfile to a CSV File Parameter

Description

Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box Time Formation

Enables you to select the time formation for the first column of the exported CSV file. The options are as follows: l GMT: Indicates the GMT time when the data package is parsed. The format is YYYYMMDDHHMMSS l TickCount: Indicates the Tick value of the CPU when the data package is parsed. The unit is ms. Enables you to select the source file. You can

Source

click the icon next to Source to select the logfile to be exported. Destination




12-48

Total


Start


End


Index



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description Time


Start


End



Device


Log




Log Wizard - Step Four dialog box Time Formation Separate Character

Set Text

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Enables you to select the time formation. You can select GMT and TickCount. Comma

Enables you to separate exported CSV files by using commas.

Tab

Enables you to separate exported CSV files by using tabs.

Semicolon

Enables you to separate exported CSV files by using semicolons.

Customize

Enables you to customize the separator (you can enter the character.)

Output Character to head

The exported CSV files contains the column.

Output unit

The exported CSV files contains the unit.


12-49



Parameters for Converting a Logfile to an MDM File Parameter

Description


Enables you to select the source file. You can click the icon next to Source to select the logfile to be exported.

Destination




Total


Start


End


Index


Time


Start


End



12-50

Device


Log



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Parameter

Description



Parameters for Converting a PHU File to a Logfile Parameter

Description

Log Wizard - Step Two dialog box PHU File

Enables you to select the source file. Click following PHU File to select the PHU file to be exported.

Destination File

Enables you to set the save path and file name. Click following Destination File to set the save path and file name of the exported test data.


IMSI

Displays the mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) of the PHU.

Start Time

Displays the time when the PHU data is recorded.


Enables you to set whether to automatically open the exported file. If you select Explore the Exporting Destination, the folder of the exported file is automatically open after the data exporting is complete.

Related Tasks 9.4 Exporting Logfiles

12.26 Parameters for Configuring the Data Export Format of the Scanner This describes the parameters for configuring the export format of the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner. You can refer to this part when exporting the CW data of the PCTel DTI scanner.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


12-51



Parameter Columns

Description Data Type

Indicates the test data type. Currently, only CW data is supported. The parameter is valid when CW Channel or CW RSSI is selected in the Log area of the Log Wizard - Step Three dialog box.

Format

Column Header

Indicates the header of a column in the file.

Reset

Indicates the reset button. It is used to reset the header modified in Column Header to the default header.

Display Date & Time with two columns

Indicates whether the data and the time are displayed in the same column.

GPS

Indicates the format of GPS information. You can select the following values: l Decimal fraction: Display GPS information in the format of angle. l Degree: Display GPS information in the format of degree, minute, and second.

File Size

Date & Time

Indicates the format of the date and time.

Display with quotation marks

Indicates that the date and time are enclosed with quotation marks.

Frequency

Indicates the unit of frequency.

FileSize Limited

Indicates the size of an exported file. You can select the following values: l Records: indicates that the size of the exported file is determined by the number of data packets specified in Count. l Sizes: indicates that the size of the exported file is the size specified in Count.

CW Data

GPS information is necessary

Indicates whether the exported file includes GPS information. If the parameter is selected, the exported file includes GPS information. If the parameter is not selected, the exported file does not include GPS information.

Binning by distance

Indicates to filter CW data by distance.

Threshold Lower Limit

Indicates the threshold of the RSSI. The threshold ranges from Lower Limit to Upper Limit, in dBm.

Threshold Upper Limit

Related Tasks 9.4 Exporting Logfiles 12-52


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

13

FAQs

About This Chapter This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the software and the corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills. 13.1 Problems Related to Software Start This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to software start. 13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem that the external device fails to be connected. 13.3 Problems Related to Views This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to the views. 13.4 Problems Related to Tests This describes the problems that result in test failures due to the malfunction of the Probe, and provides the possible causes and solutions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13-1


13 FAQs

13.1 Problems Related to Software Start This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to software start. 13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails? 13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails? 13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package? 13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program 13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components

13.1.1 What Should I Do When the Verification of the Dongle Fails? Symptom The Probe cannot be started normally and the system displays Lock Error:Verify Lock Failed.

Possible Causes The possible causes of the fault that the Probe fails to verify the dongle are as follows: l

The dongle is plugged in improperly.

l

The system time is changed before the Probe is started.

l

The dongle expires.

l

The GENEX Shared is abnormal.

l

Other dongles exist.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the dongle is plugged in. Step 2 Check whether the connection between the dongle and the USB port is normal. Step 3 Check whether the dongle drive is installed correctly. It is recommended that you reinstall the dongle drive. Step 4 Check whether the system time is changed. Do not change the system time before starting the Probe. The dongle controls the authority through the system time. The system time must be the current time or later than the current time. Step 5 Check whether the dongle expires. The license of the dongle that expires cannot be used. You need to apply for a new license. Step 6 Check whether the GENEX Shared components are installed properly. It is recommended that you reinstall the GENEX Shared components. 13-2


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

Step 7 Check whether another dongle exists and whether a dongle conflicts with the dongle of the Probe. It is recommended that you uninstall the Sentinal Drive and reinstall the GENEX Shared. ----End

13.1.2 What Should I Do When the License Check Fails? Symptom When the license edition of the Probe is used, the message Error: ESN is not correct! is displayed and the Probe cannot be started properly.

Possible Causes The ESN changes and cannot match the license.

Procedure l

Use the dongle edition of the Probe.

l

Apply for multiple licenses based on the number of network adapters on the PC. The Probe cannot identify the ESN of the hard disk on the PC because of PC configuration. In this case, the Probe selectively identifies the ESN of the network adapter on the PC. If multiple network adapters exist on the PC, the network adapter ESN changes after the operating system is started. Therefore, you are advised to apply for licenses based on the number of network adapters on the PC. When the message Error: ESN is not correct! is displayed, load the corresponding license file to the system again.

----End

13.1.3 How to Install the East Asian Language Package? Question The system displays Selected collating sequence not supported by the operating system when the Probe is started in the operating system of non-Chinese version.

Answer 1.

Choose Start > Control Panel > Regional and Language Options.

2.

In the Regional and Language Options dialog box, click the Languages tab page.

3.

Select Install files for East Asian languages and install the files for East Asian languages as the system prompts you.

13.1.4 How to Uninstall the Main Program Question How to uninstall the main program?

Answer Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13-3


13 FAQs

After the Probe main program is uninstalled, the PSTN SQE Server and system templates are deleted but the operation logs and recorded logfiles are left.

Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Uninstall Probe. The uninstalling interface is displayed. Step 2 Choose Remove. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click Yes. Step 5 After the installation is complete, click Finish. ----End

13.1.5 How to Uninstall the GENEX Shared Components Question How to uninstall the GENEX shared components?

Answer The GENEX shared components remain after the Probe main program is uninstalled. You can determine whether to uninstall the GENEX shared components according to the actual situation. Step 1 Choose Start > Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs. Step 2 In the displayed Add or Remove Programs window, click Change or Remove Programs. Step 3 Choose Shared. Step 4 Click Delete. Step 5 In the uninstall interface displayed, choose Remove. Step 6 Click Next. Step 7 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK. Step 8 After the installation is complete, click Finish. ----End

13.2 Problems Related to Device Connections This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem that the external device fails to be connected. 13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails? 13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails? 13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails? 13-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the PC? 13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals? 13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE?

13.2.1 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the MS Fails? Symptom After the MS is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the MS and fails to check the connection status of the MS. The system displays The MS cannot be connected!.

Possible Causes l

The MS is not connected correctly.

l

The MS parameters are not set correctly.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the connection between the MS and the USB port or COM port is normal. Step 2 Check whether the USB drive is installed properly. 1.

Right-click My Computer..

2.

Choose Manage from the shortcut menu to open the Computer Management dialog box.

3.

Click the Device Manager node.

4.

Check whether the corresponding MS port exists under the Ports (COM & LPT) navigation tree, and check whether the MS port is normal. If the port works abnormally, reinstall the drive.

Step 3 Check whether the port is correct. 1.

icon on the Configuration tab page in the On the Probe main interface, click the navigation area to open the Device Configure dialog box.

2.

In the device list of the Device Configure dialog box, double-click the MS.

3.

Check whether the settings in the Device Configure dialog box are consistent with the settings of the MS. If the settings are inconsistent, set the settings again.

----End

13.2.2 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the Scanner Fails? Symptom After the scanner is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the scanner and fails to check the connection status of the scanner. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13-5


13 FAQs

Possible Causes l

The scanner is not connected correctly.

l

On the Probe, the scanner parameters are not set correctly.

l

Settings of the scanner parameters are inconsistent with the parameters on the Probe.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the connection between the scanner and the parallel port or USB port is normal. Step 2 In the Device Configure window on the Probe, check whether the settings of the port ID, baud rate, and GPS model are correct. Step 3 Check whether the scanner protocol is set to Direct and whether the setting of the baud rate of the scanner is consistent with the setting of the baud rate on the Probe. Default settings, such as 8 data bit, 1 stop bit, and no parity check, are used for the other elements. ----End

13.2.3 What Should I Do When the Probe Searching for the GPS Fails? Symptom After the GPS is connected to the PC, the Probe fails to search for the GPS and fails to check the connection status of the GPS.

Possible Causes l

The GPS is not connected correctly.

l

On the Probe, the GPS parameters are not set correctly.

l

The Probe does not support the interface protocol of the GPS.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the connection between the GPS and the parallel port or USB port is normal. Step 2 In the Device Configure window on the Probe, check whether the settings of the port ID, baud rate, and GPS model are correct. Step 3 Check whether the interface protocol of the GPS is set correctly. Currently, the Probe supports the GPS based on the NEMA0183. ----End

13.2.4 What Should I Do When the Mouse Becomes Invalid After the GPS Is Connected to the PC? Symptom The mouse of the PC cannot be used normally after the GPS is connected. The pointer moves randomly in a large scale on the screen. 13-6


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

Possible Causes The system mistakes the GPS as the PS/2 mouse.

Procedure Step 1 Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to open the System Properties dialog box. Step 2 On the Hardware tab page, click Device Manager. Step 3 In the Device Manager window, expand the Mice and Other Pointing Devices node. Step 4 Right-click Microsoft PS/2 Mouse and choose Properties to open the Microsoft PS/2 Mouse Properties dialog box. Step 5 On the Driver tab page of the Microsoft PS/2 Mouse Properties dialog box, click Uninstall. Step 6 In the displayed Confirm Device Removal dialog box, click OK. ----End

13.2.5 What Should I Do When the PCTel DTI Scanner Fails to Receive the GPS Signals? Symptom The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment does not report data.

Possible Causes l

The GPS module does not receive sufficient satellite signals.

l

The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment does not function.

l

The GPS module of the PCTel DTI equipment is damaged.

Procedure Step 1 Find out whether the GPS signals are blocked. Step 2 Connect the testing PC with external handset GPS device. The recommended model is GARMIN 60. Step 3 Send the PCTel DTI equipment to the specified servicing station to repair. ----End

13.2.6 How to Configure an LTE UE? Question Before performing service tests in the LTE network, the Probe must be configured with LTE UEs. How can I configure an LTE UE? Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13-7


13 FAQs

Answer Step 1 Connect an LTE UE to a PC. Two Ethernet ports and one serial port on the PC are used to connect to the debug Ethernet port (ETH) and service Ethernet port (FE/GE) on the UE. l A Y-shaped cable is connected to the debug Ethernet port on the UE. The connector (Debug) of the Y-shaped cable is connected to the serial port on the PC through a serial cable. The connector (Ethernet) of the Y-shaped cable is connected to one Ethernet port on the PC through an Ethernet cable. For details, see Figure 13-1. l The service Ethernet port on the UE is connected to the other Ethernet port on the PC through an Ethernet cable. Figure 13-1 Y-shaped cable

The connector numbered 1 is used to connect to the LTE UE. The connector numbered 2 is used to connect to the Ethernet port on the PC. The connector numbered 3 is used to connect to the serial port on the PC.

Step 2 Query the IP address of the host through the HyperTerminal provided by the Windows operating system. For details, see Figure 13-2. NOTE

When configuring an LTE UE on the Probe, you must ensure that the typed value of UE IP is the same as the queried IP address of the host.

13-8


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

Figure 13-2 Querying the IP address of the host

e indicates the IP address of the target board, that is, the IP address of the debug Ethernet port of the UE board. h indicates the IP address of the host, that is, the IP address of the PC that is used to control and communicate with the UE board. The IP address of the host must be on the same network segment as the IP address of the debug Ethernet port on the target board.

Step 3 Start the OMT tool. 1.

Type the IP address of the host queried in Step 2 in IP.

2.

Click OK. The OMT tool is started.

Step 4 Configure parameters that are used for tests on the OMT.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Parameter

Description

Source

IMSI

Indicates the international mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) of a UE.

The core network (CN) allocates the IMSI to a UE.

PLMN ID

Indicates the ID of a public land mobile network (PLMN) where a UE camps on. It is composed of mobile network code (MNC) and mobile country code (MCC).

This parameter is determined by the operator network where a UE accesses.


13-9


13 FAQs

Parameter

Description

Source

Freq

Indicates the EUTRA absolute radio frequency channel number (EARFCN) of a UE.

This parameter setting must be consistent with that of the eNodeB.

Bandwidth

Indicates the bandwidth supported by a UE.


FDD/TDD Mode

Indicates whether the FDD or TDD mode is adopted.


Step 5 Run the following command to set the IP address of the service Ethernet port on the PC in command mode: You must set the IP address of the PC network interface card (NIC) that is connected to the service Ethernet port of a UE to the service IP address of the UE on the core network side. arp -s IP address of the PC NIC MAC address of the UE Service IP address of the UE on the core network side NOTE

l IP address of the PC NIC: indicates the IP address of the PC NIC that is connected to the service Ethernet port of the UE. l Service IP address of the UE: indicates the service IP address of the UE. You can obtain it from the core network. Run the following command to check the configuration result: arp -a

Step 6 Run the following command to set the route in command mode: route add IP address of the PC NIC mask Subnet mask Service IP address of the UE -p NOTE

l IP address of the PC NIC: indicates the IP address of the PC NIC that is connected to the service Ethernet port of the UE. l Service IP address of the UE: indicates the service IP address of the UE. You can obtain it from the core network. l p: indicates the permanent route. Run the following command to check the configuration result: route print

----End

13.3 Problems Related to Views This describes the possible cause of and the processing method for the problem related to the views.

13-10


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails? 13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails? 13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails? 13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows?

13.3.1 What Should I Do When Opening the Map View Fails? Symptom The Probe fails to open the map windows, including the indoor test map window and outdoor test map window. The system displays Please install the MapX plug-in.

Possible Causes The GENEX Shared component package is not installed, or it is damaged.

Procedure Step 1 Reinstall the GENEX Shared component package. ----End

13.3.2 What Should I Do When Opening the Chart View Fails? Symptom The Probe fails to open the chart window. The system displays Failed to Create TeeChart Control! Be sure to have installed it.

Possible Causes The GENEX Shared component package is not installed, or it is damaged.

Procedure Step 1 Reinstall the GENEX Shared component package. ----End

13.3.3 What Should I Do When Importing Engineering Parameters Fails? Symptom Exceptions occur when the Probe imports engineering parameters. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13-11


13 FAQs

Possible Causes l

The network protocol that is selected during the import of engineering parameters is different from the actual network protocol of the engineering parameters.

l

Any of the values of the mandatory fields in the engineering parameter table does not meet the requirements for the Probe.

l

The Microsoft Office 2003 or higher is not installed in the PC.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the network protocol selected during the import of engineering parameters is the same as the actual network protocol. For details about how to import engineering parameters, see 6.2 Importing Engineering Parameters. To rectify this fault, do as follows: Step 2 Check whether the values of the mandatory fields in the engineering parameter table meet the requirements for the Probe. For details about engineering parameters, see 6.1 Engineering Parameters Supported in Different Network Systems. Step 3 If the system prompts Open Excel Failed! Please check the Excel Version!, install the Microsoft Office 2003 or higher. ----End

13.3.4 What Should I Do If No Data Is Displayed in the WCDMA View Windows? Symptom When the Probe performs WCDMA tests, no data is displayed in the following view windows: AMR Codecs, Vocoder Usage, Cell Search, DRX Mode, and RACH and PRACH.

Possible Causes When configuring terminals on the Probe, you do not select data packets related to the WCDMA test in the Filter dialog box. As a result, no data is displayed in the related view windows.

Procedure l

When configuring terminals, select data packets related to the WCDMA test in the Filter dialog box. For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected. Table 13-1 shows data packets that need to be selected.

13-12


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

Table 13-1 Data packets need to be selected View Window Name

Data Packet

AMR Codecs

l Ox7143 l 0x7144

Vocoder Usage

l 0x5079 l Ox7143 l 0x7144

Cell Search

l Ox414C l Ox4018 l Ox414D l Ox4019 l Ox414E l Ox401A

DRX Mode

Ox4004

RACH and PRACH

l Ox4106 l Ox4160 l Ox410D

----End

13.4 Problems Related to Tests This describes the problems that result in test failures due to the malfunction of the Probe, and provides the possible causes and solutions. 13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail? 13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated? 13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test? 13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)? 13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid?

13.4.1 What Should I Do When FTP Service Tests Fail? Symptom l

Symptom I: Activating PDP contexts failed and the FTP service test cannot be performed normally.

l

Symptom II: Activating PDP contexts succeeded; however, the FTP service test still cannot be performed normally.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13-13


13 FAQs

l

Symptom III: The FTP upload or FTP download is disrupted.

Possible Causes Table 13-2 lists the fault causes. Table 13-2 Fault cause Fault Symptom

Possible Cause

Symptom I

l The modem port is not configured or the configuration is incorrect. l The APN is not set. l The configuration of the dial-up encryption protocol is incorrect. l The FTP server does not work.

Symptom II

The properties of the FTP upload or FTP download test item are set incorrectly.

Symptom III

l The network is blocked. l The FTP server is overloaded.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the modem port is configured. . The Device Configure dialog box is displayed.

1.


2.

Check the value in the ModemPort column. If the value in the ModemPort column of the corresponding device is Not Configure, you can infer that the modem port is not configured. Then, you need to configure the modem port of the device. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.

Step 2 Check whether the configuration of the modem port is correct. 1.

. The Device Configure dialog box is displayed. On the Probe main interface, click View the port number in the ModemPort column.

2.

In the Device Manager window, right-click the corresponding device under the Modem node, select Properties, and then view the actual port number of the device on the Modem tab page. If the set port number is different from the actual port number, you need to configure the modem port again. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices.

Step 3 Check whether the setting of the APN is correct. For details, see 8.5.1 Setting the APN (GSM/WCDMA). Step 4 Check whether the setting of the dial-up encryption protocol is correct. Check and ensure that the setting of Security Protocol of the Dial Up test item is correct. For the description of the Dial Up test item, see 14.1 Description of Test Items. Step 5 Check whether the properties of the FTP Upload or FTP Download test item are set correctly. 13-14


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

For the description of the FTP Upload and FTP Download test items, see 14.1 Description of Test Items. ----End

13.4.2 What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated? Symptom l

Symptom I: The SQE (MS-PSTN) test fails to be performed.

l

Symptom II: The SpeechView of the PSTN SQE Server contains invalid MOS values, that is, certain MOS values are smaller than 2.5.

Possible Causes Table 13-3 lists the fault causes. Table 13-3 Fault cause Fault Symptom

Possible Cause

Symptom I

l The version number of the Probe is incorrect. l The used test terminal is not Huawei U120e PHU, Huawei U1205 PHU or Huawei U6100 PHU. l The version number of the PHU is incorrect. l The RBT service of the PHU is not disabled.

Symptom II

The invalid MOS value may be caused by network problems if the following reasons are excluded. l The speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are different. l Other operations are performed on the keypad of the test MS. l An extension may be connected to the PSTN telephone cable that is connected to the PSTN SQE Server. l The configuration of the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server does not meet the requirement.

Procedure Step 1 Check the version number of the Probe. Use the Probe V200R002C01SPC010 or a later version. On the main interface of the Probe, choose Help > About PROBE to view the version number of the Probe. Step 2 Check the version number of the PHU. Use the PHU V100R002C01B010SPC110 or a later version. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13-15


13 FAQs

For details on how to view the version number of the PHU, see the help of the PHU. Step 3 Check whether the speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are the same. 1.

On the main interface of the Probe, click . The Test Plan Control window is displayed. View the value of the Sample Type property of the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item.

2.

On the main interface of the PSTN SQE Server, click . The Test Plan Editor window is displayed. View the values of the Sample Time and Language Of Sample properties of the SQE test item. If the time of playing the speech sample and the language type of the speech sample are different, reconfigure the two properties of the SQE (MS-PSTN) and SQE test items.

----End

13.4.3 What Should I Do When UE Fails to Access the Network During the LTE Forcing Feature Test? Symptom During the LTE forcing feature test, the UE fails to access the network if the locked ARFCN or PCI does not exist. The problem persists when users click Reset in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box. What should I do?

Possible Causes When the UE fails to access the network, click Reset in the LTE Forcing Feature dialog box. After that, the UE does not respond.

Procedure l

Start the UE by using the OMT so that the UE can access the network successfully.

----End

13.4.4 How to Convert Frequencies into UARFCNs (WCDMA)? Question In the WCDMA, how to convert frequencies into UARFCNs?

Answer l

Convert frequencies into UARFCNs. – Uplink Uplink UARFCN = 5 × (FUL - FUL_Offset). FUL indicates the uplink carrier frequency, and the range is from FUL_low to FUL_high. FUL_Offset indicates the UARFCN formula offset. – Downlink

13-16


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13 FAQs

Downlink UARFCN = 5 × (FDL - FDL_Offset). FDL indicates the downlink carrier frequency, and the range is from FDL_low to FDL_high. FDL_Offset indicates the UARFCN formula offset. For parameters in the formula are defined in Figure 13-3 and Figure 13-4. Figure 13-3 UARFCN definition (general)

Figure 13-4 UARFCN definition (additional channels)

----End

13.4.5 What Should I Do When the Automatic Answer Setting of Huawei U1251 Is Invalid? Question How do I solve the problem that the automatic answer setting of Huawei U1251 is invalid? Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


13-17


13 FAQs

Answer l

Check whether Huawei U1251 is connected to earphones. The automatic answer function can be enabled only after you connect Huawei U1251 to earphones. Otherwise, the automatic answer setting is invalid.

----End

13-18


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

14

Appendix

About This Chapter This describes the test items, information elements (IEs), predefined events, and keyboard shortcuts supported by the Probe. You can refer to these parameters when you collect or view data through the Probe. 14.1 Description of Test Items This describes the test items of the MS, Scanner, and PSTN SQE Server and describes properties of all test items. You can refer to this part and perform the related operations when designing a test plan. 14.2 Description of Predefined Events This describes the system predefined events of the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX and LTE networks. You can refer to this part when configuring event parameters on each network. 14.3 Description of Information Elements This describes the MS and Scanner information elements supported by the Probe. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the view window. 14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts This describes certain keyboard shortcuts of the Probe. 14.5 PSTN SQE Server This provides the guidelines for using the PSTN SQE Server and methods for speech quality evaluation. The PSTN SQE Server is an important component of the speech evaluation solution of Huawei GENEX series. The PSTN SQE Server is deployed on the PSTN as the application management program and is used to test the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink of the GSM and WCDMA networks.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-1


14 Appendix

14.1 Description of Test Items This describes the test items of the MS, Scanner, and PSTN SQE Server and describes properties of all test items. You can refer to this part and perform the related operations when designing a test plan. 14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks This describes the test items supported various systems. You can refer to this part when designing the test plan, and then complete related settings. 14.1.2 Test Items of MSs This describes the MS test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, or LTE MS, and then perform the related operations. 14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners This describes the PCTel scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. 14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners This describes the Anritsu scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Anritsu scanner, and then perform the related operations. 14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners This describes the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner, and then perform the related operations.


14.1.1 Test Items Supported in Different Networks This describes the test items supported various systems. You can refer to this part when designing the test plan, and then complete related settings.

Test Items Supported by the GSM/WCDMA This describes the test items supported by the GSM and WCDMA.

14-2

Test Item

Description

AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS)

Indicates the test of the delay in sending AMR packets from the calling terminal to the called terminal, which can be used to detect the end-toend delay in a voice call.

AT Control

Indicates the access terminal (AT) command test.

Dial Up/Hang Up

Indicates the dial-up test.

Email

Indicates the email sending test. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Test Item

Description

FTP Download

Indicates the FTP download test. It enables you to detect the network performance when downloading files.

FTP Upload

Indicates the FTP upload test. It enables you to detect the network performance when uploading files.

HTTP

Indicates the HTTP test. It enables you to detect the network performance when accessing the specified web page.

KeyEmul

Indicates the key emulation test.

Loop

Indicates the loop implementation of multiple test items.

PS Attach/PS Detach

Indicates the attach or detach test of PS services.

MMS

Indicates the multimedia message service (MMS) test. It enables you to detect the network performance when sending multimedia files.

Multi-FTP

Indicates the test of simultaneous FTP upload and download of a terminal.

Multi-RAB

Indicates the test of CS and PS concurrence.

PDP

Indicates the test of activating or deactivating the packet data protocol (PDP).

Ping

Indicates the network connectivity test.

SMS

Indicates the short message service (SMS) test.

Async SQE(MS-MS)

Indicates the bidirectional speech quality evaluation test between MSs.

SQE(MS-PSTN)

Indicates the uplink and downlink speech quality evaluation test between the MS and the PSTN SQE Server.

Sync SQE(MS-MS)

Indicates the unidirectional speech quality evaluation test between MSs.

Video Phone

Indicates the video phone test. It is supported by the WCDMA only.

Video Streaming

Indicates the video streaming test. It is supported by the WCDMA only.

Voice Call

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Indicates the voice call test.


14-3


14 Appendix

Test Item

Description

Wait

Indicates the wait duration, that is, the time from the previous test item execution to the beginning of the next test item execution.

WAP Download

Indicates the wireless application protocol (WAP) download test.

WAP Gateway Connection

Indicates the WAP gateway connection test.

WAP Logon

Indicates the WAP login test.

WAP Page Refresh

Indicates the WAP page refreshing test.

Test Items Supported in the CDMA Network This describes the test items supported by the CDMA. Test Item

Description

Dial Up/Hang Up

Indicates the dial-up test.

FTP Download


FTP Upload


HTTP


Loop


MMS

Indicates the multimedia message service (MMS) test. It enables you to detect the network performance when sending multimedia files.

Ping


SMS

Indicates the short message service (SMS) test.

Voice Call

Indicates the voice call test.

Wait


Test Items Supported in the WiMAX Network System This describes the test items supported in the WiMAX network system. 14-4


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Test Item

Description

FTP Download


FTP Upload


HTTP


NetEntry

Indicates the network entry test of the MS.

NetSearch

Indicates the Beceem frequency scanning test.

Ping


Wait


Test Items Supported by the LTE This describes the test items supported by the LTE.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Test Item

Description

FTP Download


FTP Upload


HTTP


Iperf

Indicates the network performance test of the transfer control protocol (TCP) and the user datagram protocol (UDP).

Loop


LTE Attach/LTE Detach

Indicates the attach/detach test of data services.

LTE Cell Searching

Indicates the cell scanning test on the RRC layer.

LTE Scanning

Indicates the RRC spectrum scanning test.

Ping



14-5


14 Appendix

14.1.2 Test Items of MSs This describes the MS test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX, or LTE MS, and then perform the related operations.

AMR E2E Delay (GSM/WCDMA) This section describes the properties of the AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) test item. You can set the AMR end-to-end delay test by referring to the following descriptions. The AMR E2E Delay (MS-MS) test item is used to detect the end-to-end delay in a voice call.

CAUTION When the AMR end-to-end delay test is performed, the calling and called terminals must be connected to the same Probe. In addition, when configuring the terminals, you must select the data packets related to the AMR in LogCode in the Filter dialog box. l For the calling terminal, Ox7143 need to be selected. l For the called terminal, 0x7144 need to be selected. For details, see 7.5 Selecting the Data to Be Collected. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Destination MS

-

Indicates the destination MS. The MS is another terminal that is connected to the Probe.

Destination Number

-

Indicates the called number.

Test Count

-

Indicates the number of tests.

Test Interval

Unit: s

Indicates the interval between two tests. Indicates the maximum time for call setup.

14-6

Setup Timeout

Unit: s

Exceptional Interval

Unit: s

Indicates the call exceptional interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call.

Speech Sample File

-

Indicates the voice file that is played after a call is set up.

If the call cannot be set up within the period specified by this parameter, the call setup fails.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Command Type

The values are as follows:

Indicates the terminal command type.

l Qualcomm Command: This command type is applicable to Qualcomm chipset-based terminals. If terminals fail to initiate calls through Qualcomm commands, you can configure a modem port and set Command Type to AT Command.

Select the command type according to the terminal type. Otherwise, call setup initiated by terminals may fail.

l AT Command: After you set Command Type to AT Command, AT commands can be issued. Before setting Command Type to AT Command, you need to check that a modem port has been configured. The default value is Qualcomm Command.

Async SQE(MS-MS) (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item. You can refer to this part when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminals (such as Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) configured on two Probes. In this scenario, the version numbers of the two PHU terminals must be the same. In addition, both the PHU terminals must be configured with the Async SQE(MS-MS) test item. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Call Count

You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call.

Indicates the number of calls.

The default value is 5. Call Duration


Indicates the call duration.

The default value is 120, and the unit is second.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-7


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Call Interval


Indicates the call interval.

The value ranges from 1 to 120, and the default value is 30, and the unit is second. Call Mode


Indicates the call mode.

l Outgoing: Refers to the outgoing call mode. l Incoming: Refers to the incoming call mode. When selecting Incoming, you need to set Source Number and SaveFile only. The default value is Outgoing. Call Type


Indicates the call type.

l Continuous Call: Refers to a long call. l Call by Call: Refers to a short call, which is controlled by the number of times a speech file is played. The default value is Call by Call. Destination Number

You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Outgoing.





MOS Algorithm


Indicates the MOS algorithm.

l PESQ.862.1 l PESQ.862 l PESQ LQ l PESQ Ie The default value is PESQ. 862.1. MOS Direction

-

Indicates the MOS direction. The Half duplex mode, that is the half duplex interaction mode is supported by the Probe.

14-8


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Sample Type

-

Indicates the type of a speech sample. The 5s,English type is supported by the Probe, that is the five seconds are spent in playing a speech sample, and the language of the speech sample is English.

Save All Result Files

You can select Yes or No.

Determines whether to save all speech result files.

Source Number

You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Ingoing.

Indicates the caller number.

Score Threshold

You can set this property when Save All Result Files is set to No.

Indicates the number of times for scoring the speech quality during the current call process.

Setup Timeout


Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within the period specified by this parameter, the call setup fails.

Speech Sample File

The default speech sample file is Software installation directory \Bin\SQE\ResultFile \VQA_Result.wav.

Indicates the storage path and name of the recorded speech file.

Time Sync


Before performing a speech quality evaluation test, check whether to synchronize the PC time of the calling part with the PC time of the called part.

AT Control (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the AT Control test item. You can refer to this part when performing the Access Terminal (AT) control test, and then perform the related operations. The AT commands and their formats supported by different vendors greatly differ in many ways, therefore, you need to test the AT commands on each MS.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Property

Value/Range/ Unit

Description

Test Count

The default value is 5.

Indicates the number of AT control tests.


14-9


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/ Unit

Description

Command Edition

-

This property is used to edit test commands. Click the button in the right area. Then, add multiple test commands in the displayed AT Command Edit dialog box.

Idle Time

Unit: s

Indicates the idle time.

AT Command

The default value is AT.

Indicates the AT command. The format of the entered commands must meet the requirements for the format of the AT commands.

Add

-

This parameter is used to add the values of AT Command and Idle Time to the list in the left area.

Update

-

This parameter is used to update the selected parameters of the command.

Up

-

This parameter is used to move a command upwards.

Save

-

This parameter is used to save a command file.

Delete

-

This parameter is used to delete a command.

Load

-

This parameter is used to load a command file.

Down

-

This parameter is used to move a command downwards.

AT Command Edit dialog box AT Command area

Operate area

Dial Up/Hang Up (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) This describes the properties of the Dial Up and Hang Up test items. You can refer to this part when performing the data service dial-up connection test, such as FTP, HTTP, Ping, and Wap, and then perform the related operations. Dial Up and Hang Up are used to allow several data service sessions to be conducted after one another. The Dial Up test item enables you to establish a data service connection. The Hang Up test item enables you to terminate a data service connection.

14-10


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Test Item

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Dial

Test Count


Indicates the number of dial-up tests.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two dial-up tests.

Dial User

-

Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dial-up connection.

Dial Password -

Indicates the password for the dial-up connection. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dial-up connection.

Phone Number

The default value is *99#.

Indicates the phone number for the dial-up connection.

PDP Type

You can select IP or PPP.

Indicates the protocol used in PDP tests.

l IP: Internet Protocol l PPP: Point-to-Point Protocol. It is a linklayer protocol of pointto-point links that carry the data packets of the network layer.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

PDP APN

-

Indicates the name of the PDP access point. For example, the PDP APN of China Mobile is cmwap or cmnet.

Timeout

You can select 30, 60, 120, 300, or 600. The unit is second.

Indicates the amount of time to wait for the success of dial-up. If the dial-up connection is not set up during this period, the dialup connection attempt times out.


14-11


14 Appendix

Test Item

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Security Protocol

You can select PAP or CHAP.

Indicates the network security authentication protocol.

l PAP: Password Authentication Protocol. It is used for authenticating the users who attempt to log in to the service system using the PPP protocol. If the user name and password that a user submits to the PAP needs to be sent to another program without encryption, the PAP protocol must be used. l CHAP: Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. It is an acknowledgement mode used by the PPP server. It is used for authenticating a user when the user initiates a connection or later. The default value is CHAP. Dial Type

You can select RAS or NDIS.

Indicates the dial-up type.

l RAS: Remote Access Service. It indicates that the dial-up is performed through the modem. l NDIS: Network Driver Interface Specification. It indicates that the dialup is performed through a network adapter. In this case, Network Card must be set. Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei E182E Card is recommended.

14-12


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Test Item

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Network Card

You can set this property when Dial Type is set to NDIS.

Specifies the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently. Under the Network adapters node in the Device Manager window, you can view the name of the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently.

Traffic Class

You can select the following values:

Indicates the traffic class.

l background class: refers to the background class. l conversational class: refers to the conversational class. l interactive class: refers to the interactive class. l streaming class: refers to the streaming class. l subscribed value: refers to the subscribed value. The default value is background class. UL Max Rate

You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s.

Indicates the maximum uplink rate.

DL Max Rate

You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s.

Indicates the maximum downlink rate.

UL Guaranteed Rate

You can set this property when Traffic Class is set to conversational class, streaming class, or subscribed value.

Indicates the uplink guaranteed rate.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-13


14 Appendix

Test Item

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

DL Guaranteed Rate


Indicates the downlink guaranteed rate.

You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s. Hang Up

-

-

-

Email (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the Email test item. When performing the email sending test, you can refer to the following descriptions. Before performing the Email test, you must perform the Dial Up test.

14-14

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

From

-

Indicates the email address of the originator.

To

-

Indicates the email address of the destination.

Subject

-

Indicates the email subject.

Body Text

-

Indicates the email body text.

Attachment

-

Indicates the name of file to enclose with the email as attachment (optional).

SMTP server

-

Indicates the IP address of the Simple Message Transfer Protocol (SMTP) server (for example, smtp.myserver.com).

Email User

-

Indicates the user name that accesses the SMTP server.

Email Password

-

Indicates the password for accessing the SMTP server.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two continuous email tests.

Test Count


Indicates the number of email tests.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Disconnection Mode


Indicates the mode for disconnecting the current activated data connection.

l Keep Connected After the download is complete, the Probe performs the next email test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval is up. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the current activated email service is complete. In the next email test, you must perform the dial up test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed. Dial Type

You can select RAS or NDIS.

Indicates the dial-up type.

l Remote access service (RAS): It indicates that the dial-up is performed through the modem. l Network driver interface specification (NDIS): It indicates that the dial-up is performed through a network adapter. In this case, Network Card must be set. Huawei E1820 Card and Huawei E182E Card are recommended. Dial User

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected after transfer completed.

Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication for establishing a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before originating the dial-up connection.


14-15


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Dial Password


Indicates the password for the dialup connection.



Phone Number

Certain operators require authentication for establishing a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before originating the dial-up connection.


FTP Download This section describes the properties of the FTP Download test item. You can refer to this section when performing an FTP download test. Through the FTP download test, you can check network performance during file download. Before performing an FTP download test, you must check whether your account enables you to download files to the specified directory. That is, whether you are authorized to access the FTP server. FTP Download (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) describes the properties of the FTP Download test item supported by the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA network. FTP Download (WiMAX/LTE) describes the properties of the FTP Download test item supported by the WiMAX or LTE network.

FTP Download (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) You must perform a Dial Up test before the GSM, WCDMA or CDMA FTP Download test. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

User

-

Indicates the user name for accessing the FTP server.

Password

-

Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server.

Remote File

-

Indicates the IP address of the FTP server. The format is ftp://IP address or domain name/file name

Port

14-16



Indicates the port number of the FTP server. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Write Local File

You can select either of the following values:

Indicates whether the file needs to be saved.

l True: indicates that this file is saved after it is downloaded. l False: indicates that this file is not saved after it is downloaded. The default value is False. Local File

You can set this property when Write Local File is set to True.

Indicates the filename and the path for saving files. You need to set a complete path such as C:\test.dat.

Multi Task Count

The value ranges from 1 to 5, and the default value is 1.

Indicates the number of tasks downloaded through the FTP.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two FTP download tests.

Test Count


Indicates the number of FTP download tests.

Disconnection Mode

You can select one of the following values:

Indicates the mode for disconnecting the active data connection.

l Keep Connected After the download is complete, the Probe initiates the next FTP download test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval arrives. l Disconnected by time The Probe disconnects the data connection based on the period when the time specified in Test Interval arrives. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the active FTP download is complete. In the next FTP download test, you must perform a dialup test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-17


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Port Type


Indicates the active or passive mode of the FTP.

l PASV: FTP passive mode. In this mode, the Probe functions as the client to actively connect to the FTP server. l PORT: FTP active mode. In this mode, the FTP server actively connects to the client. If this mode is used for a test, you are advised to disable the network firewall. The default value is PASV. Valid FTP Duration

You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time.

Indicates the valid duration for the FTP download test.

The default value is 300, and the unit is second. Dial Type

You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time or Disconnected after transfer completed.

Indicates the dialup type.

You can select RAS or NDIS. l RAS: Remote Access Service. It indicates that dialup is performed through the modem. l NDIS: Network Driver Interface Specification. It indicates that dialup is performed through a network adapter. In this case, Network Card must be set. Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei E182E Card is recommended. Network Card


Indicates the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently. Under the Network adapters node in the Device Manager window, you can view the name of the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently.

14-18


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Dial User


Indicates the dialup user name.




Indicates the phone number for the dialup connection.

Dial Password

Phone Number

Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dialup connection.

Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dialup connection.


FTP Download (WiMAX/LTE) Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

User

-


Password

-


Remote File

-

Indicates the file on the FTP server. The format is ftp://IP address or domain name/file name.

Port

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Indicates the port number of the FTP server.

14-19


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Port Type

The options are as follows:

Indicates the FTP active and passive modes.

l PASV: FTP passive mode. In this mode, the Probe functions as the client to actively connect to the FTP server. l PORT: FTP active mode. In this mode, the FTP server actively connects to the client. If this mode is used for a test, you are advised to disable the network firewall. The default value is PASV. Disconnection Mode


Indicates the data disconnection mode.

l Disconnected by time Data connection is disconnected after Valid FTP Duration.

This property is applicable to Huawei Sequans BM358 terminals.

l Disconnected after transfer completed Data connection is disconnected after the active FTP download service is complete. The default value is Disconnected by time. Valid FTP Duration


Write Local File

Indicates the valid duration for an FTP download test.




Indicates whether a file needs to be saved.



Indicates the file name and the path for storing files. You need to set a complete path such as C:\test.dat.

14-20


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Multi Task Count


Indicates the number of tasks downloaded through FTP.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two FTP download tests.

Test Count



FTP Upload This section describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item. You can refer to this section when performing an FTP upload test. By performing FTP upload tests, you can check network performance during file upload. Before performing FTP upload tests, you must check whether your account enables you to upload files to the specified directory. That is, whether you are authorized to access the FTP server. FTP Upload (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item supported by the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA network. FTP Upload (WiMAX/LTE) describes the properties of the FTP Upload test item supported by the WiMAX or LTE network.

FTP Upload (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) You must perform the Dial Up test before the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA FTP Upload test. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

User

-


Password

-


Remote File

-


Port



Local File

-

Indicates the drive letter, path, and file name identifying the file to be uploaded. You need to set a complete path such as C:\test.dat.

Multi Task Count

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

The value ranges from 1 to 5 and the default value is 1.


Indicates the number of tasks uploaded to the FTP server.

14-21


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Interval

The default value is 15 and the unit is second.

Indicates the interval between two FTP upload tests.

Test Count


Indicates the number of FTP upload tests.

Port Type




You can select one of the following values: l Keep Connected After the upload is complete, the Probe initiates the next FTP upload test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval arrives.

Indicates the mode for disconnecting the active data connection.

l Disconnected by time The Probe disconnects the data connection based on the period when the time specified in Test Interval arrives. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the active FTP upload is complete. In the next FTP upload test, you must perform a dialup test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed. Valid FTP Duration


Indicates the valid duration for an FTP upload test.


14-22


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Dial Type


Indicates the dialup type.

You can select RAS or NDIS. l RAS: Remote Access Service. It indicates that dialup is performed through the modem. l NDIS: Network Driver Interface Specification. It indicates that dialup is performed through a network adapter. In this case, Network Card must be set. Huawei E1820 Card or Huawei E182E Card is recommended. Network Card


Specifies the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently. Under the Network adapters node in the Device Manager window, you can view the name of the network adapter corresponding to the data card that is in use currently.

Dial User

Dial Password

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Indicates the dialup user name.




Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dialup connection.

Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dialup connection.

14-23


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Phone Number


Indicates the phone number for the dialup connection.


FTP Upload (WiMAX/LTE) Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

User

-


Password

-


Remote File

-


Port



Local File

-

Indicates the drive letter, path, and file name identifying the file to be uploaded. You need to set a complete path such as C:\test.dat.

14-24

Multi Task Count

The value ranges from 1 to 5 and the default value is 1.

Indicates the number of tasks uploaded to the FTP server.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two FTP upload tests.

Test Count




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Port Type

The options are as follows:




Indicates the data disconnection mode.

l Disconnected by time Data connection is disconnected after Valid FTP Duration.


l Disconnected after transfer completed Data connection is disconnected after the active FTP download service is complete. The default value is Disconnected by time. Valid FTP Duration

You can set this property when Disconnection Mode is set to Disconnected by Time. The default value is 300, and the unit is second.

Indicates the valid duration for the FTP upload test. This property is applicable to Huawei Sequans BM358 terminals.

HTTP This describes the properties of the HTTP test items. You can refer to this part when performing the HTTP test, and then perform the related operations. Through the HTTP test, you can test the network performance when accessing specified web pages. You must perform the Dial Up test before the HTTP test.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

URL

The address starting with http://.

Indicates the address of the HTTP server.


14-25


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Port


Indicates the port number of the HTTP server.

Show Web Page

You can select True or False. The default value is True.

Whether the page set in URL is displayed automatically.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two HTTP tests.

Test Count


Indicates the number of HTTP tests.

Disconnection Mode



l Keep Connected After the test is complete, the Probe originates the next HTTP test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval is up. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the current activated HTTP service is complete. In the next HTTP test, you must perform the dial up test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed. Dial User

Dial Password

14-26


Indicates the dial-up user name.


Indicates the password for the dial-up connection.


Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dial-up connection.

Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dial-up connection.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Phone Number




KeyEmul (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the KeyEmul test item. You can refer to this part when performing the key emulation test, and then perform the related operations. Not all functions of a test MS can be executed by issuing commands. The function such as video phone calling can be automatically dialed through only the key emulation. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Key Emulation List

-

Indicates the key emulation list. Click the button next to this item. The Key Emul Config dialog box is displayed. In the displayed dialog box, set corresponding parameters.

Test Interval

The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 30. The unit is second.

Indicates the interval between two Key-Emul tests.

Test Count

The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 5.


Key Emul Config dialog box

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Phone Type

Indicates the phone types supported by the Probe.

Phone type.

Delay

The value must be a positive integer. The default value is 300. The unit is ms.

Key pressing delay. Indicates the interval between two pressings.

Key Emulation List

-

Indicates the key emulation list. Maps the key input.

Key Input

-

Displays the key emulation.

Test

-

Indicates the test button. This item is used to test whether the sequence of key emulation meets the expectation.


14-27


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Define Key Value

-

Defines the key emulation map. Click the button next to this item. The Key Emulation Map Setting dialog box is displayed. In the displayed dialog box, set corresponding parameters.

Key Emulation Map Setting dialog box Key Emulation Map

-

Indicates the mapping table of key values of the key emulation.

Phone Type

-

Phone type. Indicates the selected phone type.

Add & Edit

-

This item is used to add new phones.

Key Value

-

Indicates the key value.

Reset

-

Indicates the reset button for the key value. Reset key values to 0x00.

Press

-

Press the key corresponding to a value of the Key Value.

Next & Press

-

Press the key corresponding to the result of adding 1 to a value of the Key Value.

Loop Start This describes the properties of the Loop Start test item. You can refer to this part when performing a cyclic test, and then perform the related operations. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Count


Indicates the times of executing test items circularly.

PS Attach/PS Detach (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) This describes the properties of the PS Attach and PS Detach test items. You can refer to this part when performing the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX attach or detach test, and then perform the related operations. NOTE

The Attach and Detach tests are performed alternately. If an Attach test is performed, the next Attach test cannot be performed until the Detach test is performed.

14-28


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Test Item

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

PS Attach

Attach Mode


Indicates the packet service attach test mode.

l Attach only: Only the Attach test is performed. If you select the Attach only mode, you must perform a Detach test before the next Attach test. l Detach before Attach: A Detach test is performed before the Attach test.

PS Detach

Timeout

The value must be a positive integer. The value range is 15 to 60. The default value is 15. The unit is second.

Indicates the time to wait for the attach successful or attach failed.

Timeout

The value must be a positive integer. The value range is 15 to 60. The default value is 15. The unit is second.

Indicates the time to wait for the detach successful or detach failed.

MMS (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) This describes the properties of the MMS test item. You can refer to this part when performing the multimedia message service (MMS) test, and then perform the related operations. Through the MMS test, you can test the network performance when multimedia files are being sent. The Probe supports the GSM MMS test and WCDMA MMS test performed by using Huawei U120e or Huawei U535 test terminals. Also the Probe supports the CDMA MMS test performed by using Huawei C5588 test terminal. Table 14-1 describes the properties of the MMS test item. If an MMS fails to be sent, you need to manually set the parameters listed in Table 14-2 on your test terminal.

CAUTION By default, the Probe sends the first MMS in the inbox of the test terminal. Thus, before performing MMS test, you should ensure that MMSs are present in the test terminal and the MMS to be sent is the first MMS in the inbox. You can use other terminal to send MMSs to the test terminal to ensure that MMSs are present in the test terminal.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-29


14 Appendix

Table 14-1 Properties of the MMS test item Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Count


Indicates the number of MMS tests.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two MMS tests, that is, the interval between the ended MMS test and the MMS test to be started.

Table 14-2 Auxiliary parameters Property

Description

MMS Gateway

Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway of an operator. The value is a string, for example, 10.10.10.1.

Gateway Port

Indicates the gateway port on the server. For example, 80.

APN

Indicates the access point name. For example, the APN of China Mobile is cmwap or cmnet.

MMS Center URL

Indicates the URL of the MMS center, starting with http://. For example, http://mmsc.monternet.com.

Multi-FTP (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the Multi-FTP test item. You can refer to this part when using a terminal to perform FTP upload and download tests simultaneously, and then perform the related operations. Property FTP Download

Value/Range/Unit

Description

DL User

-

Indicates the user name for accessing the FTP server when downloading files.

DL Password

-

Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server when downloading files.

DL Remote File

-

Indicates the file on the FTP server. The input format is ftp:// IP address or domain name/File name.

DL Port

14-30



Indicates the port number of the FTP server. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property DL Write Local File

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Specifies whether to save the file.

l True: Indicates that the file is saved after it is downloaded. l False: Indicates that the file is not saved after it is downloaded. The default value is False.

DL Local File

You can set this property when DL Write Local File is set to True.

Indicates the file name and the path for saving the file. You need to set a complete path, such as C: \test.dat.

FTP Upload

DL Multi Task Count


Indicates the number of FTP download tasks.

DL Count



UL User

-

Indicates the name of the user that accesses the FTP server when uploading files.

UL Password

-

Indicates the user password for accessing the FTP server when uploading files.

UL Remote File

-

Indicates the file on the FTP server. The input format is ftp:// IP address or domain name/File name.

UL Port



UL Local File

-

Indicates the file name and the path for saving the file. You need to set a complete path, such as C: \test.dat.

UL Multi Task Count

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



Indicates the number of FTP upload tasks.

14-31


14 Appendix

Property

Common Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

UL Count



Dial User

-

Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication for establishing a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before originating the dial-up connection.

Dial Password

-

Indicates the password for the dial-up connection. Certain operators require authentication for establishing a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before originating the dial-up connection.

Phone Number



Port Type


Indicates the FTP active and passive modes.

l PASV: FTP passive mode. In this mode, the Probe functions as the client to actively connect to the FTP server. l PORT: FTP active mode. In this mode, the FTP server actively connects to the client. If this mode is used for a test, you are advised to disable the network firewall. The default value is PASV. Test Interval

14-32



Indicates the interval between two continuous Multi-FTP tests.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Multi-RAB (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the Multi-RAB test item. You can refer to this part when testing the CS and PS concurrently, and then perform the related operations. You can test the CS and PS concurrently through the Multi-RAB test item and resolve the failed hang up of the MS for the automatic adaptive multi rate test in the case of the normal dial-up connection of the PS. The Multi-RAB test item involves the concurrent test of AMR and FTP and the concurrent test of video phone (VP) and FTP. Property Multi-RAB

Concurrent Type

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Indicates the type of the concurrent test.

l AMR & FTP: indicates the concurrent tests of the AMR and FTP. l Video & FTP: indicates the concurrent tests of the Video and FTP. The default value is AMR & FTP. Startup Priority

You can select the following values: l CS First: indicates that the CS test is performed first.

Indicates the startup priority of subservices during the concurrent test.

l FTP First: indicates that the FTP test is performed first. The default value is CS First.

CS

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Test Count



Test Interval


Indicates the time interval between two tests, that is, the time from the previous test to the beginning of the next test.

CS and FTP Interval


Indicates the time from the call originated by the MS to the beginning of the FTP service.

Destination Number

-

Indicates the destination number.


14-33


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Setup Timeout


Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within a defined period, the call setup fails.

Command Type



l Qualcomm Command: This command type is applicable to Qualcomm chipsetbased terminals. If terminals fail to initiate calls through Qualcomm commands, you can configure a modem port and set Command Type to AT Command.


l AT Command: After you set Command Type to AT Command, AT commands can be issued. Before setting Command Type to AT Command, you need to check that a modem port has been configured. The default value is Qualcomm Command. FTP

FTP Type


Indicates the FTP type.

l Upload: indicates the FTP upload. l Download: indicates the FTP download. The default value is Download.

14-34


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property Write Local File

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Indicates whether the file needs to be saved.


End Type


Indicates the filename and the path for saving files.


Indicates the end type.

You need to set a complete path such as C: \test.dat.

l By Time: indicates that the test ends until the time specified in FTP Time for transmitting data through the FTP is up. l By File: indicates that the test ends until the file download is complete. The default value is By Time and is set in FTP Time. FTP Time

You can set this property when End Type is set to By Time.

Indicates the duration of a FTP transmission.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

FTP Retry Count


Indicates the maximum number of allowed retries when the FTP connection fails.

Port



User

-



14-35


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Password

-


Remote File

-

Indicates the IP address of the FTP server. The format is ftp://IP address or domain name/ file name

FTP Dial

Multi Thread Count


Indicates the number of tasks downloaded through the FTP.

PDP Type

You can select IP and PPP.

Indicates the protocol of PDP test.

PDP APN

-

Indicates the name of the PDP access point. For example, the APN of China Mobile is cmwap or cmnet.

Dial User

-

Indicates the dial-up user name. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user name before the dial-up connection.

Dial Password

-

Indicates the password for the dial-up connection. Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to enter the user password before the dialup connection.

Phone Number

14-36




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property FTP QoS

Traffic Class

Value/Range/Unit

Description






DL Max Rate



UL Guaranteed Rate



You can select 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s. DL Guaranteed Rate




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-37


14 Appendix

PDP (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the PDP test item. You can refer to this part when performing the Packet Data Protocol (PDP) activation and deactivation tests, and then perform the related operations. By sending the AT commands to the MS, you can test whether the MS can activate or deactivate the GPRS properly. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

PDP Type

You can select IP and PPP.

Indicates the PDP type.

PDP APN

-

Indicates the name of the PDP access point.

Traffic Class




You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s.


DL Max Rate

You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s.


UL Guaranteed Rate



You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, or 4096. The unit is kbit/s. DL Guaranteed Rate



You can select 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 384, 2048, 4096, or 8192. The unit is kbit/s. 14-38


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Auto Dialup


Indicates whether to set up the dial-up connection of the packet service after the PDP activation.

l False: disables the dial-up connection. l True: enables the dial-up connection. The default value is False. Reserved Duration


Indicates the PDP duration, that is, the time from the previous PDP activation to the beginning of the PDP deactivation.

Test Interval


Indicates the time from the previous PDP deactivation to the beginning of the next PDP activation.

Test Count





Indicates the call exceptional interval, that is, the time from the failed PDP activation to the beginning of the next PDP activation.

Ping This describes the properties of the Ping test item. You can refer to this part when testing the delay of a transmitted or received packet, and then perform the related operations. The Ping test is used to test the communication connectivity of a network. The test result acts as an evidence for diagnosing daily network faults. You must perform the Dial Up test before the Ping test.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

IP

Enter an IP address such as 10.10.10.1.

Indicates the destination IP address.

Packet Size

The range is 8 to 1024. The default value is 32. The Unit is byte.

Indicates the packet size. The size of a transmitted packet affects the delay.


14-39


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Fragment Flag

The value can be either of the following:

Indicates whether to split a Ping packet.

l False: Disable the fragment test. l True: Enable the fragment test. The default value is False. Test Control Mode

Currently, only the Test by Count mode is supported. That is, the test is controlled by Test Count.

Indicates the test control mode.

Test Count



Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two ping tests.

SMS (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) This describes the properties of the SMS test item. You can refer to this part when testing the short message service (SMS), and then perform the related operations. You can test whether the short message service is normal by sending an SMS to the destination MS. NOTE

The test terminal on which the SMS test is performed must be configured with the modem port. For details, see 7.3 Configuring External Devices

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Count



Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two tests.

Service Center Number

Only numbers, * and # can be used.

Indicates the SMS center number.

Message

The length of the short message content must be less than or equal to 160 characters. The default value is Happy Everyday!.

Indicates the short message contents. You can enter a string.

Destination Number

Only numbers, * and # can be used.

Indicates the number of the destination MS.

SQE(MS-PSTN) (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item. You can refer to this part when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminal (such 14-40


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

as Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) and the PSTN SQE Server. In this scenario, you need to configure the SQE(MS-PSTN) test item for the PHU terminal in the Probe and configure the SQE test item in the PSTN SQE Server. For details about the PSTN SQE Server, see the relevant user guide. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Call Count


Indicates the number of calls.

The default value is 5. Call Duration



The default value is 120, and the unit is second. Call Interval



The value ranges from 1 to 120, and the default value is 30, and the unit is second. Call Mode



l Outgoing: Refers to the outgoing call mode. l Incoming: Refers to the incoming call mode. When selecting Incoming, you need to set Source Number and SaveFile only. The default value is Outgoing. Call Type



l Continuous Call: Refers to a long call. l Call by Call: Refers to a short call, which is controlled by the number of times a speech file is played. The default value is Call by Call.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Destination Number







14-41


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

MOS Algorithm



l PESQ.862.1 l PESQ.862 l PESQ LQ l PESQ Ie The default value is PESQ. 862.1. MOS Direction

-

Indicates the MOS direction. The Half duplex mode, that is the half duplex interaction mode is supported by the Probe.

Sample Type

-

Indicates the type of a speech sample. The 5s,English type is supported by the Probe, that is the five seconds are spent in playing a speech sample, and the language of the speech sample is English.




Source Number

You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Ingoing.

Indicates the caller number.

Score Threshold



Setup Timeout



14-42

Speech Sample File

The default speech sample file is Software installation directory \Bin\SQE\ResultFile \VQA_Result.wav.


Time Sync


Before performing a speech quality evaluation test, check whether to synchronize the PC time of the calling part with the PC time of the called part.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Sync SQE(MS-MS) (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item. You can refer to this part when performing a speech quality evaluation test by making calls between the PHU test terminals (such as Huawei U120e , Huawei U1205, Huawei U6100, or Huawei U1251) configured on a Probe. In this scenario, the version numbers of the two PHU terminals must be the same. In addition, only the calling PHU terminal needs to be configured with the Sync SQE(MS-MS) test item. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Destination MS

-

Indicates the destination MS. You can select the destination MS from the drop-down list. The MS is another terminal that is connected to the Probe.

Destination Number

-


Call Type



l Continuous Call: refers to a long call. l Call by Call: Refers to a short call, which is controlled by the number of times a speech file is played. l Call by Count: It is controlled by the number of speech evaluation scoring times. The default value is Call by Count. Call Duration



The default value is 120, and the unit is second. Call Interval



The default value is 5, and the unit is second. Test Count



The default value is 1. Score Count

You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Count. The value ranges from 1 to 9999.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)



14-43


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description




Setup Timeout



MOS Algorithm



l PESQ.862.1 l PESQ.862 l PESQ LQ l PESQ Ie The default value is PESQ.862.1. Speech Destination File

The default speech destination file is Software installation directory\Bin \SQE\ResultFile\VQA_Result.wav.


Speech Sample File

The default speech sample file is Software installation directory\Bin \SQE\narr_ukasts_8.wav.

Indicates the speech sample file provided by the Probe.




Score Threshold


Indicates the MOS threshold for saving the speech result file.

Send DTMF

You can select Yes or No. The default value is No.

Determines whether to send the dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF) signaling. When the MOS score is smaller than the value of DTMF Score Threshold, the Probe sends the DTMF signaling to the BSC.

14-44


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

DTMF Score Threshold

You can set this property when Send DTMF is set to Yes.

Indicates the MOS threshold for sending the DTMF signaling.

l When MOS Algorithm is set to PESQ Ie, DTMF Score Threshold ranges from 1 to 140. l When MOS Algorithm is set to PESQ.862.1, PESQ.862, or PESQ LQ, DTMF Score Threshold ranges from 1 to 5. Noise Type

The values are as follows: l No Noise: not to perform noise test l Car Noise: car noise l Street Noise: street noise l White Noise: white noise The default value is No Noise. You can set this property when Noise Type is set to Car Noise, Street Noise, or White Noise.

Noise Value

The noise test is performed during the speech quality evaluation test. Noise Type indicates the noise type, such as the car noise, street noise, and white noise. Indicates the SNR obtained from the noise sample file.

You can select 5dB, 10dB, or 10dB. Command Type

The values are as follows: l Qualcomm Command: This command type is applicable to Qualcomm chipset-based terminals. If terminals fail to initiate calls through Qualcomm commands, you can configure a modem port and set Command Type to AT Command.

Indicates the terminal command type. Select the command type according to the terminal type. Otherwise, call setup initiated by terminals may fail.


Video Phone (WCDMA) This describes the properties of the Video Phone test item. You can refer to this part when performing the video phone test, and then perform the related operations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-45


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Destination Number

-

Indicates the destination number.

Setup Timeout


Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within the defined period, the call setup fails.

Call Duration


Indicates the duration of a call, that is, the time from call setup to normal call release.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two calls, that is, the time from the previous call disconnection to the beginning of the next call.



Indicates the call Exceptional Interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call.

Test Count


Indicates the total number of calls.

Video Streaming (WCDMA) This describes the properties of the WCDMA Video Streaming test item. You can refer to the description when performing a video streaming test and then perform relevant operations. To ensure that video files can be played normally, ensure that the PC is installed with an video player, for example, RealPlayer. Before performing a Video Streaming test, you must perform a Dial Up test. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

URL

The URL starting with http://.

Indicates the URL of video files. The Probe supports only .rm video files.

14-46

Test Interval



Test Count


Indicates the number of times the test is performed.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Disconnectio n Mode



l Keep Connected After a test is complete, the Probe originates the next video streaming test instead of disconnecting the data connection when the time specified in Test Interval is up. l Disconnected after transfer completed The Probe disconnects the data connection until the current activated video steaming service is complete. Before the next video steaming test, you must perform the dial-up test first. The default value is Disconnected after transfer completed.

Dial User

Dial Password

Phone Number

You can set this property after selecting Disconnected after transfer completed from Disconnection Mode.

Indicates the dial-up user name.


Indicates the password for the dial-up connection.



Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to type the user name before the dial-up connection.

Certain operators require authentication in order to establish a data service connection. Therefore, you need to type the user password before the dial-up connection.


Voice Call (GSM/WCDMA/CDMA) This describes the properties of the Voice Call test item. You can refer to this part when performing the voice call test, and then perform the related operations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-47


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Destination Number

-

Indicates the outgoing call number.

Call Type



l Continuous Call: refers to a long call. The Probe does not disconnect this call until an exception occurs. If the call setup fails or a call drop occurs during the calling, the Probe terminates the current call test and starts another call test. l Call by Call: refers to a short call. Under the control of the Probe, an MS initiates a call that lasts for the period of time specified by Call Duration and then waits for the period of time specified by Test Interval before initiating another call. The number of times call tests are performed is defined by Test Count. The default value is Call by Call. Setup Timeout


Indicates the maximum time for call setup. If the call cannot be set up within the defined period, the call setup fails.

Call Duration

You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 120, and the unit is second.

14-48


Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two calls, the time from the previous call disconnection to the beginning of the next call.





Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Call Mode


Indicates the mode of call count.

You can select the following values: l Finite: indicates that the number of calls is limited. The number of calls cannot exceed the value of Test Count. l Infinite: indicates that the number of calls is unlimited. The default value is Finite. Test Count

You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call and Call Mode is set to Finite.


The default value is 30. Call Start Mode

You can select the following values: l Unlimited: The Probe performs the voice call test without determining the current status of the terminal.

Indicates the mode in which the Probe starts a voice call test.

l Idle: When the terminal is not in idle state, if the current call is not terminated after the duration specified by Waiting Time, the Probe automatically disconnects the call and performs the voice call test. l Wait for call end: The Probe performs the voice call test after the current service performed on the terminal is automatically complete. Waiting Time

You can set this property when Call Start Mode is set to Idle.

Indicates the waiting time of a test.

You can select 0s, 5s, 10s, 15s, 30s, 60s, or 90s.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-49


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Command Type



l Qualcomm Command: This command type is applicable to Qualcomm chipset-based terminals. If terminals fail to initiate calls through Qualcomm commands, you can configure a modem port and set Command Type to AT Command.



Wait This describes the properties of the Wait test item. You can refer to this part when setting the time interval between two test items, and then perform related operations. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Wait Duration



WAP Download (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the WAP Download test item. You can refer to this part when performing the WAP download test, and then perform the related operations. You can test the download state of the WAP file by downloading file resources such as rings or pictures. You must perform the Dial Uptest before the WAP Download test.

14-50

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Count




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Interval



Timeout


Indicates the timeout period. The timing starts when the first download request is sent. If the download page is not obtained within the preset time, you can infer that the connection fails.

Download Type


Indicates the type of a downloaded file.

l Ring&Picture: refers to downloading pictures and rings. l Java: refers to downloading KJava. The default value is Ring&Picture.

Local Path

-

Indicates the local path for saving the downloaded file.

URL List

The URL starts with http://.

Indicates the URL for downloading pictures, rings, or KJava.

IP

Contact local network operators to obtain the IP address.

Indicates the IP address of the WAP gateway.

Port


Indicates the port number of the WAP.

WAP Gateway Connection (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the WAP Gateway Connection test item. You can refer to this part when performing the WAP gateway connection test, and then perform the related operations. You can test the gateway connection by sending the ping packet to the gateway. You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Gateway Connection test.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Count



Test Interval




14-51


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Timeout


Indicates the timeout time. The timing starts when the first gateway connection request is sent. If the connection is not set up within the preset time, you can infer that the connection fails.

IP



WAP Logon (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the WAP Logon test item. You can refer to this part when performing the WAP login test, and then perform the related operations. You can test the WAP login and upload. You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Logon test. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Count



Test Interval



Timeout


Indicates the timeout time. The timing starts when the first gateway connection request is sent. If the connection is not set up within the preset time, you can infer that the connection fails.

URL


Indicates the URL of the tested WAP page.

Download Icon


Indicates whether to download icons on the title page.

l True: downloads icons on the title page. l False: not download icons on the title page. The default value is True.

14-52

IP



Port




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

WAP Page Refresh (GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the WAP Page Refresh test item. You can refer to this part when performing the WAP page refreshing test, and then perform the related operations. You can test the upload state of a WAP page by refreshing the same page many times. You must perform the Dial Up test before the WAP Page Refresh test. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Count



Test Interval



Timeout


Indicates the timeout time. The timing starts when the first gateway connection request is sent. If the connection is not set up within the preset time, you can infer that the download fails.

Download Icon


Indicates whether to download icons on the title page.

l True: downloads icons on the title page. l False: not download icons on the title page. The default value is True.

URL


Indicates the URL of the tested WAP page.

IP



Port



NetEntry (WiMAX) This section describes the properties of the WiMAX NetEntry test item. You can refer to this section when the Probe performs NetEntry tests. NetEntry tests are used for measuring the network access performance. Before accessing the network during a test, the MS must exit from the network.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Count


Indicates the number of NetEntry tests.


14-53


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Interval

The default value is 5, and Indicates the interval between two the unit is second. NetEntry tests.

NetSearch (WiMAX) This section describes the properties of the NetSearch test item of the WiMAX system. You can perform the frequency scan test by referring to this part. The NetSearch test is used to scan the frequencies that are searched by the UE. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Scan Type


Indicates the scan type.

l Specified Frequency Scan: Indicates the frequency to be scanned. You can set the frequency in Center Frequency List. l Continuous Frequency Scan: Indicates the continuous frequency scan. The default value is Specified Frequency Scan. Center Frequency List

You can set this property when Scan Type is set to Specified FrequencyScan.

Indicates the center frequency to be scanned.

CenterFreqStart

You can set this property when Scan Type is set to Continuous FrequencyScan.

Indicates the start frequency of the continuous frequency scan.

Range: l WiMAX 2.3GHz: 2.3 to 2.4 l WiMAX 2.5GHz: 2.496 to 2.69 l WiMAX 3.5GHz: 3.4 to 3.6 The default value is 0 and the unit is MHz. CenterFreqStep

You can set this property when Scan Type is set to Continuous FrequencyScan. The value ranges from 0.25 to 10 and the unit is MHz.

14-54


Indicates the step of the continuous frequency scan. The value of this property must be multiples of 0.01.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

CenterFreqEnd


Indicates the end frequency of the continuous frequency scan.

Range: l WiMAX 2.3GHz: 2.3 to 2.4 l WiMAX 2.5GHz: 2.496 to 2.69 l WiMAX 3.5GHz: 3.4 to 3.6 The default value is 0 and the unit is MHz. BandWidth


Indicates the bandwidth.

The value can be 5, 7, 8.75, or 10. The default value is 0 and the unit is MHz. Exceptional Interval

The default value is 15. The value ranges from 0 to 30 and the unit is s.

Indicates the scan timeout period. When the value of CINR is set to a small value, you are advised to set this property to 15 or a greater value. 0 indicates the scan with indefinite scan period. In this case, the scanner performs continuous scan until an exception occurs.

Attach/Detach (LTE) This describes the properties of the Attach and Detach test items. You can refer to this part when performing the LTE attach or detach test, and then perform the related operations. NOTE

The attach and detach tests are performed alternately. If an attach test is performed, the next attach test cannot be performed until the detach test is performed.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-55


14 Appendix

Test Item

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Attach

Attach Type


Indicates the attach test type. Currently, only the attach test of PS is supported.

l PS: Indicates that the attach tests for only data services are to be performed. l PS_CS: Indicates that the attach tests for data and voice services are to be performed.

Timeout

The value is a positive integer ranging from 15 to 60, and the default value is 15, and the unit is second.

Indicates the time to wait for the attach success or failure.

Attach Mode


Indicates the attach test mode.

l Attach only: Indicates that only the attach test is performed. Before performing the next attach test, you must configure the LTE Detach test item. l Detach before Attach: Indicates that a detach test must be performed before the PS Attach test is performed.

TestCount

-

Indicates the test count.

Detach Type


Indicates the detach test type. Currently, only the detach test of PS is supported.

l PS: Indicates that the detach tests for only data services are to be performed. l CS: Indicates that the detach tests for only speech services are to be performed. l PS_CS: Indicates that the detach tests for data and voice services are to be performed.

Detach

Detach Type

The values are as follows: l PS: Indicates that the detach tests of only data services are to be performed. l CS: Indicates that the detach tests of only speech services are to be performed.

Indicates the detach test type. Currently, only the detach test of PS is supported.

l PS_CS: Indicates that the detach tests of data and voice services are to be performed.

14-56


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Test Item

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Timeout

The value is a positive integer ranging from 15 to 60, and the default value is 15. The unit is second.

Indicates the time to wait for the detach success or failure.

Cell Scan (LTE) This section describes the properties of the Cell Scan test item. You can perform the corresponding LTE cell scanning tests by referring to this part. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

FreqBandSear chType


Indicates the type of a cell to be scanned.

l Spec Band specifies that the cell searching is performed on the specified frequency band. The value ranges from Low Band to High Band. l Spec Freq specifies that the cell searching is performed on the specified EARFCNs. Note that the cell searching can be performed on a maximum of three EARFCNs. The number of EARFCNs to be scanned can be set in FreqCount. The values of EARFCNs can be set in SpecFreqx (x ranges from 1 to 3).

Low Band

The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 39650, and the default value is 32.

Indicates the start value of a frequency band to be scanned.

High Band


Indicates the end value of a frequency band to be scanned.

Iperf (LTE) This describes the properties of the Iperf test item. You can refer to this part when performing the TCP or UDP of the LTE network performance test, and then perform the related operations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-57


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Mode


Indicates the test mode.

l Server: Indicates the server mode. As the server, the Probe listens the specified port, performs the related operations according to the configuration after receiving a connection request or data from the client, and displays the network performance indicator. l Client: Indicates the client mode. As the client, the Probe sends TCP or UDP packets to the specified server in a period according to the configuration. Protocol

Supports the TCP and UDP.

Indicates the data transmission protocol type.

Port

The value ranges from 0 to 65535.

l When Mode is set to Server, it refers to the port listened by the server. l When Mode is set to Client, it indicates the client port connected to the server.

Report Interval

The value is an integer, and the unit is second.

Indicates the data report cycle.

The default value is 0, which indicates that the data is not periodically reported. Test Count

-

Indicates the number of Iperf tests.

Test Interval


Indicates the interval between two continuous Iperf tests.

BandWidth

You can set this property when Mode is set to Client.

Indicates the data transmission bandwidth.

The value is an integer, and the default value is 1000. The unit is kbit/s. Server Address

14-58



Indicates the IP address of the server accessed by the client.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Test Mode


Indicates the client test mode.

The values are as follows: l Normal: Indicates the unidirectional test mode. l DualTest: Indicates the half duplex test mode. l Tradeoff: Indicates the duplex test mode. The default value is Normal. Test Time


Indicates the test duration.

The value is an integer, and the default value is 10, and the unit is second.

Frequency Scan (LTE) This describes the properties of the Frequency Scan test item. You can refer to this part when performing the LTE frequency scanning test, and then perform the related operations. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

FreqBandSearchType


Indicates the band searching type.

l All Band: Search the cell in all bands supported by the UE. l Spec Band: Search the cell in the specified band. The default value is All Band.

FreqBandSearchDelay

The value can be set to 100, 300, 500, and 1000. The unit is ms. The default value is 1000.

Low Band

You can set this property when FreqBandSearchType is set to Spec Band.

Indicates the cycle for reporting the frequency scanning result. Indicates the start band.

The value is an integer ranging from 0 to 1000, and the default value is 32. High Band

You can set this property when FreqBandSearchType is set to All Band.

Indicates the end band.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-59


14 Appendix

14.1.3 Test Items of PCTel Scanners This describes the PCTel scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations.

Test Items Supported By the PCTel Scanners This provides the test items supported by the scanners of the PCTel series. N et w or k

PCTel DTI EX Test Items

PCTel DTI LX Test Items

PCTel PCT-505 Test Items

PCTel PCT-520 Test Items

G S M

l CW

l CW

-

l CW

l GSM Scanning

l GSM Scanning

l GSM Scanning

l Spectrum Analysis

l Spectrum Analysis

l Spectrum Analysis

W C D M A

l CW

l CW

l CW

l CW

l RSSI Scanning

l Pilot Scanning

l RSSI Scanning

l RSSI Scanning

l Spectrum Analysis

l RSSI Scanning

l Spectrum Analysis

l Spectrum Analysis

l TopN Pilot Scanning


-

-

-

-


C D M A

l Spectrum Analysis l TopN Pilot Scanning l CW

-

l Pilot Scanning l RSSI Scanning l Spectrum Analysis l TopN Pilot Scanning

W i M A X

l CW

-

l RSSI Scanning l TopN Preamble Index Scanning

CW (PCTel) This section describes the properties of CW test item. You can refer to this section when performing the CW test by using the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX PCTel scanners.

14-60


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Description

Channel

l For GSM, WCDMA, and CDMA scanners, Channel indicates the tested ARFCN. You can manually enter ARFCNs. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by commas. A maximum of 100 ARFCNs can be set. l For WiMAX scanners, Channel indicates the channel corresponding to the tested frequency. The format is [frequency | channel]. in the right area. Enter the value of Frequency in the You can click displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The system automatically calculates the channel to which this frequency belongs.

Output Mode

Indicates the interval of reporting GSM or WCDMA scanner data. You can select either of the following values: l Normal: Indicates that scanner data is reported at the default interval. l Stacked: Indicates that scanner data is reported at an interval of 20 ms. This property can be set for only EX or LX PCTel scanners.

GSM Scanning This describes the properties of the GSM Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when performing the scanning test by using the GSM PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Channel List

l The ARFCNs of GSM 850 (869 MHz - 894 MHz) range from 127 to 252. l The ARFCNs of E-GSM (925 MHz - 960 MHz) range from 0 to 124.

Description Indicates the tested ARFCN. Click on the right of the Channel List. In the displayed GSM channel dialog box, select the ARFCNs to be scanned. The maximum number is 255.

l The ARFCNs of DCS 1800 (1805 MHz - 1880 MHz) range from 511 to 886. l The ARFCNs of PCS 1900 (1930 MHz - 1990 MHz) range from 511 to 811. RSSI Threshold

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

The value ranges from -115 to -80. The default value is -105. The Unit is dBm.

Indicates the threshold of the received signal strength indicator.


14-61


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Option Code


Indicates the function option of the scanner.

l BSIC & C/I, which indicates that the scanner used for the test supports both the BSIC and C/ I functions. l BSIC, which indicates that the scanner used for the test supports only the BSIC function.

If the scanner does not support the C/I function, Option Code must be set to BSIC. Otherwise, the test cannot be performed normally. In the IE view, The C/I value is displayed as -10.

Spectrum Analysis This describes the properties of the Spectrum Analysis test item. You can refer to this part when performing the spectrum analysis by using the GSM, WCDMA, or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Center Frequency

Unit: MHz

Indicates the center frequency.

Span

Unit: MHz

Indicates the bandwidth measured in the spectrum analysis.

RBW

You can select 5, 10, 20, 40, or 80. The default value is 80. The unit is kHz.

Indicates the resolution bandwidth, which is used to calculate the start frequency and the number of ARFCNs.

NumberSweeps

You can select 1, 2, 4, 8, or 16. The default value is 2.

Indicates the number of scanning times.

Pilot Scanning This describes the properties of the Pilot Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when performing the pilot scanning test by using the WCDMA or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations.

14-62

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Channel

A maximum of six ARFCNs can be tested simultaneously. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by commas. Each pilot code ranges from 0 to 511.

Indicates the tested ARFCN.


Click on the right of Channel, and then set the pilot code to be scanned.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

ChipWindowSize

You can manually enter the size ranging from 1 to 64. The default value is 32. The unit is dB.

Indicates the size of the chip window.

PNThreshold

You can manually enter the threshold. The value ranges from -30 to 0. The default value is -20. The unit is dB.

Indicates the threshold of the available pseudo-random number.

RSSI Scanning This section describes the properties of the RSSI Scanning test item. You can refer to this section when performing the signal strength scan test by using the WCDMA, CDMA, or WiMAX PCTel scanners. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

BandWidth

You can select 5MHz or 10MHz.

Indicates the used bandwidth of the WiMAX scanner.

Channel for BandWidth

Format: [frequency | channel]

Indicates the channel corresponding to the tested frequency of the WiMAX scanner. The procedure for setting this property is as follows: 1. Select a used bandwidth from BandWidth. in the right area. The 2. Click Channel Setting dialog box is displayed. 3. Enter the value of Frequency in the displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The system automatically calculates the channel to which this frequency belongs.

Channel

-

Indicates the tested ARFCN of the WCDMA or CDMA scanner. You can manually enter ARFCNs. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by commas.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-63


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Output Mode


Indicates the scanner data reporting mode. This property can be set for only EX or LX PCTel scanners.

l Normal: Indicates that scanner data is reported at the default interval. l Stacked: Indicates that scanner data is reported at an interval of 20 ms.

TopN Pilot Scanning This describes the properties of the TopN Pilot Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when measuring TopN pilots by using the WCDMA or CDMA PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

N

You can manually enter the number ranging from 1 to 32.

Indicates the number of pilots to be scanned.

Channel

A maximum of six ARFCNs can be tested simultaneously. Multiple ARFCNs are separated by commas.


ChipWindowSize

You can manually enter the size ranging from 1 to 64. The default value is 32. The unit is dB.

Indicates the size of the chip window.

PNThreshold

You can manually enter the threshold. The value ranges from -30 to 0. The default value is -20. The unit is dB.

Indicates the threshold of the available pseudo-random number (PN).

TopN Preamble Index Scanning This describes the properties of the TopN Preamble Index Scanning test item. You can refer to this part when measuring Top N preamble index by using the WiMAX PCTel scanner, and then perform the related operations.

14-64

Property

Value/Range/Unit

N

You can manually enter Indicates the number of preamble indexes to be the number ranging scanned. from 1 to 32. The default value is 3.

Description


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

BandWidth

You can select 5MHz or 10MHz.

Indicates the used bandwidth.

Channel for BandWidth

Format : [frequency | channel]

Indicates the channel corresponding to the tested frequency. The setting steps are as follows: 1. Select a used bandwidth from BandWidth. 2. Click in the right area. The Channel Setting dialog box is displayed. 3. Enter the value of Frequence in the displayed Channel Setting dialog box. The system automatically calculates the channel to which this frequency belongs.

14.1.4 Test Items of Anritsu Scanners This describes the Anritsu scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Anritsu scanner, and then perform the related operations.

Test Items Supported By the Anritsu Scanners This provides the test items supported by the scanners of the Anritsu ML series. No.

Test Item

ML8720

ML8740

ML8742

1

CW

×

√

√

2

GSM Specified/ UNSpecified

×

√

√

3

MultiNetwork Specified

×

√

√

4

MultiNetwork UNSpecified

×

√

√

5

Specified Base Station Measurement

√

√

√

6

UNSpecified Base Station Measurement

√

√

√

NOTE

l √: indicates that the corresponding scanner supports the test item. l ×: indicates that the corresponding scanner does not support the test item.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-65


14 Appendix

CW (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the CW test item. You can refer to this section when testing a continuous wave by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu scanner. Property Unspecifie d

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Calibrate User

Unit: dB

Indicates the user correction value, which is used for compensating antenna loss.

Reference

The value can be any of the following:

Indicates whether Calibrate User is valid.

l True l False The default value is False. Adjust Antenna


Indicates the mode for adjusting the antenna gain.

l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. Conditions

Carrier Frequency

The value ranges from 925.0 to 960.0, 1805.0 to 1880.0, and 2110.0 to 2170.0, at a step length of 0.1. The unit is MHz.

Indicates the carrier frequency to be tested.

Trigger Demultiplier

The value range is 1 to 500

Indicates the external triggering demultiplier. One sampling is performed every time a triggering pulse of the preset value is detected.

ScanRate

l When External Trigger is set to 0, ScanRate ranges from 0.01 to 0.09, 0.1 to 0.9, 1 to 9, 10 to 90, and 100 to 500. The unit is second.

Indicates the measurement duration.

l When External Trigger is set to 1, ScanRate ranges from 1 to 500. The unit is times. If ScanRate is set to a value less than 10 (ms), the measurement duration is 10 ms.

14-66


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property External Trigger

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Indicates whether to adopt the external triggering mode.

l 0: The external triggering mode is not adopted, that is, CWs are sampled according to the internal timing mode. l 1: The external triggering mode is adopted, that is, CWs are sampled according to the external triggering mode. The default value is Disable. Data Processing The value can be any of the Method following: l Median: The measurement duration is 50.

Indicates the method for processing the data sampled during each measurement duration.

l Average: The measurement duration is -1. The default value is Average. Threshold

The unit is dB.

Indicates the threshold of white noise. The recommended value is -120.

GSM Specified/UNSpecified (Anritsu, GSM) This describes the properties of the GSM Specified/UNSpecified test item. You can refer to this section when testing a specified or unspecified GSM cell by using the GSM Anritsu scanner. Property GSM Specfied/ Unspecifi ed BTS

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Calibrate User

Unit: dB


Reference



l True l False The default value is False. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-67


14 Appendix

Property Adjust Antenna

Value/Range/Unit

Description



l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. Specified/ Unspecified

The value can be Unspecified or Specified. The default value is Specified.

ARFCN/ Frequency

-

Indicates the specified or unspecified BTS measurement.

Enables you to set the ARFCN or frequency of the channel to be tested. You can set this parameter as follows: 1. Click on the right of ARFCN/ Frequency. The Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box is displayed. 2. In the Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box, set the starting and ending ARFCNs or frequencies, the number of channels to be tested, and whether to perform the test.

Condition s

Threshold

The threshold must be set to a value not greater than -120. The unit is dB.

Indicates the threshold of white noise.

BSIC Decode


Indicates whether to decode the base station identify code (BSIC).

l 0: The BSIC is decoded. l 1: The BSIC is not decoded. The default value is 1.

14-68


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property External Trigger

Value/Range/Unit

Description



l Disable: Sampling is performed according to the internal timing mode. l Enable: Sampling is performed according to the external triggering mode. The default value is Disable. Trigger Demultiplier



Measurement Duration

l When External Trigger is set to Disable, Measurement Duration ranges from 0.02 to 0.05 at a step length of 0.01. The unit is second.


l When External Trigger is set to Enable, Measurement Duration ranges from 1 to 500 at a step length of 1. The unit is times. RSSI Methods

The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%. l The value -1 indicates Average.

Indicates the method for processing the received signal strength indicator.

l The range 0%-100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-69


14 Appendix

Property C/I Methods

Value/Range/Unit

Description

The value can be -1 and 0% to 100% at a step length of 10%.

Indicates the method for processing the C/I data.

l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0%-100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average.

MultiNetwork Specified (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the MultiNetwork Specified test item. You can refer to this section when testing multi-network specified cell by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu scanner. Property Common Setting

External Trigger

Value/Range/Unit

Description



l Disable: CWs are sampled according to the internal timing mode. l Enable: CWs are sampled according to the external triggering mode. The default value is Disable.

14-70


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property Diversity

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Enables you to set the diversity function or the two carrier frequencies measurement function.

l OFF: The diversity function is disabled. If the required diversity antenna is not installed, you can select only OFF. l Receive ANT: The diversity function is enabled. l Two Carrier: The two carrier frequencies measurement function is enabled. The default value is OFF. GSM Specified BTS

Calibrate User

Unit: dB


Reference






l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. RF Input Type

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Only RF Input1 is supported for the GSM measurement.


Indicates the radio frequency (RF) input mode.

14-71


14 Appendix

Property ARFCN/ Frequency

Value/Range/Unit

Description

-

Enables you to set the ARFCN or frequency to be scanned. Click on the right of ARFCN/Frequency. In the displayed Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box, set the starting and ending ARFCNs or frequencies, the number of channels to be tested, and whether to perform the test.

Threshold



BSIC Decode


Indicates whether to decode the BSIC.

l 0: The BSIC is decoded. l 1: The BSIC is not decoded. The default value is 1. Trigger Demultiplier






l When External Trigger is set to Enable, Measurement Duration ranges from 1 to 500 at a step length of 1. The unit is times.

14-72


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property RSSI Methods

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Indicates the data processing method for the received signal strength indicator.

l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. C/I Methods


Indicates the data processing method for the C/I.

l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. Search Band Select


Indicates the specified band to be tested for the GSM.

l Both Band l Each Band The default value is Both Band.

WCDMA Specified BTS

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Both Band

You can select any value from 1 to 32.

Indicates the number of a dual-band.

Carrier Frequency

The value ranges from 2110.0 to 2200.0 at a step length of 0.2. The unit is MHz.

Indicates the carrier frequency of an antenna in RF Input2 mode.


14-73


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

RF Input Type

Only RF Input2 is supported for the WCDMA measurement.

Indicates the radio frequency input mode.

Calibrate User

Unit: dB


Reference






l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. Measurement Duration

The value can be 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, or 10. The default value is 0.5. The unit is second.


Fingers at ANT2

The value range is 0-6. The value 0 indicates that the scanner is not installed with any diversity antenna.

Indicates the maximum number of fingers used by antenna 2.

All Methods


Indicates that the same data processing method is used for the RSCP, ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total power spectral density of the receive bandwidth (Ec/ No), and signal-to-noise ratio (SIR).

l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average.

14-74


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property RSCP Method

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Indicates the data processing method for the RSCP.

l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. Ec/No Method


Indicates the data processing method for the Ec/No.

l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to -100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. SIR Method


Indicates the data processing method for the SIR.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-75


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Rake Threshold

The value range is 0 to 20. The default value is 20. The unit is dB.

Indicates the threshold of the rake receiver. The valid receive range of the rake receiver is from the best finger minus the rake threshold to the best finger.

Selection Level


Indicates the range of the fingers that can be received. A finger that is greater than the receiver noise plus the selection level can be received.

Channel Code

-

Sets the primary and secondary scrambling codes and the channel number. You can set this parameter as follows: on the right of 1. Click Channel Code. The MeasureChannel dialog box is displayed. 2. In the MeasureChannel dialog box, set the primary and secondary scrambling codes, channel number, and coding mode.

MultiNetwork UNSpecified (Anritsu, GSM/WCDMA) This describes the properties of the MultiNetwork UNSpecified test item. You can refer to this section when testing multi-network unspecified cell by using the GSM or WCDMA Anritsu scanner.

14-76


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property Commo n Setting

External Trigger

Value/Range/Unit

Description

The value can be either of the following:


l Disable: Sampling is performed according to the internal timing mode. l Enable: Sampling is performed according to the external triggering mode. The default value is Disable. Diversity

The value can be any of the following: l OFF: The diversity function is disabled. If the required diversity antenna is not installed, you can select only OFF.

Enables you to set the diversity function or the two carrier frequencies measurement function.

l Receive ANT: The diversity function is enabled. l Two Carrier: The two carrier frequencies measurement function is enabled. The default value is OFF. GSM UNSpec ified BTS

Calibrate User

Unit: dB


Reference






l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. RF Input Type

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Only RF Input1 is supported for the GSM measurement.


Indicates the radio frequency (RF) input mode.

14-77


14 Appendix

Property ARFCN/ Frequency

Value/Range/Unit

Description

-

Enables you to set the ARFCN or frequency to be scanned. You can set this parameter as follows: 1. Click on the right of ARFCN/Frequency. The Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box is displayed. 2. In the Unspecified Config Dialog dialog box, set the starting and ending ARFCNs or frequencies, the number of channels to be tested, and whether to perform the test.

Threshold



BSIC Decode


Indicates whether to decode the BSIC.

l 0: The BSIC is decoded. l 1: The BSIC is not decoded. The default value is 1. Trigger Demultiplier

The value range is 1 to 500.





l When External Trigger is set to Enable, Measurement Duration ranges from 1 to 500 at a step length of 1. The unit is times.

14-78


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property RSSI Methods

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Indicates the data processing method for the received signal strength indicator.

l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average. C/I Methods


Indicates the data processing method for the C/I.

l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average. WCDM A UNSpec ified BTS

Carrier Frequency


Indicates the carrier frequency of an antenna in RF Input2 mode.

RF Input Type

Only RF Input1 is supported for the WCDMA measurement.

Indicates the RF input mode.

Calibrate User

Unit: dB


Reference



l True l False The default value is False.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-79


14 Appendix


Value/Range/Unit

Description



l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. Measurement Duration



Fingers at ANT2

The value range is 0 to 6. The value 0 indicates that the scanner is not installed with any diversity antenna.


All Methods


Indicates that the same data processing method is used for the RSCP, Ec/No, and SIR.

l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. RSCP Method



l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average.

14-80


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property Ec/No Method

Value/Range/Unit

Description



l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. SIR Method




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Rake Threshold



Selection Level




14-81


14 Appendix

Property Channel Code

Value/Range/Unit

Description

-


CH Limits

14-82

Group Number Start


Indicates the starting number of the primary scrambling code group.

Group Number End


Indicates the ending number of the primary scrambling code group.

Cell Number Start

The value range is 0 to 7. The default value is 0.

Indicates the starting cell number.

Cell Number End


Indicates the ending cell number.

Min.Secondary SC


Indicates the minimum secondary scrambling code.

Max.Secondary SC


Indicates the maximum secondary scrambling code.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property Searching Method

Value/Range/Unit

Description


Indicates the searching method.

l P-CPICH: Scrambling codes are searched on only the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH). l SCH: Scrambling codes are searched on the Primary Synchronization Channel (PSCH) and Secondary Synchronization Channel (SSCH). The default value is SCH. Measurement Channel


Indicates the number of the channel to be measured.

Specified Channel

The value can be False or True. The default value is False.

Indicates the number of the specified channel.

Measurement Channel is valid only when Specified Channel is set to True.

Specified Base Station Measurement (Anritsu, WCDMA) This describes the properties of the Specified Base Station Measurement test item. You can refer to this section when testing a specified WCDMA cell by using the Anritsu scanner. Property Unspecified

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Calibrate User

Unit: dB


Reference



l True l False The default value is False.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-83


14 Appendix


Value/Range/Unit

Description



l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable. Conditions




Fingers at ANT1

The value range is 1 to 6. The recommended value is 6.


Fingers at ANT2



Diversity


Enables you to set the diversity function.

l OFF: The diversity function is disabled. If the required diversity antenna is not installed, you can select only OFF. l Receive ANT: The diversity function is enabled. The default value is OFF.

14-84


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property All Methods

Value/Range/Unit

Description



l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average. RSCP Method



l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average. Ec/No Method



l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-85


14 Appendix

Property SIR Method

Value/Range/Unit

Description



l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum, respectively. The default value is Average.

14-86

Rake Threshold



Selection Level



Carrier Frequency


Indicates the carrier frequency of the antenna RF input.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property CH Code

Channel Code

Value/Range/Unit

Description

-


UNSpecified Base Station Measurement (Anritsu, WCDMA) This describes the properties of the UNSpecified Base Station Measurement test item. You can refer to this section when testing an unspecified WCDMA cell by using the Anritsu scanner. Property Unspecifie d

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Calibrate User

Unit: dB


Reference






l Disable l Standard l Customized The default value is Disable.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-87


14 Appendix

Property Conditions

Value/Range/Unit

Description




Fingers at ANT1

The value range is 1 to 6. Indicates the maximum The recommended value is number of fingers used by 6. antenna 1.

Fingers at ANT2



Diversity


Enables you to set the diversity function.

l OFF: The diversity function is disabled. If the required diversity antenna is not installed, you can select only OFF. l Receive ANT: The diversity function is enabled. The default value is OFF. All Methods




14-88


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property RSCP Method

Value/Range/Unit

Description



l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. Ec/No Method



l The value -1 indicates Average. l The range 0% to 100% indicates the frequency distribution. Values 0%, 50%, and 100% respectively indicate Minimum, Median, and Maximum. The default value is Average. SIR Method




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-89


14 Appendix

Property

CH Limits

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Rake Threshold



Selection Level



Carrier Frequency


Indicates the carrier frequency of the antenna RF input.

Group Number Start


Indicates the starting number of the primary scrambling code group.

Group Number End


Indicates the ending number of the primary scrambling code group.

Cell Number Start


Indicates the starting cell number.

Cell Number End


Indicates the ending cell number.

Min.Secondary SC


Indicates the minimum secondary scrambling code.

Max.Secondary SC


Indicates the maximum secondary scrambling code.

Searching Method


Indicates the searching method.

l P-CPICH: Scrambling codes are searched on only the CPICH channel. l SCH: Scrambling codes are searched on P-SCH and S-SCH. The default value is SCH.

14-90


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Measurement Channel

The value ranges from 1 to Indicates the number of the 32, and the default value is channel to be measured. 6.

Specified Channel

The value can be False or True. The default value is False.

Indicates the number of the specified channel.

Measurement Channel is valid only when Specified Channel is set to True. CH Code

Channel Code

-


14.1.5 Test Items of Rohde & Schwarz Scanners This describes the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner test items and their properties. You can refer to this part when designing a test plan for the Rohde & Schwarz TSMX scanner, and then perform the related operations.

TSMX Spectrum Analysis (WCDMA) This describes the properties of the TSMX Spectrum Analysis test item. You can refer to this section when performing the spectrum analysis by using the TSMX scanner.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Center Frequency

You can manually enter a value ranging from 80 MHz to 3 GHz.


Span

You can manually enter a value. The maximum value is 40. The unit is MHz.

Indicates the bandwidth to be scanned.


14-91


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

RBW

Unit: kHz

Indicates the resolution bandwidth.

TSMX TopN (WCDMA) This describes the properties of the TSMX TopN test item. You can refer to this section when measuring TopN pilots by using the TSMX scanner. Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Frequency

You can set a maximum of six frequencies by using commas to separate the frequencies. The value ranges from 80 MHz to 3 GHz.

Indicates the frequency under test.

Pilot Number

The value range is 1 to 6.

Indicates the maximum number of pilots to be scanned.

PNThreshold

The value range is -130 to -20. The default value is -115. The unit is dBm.

Indicates the valid threshold of the RSCP signal.

MeasureRate

The value range is 0.5 to 10. The unit is Hz

Indicates the scanning frequency.

TimeSyncMod e


Indicates the time synchronization mode.

l 0: You can use the internal clock to synchronize the TSMX scanner. l 1: You can use the GSM signal to synchronize the TSMX scanner. l 2: You can use the PSS or GSM signal to synchronize the TSMX scanner. l 3: You can use the PPS pulse to synchronize the TSMX scanner. l 4: This mode can be used for only the WCDMA_3GPP PN scanner. The average of measured CPICH signals is used. l 256: The synchronization clock source in use is unknown.

14.2 Description of Predefined Events This describes the system predefined events of the GSM, WCDMA, CDMA, WiMAX and LTE networks. You can refer to this part when configuring event parameters on each network. 14-92


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

14.2.1 General Events This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section when configuring general events and then perform the related operations. 14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the GSM network. 14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the WCDMA network. 14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations. 14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events This section describes the predefined events in the WiMAX network. You can refer to this section when configuring predefined events in the WiMAX network. 14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events This section describes the predefined events in the LTE network. You can configure LTE network events by referring to the following descriptions.

14.2.1 General Events This section describes the general events provided by the Probe. You can refer to this section when configuring general events and then perform the related operations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Name

Meaning

Description

Call Setup Timeout

Call setup timeout

This event occurs when a call setup event times out.

Data Transfer Start

Data transfer start

This event occurs when a data service test, such as FTP test or HTTP test, starts.

Filemark

-

A filemark is encountered in the logfile.

Record Pause

Suspension of logfile recording

This event occurs when you suspend the recording of logfiles in the Probe.

Record Resume

Resuming of logfile recording

This event occurs when logfiles continue to be recorded from the time point the recording is suspended for the last time.

Test Stop

Stopping of a test

This event occurs when a test is stopped in the Probe.

MS Connected

MS connection success

This event occurs when an MS is successfully connected.

MS Disconnected

MS disconnection success

This event occurs when an MS is successfully disconnected.


14-93


14 Appendix

14.2.2 GSM Predefined Events This describes the GSM predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the GSM network.

Packet Service Events This describes the packet service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when configuring the packet service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related operations.

14-94

Name

Meaning

Description

AttachAttem pt

Attach attempt

The MS attempts to attach to the packet service.

AttachSuc

Attach success

If the MS receives the Attach Accept or Attach Complete message within the specified time after sending the Attach Request message, you can infer that the attaching is successful.

AttachFail

Attach failure

After sending the Attach Request message, the MS receives the Attach Reject message or does not receive the Attach Accept or Attach Complete message until the Attach Request message times out.

Data Transfer Start

Data transfer start

The data services such as FTP and HTTP services start to be executed, and thus the data transfer starts.

DetachAtte mpt

Detach attempt

The MS attempts to detach from the packet service.

DetachSuc

Detach success

If the MS receives the Detach Accept message within the specified time after sending the Detach Request message, you can infer that the detaching is successful.

GSMMMS MOAttempt

MMS Sending attempt

The MS attempts to send an MMS.

GSMMMS MOSuc

MMS sending success

The MS sends an MMS successfully.

GSMMMS MOFail

MMS sending failure

The MS fails to send an MMS.

PDPActivati onReq

PDP activation request

If the MS sends the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP request is activated.

PDPActivati onSuc

PDP activation success

If the MS receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation is successful.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

PDPActivati onFail

PDP activation failure

If the MS does not receive the Activate PDP Context Accept message within the specified time after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation fails.

PDPDeactiv ationReq

PDP deactivation request

The MS sends the Deactivate PDP Context Request message to request the PDP deactivation.

PDPDeactiv ationSuc

PDP deactivation success

If the MS receives the Deactivate PDP Context Accept message after sending the Deactivate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation is successful.

RAUpdateR eq

Routing area update request

The MS sends the Routing Area Update Request message to request the routing area update.

RAUpdateS uc

Routing area update success

If the MS receives the Routing Area Update Accept or Routing Area Update Complete message after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you can infer that the routing area is updated successfully.

RAUpdateFa il

Routing area update failure

If the MS does not receive the Routing Area Update message after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you can infer that the routing area fails to be updated.

RAS Dial Attempt

RAS dial attempt

The remote access service (RAS) dial is attempted.

RAS Dial

RAS dial success

The RAS dial is successful.

RAS Hangup

RAS hangup

The RAS hangs up.

RAS Error

RAS error

The RAS dial is terminated exceptionally.

Session Start

Session start

The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are started. The session start events include FTP Get and FTP Put.

Session End

Session end

The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are ended.

Session Drop

Session drop

Any of the following conditions indicates that the task is terminated exceptionally: l In the FTP service, the data downloading is terminated exceptionally. l In the HTTP and WAP Download services, if the cause value of the Deactivate PDP Context Request message of the MS is not Regular Deactivation, you can infer that the PDP session is dropped.

Session Error

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Session error

The data services such as FTP and HTTP fail to be executed.


14-95


14 Appendix

Voice Service Events This describes the voice service events of the GSM. You can refer to this part when configuring the voice service events on the GSM network, and then perform the related operations.

14-96

Name

Meaning

Description

GSMCallAttempt (MOC)

GSM mobile originating call attempt

The MS sends the Channel Request message to request the traffic channel. The situation varying according to the cause values is MOC. MOC indicates a mobile originating call.

GSMCallAttempt (MTC)

GSM mobile terminating call attempt

The MS sends the Channel Request message to request the traffic channel. The situation varying according to the cause values is MTC. MTC indicates a mobile terminating call.

GSMCallAttemptRetry

GSM call attempt retry

The MS repeatedly sends the Channel Request message after sending a Channel Request message and before receiving the Immediate Assignment message.

GSMAssignmentSuc

GSM assignment success

If the MS sends the Assignment Complete message after sending the Assignment command message, you can infer the GSM assignment is successful.

GSMAssignmentFail

GSM assignment failure

If the MS receives the Assignment Failure message after receiving the Assignment command message, you can infer the GSM assignment fails.

GSMOutgoingCallSetup

GSM outgoing call setup

The outgoing call is set up successfully.

GSMIncomingCallSetup

GSM incoming call setup

The incoming call is set up successfully.

GSMOutgoingCallEstablished

GSM outgoing call establishment success

The calling MS receives the Downlink Connect message or Uplink Connect Ack message, you can infer that the GSM outgoing call is established successfully.

GSMIncomingCallEstablished

GSM incoming call establishment success

The called MS receives the Downlink Connect message or Uplink Connect Ack message, you can infer that the GSM incoming call is established successfully.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

GSMOutgoingCallSetupFailRF

GSM outgoing call establishment failure

Call abnormally ended prior to GSMOutgoingCallSetup event (RF reason).

GSMIncomingCallSetupFailRF

GSM incoming call establishment failure

Call abnormally ended prior to GSMIncomingCallSetup event (RF reason).

GSMOutgoingCallSetupFailNotRF

GSM outgoing call establishment failure (not RF reason)

Call abnormally ended prior to GSMOutgoingCallSetup event (not RF reason).

GSMIncomingCallSetupFailNotRF

GSM incoming call establishment failure (not RF reason)

Call abnormally ended prior to GSMIncomingCallSetup event (not RF reason).

GSMCallCompleted

GSM call completed

If the MS receives the Disconnect, Release, or Release complete message, you can infer that the GSM call is complete.

GSMCallDropped

GSM call dropped

The call is terminated exceptionally after being established successfully.

GSMHandoverReq

GSM inter-cell handover request

An attempted inter-cell handover in GSM.

GSMHandoverSuc

GSM inter-cell handover success

Successful inter-cell handover in GSM.

GSMHandoverFail

GSM inter-cell handover failure

An attempted inter-cell handover in GSM failed.

GSMIntracellHandoverReq

GSM intra-cell handover request

An attempted intra-cell handover in GSM.

GSMIntracellHandoverSuc

GSM intra-cell handover success

Successful intra-cell handover in GSM.

GSMIntracellHandoverFail

GSM intra-cell handover failure

An attempted intra-cell handover in GSM failed.

GSMSDCCHAssigne d

GSM SDCCH assignment success

After the GSM call attempt event occurs, the MS receives the Immediate Assignment or Immediate Assignment Extend message to assign the stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH).

GSMSDCCHCallDro p

GSM SDCCH call dropped

During the period from the successful SDCCH assignment to the call establishment, the signaling process terminated exceptionally.


14-97


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

GSMCellReselection

GSM cell reselection

The MS selects a new serving cell in idle status.

GSMLocationUpdateSuc

GSM location update success

If the MS receives the Location Updating Accept message, the GSM location is updated.

GSMLocationUpdateFail

GSM location update failure

The MS fails to update the location area code (LAC).

GSMSMSSentAttempt

GSM SMS sent attempt

The MS attempts to send an SMS message.

GSMSMSSentSuc

GSM SMS sent success

The MS succeeds in sending an SMS message.

GSMSMSSentFail

GSM SMS sent failure

The MS sends an SMS message failed.

GSMSMSReceived

GSM SMS received

The MS succeeds in receiving an SMS message.

CMServiceReq

Connection management service request

-

CMServiceAcpt

Connection management service accept

-

CMServiceReqRej

Connection management service failure

-

14.2.3 WCDMA Predefined Events This describes the WCDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the WCDMA network.

Authentication Ciphering Events This describes the authentication ciphering events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the authentication ciphering events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations.

14-98

Name

Meaning

Description

AuthenCiph erReq

Authenticati on ciphering request

If the UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REQ message, you can infer that the UE requests the authentication ciphering.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

AuthenCiph erSuc

Authenticati on ciphering success

If the network receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REQ message and sends the Authentication AND Ciphering Resp message, you can infer that the authentication is ciphered successfully.

AuthenCiph erFail

Authenticati on ciphering failure

When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the authentication fails to be ciphered. l The UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering REJ message. l The UE receives the Authentication AND Ciphering Failure message. l The UE does not receive the Authentication AND Ciphering Resp message within the specified time.

Authentication Events This describes the authentication events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the authentication events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

Authenticat ionReq

Authenticati on request

If the network receives the Authentication Request message, you can infer that the UE originates an authentication request.

AuthenticationRsp

Authenticati on success

If the network receives the Authentication Request message and sends the Authentication Response message to the UE, and then the UE does not receive the Authentication Reject message within the specified time, you can infer that the UE authentication is successful.

Authenticat ionFail

Authenticati on failure

When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the authentication fails. l No response to the Authentication Request message is received within the specified time. l The UE receives the Authentication Failure message. l The UE receives the Authentication Reject message.

Call Connection Events This describes the call connection events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring call connection events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Name

Meaning

Description

PagingType1

Paging type 1

This is the paging event of the UE in idle status.


14-99


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

PagingType2

Paging type 2

This is the paging event of the UE in dedicated status during the concurrent service.

OutgoingCallAt tempt

Outgoing call attempt

The RRC connection request is sent, and the cause value of the RRC request is Originating Conversational Call or Emergency Call. If the UE does not receive the RRC request or the cause value of the RRC request is incorrect but receives the CM Service or Call Proceeding request, the Outgoing Call Attempt event also occurs.

IncomingCallAt tempt

Incoming call attempt

The RRC connection request is sent, and the cause value of the RRC request is any of the following values: l Terminating Conversational Call l Paging Type2 l Paging response

14-100

OutgoingCallSe tupSuc

Outgoing call setup success

-

IncomingCallSe tupSuc

Incoming call setup success

-

OutgoingCallSe tupFailRFReaso n

Outgoing call setup failure (RF reason)

-

IncomingCallSe tupFailRFReaso n

Incoming call setup failure (RF reason)

-

OutgoingCallSe tupFailNotRFR eason

Outgoing call setup failure (not RF reason)

The outgoing call is interrupted or cancelled.

IncomingCallSe tupFailNotRFR eason

Incoming call setup failure (not RF reason)

The incoming call is interrupted or cancelled.

CallSetupLinkRestore

Call establishment link restored

The call reestablishment caused by the interrupted signal link during the call establishment process also is successful.

OutgoingCallEs tablished

Outgoing call established

The outgoing call receives the Connect message or sends the Connect Acknowledge message.

IncomingCallEs tablished

Incoming call established

The incoming call sends the Connect message or receives the Connect Acknowledge message.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

CallDropped

Call dropped

l When the UE is in dedicated status and does not perform inter-system handovers, if the UE receives any of the following messages, you can infer that the call is dropped. – Master Information Block message – System Information1 message – The RRC state is RRC Disconnected. l The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message whose cause value is RRC Abnormal Release. l The UE receives the CC Disconnect or CC Release Complete message whose cause value is not any of the following values: – Normal Call Clearing – Normal Unspecified – User alerting no answer – User busy – Call rejected – Destination out of order

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

CallCompleted

Call completed

The call is connected and ended properly.

LinkRestoreAttempt

Link restored attempt

l The RRC state received by the UE is CELL_FACH.

LinkRestoreSuc

Link restored success

l The RRC state sent to the UE is CELL_DCH.

LinkRestoreFail

Link restored failure

The reported RRC state is RRC_Disconnect.

WCDMASMSS entAttempt

WCDMA SMS sending attempt

The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message whose cause value is Originating Low Priority Signaling and then receives the CM Service Request message within the specified time.

WCDMASMSS ent

WCDMA SMS sending success

The UE receives the CM Service Request message.

WCDMASMSR eceiveAttempt

WCDMA SMS reception attempt

The UE sends the Paging Type1 or Paging Type2 message and then receives the RRC Connection Request message whose cause value is Terminating Low Priority Signaling within the specified time.

WCDMASMSR eceived

WCDMA SMS reception success

After receiving the Paging Response message, the UE receives the Downlink CP-ACK message.

l The UE sends the Cell Update message.

l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message.


14-101


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

RAS Dial Attempt

RAS dial attempt

The RAS dial is attempted.

RAS Dial

RAS dial success

The RAS dial is successful.

RAS Hangup

RAS hangup

The RAS hangs up.

RAS Error

RAS error

The RAS dial is terminated exceptionally.

Session Start

Session start

The packet services such as FTP and HTTP are started.

Session End

Session end

This event occurs when all data transmission or reception are complete.

Session Drop

Session dropped

-

CMServiceReq

Connection management service request

-

CMServiceAcpt

Connection management service accept

-

CMServiceReq Rej

Connection management service failure

-

Security Events This describes the security events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring security events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

SecurityMo deReq

Security mode request

The UE sends the Security Mode Command message to request for the security mode.

SecurityMo deSuc

Security mode success

If the UE receives the Security Mode Command message, sends the Security Mode Complete message, and does not receive the Security Mode Fail message, you can infer that the security mode is successful.

SecurityMo deFail

Security mode failure

When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the security mode fails. l The UE receives the Security Mode Failure message. l The UE does not send the Security Mode Complete message within the specified time.

14-102


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

GMM Process Events This describes the GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) process events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the GMM process events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

AttachSuc

Attach success

If the UE receives the Attach Accept or sends the Attach Complete message, you can infer that the attaching is successful.

AttachFail

Attach failure

The UE does not receive the Attach Accept message or does not send the Attach Complete message.

PDPActivat ionReq

PDP activation request

If the UE sends the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP request is activated.

PDPActivat ionSuc

PDP activation success

If the UE receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation is successful.

PDPActivat ionFail

PDP activation failure

If the UE does not receive the Activate PDP Context Accept message after sending the Activate PDP Context Request message, you can infer that the PDP activation fails.

Detach

Detach

If the UE receives the Detach Accept message, you can infer that the detaching is successful.

RAUpdate Req

Routing area update request

The UE sends the Routing Area Update Request message to request the routing area update.

RAUpdateS uc

Routing area update success

If the UE receives the Routing Area Update Complete message after sending the Routing Area Update Request message, you can infer that the routing area is updated successfully.

RAUpdateF ail

Routing area update failure

When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the routing area fails to be updated. l The UE receives the Routing Area Update Reject message. l The UE does not receive the Routing Area Update Accept, Routing Area Update Complete, or GPRS Suspension Request message.

Handover Events This describes the handover events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the soft handover and hard handover events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-103


14 Appendix

14-104

Name

Meaning

Description

SoftHOAttempt

Soft handover attempt

The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.

SoftHO

Soft handover

The UE sends the ActiveSet Update Complete message.

SoftHOFail

Soft handover failure

l The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message.

Event1A

Event 1A

The UE sends the Measurement Report 1A message.

Event2A

Event 2A


Event3A

Event 3A


Event4A

Event 4A


Event1B

Event 1B

The UE sends the Measurement Report 1B message.

Event2B

Event 2B


Event3B

Event 3B


Event4B

Event 4B


Event1C

Event 1C

The UE sends the Measurement Report 1C message.

Event2C

Event 2C


Event3C

Event 3C


Event1D

Event 1D

The UE sends the Measurement Report 1D message.

Event2D

Event 2D


Event3D

Event 3D


Event1E

Event 1E

The UE sends the Measurement Report 1E message.

Event2E

Event 2E

The UE sends the Measurement Report 2E message.

Event1F

Event 1F

The UE sends the Measurement Report 1F message.

Event2F

Event 2F

The UE sends the Measurement Report 2F message.

PhChannelRecfgSuc

Physical channel reconfigurat ion success

The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message within the fixed time.

l The UE receives the ActiveSet Update message. l After receiving the ActiveSet Update message, the UE does not send the ActiveSet Update Complete message within the specified time.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

PhChannelRecfgFail

Physical channel reconfigurat ion failure

The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Fail message in the fixed time or the event times out.

TrChannelRecfgSuc

Transport channel reconfigurat ion success

The UE sends the Transport Channel Reconfiguration Complete message within the fixed time.

TrChannelRecfgFail

Transport channel reconfigurat ion failure

The UE receives the Transport Channel Reconfiguration Fail message within the fixed time or the event times out.

RBReconfigSuc

Radio bearer reconfigurat ion success

The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message within the fixed time.

RBReconfigFail

Radio bearer reconfigurat ion failure

The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Failed message within the fixed time or the event times out.

RBRelease

Radio bearer release

The UE sends the Radio Bearer Release Complete message.

RBReleaseFail

RB release failure

The UE receives the Radio Bearer Release Fail message within the fixed time or does not send the Radio Bearer Release Complete message.

IntraFreqHHO

Intrafrequency hard handover

The UE receives any of the following messages sent from the network: l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration l Transport Channel Reconfiguration l Physical Channel Reconfiguration If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of this message is the same as that of the current active set, the primary scrambling code of the cell Primary CPICH info is not included in the current active set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding complete message, the intra-frequency hard handover is successful.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-105


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

IntraFreqHHOFa il

Intrafrequency hard handover failure

The UE receives any of the following messages sent from the network: l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration l Transport Channel Reconfiguration l Physical Channel Reconfiguration If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of this message is the same as that of the current active set, the primary scrambling code of the cell Primary CPICH info is not included in the current active set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding failure message, the intra-frequency hard handover fails.

InterFreqHHO

Interfrequency hard handover

The UE receives any of the following messages sent from the network: l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration l Transport Channel Reconfiguration l Physical Channel Reconfiguration If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of this message is different from that of the current active set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding complete message, the inter-frequency hard handover is successful.

InterFreqHHOFa il

Interfrequency hard handover failure

The UE receives any of the following messages sent from the network: l Radio Bearer Reconfiguration l Transport Channel Reconfiguration l Physical Channel Reconfiguration If the downlink frequency of the cell FrequencyInfo of this message is different from that of the current active set, and the UE gives the response to corresponding failure message, the inter-frequency hard handover fails.

14-106

IntraFrequencyCellReselection

Intrafrequency cell reselection

In the idle state, the UE performs cell reselection between intra-frequency cells.

InterFrequencyCellReselection

Interfrequency cell reselection

In the idle state, the UE performs cell reselection between inter-frequency cells.

CellReselectionConnectMode

Cell reselection connection mode

The UE receives the Cell Reselection cause message.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

CSConnectionH O2Gto3GAttemp t

CS handover attempt from 2G to 3G

If the UE receives the (GSM RR DL_DCCH) Inter System To UTRAN Handover Command message, you can infer that the UE requests the CS handover from 2G to 3G.

CSConnectionH O2Gto3GSuc

CS handover succeeded from 2G to 3G

After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE sends the (RRC UL_DCCH) Handover to UTRAN Complete message within the specified time, you can infer that the CS handover from 2G to 3G is successful.

CSConnectionH O2Gto3GFail

CS handover failed from 2G to 3G

After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the Handover Failure message within the specified time or does not send the Handover Complete message, you can infer that the CS handover from 2G to 3G fails.

CSConnectionH O3Gto2GAttemp t

CS handover attempt from 3G to 2G

If the UE receives the (RRC DL_DCCH) Handover From UTRAN Command-GSM message, you can infer that the UE requests the CS handover from 3G to 2G.

CSConnectionH O3Gto2GSuc

CS handover succeeded from 3G to 2G

After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE sends the Handover Complete message within the specified time, you can infer that the CS handover from 3G to 2G is successful.

CSConnectionH O3Gto2GFail

CS handover failed from 3G to 2G

After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the Handover from UTRAN Failure message within the specified time or does not send the Handover Complete message, you can infer that the CS handover from 3G to 2G fails.

PSConnectionH O2Gto3GAttemp t

PS handover attempt from 2G to 3G

The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to request for the PS handover from 2G to 3G.

PSConnectionH O2Gto3GSuc

PS handover succeeded from 2G to 3G

After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE sends the RB Setup Complete message within the specified time, you can infer that the PS handover from 2G to 3G is successful.

PSConnectionH O2Gto3GFail

PS handover failed from 2G to 3G

After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the Routing Area Update Reject (NAS GMM) message within the specified time or does not receive the RB Setup Complete message, you can infer that the PS handover from 2G to 3G fails.


14-107


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

PSConnectionH O3Gto2GAttemp t

PS handover attempt from 3G to 2G

If the UE sends the (RRC DL_DCCH) Cell Change Order From UTRAN message, you can infer that the UE requests for the PS handover from 3G to 2G.

PSConnectionH O3Gto2GSuc

PS handover succeeded from 3G to 2G

After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the (NAS GMM) Routing Area Update Accept message or sends the RB Setup Complete message within the specified time, you can infer that the PS handover from 3G to 2G is successful.

PSConnectionH O3Gto2GFail

PS handover failed from 3G to 2G

After receiving the handover attempt message, if the UE receives the (RRC DL_DCCH) Cell Change Order From UTRAN Failure message within the specified time or does not send the Routing Area Update Accept/Routing Area Update Complete message, you can infer that the PS handover from 3G to 2G fails.

CellResel3Gto2G

Cell reselection from 3G to 2G

If the UE receives the Location Update Accept message after the WtoGIdle occurs, you can infer that the cell from 3G to 2G is reselected.

CellResel2Gto3G

Cell reselection from 2G to 3G

If the UE receives the Location Update Accept message after the GtoWIdle occurs, you can infer that the cell from 2G to 3G is reselected.

CompressedModeActivation

Compressio n mode activation

Before the hard handover (including the intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, and intersystem hard HO), the network sends the Measurement Control message to activate the compression mode, and then performs the measurement.

CompressedMod eDeActivation

Compressio n mode deactivation

The network sends the Measurement control message to notify the UE of activating the compression mode, and then performs the measurement before hard handover. If the cell measured in compression mode does not meet the requirements for the hard handover, the network sends the Measurement Control message to notify the UE of deactivating the compression mode within the specified time, and then activates the compression mode again. If the cell is qualified, the hard handover is performed. The UE automatically deactivates the compression mode after the hard handover is successful.

HSDPA Events This describes the HSDPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring HSDPA events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.

14-108


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

H2HIntraFreqCellChangeSuc

HSDPA to HSDPA intrafrequency serving cell update success

The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network.

H2R99IntraFreqSHOSuc

HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency soft handover success

l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Activeset update message from the network and then sends the Activeset update complete message to the network.

H2R99IntraFreqHHOSuc

HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency hard handover success

l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Physical channel reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Physical channel reconfiguration complete message to the network.

R992HIntraFreqSHOSuc

R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency soft handover success

The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network.

R992HIntraFreqHHOSuc

R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency hard handover success

l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-109


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

H2HIntraFreqCellChangeFail

HSDPA to HSDPA intrafrequency serving cell update failure

The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network and does not send the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network.

H2R99IntraFreqSHOFail

HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency soft handover failure

The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and does not send the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network.

H2R99IntraFreqHHOFail

HSDPA to R99 intrafrequency hard handover failure

l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Physical channel reconfiguration message from the network and sends the Physical channel reconfiguration failed message to the network or does not send the Physical channel reconfiguration complete message to the network within the specified time.

R992HIntraFreqSHOFail

R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency soft handover failure

The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and does not send the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network.

R992HIntraFreqHHOFail

R99 to HSDPA intrafrequency hard handover failure

l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network and then sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network. l The UE receives the Radio bearer reconfiguration message from the network and sends the Radio bearer reconfiguration failed message to the network. Alternatively, the UE does not send the Radio bearer reconfiguration complete message to the network within the specified time.

14-110


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

H2GHHOSuc

HSDPA to 2G hard handover success

l The UE receives the Cell Change order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network. l The UE receives the Routing Area Update Accept message from the UTRAN network.

HSDPA to 2G hard handover failure

H2GHHOFail

l The UE receives the Cell Change order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network. l The UE receives the system message that cannot be received from the network in DCH state. l The UE receives the GSM system message, indicating the idle status from the network. l The UE sends the Cell Change order from UTRAN fail message to the network.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

H2HInterFreqCellChangeSuc

HSDPA to HSDPA interfrequency serving cell update success

-

H2HInterFreqCellChangeFail

HSDPA to HSDPA interfrequency serving cell update failure

-

H2R99InterFreqHHOSuc

HSDPA to R99 interfrequency hard handover success

-

H2R99InterFreqHHOFail

HSDPA to R99 interfrequency hard handover failure

-

R992HInterFreqHHOSuc

R99 to HSDPA interfrequency hard handover success

-

R992HInterFreqHHOFail

R99 to HSDPA interfrequency hard handover failure

-

CompressedModeActivation

Compression mode activation

Before the hard handover (including the intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, and inter-system hard HO), the network sends the Measurement Control message to activate the compression mode, and then performs the measurement.


14-111


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

CompressedModeDeActivation

Compression mode deactivation

The network sends the Measurement control message to notify the UE of activating the compression mode, and then performs the measurement before hard handover. If the cell measured in compression mode does not meet the requirements for the hard handover, the network sends the Measurement Control message to notify the UE of deactivating the compression mode within the specified time, and then activates the compression mode again. If the cell is qualified, the hard handover is performed. The UE automatically deactivates the compression mode after the hard handover is successful.

HSUPA Events This describes the HSUPA events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring HSUPA events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

CellChangeUtoUBySHOAttempt

HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered by soft handovers

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) serving cell.

HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered by intrafrequency hard handovers

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell.

CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOAttempt

l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message send by the RNC.

l The UE reports the measurement report on the 1D event and obtains the primary scrambling code of the reported cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC.

CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOAttempt

14-112

HSUPA serving cell update attempt triggered by interfrequency hard handovers

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

CellChangeUtoUBySHOSuc

HSUPA serving cell update success triggered by soft handovers

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.

CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOSuc

HSUPA serving cell update success triggered by intrafrequency hard handovers

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE reports the measurement report on the 1D event and obtains the primary scrambling code of the reported cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.

CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOSuc

CellChangeUtoUBySHOFail

HSUPA serving cell update success triggered by interfrequency hard handovers


HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered by soft handovers

l The active set has multiple links. One cell is the E-DCH serving cell.

l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.

l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the SRNC.

CellChangeUtoUByIntraHHOFail

HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered by intrafrequency hard handovers

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE reports the measurement report on the 1D event and obtains the primary scrambling code of the reported cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the SRNC.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-113


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

CellChangeUtoUByInterHHOFail

HSUPA serving cell update failure triggered by interfrequency hard handovers


PSConnectionHO UtoGPRSAttempt

Handover attempt between HSUPA and GPRS

The UE receives the Cell Change Order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network.

PSConnectionHO UtoGPRSSuc

Handover success between HSUPA and GPRS

l The UE receives the Cell Change Order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network.

Handover failure between HSUPA and GPRS

l The UE receives the Cell Change Order from UTRAN message from the UTRAN network.

GPRS to HSUPA inter-system handover success

l The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Request message to the UTRAN network.

GPRS to HSUPA inter-system handover failure

l The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Request message to the UTRAN network.

HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intrafrequency hard handover attempt


PSConnectionHO UtoGPRSFail

PSConnectionHOGPRStoUSuc

PSConnectionHOGPRStoUFail

ChannelChangeIn terCellIntraFreEtoDAttempt

14-114

l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the SRNC.

l The UE sends the Routing Area Update Accept Complete message to the GPRS network.

l The UE receives the system message of the GSM or WCDMA, returns to the UTRAN network and responds the Cell Change Order from UTRAN Failure message, or receives no message indicating success or failure in the fixed time.

l The UE sends the Routing Area Update Accept Complete message to the UTRAN network.

l The UE receives the system message of the GSM or WCDMA, receives the RRC Connection Setup Request message, receives the Routing Area Update Failure message, or does not receive the response of the RRC Connection Setup message.

l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

ChannelChangeIn terCellIntraFreEtoDSuc

HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intrafrequency hard handover success

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.

ChannelChangeIn terCellIntraFreEtoDFail

HSUPA to R99 inter-cell intrafrequency hard handover failure

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Failure message to the SRNC.

ChannelChangeIn terCellInterFreEtoDAttempt

HSUPA to R99 inter-cell interfrequency hard handover attempt


ChannelChangeIn terCellInterFreEtoDSuc

HSUPA to R99 inter-cell interfrequency hard handover success



l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.

ChannelChangeIn terCellInterFreEtoDFail

HSUPA to R99 inter-cell interfrequency hard handover failure


ChannelChangeIn traCellEtoDAttempt

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type change attempt

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC.


14-115


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

ChannelChangeIn traCellEtoDSuc

HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type change success

l The active set has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.

ChannelChangeIn traCellEtoDFail

HSUPA to R99 intra-cell channel type change failure


ChannelChangeIn traCellDtoEAttempt

R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type change attempt


ChannelChangeIn traCellDtoESuc

R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type change success



l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration message from the RNC. l The UE sends the Radio Bearer Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC.

ChannelChangeIn traCellDtoEFail

R99 to HSUPA intra-cell channel type change failure


ChannelChangeEtoFAttempt

EDCH to FACH channel change attempt

l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network.

14-116


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

ChannelChangeEtoFSuc

EDCH to FACH channel change success

l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network.

ChannelChangeEtoFFail

EDCH to FACH channel change failure

l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the network and receives no corresponding message indicating success or failure in the fixed time.

ChannelChangeFtoEAttempt

FACH to EDCH channel change attempt

l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network.

ChannelChangeFtoESuc

FACH to EDCH channel change success

l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the network.

ChannelChangeFtoEFail

FACH to EDCH channel change failure

l The latest active set of the UE has multiple links. One of them is served as the E-DCH serving cell. l The UE receives the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message from the network. l The UE sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration Failure message to the network and receives no corresponding message indicating success or failure in the fixed time.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-117


14 Appendix

MM Process Events This describes the mobility management (MM) process events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring the MM process events on the WCDMA network, and then perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

LAUpdateR eq

Location update request

The UE sends the Location Updating Request message to update its location.

LAUpdateS uc

Location update success

If the UE receives the Location Updating Accept message, you can infer that the location is updated successfully.

LAUpdateF ail

Location update failure

If any of the following cases occurs, you can infer that the location fails to be updated. l The UE receives the Location Update Reject message. l If the UE does not receive the Location Update Accept message within the specified time.

IMSIDetac h

International mobile subscriber identity (IMSI) detach

If the UE sends the IMSI Detach Indication message, you can infer that the IMSI detach occurs.

IdentityReq

Identity request

The UE sends the Identity Request message to request the identity identification.

IdentityRsp

Identity response

If the UE sends the Identity Request message and receives the Identity Response message, you can infer that the identity identification is successful.

MMS Events This describes the MMS events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring MMS events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.

14-118


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

MMSMOAtte mpt

MMS mobile originating (MO) attempt

The following process is referred to as an MMSMOAttempt event. 1. The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message. 2. The UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Complete message. 3. The UE sends the Service Request message. 4. The UE sends the Activate PDP Context Request message within the specified time. 5. The UE receives the Activate PDP Context Accept message.

MMSMOSuc

MMS MO sending success

The following process is referred to as an MMSMOSuc event. 1. After the MMSMOAttempt event occurs, the UE sends the Deactivate PDP Context Request message during the period from the time when the service is ended to the time when the UE receives the system message. 2. The UE receives the Deactivate PDP Context Accept and RRC Connect Release messages, and the Release Cause value of the RRC Connect Release message is Normal Event. 3. The UE sends the RRC Connection Release Complete message.

MMSMOFail

MMS MO sending failure

After the MMSMOAttempt event occurs, during the period from the time when the service is ended to the time when the UE receives the system message, if any of the following situations occurs, the MO fails to sent the MMS. l The UE does not send the Deactivate PDP Context Request message. l The UE does not receive the Deactivate PDP Context Accept message. l The UE receives the RRC Connect Release signaling but the Release Cause value of the RRC Connection Release message is not Normal Event.

Radio Bearer Establishment Events This describes the radio bearer (RB) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring RB events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-119


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

RBSetupRe q

RB setup request

The UE receives the Radio Bearer Setup message to request the RB setup.

RBSetupSu c

RB setup success

If the UE sends the Radio Bearer Setup Complete message, you can infer that the RB is set up successfully.

RBSetupFai l

RB setup failure

When any of the following cases occurs, you can infer that the RB setup fails. l The UE receives the Radio Bearer Setup Failure message. l The UE does not receive the Radio Bearer Setup Complete message within the specified time.

RRC Events This describes the radio resource control (RRC) events of the WCDMA. You can refer to this part when configuring RRC events on the WCDMA network, and perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

RRCSetup Req

RRC connection setup request

The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to the network to request for the RRC connection setup.

RRCSetupS uc

RRC connection setup success

If the UE sends the RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the network, you can infer that the RRC connection setup is successful.

RRCSetupF ail

RRC connection setup failure

The UE sends the RRC Connection Request message to the network and does not receive the RRC Connection Setup message within the specified time.

RRCConne ctionRel

RRC connection release

The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message whose cause value is Normal Event or User Inactivity. Alternatively, the UE sends the RRC Connection Release Complete message.

RRCConne ctionAbnor mal

RRC connection abnormal release

When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the RRC connection is released exceptionally. l The UE receives the RRC Connection Release message whose cause value is not Normal Event or User Inactivity. l If RRC state is set to CELL_DCH and the UE does not receive RRC Connection Release, the received RRC state is Disconnected, Master Information Block, System Information 1, or System Information 2.

RRCState

14-120

RRC State

This event occurs when the UE sends the RRC State packets.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

14.2.4 CDMA Predefined Events This describes the CDMA predefined events. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the CDMA network, and then perform the related operations. The system defines the following states of the MS: l

INITorIDLE: indicates the state combining the initial state with the idle state.

l

SYS_ACC: indicates the system access state.

l

TC: indicates the traffic state.

EV-DO Events This describes events of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can refer to this part when configuring events on the CDMA2000 EV-DO network, and then perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

DOATConnectR eq

AT connection request

The AT sends the Connection Request message on the access channel.

DOATConnectSu c

AT connection success

The AT sends the Traffic Channel Complete message on the reverse traffic channel.

DOATConnectFa il

AT connection failure

When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the connection fails. l The AT receives the Connection Deny message on the control channel. l The AT does not send the Traffic Channel Complete message within the specified time after sending the Connection Request message.

DOANConnectR eq

AN connection request

The AN sends the Connection Request message on the access channel.

DOANConnectS uc

AN connection success

The AN sends the Traffic Channel Complete message on the reverse traffic channel.

DOANConnectF ail

AN connection failure

When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the connection fails. l The AN receives the Connection Deny message on the control channel. l The AN does not send the Traffic Channel Complete message within the specified time after sending the Connection Request message.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-121


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

DOANNormalRe lease

AN normal release

When any of the following situations occurs, you can infer that the release is normal. l The AN receives the Connection Close message on the forward traffic channel. l The AT gives the response to the Connection Close message on the reverse traffic channel.

DOATNormalRe lease

AT normal release

The AT sends the Connection Close message on the reverse traffic channel.

DO-CallDrop

Call dropped

-

DOReverseSoftH OReq

Reverse soft handoff request

The AN sends the Traffic Channel Assignment message on the control channel or on the forward traffic channel.

DOReverseSoftH OSuc

Reverse soft handoff success

The AT sends the Traffic Channel Complete message.

DOReverseSoftH OFail

Reverse soft handoff failure

On the reverse traffic channel, the AT does not receive the Traffic Channel Complete message corresponding to the Traffic Channel Assignment sent from the AN within the specified time.

DOSessionReq

Session request

An EV-DO session request occurs.

DOSessionSuc

Session success

An EV-DO session attempt completed successfully.

MMS Events (1x) This describes the MMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring the MMS on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations.

14-122

Name

Meaning

Description

1xMMSESendReq

MMS sending request

In idle status, the MS sends an Origination Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the MMS service. If yes, the MS requests for sending MMSs.

1xMMSESendCon

MMS sending connected

In sync status, the MS sends the Service Connect Complete Message.

1xMMSESendCompl ete

MMS sending complete

The MS originates an Order Release message or receives an Order Release message from the mobile switching center (MSC).


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Packet Service Events (1x) This describes the packet service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring the PS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

1xPSOutgoing CallReq

PS outgoing call request

In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends an Origination Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the PS service. If yes, the MS requests the PS outgoing call.

1xPSOutgoing CallSuc

PS outgoing call success

After originating an outgoing call request for the PS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the PS outgoing call is successful. l Service Connect Completion Message in the log packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic l Diagnostic packet in TC status

1xPSOutgoing CallFail

PS outgoing call failure

After originating an outgoing call request for the PS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the PS outgoing call is failed. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status

1xPSCallDrop ped

PS call dorpped

After originating an outgoing call request for the PS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets and does not receive or originate the Release Order message before receiving the log packet, you can infer that the PS call is dropped. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status

1xPSCallCom pleted

PS call completed

In TC status, if the MS originates a Release Order and the BSS also originates a Release Order, you can infer that the PS call is complete.

SMS Events (1x) This describes the SMS events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring the SMS events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-123


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

1xSMSSentReq

SMS sending request

In idle status, the MS sends an Origination Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the SMS service. If yes, the MS requests for sending SMSs.

1xSMSSendCon

SMS sending connected


1x-SMSSend

SMS sending

In dedicated status, the MS sends the Data Burst Message.

1xSMSSendComp lete

SMS sending complete

The MS or MSC sends the Order Release message.

1xSMSReceiveRe q

SMS reception request

In idle status, the MS receives the Service Connect Complete message.

1xSMSReceiveCo n

SMS reception connected


1x-SMSReceive

SMS received

In dedicated status, the MS receives the Data Burst Message.

1xSMSReceiveCo mplete

SMS reception complete

The MS or MSC sends the Order Release message.

Voice Service Events (1x) This describes the voice service events of the CDMA2000 1x. You can refer to this part when configuring the CS voice service events on the CDMA2000 1x network, and then perform the related operations. Name

Meaning

Description

1xCSOutgoingCallReq

CS outgoing call request

In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends an Origination Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the CS service. If yes, the MS requests the CS outgoing call.

1xCSOutgoingCallSuc

CS outgoing call success

After originating an outgoing call request for the CS services, if the MS receives any of the following information in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the CS outgoing call is successful: l Service Connect Completion Message in the log packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic l Diagnostic packet in TC status

14-124


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

1xCSOutgoingCallFail

CS outgoing call failure

After originating an outgoing call request for the CS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets in SYS_ACC status, you can infer that the CS outgoing call is failed. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status

1xCSIncomingCallReq

CS incoming call request

In INIT or IDLE status, the MS sends a Paging Response Message, and then parses it to determine whether this call is about the CS service. If yes, the MS requests the CS incoming call.

1xCSIncomingCallSuc

CS incoming call success

After the CS incoming call request event occurs, if the MS receives any of the following information, you can infer that the CS incoming call is successful. l Service Connect Completion Message in the log packet of the Reverse Link Channel Traffic l Diagnostic packet in TC status

1xCSIncomingCallFail

CS incoming call failure

After the CS incoming call request event occurs, if the MS receives any of the following log packets, you can infer that the CS incoming call is failed. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status

1xCSCallDropped

CS call dropped

After originating an outgoing call request for the CS services, if the MS receives any of the following log packets and does not receive or send the Release Order message before receiving the log packet, you can infer that the CS call is dropped. l Log packet of the Sync Channel l Log packet of the Paging Channel l Diagnostic packet in INIT or IDLE status

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

1xCSCallCompleted

CS call completed

In TC status, if the MS sends a Release Order message and the base station subsystem (BSS) also sends a Release Order message, you can infer that the CS call is complete.

1xSoftHandoffReq

Soft handoff request

The request for adding, deleting, or replacing pilots in the active set occurs. When pilots are replaced, the number of pilots in the active set must be greater than one.


14-125


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

1xSoftHandoffSuc

Soft handoff success

The pilots in the active set are added, deleted, or replaced successfully. When pilots are replaced, the number of pilots in the active set must be greater than one.

1xSoftHandoffFail

Soft handoff failure

The pilots in the active set fail to be added, deleted, or replaced. When pilots are replaced, the number of pilots in the active set must be greater than one.

1xInterFreqHandoffReq

Inter-frequency hard handoff request

Refers to the handoff in traffic state to another frequency or a different band.

1x-InterFreqHandoffSuc

Inter-frequency hard handoff success

Refers to the successful handoff in traffic state to another frequency or a different band.

1x-InterFreqHandoffFail

Inter-frequency hard handoff failure

Refers to the failed handoff in traffic state to another frequency or a different band.

1xIntraFreqHandoffReq

Intra-frequency hard handoff request

Refers to the handoff in traffic state to the same frequency.

1x-IntraFreqHandoffSuc

Intra-frequency hard handoff success

Refers to the successful handoff in traffic state to the same frequency.

1x-IntraFreqHandoffFail

Intra-frequency hard handoff failure

Refers to the failed handoff in traffic state to the same frequency.

14.2.5 WiMAX Predefined Events This section describes the predefined events in the WiMAX network. You can refer to this section when configuring predefined events in the WiMAX network.

14-126

Name

Meaning

Description

WXBSDeREGSuc

Base station (BS) out of service success

The BS is out of service.

WX-BSDSAFail

BS service flow setup failure

The service flow setup fails.

WX-BSDSAReq

BS service flow setup request

The BS initiates a service flow setup request.

WX-BSDSASuc

BS service flow setup success

The service flow setup is successful.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

WX-BSDSCFail

BS service flow change failure

The service flow change fails.

WX-BSDSCReq

BS service flow change request

The BS initiates a service flow change request.

WX-BSDSCSuc

BS service flow change success

The service flow change is successful.

WX-BSDSDFail

BS service flow deletion failure

The service flow deletion fails.

WX-BSDSDReq

BS service flow deletion request

The BS initiates a service flow deletion request.

WX-BSDSDSuc

BS service flow deletion success

The service flow deletion is successful.

WXBSEnterIdleFail

BS entering idle state failure

The BS fails to initiate the state conversion of an MS to idle state.

WXBSEnterIdleReq

BS entering idle state request

The BS initiates a request for triggering the state conversion of an MS to idle state.

WXBSEnterIdleSuc

BS entering idle state success

The BS successfully initiates the state conversion of an MS to idle state.

WX-Drop

MS call drop at the data link layer

Signal loss occurs on an MS.

WX-DSAFail

Dynamic service addition failure

The service flow allocation fails.

WX-DSAReq

Dynamic service addition request

The MS initiates a request for the service flow allocation.

WX-DSASuc

Dynamic service addition success

The service flow allocation is successful.

WX-HOCancel

Handover cancellation

After sending a handover request, the MS sends a MOB_HO-IND message to cancel the handover.

WX-HOFail

Handover failure

After sending a handover request, the MS does not receive a Ranging response message or sends a MOB_HO-IND message with the cause value of rejection.

WX-HOReq

Handover request

After sending a MOB_MSHO-REQ message to the BS, the MS receives a MOB_BSHO-RSP message from the BS or sends a Ranging request for handover.


14-127


14 Appendix

14-128

Name

Meaning

Description

WX-HOSuc

Handover success

After MS sends a handover request, a new BS serves as the serving BS and services are not disrupted.

WXLocationUpdateFail

MS location update failure

The MS fails to perform location update.

WXLocationUpdateReq

MS location update request

The BS initiates a request for MS location update.

WXLocationUpdateSuc

MS location update success

The MS performs location update successfully.

WXMSDeREGReq

MS request for out of service

The MS requests for out of service.

WXMSDeREGSuc

MS out of service success

The MS is out of service.

WX-MSDSAFail

MS service flow setup failure

-

WX-MSDSAReq

MS service flow setup request

-

WX-MSDSASuc

MS service flow setup success

-

WX-MSDSCFail

MS service flow change failure

-

WX-MSDSCReq

MS service flow change request

-

WX-MSDSCSuc

MS service flow change success

-

WX-MSDSDFail

MS service flow deletion failure

-

WX-MSDSDReq

MS service flow deletion request

-

WX-MSDSDSuc

MS service flow deletion success

-

WXMSEnterIdleFail

MS entering idle state failure

-

WXMSEnterIdleReq

MS entering idle state request

-


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

WXMSEnterIdleSuc

MS entering idle state success

-

WXMSExitIdleFail

MS exiting idle state failure

-

WXMSExitIdleReq

MS exiting idle state request

-

WXMSExitIdleSuc

MS exiting idle state success

-

WXNetEntryAttempt

Network access attempt

The MS sends an RNG-REQ (initial network access) message to the BS to request for accessing the network.

WX-NetEntryFail

Network access failure

The MS fails to access the network when the WX-RNGFail, WX-SBCFail, WXPKMFail, and WX-REGFail events occur or the MS receives an RNG-REQ message before the service flow allocation is successful.

WX-NetEntrySuc

Network access success

MS access success refers to that the MS registers on the BTS before the service stream is allocated successfully.

WX-PKMFail

Authentication failure

The MS receives a PKM-RSP (Fail) message.

WX-PKMReq

Authentication request

The specified MS initiates an authentication request for network access during the basic capability negotiation.

WX-PKMSuc

Authentication success

The MS receives a PKM-RSP (Success) message after the authentication on the BS side is successful.

WX-REGFail

Registration failure

The MS receives the registration failure message from the network side or does not receive any registration response.

WX-REGReq

Registration request

The MS sends an RNG-REQ (initial network access) message to the BS to request for registration.

WX-REGSuc

Registration success

After sending a registration request, the MS receives an REG-RSP message from the BS.

WX-RNGFail

Initial distance measurement failure

The MS receives an RNG-RSP (Fail) message.


14-129


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

WX-RNGReq

Initial distance measurement request

The MS initially accesses the network, performs handover or accesses the network again.

WX-RNGSuc

Initial distance measurement success

The MS receives an RNG-RSP (Success) message.

WX-SBCFail

Basic capability negotiation failure

The MS does not receive an SBC-RSP message within the specified time.

WX-SBCReq

Basic capability negotiation request

The basic capability negotiation request is initiated when the MS initially accesses the network or after the distance measurement is successful.

WX-SBCSuc

Basic capability negotiation success

The MS receives an SBC-RSP message.

WXNetConnectSuc

MS connection success

A service stream is set up successfully after the MS is connected to the network.

WXNetConnectFail

Network connection failure

A service stream setup fails when the MS accesses the network.

14.2.6 LTE Predefined Events This section describes the predefined events in the LTE network. You can configure LTE network events by referring to the following descriptions.

14-130

Name

Meaning

Description

AttachAttem pt

Attach attempt

A UE attempts to attach to the data service.

AttachSuc

Attach success

A UE attaches to the data service successfully.

AttachFail

Attach failure

A UE fails to attach to the data service.

DetachAttem pt

Detach attempt

A UE attempts to detach from the data service.

DetachSuc

Detach success

A UE detaches from the data service successfully.

RRCSetupRe q

RRC connection setup request

A UE sends an RRC Connection Request message to the network to request for the RRC connection setup.

RRCSetupSu c

RRC connection setup success

If a UE sends an RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the network, you can infer that the RRC connection setup is successful.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Meaning

Description

RRCSetupFa il

RRC connection setup failure

A UE receives an RRC Connection Reject message or does not receive an RRC Connection Setup message within the specified time after sending an RRC Connection Request message to the network.

ERABSetup Attempt

ERAB setup attempt

If an RRC Connection Reconfiguration message contains the specified information element (drbToAddModList or drb-ToAddModifyList), you can infer that a UE attempts to set up the Evolved Radio Access Bearer (ERAB).

ERABSetupS uc

ERAB setup success

If a UE receives an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message after the ERABSetupAttempt event occurs, you can infer that the ERAB setup is successful.

ERABSetupF ail

ERAB setup failure

If a UE does not receive an RRC Connection Reconfiguration Complete message within the specified time after the ERABSetupAttempt event occurs, you can infer that the ERAB setup fails.

ERABNorma lRel

ERAB normal release

If a UE receives an RRC Release or RRC Connection Reconfiguration message after receiving a Deactivate Eps Bearer Context Request message, you can infer that the ERAB is released normally.

ERABAbnor malRel

ERAB abnormal release

If a UE receives an RRC Release or RRC Connection Reconfiguration message but does not receive a Deactivate Eps Bearer Context Request message, you can infer that the ERAB is released abnormally.

HOA3Measu rereport

Handover A3 measurement report

If measId of a MeasurementReport message is the same as measId of the previous RRC ConnectionReconfiguration message, a handover A3 measurement report is generated.

HOAttempt

Handover attempt

A UE attempts to perform a handover.

HOSuc

Handover success

A UE performs a handover successfully.

HOFail

Handover failure

A UE fails to perform a handover.

14.3 Description of Information Elements This describes the MS and Scanner information elements supported by the Probe. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the view window. 14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs This describes the GSM information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the GSM MS air interface views. 14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-131


14 Appendix

This describes the WCDMA information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the WCDMA UE air interface views. 14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs This describes the CDMA information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the CDMA MS air interface views. 14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs This describes the WiMAX information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the WiMAX UE air interface views. 14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs This describes the LTE information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the LTE UE air interface views. 14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners This describes the IEs of the PCTel, Anritsu, and Rohde & Schwarz scanners. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the views of these scanners. 14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements This describes the packet service testing information elements. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the packet service views. 14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements This describes meanings of the IEs related to Speech Quality Evaluation. The following table provides information about IEs related to the speech quality service. 14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Noise Test KPI. The following table provides the information noise test information elements.

14.3.1 GSM Information Elements of MSs This describes the GSM information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the GSM MS air interface views.

3G Neighboring Cell Measurement This describes meanings of the IEs related to 3G Neighboring Cell Measurement of the GSM. The following table provides the information about the 3G neighboring cells, such as the ARFCN, quality, and level.

14-132

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

UARFCN

Range: 0 to 16383

Indicates the ARFCNs of measured GSM neighbors.

P-SC

Range: 0 to 511

Indicates the primary scrambling code of measured GSM neighbors.

Diversity

0 or 1

Indicates whether to use the diversity mode. 0 refers to No and 1 refers to Yes.

Squal

Unit: dB

Indicates the quality of the received signal, which is applicable to cell selection criteria S.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Srxlev

Unit: dB

Indicates the rank of the received signal level, which is applicable to cell selection criteria S.

RSCP

Range: -115 to -25. Unit: dBm.

Indicates the received signal code power.

Ec/Io

Range: -30 to 0. Unit: dB.

Indicates the ratio of energy per chip to the total power density of received bandwidth.

AMR Call Average This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Call Average of the GSM. The following table provides the distribution of AMR codec usage for the whole of the call currently in progress. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Codec

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the AMR codec: l 0: 12.2 kbit/s l 1: 10.2 kbit/s l 2: 7.95 kbit/s l 3: 7.40 kbit/s l 4: 6.70 kbit/s l 5: 5.90 kbit/s l 6: 5.15 kbit/s l 7: 4.75 kbit/s

Uplink

Range: 0 to 100. Unit: %.

Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec usage for the current call. This IE is invalid if no call is ongoing.

Downlink


Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR codec usage for the current call. This IE is invalid if no call is ongoing.

AMR Cell Average This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Cell Average of the GSM. The following table provides the distribution of AMR codec usage in the current serving cell before the handover..

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-133


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Codec

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the AMR codec: l 0: 12.2 kbit/s l 1: 10.2 kbit/s l 2: 7.95 kbit/s l 3: 7.40 kbit/s l 4: 6.70 kbit/s l 5: 5.90 kbit/s l 6: 5.15 kbit/s l 7: 4.75 kbit/s

Uplink


Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec usage since the MS started using the current serving cell.

Downlink


Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR codec usage since the MS started using the current serving cell.

AMR Codec Usage This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Codec Usage of the GSM. The following table provides the information about the uplink and downlink AMR codec rates for the current terminal. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Codec UL

l 12.2 kbit/s

Indicates the uplink codec rate.

l 10.2 kbit/s l 7.95 kbit/s l 7.40 kbit/s l 6.70 kbit/s l 5.90 kbit/s l 5.15 kbit/s l 4.75 kbit/s Uplink

14-134


Indicates the distribution of uplink AMR codec usage across the active set being used.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Codec DL

l 12.2 kbit/s

Indicates the downlink codec rate.

l 10.2 kbit/s l 7.95 kbit/s l 7.40 kbit/s l 6.70 kbit/s l 5.90 kbit/s l 5.15 kbit/s l 4.75 kbit/s Downlink


Indicates the distribution of downlink AMR codec usage across the active set being used.

AMR Setting GSM This describes meanings of the IEs related to AMR Setting GSM of the GSM. The following table provides the current active set of AMR speech coders on the uplink and downlink respectively, along with hysteresis and threshold values governing AMR mode switches. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Active Set UL

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the current active set of AMR speech codecs on the uplink, each codec being described by a text string, such as 12.2 kbit/s rate.

Active Set DL

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the current active set of AMR speech codecs on the downlink, each codec being described by a text string, such as 12.2 kbit/s rate.

Hysteresis

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the hysteresis value in the AMR mode switch mechanism.

Threshold

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the threshold value in the AMR mode switch mechanism.

Lower Limit


Indicates the C/I limit for codec change to lower bit rate, calculated from Hysteresis and Threshold. The C/I value used as input to mode control in AMR. This parameter is distinct from the ordinary C/I information elements, although the value should be similar.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-135


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Upper Limit


Indicates the C/I limit for codec change to higher bit rate, calculated from Hysteresis and Threshold. The C/I value used as input to mode control in AMR. This parameter is distinct from the ordinary C/I information elements, although the value should be similar.

BA List This describes meanings of the IEs related to BA List of the GSM. The following table provides the signal strength of the neighboring cells of the current cell, including the information about IEs such as the BCCH, level and BSIC. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

BCCH ARFCN

Range: 0 to 1023

Indicates the ARFCN of the broadcast control channel.

l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251 l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124 l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 l DCS 1800: 512 to 885 l PCS 1900: 512 to 810 BAND

l GSM-R 850 l P-GSM 900

Indicates the frequency band of BCCH carrier.

l E-GSM 900 l DCS 1800 l PCS 1900 RxLev


Indicates the received signal strength.

BSIC

Range: 00 to 77

Indicates the base station identity code.

GPRS Data Bytes Sent/Received This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Bytes Sent/Received of the GPRS. The following table provides the total data bytes that are sent and received through the application, subnetwork dependent convergence protocol (SNDCP), logical link control (LLC), and radio link control (RLC) layers.

14-136


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Application Bytes Received (DL)

Range: 0 to 2 x 109. Unit: byte.

Indicates the number of bytes received at the application protocol level.

Application Bytes Sent (UL)


Indicates the number of bytes sent at the application protocol level.

SNDCP Bytes Received (DL)


Indicates the number of bytes received at the SNDCP protocol level since GPRS attach.

SNDCP Bytes Sent (UL)


Indicates the number of bytes sent at the SNDCP protocol level since GPRS attach.

LLC Bytes Received (DL)


Indicates the number of bytes received at the LLC protocol level since PS attach.

LLC Bytes Sent (UL)


Indicates the number of bytes sent at the LLC protocol level since PS attach.

RLC Bytes Received (DL)


Indicates the number of bytes received at the RLC protocol level since GPRS attach.

RLC Bytes Sent (UL)


Indicates the number of bytes sent at the RLC protocol level since GPRS attach.

GPRS Data Throughput This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Throughput of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs related to the data throughput ratio at the application, SNDCP, LLC, and RLC layers.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

App Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the application layer.

SNDCP Throughput

Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/ s.

Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the SNDCP layer.

LLC Throughput


Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the LLC layer.


14-137


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

RLC Throughput


Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the RLC layer.

LLC Retrasimission Rate


Indicates the retransmission rate on the uplink at the LLC layer.

RLC Retrasimission Rate


Indicates the retransmission rate on the uplink at the RLC layer.

RLC BLER


Indicates the block error rate on the downlink at the RLC layer.

GPRS Data Timeslots This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Data Timeslots of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs related to the GPRS data timeslots. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

TS used

-

Indicates the used timeslot number on the uplink and downlink.

TS Channel Type

-

Indicates the type of channel in each timeslot on the uplink and downlink.

CS-n Data


These elements contain the distribution of coding scheme usage for each timeslot.


These elements contain the distribution of modulation coding scheme usage for each timeslot.

GMSK rate


Indicates the usage percentage of the Gaussian minimum shift-frequency keying (GMSK) coding scheme.

8PSK rate


Indicates the usage percentage of 8 phase shift keying (8PSK) coding scheme.

n: 1 to 4 MCS-n Data n: 1 to 9

GPRS Line Chart This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Line Chart of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the APP, SNDCP, LLC, and RLC throughput ratio and timeslot usage of the GPRS.

14-138


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

APP Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the application layer.

SNDCP Throughput

Range: 0 to 400. Unit: kbit/s.

Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the SNDCP layer.

LLC Throughput


Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the LLC layer.

RLC Throughput


Indicates the data throughput on the uplink and downlink at the RLC layer.

Number Of Used Timeslot (DL)

-

Indicates the number of used timeslots on the downlink.

Number Of Used Timeslot (UL)

-

Indicates the number of used timeslots on the uplink.

Current CS (DL)

Range: 1 to 4

Indicates the coding scheme currently used on downlink.

Current CS (UL)

Range: 1 to 4

Indicates the coding scheme currently used on uplink.

Current MCS (DL)

Range: 1 to 9

Indicates the modulation coding scheme currently used on downlink.

Current MCS (UL)

Range: 1 to 9

Indicates the modulation coding scheme currently used on uplink.

GPRS PDP Context This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS PDP Context of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs related to the PDP. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Active PDP Contexts

0 or 1

Indicates whether to active the PDP contexts. l 0: Active l 1: Inactive

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

PDP NSAPI

An integer ranging from 5 to 15

Indicates the service access point identity at the network layer.

PDP LLC SAPI

Range: 3 to 11

Indicates the service access point identity at the logical link control layer.

PDP Delay Class

-

Indicates the delay class as defined by subscription.


14-139


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

PDP Reliability Class

-

Indicates the reliability class as defined by subscription.

PDP Precedence Class

-

Indicates the precedence class as defined by subscription.

PDP Peak Throughput

-

Indicates the peak throughput as defined by subscription.

PDP Mean Throughput

-

Indicates the mean throughput.

PDP Radio Priority

-

Indicates the radio priority as defined by subscription.

PDP Access Point Name

-

Indicates the host name or network address for each active PDP context.

PDP Address

IPv4 or IPv6

Indicates the user address.

GPRS Status This describes meanings of the IEs related to GPRS Status of the GPRS. The following table provides the information about IEs related to the GPRS status.

14-140

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Number of TS Used (DL)

Range: 0 to 8

Indicates the number of timeslots used on the downlink.

Number of TS Used (UL)

Range: 0 to 8

Indicates the number of timeslots used on the uplink.

PBCCH TS

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the timeslots of the packet broadcast control channel.

RAC

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the Routing Area Code.

GMM State

-

Indicates the state of GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) protocol: Idle, Ready, or Standby.

GRR State

-

Indicates the state of GPRS Radio Resource (GRR) protocol: Packet Idle or Packet Transfer.

TLLI

-

Indicates the temporary logical link identity.

TFI (DL)

Range: 0 to 31

Indicates the Temporary Flow ID on the downlink. Used to identify the temporary block flow.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

TFI (UL)

Range: 0 to 31

Indicates the Temporary Flow ID on the uplink. Used to identify the temporary block flow.

NC

-

Indicates the network control mode.

NMO

-

Indicates the network operation mode.

Coding Scheme UL

l 1 to 4 corresponds to CS 1 to CS 4.

Uplink coding scheme. Refers to the coding mode with the maximum usage ratio on the uplink within 500 ms.

l 7 to 15 corresponds to MCS 1 to MCS 9. Coding Scheme DL

l CS 1 to CS 4 l MCS 1 to MCS 9

Downlink coding scheme. Refers to the coding mode with the maximum usage ratio on the downlink within 500 ms.

Mean BEP

-

Mean value of the bit error probability (BEP)

CV BEP

-

Coefficient of variation of BEP

GSM C/A This describes the meanings of the IEs related to GSM C/A of the GSM. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the signal strength of the frequency used by the current MS and the adjacent-frequency signal strength. The Probe disables the GSM C/A measurement function by default. You can obtain corresponding IE information only after the C/A measurement function is enabled. For details about how to enable the C/A measurement function, see 11.2.2 Conducting GSM C/A Measurements.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

SS


Indicates the signal strengths of the four adjacent frequencies of the current serving cell.

C/A +1

Range: -110 to +100. Unit: dB.

Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation formula: Received signal strength at the serving frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent frequency that is equal to the serving frequency plus 200 kHz.

C/A +2


Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation formula: Received signal strength at the serving frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent frequency that is equal to the serving frequency plus 400 kHz.


14-141


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

C/A -1


Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation formula: Received signal strength at the serving frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent frequency that is equal to the serving frequency minus 200 kHz.

C/A -2


Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent ratio. Calculation formula: Received signal strength at the serving frequency - Received signal strength at the adjacent frequency that is equal to the serving frequency minus 400 kHz.

GSM C/I This describes meanings of the IEs related to GSM C/I of the GSM. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the channel ARFCN, received signal strength, and intrafrequency carrier-to-interference ratio. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

ARFCN

-

Indicates the channel ARFCN.

RxLev


Indicates the received signal strength.

C/I

Unit: dB

Indicates the intra-frequency carrier-tointerference ratio.

Hopping Parameters This describes meanings of the IEs related to Hopping Parameters of the GSM. The following table provides the GSM hopping parameters.

14-142

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Hopping State

0 or 1

Indicates whether to use the frequency hopping. 0 indicates no and 1 indicates yes.

Hopping Freq List

Range: 0 to 1023

Indicates the ARFCNs of the channels in the hopping frequency list, for example, 1, 10, 19, and 28.

Hopping Freq count

-

Indicates the number of hopping frequencies in the Hopping Freq List.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

MAIO

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the mobile allocation index offset. The mobile allocation index offset indicates the position from which the frequency hopping starts in the hopping frequency list. This IE is valid only when the frequency hopping is used.

HSN

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the hopping sequence number. The hopping sequence number indicates which hopping frequency list is being used.

Other Radio Parameters This describes meanings of the IEs related to Other Radio Parameters of the GSM. The following table provides the GSM channel and cell reselection parameters.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

ATT

0 or 1

Indicates whether to allow IMSI attach. 0 indicates no and 1 indicates yes.

AGBLK

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the number of reserved blocks.

CBA

Not allowed or Allowed

Indicates the cell bar access.

CBQ

Not barred or Barred

Indicates the cell bar qualify.

T3212

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the periodical location update counter.

Max Retrans

1, 2, 4, or 7

Indicates the maximum number of retransmissions.

Reestablishment

Not qualify or Qualify

Indicates whether to limit cell reconstruction.

Tx Integer

3 to 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, or 50

Indicates the number of extended transmission timeslots.

MS_TXPWR_M AX_CCH

Range: 0 to 31. Unit: dBm.

Indicates the maximum level of the transmit power allowed for an MS to access the control channel.

RXLEV_ACCE SS_MIN


Indicates the minimum strength of the received signal allowed for an MS to access the system.

POWER_OFFSE T_VALID

-

Indicates whether POWER_OFFSET is valid.


14-143


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

POWER_OFFSE T

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the power offset, which must be used with MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH. l 0: 0 dB l 1: 2 dB l 2: 4 dB l 3: 6 dB

CELL_RESELE CT_HYSTERES IS

Range: 0 to 14. Step: 2. Unit: dB.

Indicates the cell reselection hysteresis.

CELL_RESELE CT_OFFSET

Range: 0 to 63 corresponding to 0 dB to 126 dB. Step: 2 dB.

Indicates the cell reselection offset.

TEMPORARY_ OFFSET

Range: 0 to 7. The values from 0 to 6 correspond to 0 dB to 60 dB. The value 7 corresponds to ∞.

Indicates the temporary offset.

PENALTY_TIM E

Range: 0 to 31, corresponding to 20s to 620s.

Indicates the penalty time.

Radio Parameters This describes meanings of the IEs related to Radio Parameters of the GSM. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the received signal strength and transmit powers of each cell of the GSM.

14-144

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Rxlev Full


Indicates the received signal strength (Full value).

Rxlev Sub


Indicates the received signal strength (Sub value).

Rxlev Idle


Indicates the received signal strength of the serving cell in idle status.

RxQual Full

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the received signal quality (Full value).

RxQual Sub

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the received signal quality (Sub value).

TA

Range: 0 to 63. Unit: bit.

Indicates the timing advance. Valid only in dedicated mode.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Tx Power

The value range is:

Indicates the transmit power. Valid only in dedicated mode.

l GSM 850 MHz: 5 to 39 (Unit: dBm) l GSM 900 MHz: 5 to 39 (Unit: dBm) l GSM 1800 MHz: 0 to 36 (Unit: dBm) l GSM 1900 MHz: 0 to 33 (Unit: dBm) Power Control Level

Range: 0 to 31

Indicates the transmit power level ordered by the base station. Valid only in dedicated mode.

NCell RxLev 1-6


Indicates the received signal strength of a neighboring cell.

RLT Actual

Range: 0 to 64

Indicates the actual radio link timeout.

RLT Max

Range: 0 to 64

Indicates the maximum radio link timeout.

C/I Worst

Range: -5 to +35. Unit: dB

Indicates the worst carrier-to-interference ratio.

FER Full


Indicates the frame error rate (Full value). The formula is as follows: Number of error frames/Total number of frames x 100%.

FER Sub


Indicates the frame error rate (Sub value). The formula is as follows: Number of error frames/Total number of frames x 100%.

BER Full


Indicates the bit error rate (Full value). The formula is as follows: Number of error bits/Total number of bits x 100%.

BER Sub


Indicates the bit error rate (Sub value). The formula is as follows: Number of error bits/Total number of bits x 100%.

DSC Actual

Range: 0 to 45

Indicates the current value of Downlink Signalling Counter (DSC). Valid only in idle mode.

MS_DTX

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

-

Indicates the discontinuous transmission of the MS.


14-145


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

CGI

-

Indicates the Cell Global Identity, consisting of the Mobile Country Code, Mobile Network Code, Location Area Code, and cell ID.

Cell Name

-

Indicates the cell name.

TCH ARFCN

Range: 0 to 1023

Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of Traffic Channel. This IE is valid only in dedicated mode and only for channels where no frequency hopping is used.

l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251 l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124 l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 l DCS 1800: 512 to 885 l PCS 1900: 512 to 810 BCCH ARFCN

Range: 0 to 1023 l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251 l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124 l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975 to 1023

Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of Broadcast Control Channel. This IE is valid only in the idle mode and only for channels where no frequency hopping is used.

l DCS 1800: 512 to 885 l PCS 1900: 512 to 810

14-146

Timeslot

Range: 0 to 8

Indicates the number of timeslots.

Cell Priority

-

Indicates the cell priority.

Mode

-

Indicates the service type performing by the MS currently, such as Voice. This IE is displayed as Idle in idle state.

Channel Type

-

Indicates the channel type that a speech coder uses.

Ciphering Algorithm

-

Indicates the ciphering algorithm used for the CS or PS domain, for example, A5/1, A5/2, or GEA5/1.

Sub Channel Number

-

Indicates the number of subchannels.

Cell GPRS Support

YES or NO

Indicates whether to support the GPRS.

Cell EGPRS Support

YES or NO

Indicates whether to support the enhanced general packet radio service (EGPRS).

Speech Codec

-

Indicates the currently used speech codec: EFR, HR, FR, or AMR.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Serving and Neighboring Cells This describes meanings of the IEs related to Serving and Neighboring Cells of the GSM. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the ARFCNs of the broadcast control channel (BCCH), base station identity codes (BSICs), cell names, frequency bands, received signal strength, parameters of cell selection and reselection, and location area codes of the serving and neighboring cells. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

BAND

l GSM-R 850

Indicates the frequency band of BCCH carrier.

l P-GSM 900 l E-GSM 900 l DCS 1800 l PCS 1900 BCCH ARFCN

Range: 0 to 1023 l GSM-R 850: 128 to 251

Indicates the ARFCN of the broadcast control channel.

l P-GSM 900: 1 to 124 l E-GSM 900: 0 to 124, 975 to 1023 l DCS 1800: 512 to 885 l PCS 1900: 512 to 810

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

BSIC

Range: 00 to 77


Cell Name

-

Indicates the cell name. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used.

Cell ID

-

Indicates the cell identity. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used.

C1


Indicates the cell selection criterion. This IE is valid only in idle mode.

C2


Indicates the cell reselection criterion. This IE is valid only in idle mode.

C31


Indicates the GPRS cell selection criterion. This IE is valid only in the packet service.

C32


Indicates the GPRS cell reselection criterion. This IE is valid only in the packet service.

Distance

Unit: km

Indicates the distance between the MS and the cell.

LAC

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the Location Area Code of the serving cell.


14-147


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Rxlev (Sub +Idle)


Indicates the received signal strength (Sub value) or the idle value in idle status of the serving cell.

Vocoder Usage This section describes the IEs related to Vocoder Usage in the GSM network. The following table provides the usage information about the uplink and downlink AMR codec rates for the test terminal. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

EFR


Indicates the percentage of the enhanced full rate (EFR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.

FR


Indicates the percentage of the full rate (FR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.

HR


Indicates the percentage of the half rate (HR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.

FAMR


Indicates the percentage of the full adaptive multirate (FAMR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.

HAMR


Indicates the percentage of the half adaptive multirate (HAMR) to all the AMR rates on the uplink or downlink.

14.3.2 WCDMA Information Elements of UEs This describes the WCDMA information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the WCDMA UE air interface views.

AMR Codecs This section describes the IEs related to AMR Codecs in the WCDMA network. The following table provides the information about the WCDMA AMR uplink and downlink codecs, voice type, and frame rate.

14-148

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Bad Frame Indicator

BFI not set or BFI set

Indicates the bad frame indicator on the downlink.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Error Flag

Normal or Encoder error

Indicates the error flag on the uplink.

Frame Rate

l 12.2 kbit/s

Indicates the frame rate on the uplink or downlink.

l 10.2 kbit/s l 7.95 kbit/s l 7.40 kbit/s l 6.70 kbit/s l 5.90 kbit/s l 5.15 kbit/s l 4.75 kbit/s Frame Type

-

Indicates the frame type on the uplink or downlink.

Time Alignment Flag

TAF not set or TAF set

Indicates the time alignment flag on the downlink.

UnStable Frame Indicator

UFI not set or UFI set

Indicates the unstable frame indicator on the downlink.

Vocoder Data

-

Indicates the vocoder data on the uplink or downlink.

Vocoder Mode

-

Indicates the vocoder mode on the uplink or downlink, such as AMR, EFR, FR, or HR.

Cell Search This describes meanings of the IEs related to Cell Search of the WCDMA. The following table provides the parameter information about searching cells. The steps for searching cells are as follows: 1.

Synchronize timeslots. The UE synchronizes timeslots of a cell according to the basic synchronization codes of the supplemental channel (SCH).

2.

Identify the frame alignment and code group. The UE searches the frame alignment according to the secondary synchronization codes of the SCH, and then identifies the obtained timeslot synchronization code groups.

3.

Identify the scrambling code. The UE confirms that the basic scrambling code of the cell is found.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-149


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Chart of Step One Search

-

Indicates the first step of searching cells.

Chart of Step Two Search

-

Indicates the second step of searching cells.

Chart of Step Three Search

-

Indicates the third step of searching cells.

Step Three

P-SC

Range: 0 to 511

Indicates the primary scrambling code.

S-SC

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the secondary scrambling code.

Ec/Io


Indicates the ratio of the energy per chip to the total power density of the received bandwidth.

PN_POS

-

Indicates the peak position in chipx8 units.

DRX Mode This describes meanings of the IEs related to DRX Mode of the WCDMA. The following table provides the parameter information about the discontinuous reception. IE Name

Description

DRX Cycle Num

Indicates the number of discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) cycles.

Paging indicator bit

Indicates the paging indicator bit.

Finger This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the WCDMA. You can check whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link.

14-150

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Finger ID

Range: 0 to 11

Indicates the Rake finger identifier.

P-SC

Range: 0 to 511

Indicates the primary scrambling code for each Rake finger.

Ec/Io




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Finger Pos

-

Indicates the PN position offsets of the finger.

HSDPA Link Statistics This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSDPA Link Statistics of the HSDPA. The following table provides the information about the HSDPA link statistics.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Scheduled Rate-Delta

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the rate delta of scheduling data at the MAC layer.

Scheduled Rate-Average

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the average rate of scheduling data at the MAC layer.

Served Rate-Delta

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the rate delta of transmission at the MAC layer, including the rate of failed transmissions and retransmissions.

Served Rate-Average

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the average rate of transmission at the MAC layer, including the rate of failed transmissions and retransmissions.

MAC Layer Rate-Delta

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the rate delta of transmission at the MAC layer, excluding the rate of failed transmissions and retransmissions.

MAC Layer Rate-Average

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the average rate of transmission at the MAC layer, excluding the rate of failed transmissions and retransmissions.

HS-SCCH Success RateDelta


Indicates the usage ratio of the HS-SCCH channel (transient value).

HS-SCCH Success RateAverage


Indicates the usage ratio of the HS-SCCH channel (phase average value).

HS-DSCH SBLER-Delta


Indicates the schedule block error rate at the MAC layer (transient value).

HS-DSCH SBLERAverage


Indicates the schedule block error rate at the MAC layer (phase average value).

HS-DSCH Res.BLERDelta


Indicates the residual block error rate at the RLC layer (transient value).

HS-DSCH Res.BLERAverage


Indicates the residual block error rate at the RLC layer (phase average value).


14-151


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

HS-DSCH Retrans. RateDelta


Indicates the retransmission rate of the High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) (transient value).

HS-DSCH Retrans. RateAverage


Indicates the retransmission rate of the HS-DSCH channel (phase average value).

CQI

Range: 0 to 30

Indicates the average value of the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI).

Single Stream CQI (MIMO)

-

Indicates the single stream CQI.

Dual Stream CQI1 (MIMO)

-

Indicates the CQI of stream 1 in double stream transmission mode.

Dual Stream CQI2 (MIMO)

-

Indicates the CQI of stream 2 in double stream transmission mode.

Number of HS-PDSCH Codes

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the average number of codes used by the UE.

HSDPA Physical Channel This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSDPA Physical Channel of the HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the HSDPA physical channel. IE Name HS-DSCH Configuration

HS-SCCH Configuration

14-152

Range/Unit

Description

H-RNTI UE ID

-

Indicates the temporary ID of the UE.

DL DPCH to HSSCCH Timing Offset

Unit: chip

Indicates the timing offset of the downlink dedicated physical channel (DPCH) relative to the high speed shared control channel (HSSCCH).

HARQ Processes

-

Indicates the number of processes of the hybird automatic repeat request (HARQ).

HS-SCCH

-

Indicates the coding and validity of the HS-SCCH.

OVSF

-

Indicates the orthogonal variable spreading factor.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name Uplink HS-DPCCH Configuration

MAC-d Flow Mapping List

Reordering Queue Parameters

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

CQI Feedback Cycle

Unit: ms

Indicates the feedback cycle of the channel quality indicator (CQI).

CQI Repetition Factor

-

Indicates the CQI repetition factor.

Ack/Nack Repetition Factor

-

Indicates the repetition factor of the ACKnowledgement (ACK) or Negative ACKnowledgement (NACK).

UL DPCCH to HSDPCCH Timing Offset

Unit: chip

Indicates the timing offset of the high speed dedicated physical control channel (HSDPCCH) relative to the uplink dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH).

PO-ACK

-

Indicates the power offset of the ACK relative to the downlink DPCCH.

PO-NACK

-

Indicates the power offset of the NACK relative to the downlink DPCCH.

PO-CQI

-

Indicates the power offset of the CQI relative to the downlink DPCCH.

MAC-d Flow ID

-

Indicates the ID of the MAC-d flow.

CCTrCH ID

-

Indicates the ID of the coded composite transport channel.

Queue ID List

-

Indicates the list for queue ID.

Queue ID

-

Indicates the queue ID.

Receive Window Size

-

Indicates the MAC-hs window size.

Reordering Release Timer

-

Indicates duration of the MAC-hs reordering release


14-153


14 Appendix

IE Name MAC-d PDU Sizes

Range/Unit

Description

-

Indicates the size of the MAC-d PDU.

HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics This describes meanings of the IEs related to HS-DSCH Decoding Statistics of the HSDPA. The following table provides the information about the HSDPA decoding statistics on carrier 0, carrier 1, and the two carriers.

14-154

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Carrier

-

Indicates the carrier for statistics, which can be Carrier0, Carrier1, or Total.

TBS

Unit: bit

Indicates the transport block size. Each frame transmits only one TB.

QPSK

Unit: frame

Indicates the number of frames modulated in Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) mode.

16QAM

Unit: frame

Indicates the number of frames modulated in 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM) mode.

64QAM

Unit: frame

Indicates the number of frames modulated in 64QAM mode.

SB-

-

Indicates the number of frames failing to be transmitted at the MAC layer.

SB+

-

Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted at the MAC layer.

Dup.SB+

-

Indicates the number of NACK messages to which the NodeB translates the ACK messages returned by the UE upon successful decoding.

Other

-

Indicates the number of exceptional frames, for example, the frame whose TBS of the current successful retransmission is different from that of the latest successful transmission.

SBLER


Indicates the schedule block error rate at the MAC layer, which is calculated through the following formula: Number of transmission failures / Total number of transmissions x 100%.

1st SBLER


Indicates the schedule block error rate of the first frame at the MAC layer.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Block-

-

Indicates the number of frames that fail to be transmitted at the RLC layer. After several failures at the MAC layer, the RLC initiates the retransmission.

Block+

-

Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted at the RLC layer. The value of Block + is the same as the value of SB+.

Res.BLER


Indicates the residual block error rate at the RLC layer, which is calculated through the following formula: Number of frames that fail to be transmitted at the RLC layer / Total number of transmissions at the RLC layer x 100%.

1

-

Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted at the MAC layer during the first transmission.

2

-

Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the second retransmission after the first transmission fails.

3

-

Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the third retransmission after the first transmission and the second retransmission fail.

4

-

Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the fourth retransmission after the first three transmissions fail.

5

-

Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the fifth retransmission after the first four transmissions fail.

>=6

-

Indicates the number of frames successfully transmitted in the sixth or later retransmission after all the previous transmissions fail.

HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics This describes meanings of the IEs related to HS-SCCH Decoding Statistics of the HSDPA. The following table provides the information about the HSDPA decoding statistics on carrier 0, carrier 1, and the two carriers.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

HS-SCCH Attempts

-

Indicates the total number of frames.


14-155


14 Appendix

14-156

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

HS-SCCH Success

-

Indicates the number of HS-SCCH frames scheduled to the UE that is in the communication.

HS-SCCH Success Rate


Indicates the success ratio of the HSSCCH channel.

ACK->NACK/DTX (Duplicate SB +)


Indicates the ratio of NACK messages to which the NodeB translates the ACK messages transmitted by the UE upon successful decoding.

HS-SCCH Less Operation Rate


Indicates the rate of the transport blocks (TBs) that use the HS-SCCH Less operation mode to total TBs.

1 TB

-

Indicates the number of single stream transmissions used in the multiple input multiple output (MIMO).

2 TBs

-

Indicates the number of double stream transmissions used in the MIMO.

Percent 1TB


Indicates the percentage of single stream transmission used in the MIMO.

Percent 2TBs


Indicates the percentage of double stream transmission used in the MIMO.

Percent Single Stream


Indicates the percentage of data using single stream transmission.

Percent Dual Stream


Indicates the percentage of data using double stream transmission.

Single Stream SBLER


Indicates the schedule block error rate of single stream transmission, which is calculated through the following formula: NACK / (ACK + NACK) × 100%.

Dual Stream1 SBLER


Indicates the schedule block error rate of stream 1 in double stream transmission mode, which is calculated through the following formula: NACK1 / (ACK1 + NACK1) × 100%.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Dual Stream2 SBLER


Indicates the schedule block error rate of stream 2 in double stream transmission mode, which is calculated through the following formula: NACK2 / (ACK2 + NACK2) × 100%.

HSUPA DL Channel Configuration This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA DL Channel Configuration of the HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the downlink channel of the HSUPA. IE Name HSUPA DL All Channel Configuration

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

SERV_CELL_ INDEX

-

Indicates the serving cell index of the uplink packet access (UPA) service.

TTI

-

Indicates the transmission time interval.

SG_SEL

-

Indicates the type of the initial serving grant (SG).

P_ERNTI

-

Indicates the temporary identifier of the primary radio network, which is allocated for the UE that performs the EUL service.

S_ERNTI

-

Indicates the temporary identifier of the secondary radio network, which is allocated for the UE that performs the EUL service.

AGCH_ACTI ON

-

Indicates whether the access grant channel (AGCH) is activated.

AGCH_VALI D

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates whether AGCH information fields are valid.

AGCH_OVSF

-

Indicates the spreading factor of the AGCH.

AGCH_STAR T

-

Indicates the start frame number or subframe number of the AGCH.

AGCH_END

-

Indicates the end frame number or subframe number of the AGCH.


14-157


14 Appendix

IE Name

HSUPA DL Each Cell Configuration in the EUL Active Set

14-158

Range/Unit

Description

AGCH_DPCH _OFFSET

Range: 0 to 149

Indicates the offset from the first AGCH transmission time interval to the DPCH.

STTD_AGCH

-

Indicates whether the space time transmit diversity (STTD) is used on the AGCH.

CELL_IDX

Range: 1 to 6

Indicates the EUL cell number.

PSC

Range: 0 to 511

Indicates the scrambling code.

SERV_CELL

-

Indicates whether the current cell is the serving cell of the EDCH.

RLS_IDX

Range: 0 to 5

Indicates the index of the radio link set.

REF_FINGER

Range: 0 to 31

Indicates the reference finger index.

TPC_INDEX

Range: 0 to 5

Indicates the index of the hybrid ARQ indicator channel (HICH).

RGCH_ACTI ON

-

Indicates whether the relative grant channel (RGCH) is activated.

RGCH_VALI D

-

Indicates whether RGCH information fields are valid.

HICH_ACTIO N

-

Indicates whether the HICH is activated.

HICH_VALID

-

Indicates whether HICH information fields are valid.

HICH_OVSF

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the OVSF code for the HICH and RGCH.

HICH_START

-

Indicates the start frame number or subframe number for the HICH.

HICH_END

-

Indicates the end frame number or subframe number for the HICH.

HICH_DPCH_ OFFSET

Range: 0 to 149

Indicates the offset from the HICH to the DPCH.

TAU_HICH

-

Indicates the timeslot offset of the HICH to the P-CCPCH.

HICH_SIGNA TURE

Range: 0 to 39

Indicates the ID of the Handamard codes for the HICH.

HICH_STTD

-

Indicates whether the space time transmit diversity (STTD) is used on the HICH.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

RGCH_STAR T

-

Indicates the start frame number or subframe number of the RGCH.

RGCH_END

-

Indicates the end frame number or subframe number of the RGCH.

RGCH_DPCH _OFFSET

Range: 0 to 149

Indicates the offset from the RGCH to the DPCH.

RGCH_SIGN ATURE

Range: 0 to 39

Indicates the signature sequence ID of the RGCH.

DPCH_CHAN NEL

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the number of downlink dedicated physical channel.

HSUPA Link Statistics This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA Link Statistics of the HSUPA. The following table provides the information about the HSUPA link statistics. IE Name HSUPA Link Throughput Statistics

HSUPA Link Quality Statistics

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

MAC-e PDU NonDTX Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the nonDTX (non discontinuous transmission) rate.

MAC-e PDU Served Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the served rate.

MAC-e PDU Available Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the available rate.

RxNon-DTX Probability


Indicates the nonDTX probability.

SBLER


Indicates the schedule block error rate.

1st SBLER


Indicates the schedule block error rate of the first frame.

Power Limited Rate


Indicates the limited rate of power.

SG Limited Rate


Indicates the limited rate of serving grant (SG).

Buffer Limited Rate


Indicates the limited rate of buffer.


14-159


14 Appendix

IE Name

HSUPA Grant Statistics

Range/Unit

Description

Happy Rate


Indicates the HAPPY rate.

Average AG

-

Indicates the average value of absolute grant (AG).

Combined RG Hold Rate


Indicates the combined hold rate of relative grant (RG).

Combined RG Up Rate


Indicates the combined up rate of relative grant.

Combined RG Down Rate


Indicates the combined down rate of relative grant.

Average SG

-

Indicates the average value of serving grant.

HSUPA UL Channel Configuration This describes meanings of the IEs related to HSUPA UL Channel Configuration of the HSDPA. The following table provides the configuration information about the downlink channel of the HSUPA. IE Name HSUPA DL Channel Configuration

14-160

Range/Unit

Description

TTI

-

Indicates the transmission time interval.

IR_CC

-

Indicates the coding scheme.

DPDCH_PRES

-

Indicates whether the current R99 dedicated physical data channel (DPDCH) is valid.

HS_DPCCH_P RES

-

Indicates whether the downlink HSDPA is valid.

SLOT_FORM AT

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the timeslot format of the DPCCH.

ACTION_TYP E

-

Indicates the ACTION type.

MAX_EUL_S F

-

Indicates the maximum EUL spreading factor.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

HSUPA UL Channel Each Reference Power Offset

Range/Unit

Description

UE_MAX_SF

-

Indicates the maximum EUL spreading factor exported by UE.

START_FRA ME_NUM

-

Indicates the start EUL frame number or subframe number.

END_FRAME _NUM

-

Indicates the end EUL frame number or subframe number.

PL_NON_MA X

Range: 44 to 100

Indicates the maximum punctuating limit.

MAX_TX_PW R

Range: -50 to 33. Unit: dBm

Indicates the maximum transmit power of UE.

IQ_MAP

-

Indicates the E-DPDCH I/Q mapping.

SERVING_GR ANT

-

Indicates the service grant.

GRANT_SEL

-

Indicates the grant selection.

2IDX_STEP_T

Range: 0 to 37

Indicates the threshold of the enhanced transport format combination indicator (ETFCI).

3IDX_STEP_T

Range: 0 to 37

Indicates the ETFCI threshold.

EDPCCH_PO

Range: 0 to 8

Indicates the power offset from E-DPCCH to DPCCH.

TFCI_CONFI G

1 indicates that the indicator is configured, and 0 indicates that the indicator is not configured.

Indicates whether an indicator is configured for the Ref E-TFCI.

REF_TFCI

Range: 1 to 127

Indicates the enhanced transport format combination indicator.

REF_PWR_OF FSET

Range: 0 to 29

Indicates the power offset.

Inter-RAT GSM Cell Information This describes meanings of the IEs related to Inter-RAT GSM Cell Information of the WCDMA. The following table provides the inter-system (such as GSM) cell information.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-161


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

BCCH ARFCN

Range: 0 to 1023

Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number for the BCCH.

BAND

-

Indicates the inter-system frequency band. The following frequency bands are included: l GSM 900 MHz l DCS 1800 MHz l PCS 1900 MHz l GSM 850 MHz

RSSI

Unit: dBm

Indicates the received signal strength indicator.

BSIC

Range: 00 to 77


Power Control This section describes the IEs related to Power Control in the WCDMA network. The following table lists the information about power control, such as the signal to interference ratio, transmit power, and receive power.

14-162

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

SIR


Indicates the signal to interference ratio of the dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH).

Tx Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the transmit power.

Rx Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the receive power.

Rx Carr0 Chain0

Range: -128 to -20. unit: dBm.

Indicates the received signal strength of link 0 on carrier 0.

Rx Carr1 Chain0



Rx Carr0 Chain1



Rx Carr1 Chain1



UE Tx TPC/frame

-

Indicates the power control bit that is sent from the NodeB to the UE for adjusting the transmit power on the uplink.

Cell Tx TPC/frame

-

Indicates the power control bit that is sent from the UE to the NodeB for adjusting the transmit power on the downlink.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

RACH and PRACH This describes meanings of the IEs related to RACH and PRACH of the WCDMA. The following table provides the information about the UE access. IE Name RACH

PRAC H

Range/Unit

Description

AICH State

-

Indicates the state of the acquisition indicator channel (AICH) sent by the latest access timeslot.

Number of Preamble

Range: 0 to 64

Indicates the number of transmitted preambles.

Signature

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the signature for the preamble of the latest access channel.

Slot No

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the subchannel where the latest preamble signature is transmitted.

SFN

Range: 0 to 4095

Indicates the number of the system frame where the latest preamble is transmitted.

AICH Timing

-

Indicates the timeslot of the AICH.

Max Tx Pwr

Range: -50 to 33. Unit: dBm.

Indicates the allowed maximum transmit power.

Avail Sig Mask

-

Indicates the 16-bit mask of the available signal.

Sub Ch Mask

-

Indicates the 12-bit mask of the available signal.

SF Min

-

Indicates the minimum spreading factor used for each random access channel (RACH) with the period 10 ms.

SC Num

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the number of scrambling codes.

UL Punct Lmt

-

Indicates the limit for punctuating on the uplink.

Trch Id

Range: 1 to 32

Indicates the ID of the transport channel.

Pwr Offset

Unit: dB

Indicates the offset of preamble power.

Max Pream Num

Range: 1 to 64

Indicates the maximum number of transmitted preambles.

RLC Throughput This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLC Throughput of the WCDMA. The following table provides the information about the uplink and downlink throughput at the RLC layer of the WCDMA. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-163


14 Appendix

IE Name RLC UL Throughput

RB UL Assigned Throughput

RLC DL Throughput

RB DL Assigned Throughput

Range/Unit

Description

RLC PDU Throughput UL

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink packet data unit (PDU) throughput at the RLC layer.

RLC SDU Throughput UL

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink signaling data unit (SDU) throughput at the RLC layer.

RLC PDU Retransmission Rate UL

Unit: %

Indicates the uplink PDU retransmission rate at the RLC layer.

ChannelIdentity

-

Indicates the channel identifier.

Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the throughput.

RLC PDU Throughput DL

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink PDU throughput at the RLC layer.

RLC SDU Throughput DL

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink SDU throughput at the RLC layer.

RLC PDU Errors Rate DL

Unit: %

Indicates the downlink PDU error rate at the RLC layer.

ChannelIdentity

-

Indicates the channel identifier.

Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the throughput.

Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells This describes meanings of the IEs related to Serving/Active Set and Neighboring Cells of the WCDMA. The following table provides the parameters of the active set, monitoring set, or detection set of a UE.

14-164

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Freq DL

Unit: MHz

Indicates the downlink frequency.

P-SC

Range: 0 to 511

Indicates the primary scrambling code.

Ec/Io


Indicates the ratio of the combined peak energy per chip to the total power density of the received bandwidth.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Peak Ec/Io


Indicates the ratio of the peak energy per chip to the total power density of the received bandwidth.

RSCP


Indicates the combined received signal code power.

Peak RSCP


Indicates the peak received signal code power.

PS DL

-

Indicates the downlink resource block bearer type of an active set for PS services, such as R99 and HSDPA.

PS UL

-

Indicates the uplink resource block bearer type of an active set for PS services, such as R99 and HSUPA.

S-SC

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the secondary scrambling code.

Cell ID

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the identifier of the cell configured on the RNC. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used.

Cell Name

-


Distance

Unit: m

Indicates the distance between the UE and the cell.

LAC

Range: 0 to 65535


RNC ID

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the RNC identifier. Present only if an engineering parameter file is used.

Carrier

-

l In non-DC-HSDPA mode, the value of Carrier is null. l In DC-HSDPA mode, Carrier displays the information about the carrier in an active set cell.

UE State This describes meanings of the IEs related to UE State of the WCDMA. The following table provides the state information about the UE.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Cell Barred

-

Indicates the cell barred indicator.

Cell ID

-

Indicates the cell identity.

Cell Reserved

-

Indicates the cell reserved flag.


14-165


14 Appendix

14-166

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Cell Reserved for SoLSA

-

Indicates the flag of the cell reserved for Support of Localized Service Area (SoLSA).

GMM State

-

Indicates the state of GPRS Mobility Management (GMM) protocol: Idle, Ready, or Standby.

GMM Sub State

-

Indicates the GPRS mobility management substate.

IMEI

-

Indicates the international mobile equipment identity.

IMSI

-

Indicates the international mobile subscriber identity.

LAC

Range: 0 to 65535


MCC

Range: 000 to 999

Indicates the Mobile Country Code of the serving cell.

MM State

-

Indicates the mobility management state.

MM Sub State

-

Indicates the mobility management substate.

MM Update

-

Indicates the mobility management update.

MNC

Range: 000 to 999

Indicates the Mobile Network Code of the serving cell. May consist of two or three digits.

RAC

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the Routing Area Code.

RF Mode

-

Indicates the radio frequency mode.

RNC ID

-

Indicates the Radio Network Controller identity.

RRC State

-

Indicates the radio resource control state.

Service State

-

Indicates the service state.

UARFCN DL

-

Indicates the downlink ARFCN of the UTRAN terrestrial radio access network.

UARFCN UL

-

Indicates the uplink ARFCN of the UTRAN terrestrial radio access network.

UE Camped on a cell

-

Indicates the flag of the UE camped on a cell.

URA ID

-

Indicates the identity of the user registration area (URA)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

WCDMA BLER This describes meanings of the IEs related to WCDMA BLER of the WCDMA. The following table provides the information about IEs such as the transport channel number, block error rate (BLER), size of the window, and number of received blocks that are checked by cyclic redundancy check (CRC) in the WinSize. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

TrCH

-

Indicates the transport channel number.

BLER

-

Indicates the block error rate.

WinSize

Unit: frame

Indicates the size of the window.

CRC REC

-

Indicates the number of received blocks that are checked by CRC in the WinSize.

CRC ERROR

-

Indicates the number of received error blocks that are checked by CRC in the WinSize.

RACH BLER


Indicates the block error rate of the random access channel.

FACH BLER


Indicates the block error rate of the forward access channel.

14.3.3 CDMA Information Elements of MSs This describes the CDMA information elements of the MSs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the CDMA MS air interface views.

MS State This describes meanings of the IEs related to MS State of the CDMA. The following table provides the basic information about the MS.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Description

ESN

Indicates the equipment serial number.

IMSI


RF Mode

Indicates the radio frequency mode.

Channel

Indicates the central ARFCN.

Slot Cycle Index

Indicates the index of the timeslot cycles.

BS P_REV

Indicates the highest protocol revision supported by the base station.

P_REV in use

Indicates the protocol revision currently used between the base and mobile stations. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-167


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

Mobile P_REV

Indicates the highest protocol revision supported by the CDMA MS.

Combined Ec/Io (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Combined Ec/Io of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides value changes of Combined Ec/Io. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Combined Ec/Io


Indicates the strength of the pilot, computed by the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total power spectral density.

FCH/SCH FER (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to FCH/SCH FER of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides frame erasure ratios on the forward FCH, SCH 0, and SCH 1. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

F-FCH FER

Unit: %

Indicates the frame error rate on the forward FCH.

F-SCH0 FER

Unit: %

Indicates the frame error rate on the forward SCH 0.

F-SCH1 FER

Unit: %

Indicates the frame error rate on the forward SCH 1.

Finger (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the CDMA2000 1x. You can check whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link.

14-168

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

PN

-

Indicates the pilot PN offset of the finger.

Sector

-

Indicates the sector name corresponding to the pilot of the finger.

Ec/Io


Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip of the finger to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth.

Delay

Unit: chip

Indicates the absolute finger position.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Status

-

Indicates the finger state. The following states are included: l Locked: indicates the finger is locked in the symbol combiner. l UnLocked: indicates the finger is unlocked in the symbol combiner.

SectorName

-

Indicates the sector name.

Distance

Unit: m

Indicates the distance between the MS and the serving cell.

Forward Link Info (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Forward Link Info of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the forward traffic channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time. IE Name

Description

FFCH

Indicates the forward fundamental channel.

FSCH0

Indicates the statistics for the forward supplemental channel 0.

FSCH1

Indicates the statistics for the forward supplemental channel 1.

Full

Indicates the statistics for the full-rate frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH.

Half

Indicates the statistics for the half-rate frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH.

Quarter

Indicates the statistics for the one-quarter rate frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH.

Eighth

Indicates the statistics for the one-eighth rate frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH.

Erasure

Indicates the statistics for the erasure frames of the forward traffic channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH.

Markov Statistics (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Markov Statistics of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides information about IEs such as the statistics for the Markov call frames.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-169


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

Mode

Indicates the current call type of the MS. Involves all call types supported by the MS.

Total frames

Indicates the total number of frames received by the Markov call. The number is cleared when a new Markov call starts.

State

Indicates the reception state of the MS. The following states are involved: l Entering CDMA State: refers to the CDMA acquisition state. l Sync Channel State: refers to the synchronization state. l Paging Channel State: refers to the paging state. l Traffic Channel Initialization State: refers to the traffic initialization state. l Traffic Channel State: refers to the normal traffic state. l Exit State: refers to the exit state.

Bad frames

Indicates the number of bad frames during the Markov call, including the number of the erasure frames and full-rate frames with error bits. The number is cleared when a new Markov call starts.

Markov rate

Indicates the current Markov call rate. The following rates are involved: l Rate Variable: refers to the variable rate. l Rate 1/8: refers to the one-eighth rate. l Rate 1/4: refers to the one-quarter rate. l Rate 1/2: refers to the half rate. l Full: refers to the full rate. Indicates the Markov call error rate. The calculation formula is Bad frames/Total frames.

Error rate Received Frames Counts

14-170

Full

Indicates the number of full-rate frames received actually.

D1/2

Indicates the number of half-rate unavailable frames received actually.

D1/4

Indicates the number of one-quarter rate unavailable frames received actually.

D1/8

Indicates the number of one-eighth rate unavailable frames received actually.

Bsig

Indicates the number of signaling frames received actually.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

Expected

Half

Indicates the number of half-rate frames received actually.

Quarter

Indicates the number of one-quarter rate frames received actually.

Eighth

Indicates the number of one-eighth rate frames received actually.

FErrs

Indicates the number of full-rate frames that are actually received with error bits.

Erasures

Indicates the number of erasure frames received actually on the fundamental channel (FCH).

BitErrs

Indicates the number of frames that are actually received with error bits.

Percent

Indicates the percentage of error frames (the frames with error rates or bits except for the signaling) to total frames.

Full

Indicates the expected number of full-rate frames.

Half

Indicates the expected number of half-rate frames.

Quarter

Indicates the expected number of one-quarter rate frames.

Eighth

Indicates the expected number of one-eighth rate frames.

Pilot Sets (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Pilot Sets of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides information about the serving cell and neighboring cells of the current MS on the CDMA network. The pilot set refers to a set of the pilot channels that have the same frequency and different PN phases. The pilot set includes the parameters of the active set, candidate set, and neighboring pilot set.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Active Set

-

Indicates the active set.

Candidate Set

-

Indicates the candidate set.

Neighbor Set

-

Indicates the neighboring pilot set.

PN

Range: 0 to 511

Indicates the PN offset of the pilot.


14-171


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Ec/Io


Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth.

SectorName

-


Distance

Unit: m


Power (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides power information about the MS. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Rx Power


Indicates the received signal power.

Tx Power



TxAdj


Indicates the power control value, that is, the adjustment step of the transmit power.

Reverse Link Info (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Reverse Link Info of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the reverse traffic channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time.

14-172

IE Name

Description

RFCH

Indicates the reverse fundamental channel.

RSCH0

Indicates the statistics for the reverse supplemental channel 0.

RSCH1

Indicates the statistics for the reverse supplemental channel 1.

Full

Indicates the statistics for the full-rate frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH.

Half

Indicates the statistics for the half-rate frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH.

Quarter

Indicates the statistics for the one-quarter rate frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH.

Eighth

Indicates the statistics for the one-eighth rate frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on only the FCH. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

Erasure

Indicates the statistics for the error frames of the reverse traffic channel. Exists on the FCH and SCH.

RLP Statistics (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP Statistics of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides statistical values of each type of frames at the radio link protocol (RLP) layer.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Description

Service ID

Indicates the service ID.

Last Reset Time

Indicates the latest reset time, that is, the last reset time (ms).

Retransmitted Frames Not Found

Indicates the number of retransmissions that is not found.

Retransmitted Frames Missing

Indicates the number of missing transmitted frames.

Last RTT Measurement Frames

Indicates the number of 20 ms frames for the last round-trip time measurement.

Largest Consecutive Erasures

Indicates the largest block of consecutive erasures.

Number of Resets

Indicates the number of resets.

Number of NAK Aborts

Indicates the number of NAK aborts.

Block of Bytes Used

Indicates the method for adding the block of bytes.

RX Queue

Idle Frames

Indicates the number of received idle frames.

Fill Frames

Indicates the number of received fill frames.

Blank Frames

Indicates the number of received blank frames.

Null Frames

Indicates the number of received null frames.

New Data Frames

Indicates the number of received new data frames.

Fundamental Data Frames

Indicates the number of received 20 ms fundamental data frames.

Erasures

Indicates the number of received erasures at the radio link layer.

Multiplexer Erasures

Indicates the number of received erasures at the multiplexer layer.

Total Bytes

Indicates the total number of received bytes.


14-173


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

TX Queue

TX NAK Counts

Retransmitted Frames

Indicates the number of retransmitted frames.

Idle Frames

Indicates the number of transmitted idle frames.

New Data Frames

Indicates the number of transmitted new frames.

Fundamental Data Frames

Indicates the number of transmitted 20 ms fundamental data frames.

Total Bytes

Indicates the total number of transmitted bytes.

Single

Indicates the number of single NAKs.

Double

Indicates the number of double NAKs.

Triple

Indicates the number of triple NAKs.

RLP Throughput (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP Throughput of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides changes of the throughput received and transmitted at the RLP layer. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

1x RLP Rx Throughput Instantaneous

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the instantaneous throughput on the downlink.

1x RLP Tx Throughput Instantaneous

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the instantaneous throughput on the uplink.

Signaling (1x) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Signaling of the CDMA2000 1x. The following table provides information about the receive and transmit power of the MS.

14-174

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Rx Power


Indicates the received signal power.

Tx Power



TxAdj


Indicates the power control value, that is, the adjustment step of the transmit power.

F-FCH FER


Indicates the frame error rate of the forward fundamental channel.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Combined Ec/Io


Indicates the strength of the pilot, computed by the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to total power spectral density.

F-SCH Rate

The rate ranges are 0X-1X, 1X-2X, 2X-4X, 3X-8X, 4X-16X, 5X-18X, and 6X-32X. If the rate is outside the ranges, N/A is displayed.

Indicates the assignment rate on the forward supplemental channel.

R-SCH Rate

-

Indicates the assignment rate on the reverse supplemental channel.

Air Link Summary (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Air Link Summary of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides information about IEs of the forward signals on the air interface on the CDMA2000 EV-DO.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Best Predicted ASP Index

Range: 1 to 6

Indicates the sector index of the best active set pilot (ASP).

Best ASP SINR


Indicates the signal-to-interference-andNoise ratio (SINR) of the best ASP.

Best ASP Filtered SINR


Indicates the filtered SINR of the best ASP.

Data Rate - Current

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the instantaneous data rate.

Data Rate - Short

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the average data rate in a short period.

Data Rate - Long

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the average data rate in a long period.

PER - Current

Unit: %

Indicates the instantaneous packet error rate (PER).

PER - Short

Unit: %

Indicates the average PER in a short period.

PER - Long

Unit: %

Indicates the average PER in a long period.

ASP[1] Filtered RPC

-

Indicates the filtered reverse power control (RPC) of the ASP 1.

ASP[2] Filtered RPC

-

Indicates the filtered RPC of the ASP 2.


14-175


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

ASP[3] Filtered RPC

-


ASP[4] Filtered RPC

-


ASP[5] Filtered RPC

-


ASP[6] Filtered RPC

-


AT Status (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to AT Status of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides the state of the AT, including the parameters of the sector to which the AT is connected, AT connection state, session connection state, and pilot set. IE Name

Description

Protocol States

AT state

Indicates the AT state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Acquisition l Sync l Idle l Access l Connected

Session state

Indicates the session connection state. The contained states are as follows: l Closed l AMP setup l AT-initiated negotiation l AN-initiated negotiation l Open l Closing

ALMP state

Indicates the state of the air link management protocol (ALMP). The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Initialization l Idle l Connected

14-176


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description Initialization state

Indicates the initialization state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Network determination l Pilot acquisition l Sync

Idle state

Indicates the idle state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Monitor l Sleep l Connection setup l Suspend

Connected state

Indicates the connection state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Open

Route update state

Indicates the route update state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Idle l Connection Setup l Connected l Synchronize connection setup

Overhead state

Indicates the state of overhead message processing. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Process All messages l Sleep l Frequency Change In Progress l Access Handoff In Progress l Wait for Link

Session Attempt

Result

Indicates the session attempt result. The results are as follows: l Received UATIAssignment message l Did not received UATIAssignment message

RATI

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Indicates the random access terminal identifier.


14-177


14 Appendix

IE Name

AT Status

Description UATI

Indicates the unicast access terminal identifier (UATI). When Result is set to 1, the value of UATI is null.

Color Code

Indicates the color code. When Result is set to 1, the value of UATI is null.

PN

Indicates the PN offset of the pilot. When Result is set to 1, the value of UATI is null.

SectorName

Indicates the name of the current serving sector.

AT state

Indicates the AT state. The contained states are as follows: l Inactive l Acquisition l Sync l Idle l Access l Connected

Session state

Indicates the session connection state. The contained states are as follows: l Closed l AMP setup l AT-initiated negotiation l AN-initiated negotiation l Open l Closing

14-178

Sector ID

Indicates the ID of the current serving sector.

UATI024 Code

Indicates the latter 24 codes of the UATI.

MAC index

Indicates the MAC index.

Channel

Indicates the ARFCN.

Band Class

Indicates the frequency band.

Subnet mask

Indicates the subnet mask of a sector.

Color code

Indicates the color code.

Serving Sector PN

Indicates the PN of the current serving sector.

User count

Indicates the number of users.

SectorName

Indicates the name of the current serving sector.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Finger (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Finger of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can check whether a barrier or a line-of-sight path exists in the link. IE Name State Information

Finger Information

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

Search State

-

Indicates the search state.

MSTR (chip x8)

Unit: 1/8 chip

Indicates the mobile station time reference (MSTR) offset relative to the real time control (RTC) timebase.

MSTR Error

Unit: 1/8 chip

Indicates the MSTR offset relative to the earliest arriving in-lock and enabled active set pilot.

MSTR Pilot PN

-

Indicates the pilot PN of the earliest arriving finger.

PN

-

Indicates the PN offset of the pilot of the finger.

RTC Offset

Unit: 1/8 chip

Indicates the offset in the RTC buffer for this pilot.

C/I

Unit: dB

Indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio.

Locked

0 or 1

Indicates the locked state. 0 refers to the unlocked state and 1 refers to the locked state.

Antenna

0 or 1

Indicates the antenna selection, only valid when diversity is disabled. 0 refers to Antenna 0, and 1 refers to Antenna 1.

Diversity

0 or 1

Indicates whether the diversity is enabled for the AT. 0 refers to Disabled, and 1 refers to Enabled.

Finger Idx

The range is 1000 to 1011, referring to finger 0 to finger 11.

Finger index, which indicates the index of the demodulator finger.

RPC Cell Idx

Range: 1 to 6

Cell index, which indicates the index assigned to a cell by AT.

ASP Idx

Range: 1 to 6

Sector index, which indicates the index assigned to a sector by AT.

C/I (Ant0)

-

C/I equivalent of the finger for antenna 0, only valid when diversity is enabled.


14-179


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

C/I (Ant1)

-

C/I equivalent of the finger for antenna 1, only valid when diversity is enabled.

SectorName

-


Distance

Unit: m


Pilot Set (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Pilot Set of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides information about the serving cell and neighboring cells of the current MS of the CDMA. The pilot set refers to a set of the pilot channels that have the same frequency and different PN phases. The pilot set includes the parameters of the active set, candidate set, and neighboring pilot set. IE Name Neighbor Set

Active Set

14-180

Range/Unit

Description

Pilot PN

-

Indicates the pilot PN of the neighboring pilot set.

Pilot Energy

Unit: dB

Indicates the pilot strength Ec/Io of the neighboring pilot set, that is, the ratio of the energy per chip to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth.

Channel Number

-

Indicates the ARFCN of the neighboring pilot set.

Band Class

Unit: MHz


Window Size

-

Indicates the search window size of the neighboring set.

SectorName

-


Distance

Unit: m

Indicates the distance between the MS and the neighboring cell.

Pilot PN

-

Indicates the pilot PN of the active set.

Pilot Energy

Unit: dB

Indicates the pilot strength Ec/Io of the active set, that is, the ratio of the energy per chip to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth.

Mac Index

-

Indicates the MAC index of the active set.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Candidate Set

General

Range/Unit

Description

Window Center (x2)

-

Indicates the search window center of the active set.

SectorName

-


Distance

Unit: m

Indicates the distance between the MS and the active set cell.

Pilot PN

-

Indicates the pilot PN of the candidate set.

Pilot Energy

Unit: dB

Indicates the pilot strength Ec/Io of the candidate set, that is, the ratio of the energy per chip to total power spectral density of the received bandwidth.

Channel Number

-

Indicates the PN offset of the pilot.

Band Class

Unit: MHz


Window Center (x2)

-

Indicates the search window center of the candidate set.

SectorName

-


Distance

Unit: m

Indicates the distance between the MS and the candidate set cell.

Pilot PN Increment

-

Indicates the PN increment of the pilot.

Band Class

Unit: MHz


Searcher State

-

Indicates the search state of the AT.

Active Set Channel

-

Indicates the ARFCN of the active set.

Active Set Window

-

Indicates the search window size of the active set.

Remaining Set Window

-

Indicates the search window size of the remaining set.

Power (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides power information about test terminals.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-181


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Power Amplifier State

On or Off.

Indicates the power amplifier state.

TX Open Loop


Indicates the open loop transmit power.

TX Closed Loop


Indicates the closed loop transmit power.

TX Pilot


Indicates the pilot power.

TX Total


Indicates the total transmit power.

RX Antenna 0


Indicates the received power of antenna 0.

RX Antenna 1


Indicates the received power of antenna 1.

Rel. 0 Forward LinkInfo (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rel. 0 Forward LinkInfo of the CDMA2000 EVDO. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the forward traffic channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time. IE Name

Description

Rates

Indicates the frame rate.

Good CRC

Indicates the number of frames that pass the cyclic redundancy check (CRC).

Bad CRC

Indicates the number of the frames that do not pass the CRC.

Total

Indicates the sum of Good CRC and Bad CRC of each rate.

Forward Traffic Channel Statistics

14-182

Frames at 38.4 kbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the frames at 38.4 kbit/ s.



Frames at 153.6 kbit/ s


Short frames at 307.2 kbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the short frames at 307.2 kbit/s.

Long frames at 307.2 kbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the long frames at 307.2 kbit/s.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

Control Channel Statistics

TX Queue

Short frames at 614.4 kbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the short frames at 614.4 kbit/s.

Long frames at 614.4 kbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the long frames at 614.4 kbit/s.

Frames at 921.6 kbit/ s


Short frames at 1.228 Mbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the short frames at 1.228 Mbit/s.

Long frames at 1.228 Mbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the long frames at 1.228 Mbit/s.

Frames at 1.843 Mbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the frames at 1.843 Mbit/s.

Frames at 2.457 Mbit/s

Indicates the statistics for the frames at 2.457 Mbit/s.

Total frames

Indicates the sum of Good CRC of all rates, sum of Bad CRC of all rates, and sum of Total of all rates.





Total frames

Indicates the sum of Good CRC of all rates, sum of Bad CRC of all rates, and sum of Total of all rates.

Mean served throughput

Indicates the mean throughput.

Packet Error Rate (PER)

Indicates the total PER, which is calculated based on the formula: Total CRC Bad Frames/(Total CRC Bad Frames + Total CRC Good Frames).

Rel. 0 Reverse LinkInfo (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rel. 0 Reverse LinkInfo of the CDMA2000 EVDO. The following table provides the number of frames at different rates of the reverse traffic channel and the frame rates of the channel at different time.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-183


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

Reverse Rate Indicator

Actual RRI

Indicates the actual reverse rate indicator. The following values are included: l 0 kbit/s l 9.6 kbit/s l 19.2 kbit/s l 38.4 kbit/s l 76.8 kbit/s l 153.6 kbit/s

Reverse Rate Limit

Indicates the reverse rate limit. The following values are included: l 0 kbit/s l 9.6 kbit/s l 19.2 kbit/s l 38.4 kbit/s l 76.8 kbit/s l 153.6 kbit/s

Traffic Statistics

Power Amplifier Limit

Indicates the power amplifier limit.

9.6kbit/s

Indicates the number of packets transmitted at 9.6 kbit/s.

19.2kbit/s


38.4kbit/s


76.8kbit/s


153.6kbit/s

Indicates the number of data packets transmitted at 153.6 kbit/s.

Rev. A DRC-DSC-ARQ Buffer (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A DRC-DSC-ARQ Buffer of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides information about the data source control (DSC) and data rate control (DRC).

14-184

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DRC Cover

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the DRC coverage.

DSC Value

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the DSC value.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DRC Rate


Indicates the DRC rate.

ASP DRC Lock

-

Indicates the DRC lock for ASP1 to ASP6.

Rev. A Forward Link User Packet Throughput (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Forward Link User Packet Throughput of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides the throughput of the forward link user packet. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

SUP Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the throughput of the single service user packet.

Rev. A MultiFlow RLP Statistics (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A MultiFlow RLP Statistics of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides statistical information about the forward or reverse multi-RLP layer. IE Name Forward Link Statistics

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

Flow ID

-

Indicates the ID of the RLP flow.

Version

-

Indicates the version.

Reset time

-

Indicates the latest reset time, that is, the last reset time.

Retransmissions not found

-

Indicates the number of retransmissions that is not found.

AT NAK bytes requested

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of NAK bytes requested by the AT for retransmission.

RX retransmitted bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of received retransmitted bytes.

RX new data bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of received new data bytes.

RX total bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the total number of received data bytes.


14-185


14 Appendix

IE Name

Reverse Link Statistics

Range/Unit

Description

NAK timeouts/ aborts

-

Indicates the number of NAK timeouts or aborts.

Resets

-


AT reset request count

-

Indicates the number of resets requested by the AT.

AN reset ACK count

-

Indicates the number of ACKs received from the AN.

AN reset request count

-

Indicates the number of resets requested by the AN.

Flow ID

-

Indicates the ID of the RLP flow.

Version

-


Reset time

-


Retransmissions not found

-

Indicates the number of frames that are not received in the retransmission.

AN NAK bytes requested

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of NAK bytes requested by the AN for retransmission.

TX retransmitted bytes

-

Indicates the number of retransmitted bytes.

TX new data bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of transmitted new data bytes.

TX total bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the total number of transmitted data bytes.

Resets

-


AT reset request count

-


AN reset ACK count

-

Indicates the number of ACKs received from the AN.

AN reset request count

-


Rev. A Multi-User Packet Forward Statistics (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Multi-User Packet Forward Statistics of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides multi-user packet forward statistics. 14-186


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

CRC Count

-

Indicates the number of transmitted multi-user traffic channel packets.

Termination Slot Count

-

Indicates the number of CRCs transmitted by each timeslot.

Packet Error Rate

Unit: %

Indicates the PER.

Throughput When Served

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the terminal throughput.

Instantaneous Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the instantaneous throughput.

Instantaneous Throughput (1s)

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the instantaneous throughput, which is calculated according to the difference of the previous packet.

Sequence (Elapsed Time)

-

Indicates the sequence number of the log packet.

Rev. A Reverse Link Metrics (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Reverse Link Metrics of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. You can obtain counters of the reverse link statistics. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

HiCap SPn ACKs

-

Indicates the number of ACKs of the high capacity (HiCap), which is received by the current instance.

HiCap PARQ NAKs

-

Indicates the number of NAKs of the HiCap, which is received by the current instance.

LoLat SPn ACKs

-

Indicates the number of ACKs of the low latency (LoLat), which is received by the current instance.

LoLat PARQ NAKs

-

Indicates the number of NAKs of the LoLat, which is received by the current instance.

Packets Sent

-

Indicates the number of transmitted packets.

Good Packets

-

Indicates the number of packets transmitted successfully.

PER

Unit: %

Indicates the PER.

Total Packet TX Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the duration for packet transmission.

n: 0 to 3

n: 0 to 3

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-187


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Transmitted Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the transmission throughput.

Overall Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the overall throughput.

Total PER

Unit: %

Indicates the total PER.

Total Instantaneous PER

Unit: %

Indicates the total instantaneous PER.

Total Transmitted Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the total transmission throughput.

Total Overall Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the overall throughput.

Total Instantaneous Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the total instantaneous throughput.

Average Latency

Unit: ms

Indicates the average latency.

Total Packets Sent

-

Indicates the total number of transmitted packets.

Unexpected HARQ NAKs

-

Indicates the number of HARQ NAKs received by the same packet of the current instance.

HARQ-PARQ Mismatch Rate

Unit: %

Indicates the ratio of error packets to total transmitted packets.

Rev. A Reverse Link Throughput (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Reverse Link Throughput of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. statistical information about the reverse link throughput. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Throughput-Average

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the average throughput.

Throughput-Instantaneous

Unit: kbit/s


Throughput-TX Average

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the average transmit throughput.

Rev. A Single-User Forward Statistics (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Rev. A Single-User Forward Statistics of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides single-user forward statistics.

14-188


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/ Unit

Description

Forward Traffic Channel Statistics

-

Indicates the forward traffic channel statistics.

Format

-

Indicates the DRC information format. The format is [Rate, Transmit Slot, Transmit Bit].

Passed

-

Indicates the number of passed CRCs.

Failed

-

Indicates the number of failed CRCs.

Total

-

Indicates the total number of CRCs.

Info

-

Indicates the transmit slot.

Avg

-

Indicates the average value.

1-16

-

Indicates the N slot. N ranges from 1 to 16.

DRC kbit/s

-

Indicates the DRC rate.

DRC Format

-

Indicates the DRC format.

CRC Count Passed

-

Indicates the number of CRCs transmitted successfully.

CRC Count Failed

-

Indicates the number of CRCs failed to be transmitted.

CRC Count Total

-

Indicates the total number of CRCs.


-

Indicates the number of packets transmitted at each slot.

General

Sequence Number (Elapsed Time)

-

Indicates the sequence number of the log packet.

Traffic Channel

Packet Error Rate

Unit: %

Indicates the PER.


Unit: kbit/s



Unit: kbit/s



Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the instantaneous throughput, which is calculated according to the deviation of the previous packet.

DRC Info


Forward Control Channel Statistics

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-189


14 Appendix

IE Name Short Control Channel

Range/ Unit

Description


Unit: kbit/s



Unit: kbit/s



Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the instantaneous throughput, which is calculated according to the deviation of the previous packet.

RLP (EV-DO) This describes meanings of the IEs related to RLP of the CDMA2000 EV-DO. The following table provides statistical values of each type of frames at the RLP layer.

14-190

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Service ID

-

Indicates the service ID.

Last Reset Time

Unit: ms


Total AN/AT Resets

-

Indicates the total number of resets requested by the AN or AT.

AN Resets

-


AT Resets

-


Received Reset AN ACKs

-

Indicates the number of ACKs received by the AN.

RX Queue

Total AT Bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the total number of bytes received by the AT.

New AT Bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of new data bytes received by the AT.

Duplicate AT Bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of duplicate bytes received by the AT.

Retransmitted AT Bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of retransmitted bytes received by the AT.

AT NAK Requests

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of NAK bytes requested by the AT for retransmission.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

TX Queue

Range/Unit

Description

AT NAK Aborts

-

Indicates the number of NAK timeouts or aborts of the AT.

AT NAK Bytes

-

Indicates the number of NAK bytes received by the AT.

Total AT Bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the total number of bytes transmitted by the AT.

New AT Bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of new data bytes transmitted by the AT.

Duplicate AT Bytes

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of duplicate bytes transmitted by the AT.

Retransmissions Not Found

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of bytes that are not received in retransmission.

AN NAK Requests

Unit: byte

Indicates the number of NAK bytes requested by the AN for retransmission.

AN NAK Bytes

-

Indicates the number of NAK bytes transmitted by the AN.

14.3.4 WiMAX Information Elements of UEs This describes the WiMAX information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the WiMAX UE air interface views.

NETEntry/HO Delay This describes meanings of the IEs related to NETEntry/HO Delay of the WiMAX. The following table provides the parameters related to the network entry and handover delay of the test terminal. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

NetEntry Delay Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the delay time of the network entry.

HO Delay Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the handover delay time.

Basic Information (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides basic information about the current terminal such as the serving cell identifier, terminal connection state, and frequency. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-191


14 Appendix

IE Name MS State

Connection

Frame

14-192

Range/Unit

Description

Base ID

-

Indicates the ID of the BS.

Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 114

Indicates the preamble index.

IDCell

-

Indicates the cell ID.

Current Frequency

Unit: Hz

Indicates the current frequency.

Frame Ratio (DL:UL)

-

Indicates the frame ratio on the uplink and downlink.

Permutation

-

Indicates the downlink permutation zone.

MAC State

-

Indicates the MAC state.

Max Tx Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the maximum transmit power.

Cell Name

-


Distance

Unit: m


Network Entry State

0 refers to success, and 1 refers to failure.

Indicates the network entry state of the MS.

No. of Provisioned Connection

-

Indicates the number of the provisioned connection.

No. of Admitted Connection

-

Indicates the number of the admitted connection.

Basic CID

-

Indicates the basic connection identifier (CID).

Primary CID

-

Indicates the primary CID.

Second CID

-

Indicates the secondary CID.

DL Traffic Connections

-

Indicates the number of downlink traffic connections.

UL Traffic Connections

-

Indicates the number of uplink traffic connections.

Frame Number

-

Indicates the frame number.

Logical Frame Number

-

Indicates the logical frame number.

DL PDU Number

-

Indicates the number of downlink PDUs.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Burst

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

UL PDU Number

-

Indicates the number of uplink PDUs.

DL SDU Number

-

Indicates the number of downlink SDUs.

UL SDU Number

-

Indicates the number of uplink SDUs.

DL Discard Frame Number

-

Indicates the number of frames discarded on the downlink.

Uplink Burst Data Zone

-

Indicates the uplink permutation zone.

Downlink Burst Data Zone

-


Uplink Burst Data Duration

Unit: slot

Indicates the uplink burst data duration.

Downlink Burst Data Duration

Unit: slot

Indicates the downlink burst data duration.

Uplink Burst Data Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the size of the uplink burst data.

Downlink Burst Data Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the size of the downlink burst data.

Uplink Burst Data CID

-

Indicate the CID corresponding to the uplink burst data.

Downlink Burst Data CID

-

Indicate the CID corresponding to the downlink burst data.

Uplink Burst Data UIUC

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the uplink interval usage code (UIUC) of the burst data.

Downlink Burst Data DIUC

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the downlink interval usage code (DIUC) of the burst data.

Uplink Burst Data FEC Scheme

-

Indicates the FEC scheme of the uplink burst data.

Downlink Burst Data FEC Scheme

-

Indicates the FEC scheme of the downlink burst data.

DL Map FEC Scheme

-

Indicates the MCS of the downlink MAP.


14-193


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Uplink Burst Data FEC Repetition

-

Indicates the MCS repetition of the uplink burst data.

Downlink Burst Data FEC Repetition

-

Indicates the MCS repetition of the downlink burst data.

Cell Measurement (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Cell Measurement of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the cell measurement. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

BSID

-


Preamble

Range: 0 to 114

Indicates the preamble code.

CINR mean

Range: -50 to -30. Unit: dB.

Indicates the mean CINR.

CellName

-


Distance

Unit: m

Indicates the distance between the UE and the serving cell.

RSSI mean


Indicates the mean RSSI.

CS_Info (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to CS_Info of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the convergence sublayer (CS).

14-194

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

No.

-

Indicates the number.

SFID

-

Indicates the ID of the service flow.

Direction

-

Indicates the direction.

CID

-

Indicates the CID.

SF Type

-

Indicates the type of the service flow.

CS Type

-

Indicates the type of the convergence sublayer.

Service Class Name

-

Indicates the service type.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name Basic

PHS

Qos Profile

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

SFID

-


Direction

-


CID

-

Indicates the CID.

SF Type

-

Indicates the type of the service flow.

Source Port Low Value

-

Indicates the low value of the source port.

Source Port high Value

-

Indicates the high value of the source port.

Destination Port Low Value

-

Indicates the low value of the destination port.

Destination Port High Value

-

Indicates the high value of the destination port.

CS Type

-

Indicates the CS type.

Qos Set Flag Provisioned

-

Indicates whether to use the provisioned QoS set.

Qos Set Flag Admitted

-

Indicates whether to use the admitted QoS set.

Qos Set Flag Active

-

Indicates whether to use the active QoS set.

Classifier Priority

-

Indicates the classifier priority.

Service Class Name

-

Indicates the service name.

PHSI

-

Indicates the ID of the payload header suppression.

PHSS

Unit: byte

Indicates the size of the payload header suppression.

PHSV

-

Indicates whether the payload header suppression is valid.

PHSM

-

Indicates the mask of the payload header suppression.

PHSF

-

Indicates the payload header suppression field.

Traffic Priority

-

Indicates the traffic priority.

Maximum Sustained Traffic Rate

Unit: bit/s

Indicates the maximum sustained traffic rate.

Minimum Reserved Traffic Rate

Unit: bit/s

Indicates the minimum reserved traffic rate.


14-195


14 Appendix

IE Name

IP

Range/Unit

Description

Tolerated Jitter

Unit: ms

Indicates the tolerated jitter.

SDU Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the SDU size.

Maximum Latency

Unit: ms

Indicates the maximum latency.

Unsolicited Grant Interval

Unit: ms

Indicates the unsolicited grant interval.

Unsolicited Polling Interval

Unit: ms

Indicates the unsolicited polling interval.

Protocol

-

Indicates the protocol at the IP layer.

IP Source Address

-

Indicates the source IP address.

IP Source Mask Address

-

Indicates the source IP address mask.

IP Destination Address

-


IP Destination Mask Address

-

Indicates the destination address mask.

Tos Low

-

Indicates the service type range of IP packets (lower limit).

Tos high

-

Indicates the service type range of IP packets (upper limit).

Tos Mask

-

Indicates the service type mask of IP packets.

DL Frame Prefix and MS Capability (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to DL Frame Prefix and MS Capability of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the uplink frames and MS capabilities. IE Name DL Frame Prefix

14-196

Range/Unit

Description

FFT Size

-

Indicates the number of subcarriers supported by the BS.

Used Subchannel

-

Indicates the used subchannel.

FFC Repetition Code

-

Indicates the number of DL_Map repetitions.

FEC Coding

-

Indicates the DL_Map coding scheme.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name MS Physical Capability

Range/Unit

Description

TTG

-

Indicates the transmit-to-receive time interval.

RTG

-

Indicates the receive-to-transmit time interval.

Max Tx Power

Unit: dBm


FFT Support

-

Indicates the number of subcarriers supported by the MS.

Handover and Neighboring Cells (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the handover and neighboring cells. IE Name HO Event

Range/Unit

Description

HO Type

-

Indicates the handover type.

HO Latency Time

-

Indicates the handover latency.

Serving BSID

-

Indicates the BS ID of the serving cell.

CellName

-


Distance

Unit: m


-

Indicates the ID of the recommended BS.

The Number of HO Drop

-

Indicates the number of handover drops.

The Number of HO Trial

-

Indicates the number of handover trials.

Ping Pang Count During HO

-

Indicates the number of ping pang handovers.

HO Drop Rate

-

Indicates the handover drop rate.

Recom. BSID HO Statistic

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-197


14 Appendix

IE Name Cells List

Range/Unit

Description

NO.

-

Indicates the number.

BSID

-


Cell ID

-


Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 114


CINR mean


Indicates the mean carrierto-interference-and-noise ratio (CINR).

RSSI mean



SNR mean

Unit: dB

Indicates the mean SNR.

CellName

-


Distance

Unit: m


Freq

Unit: Hz

Indicates the central frequency.

MAC Throughput (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to MAC Throughput of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the uplink and downlink throughput.

14-198

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DL App Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink throughput at the application layer

UL App Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink throughput at the application layer

DL Bit Data Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink bit rate.

UL Bit Data Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink bit rate.

DL Packet Data Rate

Unit: pkt/s

Indicates the downlink packet rate.

UL Packet Data Rate

Unit: pkt/s

Indicates the uplink packet rate.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Modulation and Coding (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Modulation and Coding of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the current or history MCS. IE Name

Description

Active

CID

Indicates the CID.

Direction


FEC Type

Indicates the MCS type.

FEC Type ID

Indicates the ID of the MCS type.

Power and PER (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about the transmit power, receive power, and reception quality. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Power

RSSI Mean



RSSI Deviation

-

Indicates the RSSI deviation.

CINR Mean



CINR Deviation

-

Indicates the CINR deviation.

Tx Power

Unit: dBm


Tx Reference Power

-

Indicates the reference transmit power.

Tx Headroom

Unit: dB

Indicates the headroom between the current transmit power and the maximum transmit power that can be used for the UE.

Tx Power BS Offset

-

Indicates the transmit power offset of the BS.

Power Work Mode

-

Indicates the power work mode.

-

Indicates the packet error rate.

PER

Ranging (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the ranging. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-199


14 Appendix

IE Name Ranging Method

Range/Unit

Description

UL Ranging Code

-

Indicates the uplink ranging codes.

UL Ranging Seed

-

Indicates the random seed of the uplink ranging.

Ranging Type

-

Indicates the ranging type. The following types are included: l Initial: refers to the initial ranging. l Periodic: refers to the periodic ranging. l BW Request: refers to the bandwidth request ranging. l Handover: refers to the handover ranging.

Ranging Code

Ranging Backoff

14-200

Ranging Method

-

Indicates the ranging method.

UL Initial Ranging Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the uplink initial ranging power.

Tx Reference Power

-

Indicates the reference transmit power.

Start of Ranging Codes Group

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the start of a ranging code group.

Initial Ranging Codes

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the initial ranging codes.

Periodic Ranging Codes

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the periodic ranging codes.

Bandwidth Requests Codes

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the bandwidth request ranging codes.

Handover Ranging Codes

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the handover ranging codes.


2N. The range of N is 0 to 15.

Indicates the backoff window size of the initial ranging.



Indicates the backoff window size of the periodic ranging.

BW Request Ranging Codes


Indicates the backoff window size of the bandwidth request ranging.



Indicates the backoff window size of the handover ranging.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name Ranging Statistic

Range/Unit

Description

Initial Ranging

-

Indicates the initial ranging.

Periodic Ranging

-

Indicates the periodic ranging.

BW Request Ranging

-

Indicates the bandwidth request ranging.

Handover Ranging

-

Indicates the handover ranging.

Secondary Connect Profile (Runcom) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Secondary Connect Profile of the WiMAX_Runcom. The following table provides the information about the secondary CID. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Secondary CID

-


ARQ Support

Not Supported: supports the ARQ. Supported: not support the ARQ.

Indicates whether to support the automatic repeat request (ARQ).

IP Management Mode

Unmanaged: disables the IP management mode. Managed: enables the IP management mode.

Indicates the IP management mode.

IP Version

The IP versions are IP4 and IPv6.

Indicates the supported IP versions.

Basic Information (GCT) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides basic information about the current terminal such as the serving cell identifier, terminal connection state, and frequency. IE Name MS State

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

BSID

-


IDCell

-


Frequency

Unit: kHz


Frame Ratio

-


Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 114


MAC State

-

Indicates the MAC state.


14-201


14 Appendix

IE Name

FCH

Frame

Burst

14-202

Range/Unit

Description

Max Tx Power

Unit: dBm


Segment

Range: 0 to 2

Indicates the preamble carrier set.

DL PermBase

Range: 0 to 31

Indicates the permutation base for specified downlink.

UL PermBase

Range: 0 to 69

Indicates the permutation base for specified uplink.

Cell Name

-


Distance

Unit: m


FA Index

-

Indicates the frequency assignment (FA) index.

FCH Bitmap

-

Indicates the bitmap information about the frame control header (FCH).

DL MapLen

-

Indicates the length of the downlink MAP message.

CodingInd

-

Indicates the FCH coding scheme.

RptCodingInd

-

Indicates the index of the FCH repeat coding.

UsedSubch (Total 6 Group)

-

Indicates the number of used subchannels.

Frame Number

-

Indicates the number of frames.

UL PDU Number

-

Indicates the uplink PDU number.

DL PDU Number

-

Indicates the downlink PDU number.


Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the connection identifier (CID) corresponding to the uplink burst data.


Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the CID corresponding to the downlink burst data.


Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the UIUC corresponding to the uplink burst data.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description


Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the DIUC corresponding to the downlink burst data.


-

Indicates the FEC scheme of the uplink burst data.


-

Indicates the FEC scheme of the downlink burst data.

BCS (GCT) This describes meanings of the IEs related to BCS of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the parameters related to the background cell search (BCS) test. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Preamble Index

-


CINR mean

Unit: dB


RSSI mean

Unit: dBm


Handover and Neighboring Cells (GCT) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the handover and neighboring cells. IE Name HO Event

HO Type

Range/Unit

Description

-

Indicates the handover type: l HO Intra FA: refers to the intra-FA handover. l HO Inter FA: refers to the inter-FA handover.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Current Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 133

Indicates the preamble index of the current serving cell.

Current Serving ACOR

-

Indicates the ACOR of the current serving cell.

Previous Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 133

Indicates the preamble index of the previous cell.

Previous Serving ACOR

-

Indicates the ACOR of the previous cell.


14-203


14 Appendix

IE Name

HO Statistic

Cells List

Range/Unit

Description

HO Traffic Latency Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the handover traffic latency.

HO Latency Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the handover latency.


-



-



-


HO Drop Rate

-

Indicates the handover drop rate.

Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 114


CINR mean



RSSI mean



Freq

Unit: kHz


Modulation and Coding (GCT) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Modulation and Coding of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the current or history modulation coding scheme (MCS).

14-204

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

CID

-

Indicates the ID of the CID.

Direction

-

Indicates the transmit direction.

UIUC/DIUC

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the uplink interval usage code or downlink interval usage code.

FEC Type

-

Indicates the type of the forward error correction (FEC).

Repetition

-

Indicates the number of repetitions.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Power and PER (GCT) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the transmit power, receive power, and reception quality. IE Name Power

PER

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

Tx Power

Unit: dBm


Tx Power Offset (BS)

Unit: dBm

Indicates the transmit power offset on the BS side.

Tx Power Offset (SS)

Unit: dBm

Indicates the transmit power offset on the subscriber station.

Min Tx Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the minimum transmit power in a period.

Max Tx Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the maximum transmit power in a period.

Noise Interference (BS)

Unit: dBm

Indicates the noise interference on the BS side.

Noise Interference (SS)

Unit: dBm

Indicates the noise interference on the subscriber station.

Power Work Mode

-

Indicates the power work mode.

Burst PER

Unit: %

Indicates the burst PER.

Burst Lost

-

Indicates the number of lost burst packets.

Burst

-

Indicates the number of received burst packets.

MAP PER

Unit: %

Indicates the MAP PER.

MAP Lost

-

Indicates the number of lost MAP packets.

MAP

-

Indicates the number of received MAP packets.

PDU PER

Unit: %

Indicates the PDU PER.

PDU ERROR

-

Indicates the number of error PDU packets.

PDU RX

-

Indicates the number of received PDU packets.


14-205


14 Appendix

Ranging (GCT) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the initial ranging codes, periodic ranging codes, bandwidth request ranging codes, and handover ranging codes. IE Name

Description

Ranging Backoff

Ranging Code





BW Request Ranging Codes




Start of Ranging Codes Group






BW Requests Ranging Codes




UL and DL (GCT) This describes meanings of the IEs related to UL and DL of the WiMAX_GCT. The following table provides information about the uplink, downlink, and antenna. IE Name ATN 1

ATN 2

DL

14-206

Range/Unit

Description

RSSI

Unit: dBm

Indicates the RSSI value.

CINR

Unit: dB

Indicates the CINR value.

AGC

-

Indicates the value of the automatic gain control (AGC).

RSSI

Unit: dBm


CINR

Unit: dB


AGC

-

Indicates the AGC value.

Frequency Offset

Unit: Hz

Indicates the downlink frequency offset.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

UL

Range/Unit

Description

Min FO

Unit: Hz

Indicates the minimum downlink frequency offset.

Max FO

Unit: Hz

Indicates the maximum downlink frequency offset.

Sync Lost

-

Indicates the synchronization lost.

Tx Timing Offset

Unit: μm

Indicates the transmit timing offset.

BR ranging tries

-

Indicates the number of bandwidth request ranging tries.

BRH Tries

-

Indicates the number of BRH tries.

Max200 This describes meanings of the IEs related to Max200 of the WiMAX Max. The following table provides the basic information about the current UE.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

CINR Mean



BSID

-

Indicates the base ID.

CINR Deviation

Unit: dB

Indicates the CINR deviation.

Cell ID

-


RSSI



Frequency

-


UL Data Rate

Unit: bit/s

Indicates the uplink data rate.

DL Data Rate

Unit: bit/s

Indicates the downlink data rate.

WiMAX State

-

Indicates the state of the WiMAX.

Tx Power

Unit: dBm


MAC Address

-

Indicates the MAC address.

PER

Unit: %


Cell Name

-

Indicates the cell name.

Distance

Unit: m



14-207


14 Appendix

Basic Information (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX Sequans. The following table provides basic information about the current terminal such as the serving cell identifier, terminal connection state, and frequency. IE Name MS State

Range/ Unit

Description

BSID

-


Bandwidth

Unit: MHz


Cell Name

-


Distance

Unit: m


FFT Size

-

Indicates the number of subcarriers.

Frequency

Unit: kHz


MAC Address

-


MAC Version

-

Indicates the MAC version.

PHY Type

-

Indicates the multiple access type: l SC, that is single carrier. l SCA, that is selective call acceptance. l OFDM, that is orthogonal frequency division multiplex. l OFDMA., that is orthogonal frequency division multiple access.

Connect ion

14-208

Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 114


SS State

-

Indicates the signal strength (SS) state of the MS.

Basic CID

-

Indicates the basic CID.

Frame Number

-


Primary CID

-

Indicates the primary CID.

Second CID

-


UL Permbase

Range: 0 to 69

Indicates the uplink permutation base, which determines the combination mode of uplink subchannels.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Burst Profiles (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Burst Profiles of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides burst information about the uplink and downlink frames such as interval usage code (IUC), and FEC. IE Name

Description

DL Qty

Indicates the number of burst profiles on the downlink.

FEC Code

Indicates the FEC scheme of the burst data on the downlink or uplink.

IUC Code

Indicates the interval usage code on the downlink or uplink.

UL Qty

Indicates the number of burst profiles on the uplink.

Downlink Channel Descriptor (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Downlink Channel Descriptor of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the IEs related to the downlink channel descriptor (DCD) signaling. IE Name DCD Info

Range/Unit

Description

-

Indicates the number of DCDs.

Unit: dBm

Indicates the effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the BS.

Unit: dBm

Indicates the maximum EIRP received by the initial ranging on the BS side.

Frequency

Unit: kHz


MAC Version

-

Indicates the MAC version.

HysteresisMargin

-

Indicates the handover hysteresis.

TimeToTrigger Duration

-

Indicates the statistics duration.

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the number of BS restart attempts.

DLBurstProfiles Qty

-

Indicates the number of downlink burst profiles.

PHY Type

-

Indicates the multiple access type.

-

Indicates the channel number. This IE is displayed only when the channel is assigned manually.

Configuration Count BS EIRP MaxRSS For InitRanging

BS Restart Count

DCD PHY Specific

Channel Number

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-209


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Channel Switch Frame Number

-

Indicates the channel switch frame number.

BSID

-


-

Indicates the transmit-to-receive time interval.

-

Indicates the receive-to-transmit time interval.

HARQ ACK Delay UL

Unit: frame

Indicates the acknowledgement delay of the HARQ on the uplink.

Perm Type For Broadcast In HARQ

-

Indicates the permutation zone used by the HARQ.

-

Indicates the maximum number of HARQ retransmissions on the downlink.

Def RSSI And CINR Aver Parameter

-

Indicates the default RSSI and CINR.

DL AMC Allocated Band Bitmap

-

Indicates the bitmap of the downlink AMC assignment.

-

Indicates the threshold for adding neighboring cells.

-

Indicates the threshold for deleting neighboring cells.

-

Indicates the slot length and switching period of the anchor switch reporting (ASR).

-

Indicates the supported handover type.

-

Indicates the FEC type of the downlink burst data.

-

Indicates the number of paging groups.

-

Indicates the target threshold of the neighboring cell quality.

-

Indicates the average value of the handover.

TTG (PS) RTG (PS)

Max Retransmission

H-Add Threshold H-Delete Threshold ASR Slot Len And Switching Period HO Type Support DL BP For Multi FEC Types Paging Group Qty Neighbor BS Trigger Qty HO Aver Params

14-210


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

-


Unit: m


Unit: frame

Indicates the paging interval time.

Cell Name

Distance Paging Interval Len

Frame Configuration Definition (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Frame Configuration Definition of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the frame structure. IE Name FCD

Range/Unit

Description

Configuration Count

-

Indicates the number of frame configuration definitions (FCDs).

Channel Started

TURE or FALSE

Indicates the start channel.

Channel Gain Ratio

-

Indicates the ratio of the cyclic prefix to the available frame duration.

Bandwidth

Unit: MHz


Frame Duration

-

Indicates the frame duration.

PHY Type

-


FFT Size

-

Indicates the number of subcarriers.

Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 114


SubChannel Bitmap

-

Indicates the subchannel structure bitmap.

MCS and Zone Info (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to MCS and Zone Info of the WiMAX Sequans. The following table provides information about the current or historical modulation coding scheme.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Description

DL FEC Type

Indicates the downlink forward error correction (FEC) type. Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-211


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

UL FEC Type

Indicates the uplink FEC type.

DL Repetition

Indicates the number of repetitions on the downlink.

UL Repetition

Indicates the number of repetitions on the uplink.

Current Zone

Indicates the current zone where the terminal transmits data. The values are as follows: l pusc with all: indicates that all the channels can be used for data transmission. l pusc with 1/3: indicates that 1/3 of all the channels can be used for data transmission. Indicates the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) used by the terminal. The values are as follows:

MIMO Type

l MIMO A: indicates that the data stream is divided into multiple data streams. Within the same duration, the data transmitted by multiple antennas is the same. l MIMO B: indicates that the high-speed data stream is divided into multiple data streams based on the number of antennas, and then data streams are modulated separately and transmitted through the corresponding antennas to improve the channel capacity directly.

Neighbor BS List (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Neighbor BS List of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the neighboring cells such as the ID of the BS, preamble index, SINR value, and signal strength. IE Name BS Information

BS List

14-212

Range/Unit

Description

Neighbor BS Qty

-

Indicates the number of neighboring cells.

Current Serving BSID

-

Indicates the BS ID of the current serving cell.

Current Serving PreambleIdx

-

Indicates the preamble index of the current serving cell.

Current Serving Frequency

Unit: kHz

Indicates the central frequency of the current serving cell.

BSID

-


PreambleIdx

-



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

HO Statistics

Range/Unit

Description

Frequency

Unit: kHz

Indicates frequency.

CINR

Unit: dB


RSSI

Unit: dBm


Cell Name

-


Distance

Unit: m


Min HO Latency Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the minimum handover latency.

Max HO Latency Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the maximum handover latency.

Mean HO Latency Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the mean handover latency.

Last HO Latency Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the last handover latency.

the

central

Power and PER (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Power and PER of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the power and signal of the UE.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

MeanRSSI

Unit: dBm


StdDevRSSI

Unit: dB

Indicates the RSSI standard deviation.

MeanCINR

Unit: dB


StdDevCINR

Unit: dB

Indicates the CINR standard deviation.

MeanCINRReuse1

Unit: dB

Indicates the mean CINR of the serving cell when all subchannels are used.

StdDevCINRReuse1

Unit: dB

Indicates the CINR standard deviation of the serving cell when all subchannels are used.


14-213


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

MeanCINRReuse3

Unit: dB

Indicates the mean CINR of the serving cell when one-third subchannels are used.

StdDevCINRReuse3

Unit: dB

Indicates the CINR standard deviation of the serving cell when one-third subchannels are used.

BS EIRP

Unit: dBm

Indicates the dffective isotropic radiated power of the BS.

Up PowerOffset Adjust Step

Unit: dB

Indicates the power control adjustment step on the uplink.

Down PowerOffset Adjust Step

Unit: dB

Indicates the power control adjustment step on the downlink.

Min Adjustment

PowerOffset

Unit: dB

Indicates the minimum power control adjustment value.

Max Adjustment

PowerOffset

Unit: dB

Indicates the maximum power control adjustment value.

Current Tx Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the current transmit power.

Max Tx Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the maximum transmit power of the UE.

PER

Unit: %


Frequency Offset

Unit: Hz

Indicates the downlink frequency offset.

Power Mode

The power control mode includes open loop and closed loop.

Indicates the power control mode.

Ranging (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Ranging of the WiMAX Sequans. The following table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the ranging. IE Name Ranging Backoff

14-214

Range/Unit

Description

Initial Ranging



Periodic Ranging




Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description





RangingCode Group Start

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the start number of the ranging codes.


Range: 0 to 255



Range: 0 to 255


Bandwidth Request Codes

Range: 0 to 255



Range: 0 to 255


Unit: dBm

Indicates the maximum effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the initial ranging.

Unit: frame

Indicates the assignment interval of the initial ranging.

BW Request Ranging Handover Ranging Ranging and Other

Code

MaxRSS For InitRanging InitRanging Interval

SF List (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to SF List of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about all the reported IEs related to the server flower (SF). IE Name ARQ Authenticate Algorithm Baisc CID CID Delivery Service

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

The value is Disabled or Enabled.

Indicates whether to support the ARQ.

-

Indicates the authentication algorithm.

-

Indicates the basic connection identifier.

-

Indicates the connection identifier.

-

Indicates the delivery service.


14-215


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Direction

The value is Uplink or Downlink.


-

Indicates the encrypt algorithm.

The value is Disabled or Enabled.

Indicates whether to support the HARQ.

Unit: bit/s

Indicates the maximum traffic rate.

Unit: ms

Indicates the maximum latency.

Unit: bit/s

Indicates the minimum traffic rate.

-

Indicates the ID of the safety set.

Scheduling Service Type

-

Indicates the scheduling service type.

Service Class Name

-

Indicates the service class.

-

Indicates the number of server flowers.

-

Indicates the SF state:

Encrypt Algorithm HARQ Max Traffic Rate Maximum Latency Min Traffic Rate SAID

SF Qty

l Provisioned

SF State

l Admitted l Active -

Indicates the SF type: l Basic SF l Primary SF

SF Type

l Secondary SF l Data SF l Multicast SF -

Indicates the ID of the server flower.

ToleRated Jitter

Unit: ms

Indicates the tolerated jitter.

Traffic Priority

-

Indicates the traffic priority.

SFID

14-216


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Uplink Channel Descriptor (Sequans) This describes meanings of the IEs related to Uplink Channel Descriptor of the WiMAX_Sequans. The following table provides information about the IEs related to the uplink channel descriptor (UCD) signaling. IE Name UCD Info

UCD PHY Specific

Range/Unit

Description

Configuration Count

-

Indicates UCDs.

Initial Ranging Backoff Start

-

Indicates the start backoff window size of the initial ranging.

Initial Ranging Backoff End

-

Indicates the end backoff window size of the initial ranging.

BW Request Backoff Start

-

Indicates the start backoff window size of the bandwidth request ranging.

BW Request Backoff End

-

Indicates the end backoff window size of the bandwidth request ranging.

Reservation Timeout

-

Indicates the interval for originating the rangings of the same type.

Frequency

Unit: kHz

Indicates frequency.

ULBrustProfile Qty

-

Indicates the number uplink burst profiles.

-


-


-


-


-

Indicates the start of the periodic ranging backoff codes.

-

Indicates the end of the periodic ranging backoff codes.

PHY Type Initial Ranging Codes Periodic Ranging Codes Bandwidth Codes

Request

Periodic Ranging Backoff Start Periodic Backoff End

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Ranging


the

number

the

of

central of

14-217


14 Appendix

IE Name RangingCode Start

Group

Permutation Base Ul Alloc Subch Bitmap

Range/Unit

Description

Range: 0 to 255


-

Indicates the permutation zone.

-

Indicates the bitmap of all the uplink subcarriers.

Optional Ul Subch Bitmap

Alloc

-

Indicates the bitmap of optional uplink subcarriers.

Band AMC Threshold

Alloc

Unit: dB

Indicates the threshold for allocating the band AMC.

Release

Unit: dB

Indicates the threshold for releasing the band AMC.

Unit: frame

Indicates the allocation duration of the band AMC.

Unit: frame

Indicates the release duration of the band AMC.

Unit: frame

Indicates the maximum period for refreshing the band CINR.

Unit: frame

Indicates the assignment and retry duration of the band AMC.

Allo

Unit: dB

Indicates the threshold for assigning the channel.

Release

Unit: dB

Indicates the threshold for releasing the channel.

Unit: frame

Indicates the duration of the channel assignment.

Unit: frame

Indicates the duration of the channel release.

Unit: frame

Indicates the maximum period for refreshing the bin CINR.

Unit: frame

Indicates the re-assignment duration.

Unit: frame

Indicates the HARQ acknowledgement delay.

Band AMC Threshold

Band AMC Allo Timer Band AMC Timer

Release

Band Status ReportMax Period

Band AMC Retry Timer Safety Ch Threshold Safety Ch Threshold

Safety Ch Allo Timer Safety Timer

Ch

Release

Bin Status ReportMax Period Safety Ch Retry Timer HARQ ACK Delay DL

14-218

uplink


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

-

Indicates the AMC transmission delay of the channel quality information channel (CQICH).

-

Indicates the number of retransmissions.

-

Indicates the normalized carrier-to-noise ratio (C/N) overrides.

Range: 0-7

Indicates the CQICH field size.

Range: 0-15

Indicates the size of the start backoff window where the UE performs the ranging during the handover.

Range: 0-15

Indicates the size of the end backoff window where the UE performs the ranging during the handover.

-

Indicates the normalized C/N overrides 2.

Unit: dB

Indicates the average CINE required for the band AMC entry.

Unit: dB

Indicates the preamble upper bound step of the adaptive antenna system (AAS).

Unit: dB

Indicates the preamble lower bound step of the AAS.

Allow AAS Beam Select Messages

The value is No or Yes.

Indicates whether to send the AAS Beam Select message.

Use CQICH Indication Flag

-

Indicates whether to use the CQICH.

Unit: dB

Indicates the upper adjustment step of the uplink power.

Unit: dB

Indicates the lower adjustment step of the uplink power.

CQICH Band Trans Delay

AMC

Max Retransmission In UL-HARQ Normalized Overrides

C/N

CQICH Field Size

Handover Ranging Backoff Start

Handover Backoff End Normalized Overrides2

Ranging

C/N

Band AMC Average CINR

Entry

UpperBound Preamble

AAS

LowerBound Preamble

AAS

Up PowerOffset Adjust Step Down PowerOffset Adjust Step

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


maximum HARQ

14-219


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Min PowerOffset Adjustment

Unit: dB

Indicates the adjustment step of the minimum power.

Max PowerOffset Adjustment

Unit: dB

Indicates the adjustment step of the maximum power.

Handover Codes

-

Indicates the ranging codes.

-

Indicates the interval for transmitting the initial ranging.

-

Indicates the report on the transmit power.

The value ranges from 0 to 14, and the unit is dB.

Indicates the threshold for transmitting the report on the transmit power.

-

Indicates the interval for transmitting the report on the transmit power.

-

Indicates the αp_avg value.

The value ranges from 0 to 14, and the unit is dB.

Indicates the threshold for assigning the CQICH.

Tx Power Report Interval-CQICH

-

Indicates the interval for assigning CQICH.

Tx Power Report a (p_avg)-CQICH

-

Indicates the αp_avg value after the CQICH is assigned.

Normalized C/N Channel Sounding

-

Indicates the normalized C/N during the channel sounding.

Up BurstProfile MultiFECTypes

-

Indicates the burst profile on the uplink.

Ranging

InitRanging Interval

Tx Power Report bitmap Tx Power Threshold

Report

Tx Power Interval

Report

Tx Power Report a (p_avg) Tx Power Report Threshold-CQICH

For

handover

Basic Information (Beceem) This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Basic Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the status information of the current terminal.

14-220

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Bandwidth

Range: 5 MHz, 7 MHz, 8.75 MHz, and 10 MHz. Unit: MHz.



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

BSID

-

Indicates the ID of the BS. It is displayed only if an engineering parameter file is used.

Cell Name

-

Indicates the name of a cell. It is displayed only if an engineering parameter file is used.

CINR Deviation


Indicates the standard deviation of the carrier-to-interference-and-noise ratio (CINR).

CINR Diversity Ant


Indicates the CINR of the diversity antenna.

CINR Mean



CINR Primary Ant


Indicates the CINR of the primary antenna.

Distance

Unit: m

Indicates the distance between the terminal and the serving cell.

DL Bit Data Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink bit rate.

DL PermBase

Range: 0 to 31

Indicates the permutation base for the specified downlink subchannel.

Frame Ratio

-


Frequency

Unit: kHz


Frequency Offset

Unit: kHz

Indicates the frequency offset on the downlink.

MAC Address

-


Network Entry State

-

Indicates the network entry state, including wait for sync, phy sync achieved, wait for RNG RSP, wait for SBC RSP, wait for REGRSP, wait for DSA, and network entry complete.

Number of SFIDs

-

Indicates the number of service flows.

Power Mode

-

Indicates the power mode, including close loop, openloop passive retention, open loop passive, and open loop active.

Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 114


Ranging Code

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the ranging code.


14-221


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Ranging Seed

-

Indicates the ranging seed.

RSSI Deviation


Indicates the standard deviation of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI).

RSSI Diversity Ant


Indicates the RSSI of the diversity antenna.

RSSI Mean



RSSI Primary Ant


Indicates the RSSI of the primary antenna.

Support ARQ

Range: Disable (does not support the ARQ), or Enable (support the ARQ)

Indicates whether to support the automatic repeat request (ARQ).

Tx Headroom

Unit: dBm

Indicates the difference between the current transmission power and the maximum transmission power available for the UE.

Tx Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the transmission power.

UL Bit Data Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink bit rate.

UL PermBase

Range: 0 to 69

Indicates the permutation base for the specified uplink subchannel.

CS Information (Beceem) This describes the meanings of the IEs related to CS Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the convergence sublayer. IE Name IP

14-222

Range/Unit

Description

Associated PHSI

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the associated payload header suppression index (PHSI). It is the mirror of the PHSI.

Destination MAC Address

-

Indicates the destination MAC address.

Destination Port Range

-

Indicates the destination port range.

IP Destination Address

-


IP Source Address

-

Indicates the source IP address.

Protocol

-

Indicates the IP layer protocol.

Source MAC Address

-

Indicates the source MAC address.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

PHS

Range/Unit

Description

Source Port Range

-

Indicates the source port range.

Tos-High

-

Indicates the lower limit of the IP packet service type.

Tos-Low

-

Indicates the upper limit of the IP packet service type.

Tos-Mask

-

Indicates the mask of the IP packet service type.

Classifier Rule Priority

-

Indicates the priority of data packet classifier rules. Classifier rules map data packets to transmission connections.

SF List Inform ation

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Packet Classification Rule Index

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the packet classification rule index. It provides references for the formulation of PHS rules.

PHSF

-

Indicates the payload header suppression field (PHSF), which is a set of bytes. It specifies the header part to be suppressed in the packet data unit (PDU) message.

PHSI

-

Indicates the ID of the payload header suppression, which is a 8-bit mask. It specifies the bytes that are suppressed and those are not suppressed in the PHSF.

PHSM

-

Indicates the mask of the payload header suppression. It specifies the bytes to be suppressed in the PHSF.

PHSS

Range: 1 to 255. Unit: byte

Indicates the size of the payload header suppression. The value is equal to the number of bytes in the PHSF or the number of valid bits in the PHSM.

PHSV

-

Indicates whether the payload header suppression is valid. It determines whether to perform suppression verification before suppressing the payload header.

CID

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the connection ID. It can map service flows to the transmission connections on the MAC layer.


14-223


14 Appendix

IE Name Direction

Range/Unit

Description

-

Indicates the direction of the service flow. The service flow may be used in the uplink or downlink direction, and each PDU message correlates with an independent service flow.

SF Scheduling Type

-

Indicates the scheduling type of the service flow, including the BE, nrtPS, rtPS, ErtPS, and UGS.

SF state

-

Indicates the state of the service flow, including Provisioned Set, Admitted Set, and Active Set.

SFID

-


TID

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the transaction ID.

HARQ and FER Information (Beceem) This describes the meanings of the IEs related to HARQ and FER Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the hybrid automatic retransmission request (HARQ) and frame error rate.

14-224

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

FER


Indicates the frame error rate.

PER



SDU Reject

-

Indicates the number of the rejected signaling data unit (SDU) packets.

PDU Reject

-

Indicates the number of the rejected packet data unit (PDU) packets.

PDU CRC Error

-

Indicates the number of PDU packets with cyclic redundancy check (CRC) errors.

PDU HCS Error

-

Indicates the number of PDU packets with header check sequence (HCS) errors.

DL MAP CRC Error

-

Indicates the number of downlink Map packets with CRC errors.

DL MAP HCS Error

-

Indicates the number of downlink Map packets with HCS errors.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

SDU Number

-

Indicates the number of the transmitted or received SDU packets

PDU Number

-

Indicates the number of the transmitted or received PDU packets

Control Packet Number

-

Indicates the number of the transmitted or received control packets

UL BURST HARQ ASK DELAY

Range: Sync, one frame offset, two frames offset, and three frames offset

Indicates the acknowledgement delay of the burst HARQ on the uplink.

DL BURST HARQ ACK DELAY

Range: Sync, one frame offset, two frames offset, and three frames offset

Indicates the acknowledgement delay of the burst HARQ on the downlink.

Ranging (Beceem) This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Ranging of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the uplink channel descriptor (UCD) message.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Initial ranging code Start

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the start number of the initial ranging code.

Periodic ranging code Start

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the start number of the periodic ranging code.

Handover ranging code Start

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the start number of the handover ranging code.

Bandwidth ranging code Start

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the start number of the bandwidth request ranging code.

Initial ranging code End

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the end value of the initial ranging code.

Periodic ranging code End

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the end value of the periodic ranging code.

Handover ranging code End

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the end value of the handover ranging code.

Bandwidth ranging code End

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the end value of the bandwidth request ranging code.


14-225


14 Appendix

Physical Information (Beceem) This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Physical Information of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about the physical channel coding. IE Name DL MAP

DL Map FEC Scheme

Range/ Unit

Description

-

Indicates the modulation coding scheme (MCS) of the downlink MAP. The downlink MAP is used to identify the usage of downlink burst intervals in the physical layer in burst mode.

DL Burst

UL Burst

14-226

Frame Number

-


Local Frame Number

-

Indicates the number of the current frame, namely the frame on which the downlink Map message is received.

PHY state

-

Indicates the physical layer state, including SYNC_ACHIEVED, SYNC_TRYING_TO_SYNC, and SYNC_INVALID.

DCD Change Count

-

Indicates the number of downlink channel descriptor (DCD) message changes.


-

Indicates the connection ID of the downlink burst data.


-

Indicates the downlink interval usage code (DIUC) of the burst data.

Downlink Burst Data Duration

Unit: slot

Indicates the downlink burst data duration.

Downlink Burst Data FEC Repetition

-

Indicates the MCS repetition of the downlink burst data.


-

Indicates the MCS of the downlink burst data.

Downlink Burst Data Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the downlink burst data size.

Downlink Burst Data Zone

-

Indicates the uplink permutation zone.

UCD Change Count

-

Indicates the number of uplink channel descriptor (UCD) message changes.


-

Indicates the connection ID of the uplink burst data.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/ Unit

Description

Uplink Burst Data Duration

Unit: slot

Indicates the uplink burst data duration.

Uplink Burst Data FEC Repetition

-

Indicates the MCS repetition of the uplink burst data.


-

Indicates the MCS of the uplink burst data.

Uplink Burst Data Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the uplink burst data size.


-

Indicates the uplink interval usage code (UIUC) of the burst data.

Uplink Burst Data Zone

-


Handover and Neighboring Cells (Beceem) This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Handover and Neighboring Cells of the WiMAX Beceem. The following table provides the information about terminal handover and neighboring cells.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Bandwidth

Unit: MHz


BSID

-

Indicates the ID of the BS. It is displayed only if an engineering parameter file is used.

CellName

-

Indicates the name of a cell. It is displayed only if an engineering parameter file is used.

CINR Mean



Distance

Unit: m

Indicates the distance between the terminal and the neighboring cell.

Frequency

Unit: kHz


HO Type

-

Indicates the handover type.

Last HO Latency Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the delay of the last handover.


-


Preamble Index

Range: 0 to 114



14-227


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

RSSI Mean



The Number of HO

-

Indicates the number of successful handovers.


-


The Number of HO Ranging Failure

-

Indicates the number of ranging handover failures.


-


14.3.5 LTE Information Elements of UEs This describes the LTE information elements of the UEs. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the LTE UE air interface views.

BandWidth This section describes the IEs related to the Bandwidth of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the uplink bandwidth by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

UL RB Num

Range: 0 to 100

Indicates the number of uplink resource blocks.

UL RB Start

Range: 0 to 99

Indicates the start uplink resource block.

BLER This section describes the IEs related to the BLER of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the block error rate (BLER) by referring to the following descriptions.

14-228

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Initial Error TB Count

-

Indicates the statistics of transport blocks (TBs) with initial transmission errors on codeword 0 or 1.

Initial Total TB Count

-

Indicates the statistics of TBs initially transmitted on codeword 0 or 1.

Residual Error TB Count

-

Indicates the statistics of TBs with retransmission errors on codeword 0 or 1.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Residual Total TB Count

-

Indicates the statistics of TBs retransmitted on codeword 0 or 1.

Code0 Initial BLER

Range: 0 to 100; Unit: %

Indicates the initial BLER on codeword 0.

Code1 Initial BLER


Indicates the initial BLER on codeword 1.

Code0 Residual BLER


Indicates the residual BLER on codeword 0.

Code1 Residual BLER


Indicates the residual BLER on codeword 1.

PDSCH BLER


Indicates the BLER on the physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH).

Buffer Status Report This section describes the IEs related to the Buffer Status Report of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the buffer status report (BSR) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Long BSR0

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the status reports of long buffer 0.

Long BSR1

Range: 0 to 63


Long BSR2

Range: 0 to 63


Long BSR3

Range: 0 to 63


Short BSR

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the status reports of short buffer.

Camp Cell Information This section describes the IEs related to the Camp Cell Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the camp cell by referring to the following descriptions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

CP Length

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the normal CP length. 1 indicates the extended CP length.

Indicates the cyclic prefix length.

C-RNTI

-

Indicates the cell radio network temporary identifier.


14-229


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Dl BandWidth

Range: 0 to 5

Indicates the downlink bandwidth.

l 0 indicates 1.4 MHz. l 1 indicates 3 MHz. l 2 indicates 5 MHz. l 3 indicates 10 MHz. l 4 indicates 15 MHz. l 5 indicates 20 MHz.

14-230

DL Frequency

-

Indicates the downlink central frequency.

EARFCN

-

Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number.

eNBTxAntennasNumber

1, 2, or 4

Indicates the eNodeB transmit antenna number.

NeighbourAntennasNumber

1, 2, or 4

Indicate the neighbor antenna number.

PCI

Range: 0 to 503

Indicates the physical cell identity.

P-RNTI

-

Indicates the paging radio network temporary identifier.

RA-RNTI

-

Indicates the random access radio network temporary identifier.

SI-RNTI

-

Indicates the system information radio network temporary identifier.

SpecialSubFramePatterns

-

Indicates the ratio of special sub frames such as DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS, available only for TDD.

SPS C-RNTI

-

Indicates the semi-persistent scheduling cell radio network temporary identifier.

SubFrameAssignmentType

-

Indicates the ratio of sub frames on the uplink and downlink, available only for TDD.

SyncFlag

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the synchronization. 1 indicates the asynchronization.

Indicates the synchronous flag.

TAC

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the tracking area code.

TMP C-RNTI

-

Indicates the temporary cell radio network temporary identifier.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

TPC-PUCCH-RNTI

-

Indicates the cell radio network temporary identifier for power control on Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH).

TPC-PUSCH-RNTI

-

Indicates the cell radio network temporary identifier for power control on PUCCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH).

Transmission Mode

Range: 1 to 9

Indicates the transmission mode.

UERxAntennasNumber

1, 2, or 4

Indicates the UE received antenna number.

UETxAntennasNumber

1 or 2

Indicates the UE transmit antenna number.

UL BandWidth

Range: 0 to 5

Indicates the uplink bandwidth.

l 0 indicates 1.4 MHz. l 1 indicates 3 MHz. l 2 indicates 5 MHz. l 3 indicates 10 MHz. l 4 indicates 15 MHz. l 5 indicates 20 MHz. UL Freqency

-

Indicates the uplink central frequency.

Work Mode

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the FDD mode. 1 indicates the TDD mode.

Indicates the work mode.

Cell Reselection Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Reselection Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the cell reselection parameters by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name RESEL_C OMM

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

NCellReselectionHigh

Range: 1 to 16

Indicates the maximum number of cell reselections for UEs to enter the high-mobility state.

NCellReselectionMedium

Range: 1 to 16

Indicates the minimum number of cell reselections for UEs to enter the mediummobility state.


14-231


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

PCompensation

Unit: dB

Indicates the difference between the maximum allowed transmit power of the UE and the maximum actual transmit power of the UE, that is, max(PeMax - PuMax, 0).

PeMax

Unit: dBm

Indicates the maximum transmit power of a UE during data transmission on the downlink.

PuMax

Unit: dBm

Indicates the maximum RF output power of the UE.

QHyst

Range: 0 to 8

Indicates the hysteresis value for ranking criteria.

Qrxlevmeas

Unit: dBm

Indicates the hysteresis value for ranking criteria.

QRxLevMinOffse t

Range: 1 to 8

Indicates the offset to the signalled Qrxlevmin taken into account in the Srxlev evaluation as a result of a periodic search for a higher priority PLMN while camped normally in a VPLMN.

RxLevMin


Indicates the minimum required received signal level in a cell.

SfHigh

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in high service flow for high-mobility state.

0 indicates 0.25. 1 indicates 0.5. 2 indicates 0.7. 3 indicates 1. SfMedium

Range: 0 to 3 0 indicates 0.25. 1 indicates 0.5.

Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in medium service flow for medium-mobility state.

2 indicates 0.7. 3 indicates 1. TEvaluation

14-232

Value: 30, 60, 120, 180, or 240. Unit: s


Indicates the duration for evaluating the allowed number of cell reselections.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

SERVING_ FREQ_INF O

INTRA_FR EQ_CELL_ RESELEC T

INTER_FR EQ_CARR IER_FREQ

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

THystNormal

Value: 30, 60, 120, 180, or 240

Indicates the additional time period before the UE can enter the normal-mobility state.

CellReselectPriority

-

Indicates the cell reselection information that is common for intra-frequency cells.

SNonIntraSearch

Range: 0 to 56. Unit: dB.

Indicates the threshold (in dB) for E-UTRAN inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurements.

ThreshServingLo w

Range: 0 to 56

Indicates the threshold for serving frequency that is used in reselection evaluation towards lower priority EUTRAN frequency or RAT.

PMax

-

Indicates the value that is applicable for the intrafrequency neighboring EUTRA cells.

QRxLevMin


Indicates the minimum required RxLevel in a cell.

SfHigh

-

Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in sf-High for highmobility state.

SfMedium

-

Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in sf-medium for medium-mobility state.

SIntraSearch

Range: 0 to 31. Unit: dB.

Indicates the threshold (in dB) for intra-frequency measurements.

TReselectEutra

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the cell reselection timer value TreselectionRAT for E-UTRAN. This parameter can be set for each E-UTRAN frequency.

CellReselectionPriority

-

Indicates the cell reselection priority.

DlCarrierFreq

Unit: dBm

Indicates the minimum required Rx level in a cell.

InterFrequencyNumber

-

Indicates the inter frequency number.


14-233


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

NeighborCellConfig

-

Indicates the neighbor cell configuration table.

PCI

Range: 0 to 503

Indicates the neighbor cell ID.

PMax

Unit: dBm

Indicates the value applicable for the neighboring E-UTRAN cells on a carrier frequency.

QOffsetCell

Range: 0 to 30

Indicates the frequency offset for E-UTRAN frequencies with the same priority.

QOffsetFreq

-

Indicates the frequency offset for E-UTRAN frequencies with the same priority.

RxLevMin


Indicates the minimum required RxLevel in a cell.

SfHigh

-

Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in sf-high for highmobility state.

SfMedium

-

Indicates the scaling factor for Qhyst in sf-Medium for medium-mobility state.

ThreshXHigh

-

Indicates the threshold used by the UE when reselecting towards the higher priority frequency X than current serving frequency.

ThreshXLow

-

Indicates the threshold used in reselection towards frequency X priority from a higher priority frequency.

TReselectEutra

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the cell reselection timer value for E-UTRAN. This parameter can be set for each E-UTRAN frequency.

Cell Scan This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Scan of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the LTE cell searching test by referring to the following descriptions.

14-234


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DlBandWidth

Unit: M

Indicates the downlink bandwidth, such as 5 M, 10 M, and 20 M.

Frequency

-

Indicates the frequency involved in the cell searching test.

Iot

Unit: dB

Indicates the Iot value.

RSRP


Indicates the reference signal received power.

RSRQ


Indicates the reference signal received quality.

RSSI

Unit: dBm


SCHRP

Unit: dBm

Indicates the SCH_RP value.

Cell Search This section describes the IEs related to the Cell Search of the LTE network. You can obtain the information reported by the test terminal during the cell searching. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

CP Type

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the cyclic prefix type.

GroupID

Range: 0 to 167

Indicates the group ID.

Physical Sector

Range: 0 to 2

Indicates the physical sector index.

RxAntNumber

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the received antenna number.

l 0 indicates 1R. l 1 indicates 2R. l 2 indicates 3R. l 3 indicates 4R. SyncPosition

Range: 0 to 11520

Indicates the symbol synchronization position.

System Bandwidth

Range: 0 to 5

Indicates the system bandwidth.

l 0 indicates 1.4 MHz. l 1 indicates 3 MHz. l 2 indicates 5 MHz. l 3 indicates 10 MHz. l 4 indicates 15 MHz. l 5 indicates 20 MHz. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-235


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Time Position

Range: 0 to (11520 x 16)

Indicates the time position.

Constellation Painting This section describes the IEs related to the Constellation Painting of the LTE network. You can obtain the statistical information by referring to the following descriptions when the QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM is used as the modulation method. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

QPSK

Unit: frame

Indicates the number of frames modulated in Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) mode.

16QAM

Unit: frame

Indicates the number of frames modulated in 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM) mode.

64QAM

Unit: frame

Indicates the number of frames modulated in 64QAM mode.

CQI This section describes the IEs related to the CQI of the LTE network. You can obtain the configuration information about the channel quality indicator (CQI) by referring to the following descriptions.

14-236

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DL SubBand Schedule Number

-

Indicates the scheduling times of downlink subband.

Rank1

-

Indicates the CQI of Rank 1.

Rank2 Code0

-

Indicates the CQI of Rank 2 on codeword 0.

Rank2 Code1

-


Rank3 Code0

-


Rank3 Code1

-


Rank4 Code0

-


Rank4 Code1

-



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Sub0~24

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the scheduling times of subband.

Sub Band CQI

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the CQI of each subband.

Wide Band CQI

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the CQI of each wideband.

CQI Configuration Information This section describes the IEs related to the CQI Configuration Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the configuration information about the channel quality indicator (CQI) by referring to the following descriptions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

AckMcsOffsetIndex

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the MCS offset index of the acknowledgment (ACK).

AperiodCqiReportMode

Range: 0 to 4

Indicates the aperiodic CQI report mode of the PUSCH.

BandwidthPartNumber

Range: 0 to 4

Indicates the number of bandwidth parts.

CQIMcsOffsetIndex

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the MCS offset index of the CQI.

MultiRi

Range: 0 to 32

Indicates the multi-RIs.

NOffsetRi

Range: -160 to 0

Indicates the rank indicator (RI) offset.

ParaH

Range: 1 to 17

Indicates the parameter H.

ParaK

Range: 0 to 4

Indicates the parameter K.

PeriodCqiReportMode

Range: 5 to 8

Indicates the periodic CQI report mode of the PUSCH.

CQIPeriodicity

Range: 1 to 160

Indicates the CQI periodicity.

PmiMode

Range: 0 to 2

Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index (PMI) mode.

PucchFeedBackType

Range: 1 to 2

Indicates the CQI feedback type of the PUCCH.

Rank1CQISpecial

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the special CQI of rank 1.

Rank2Code0CQISpecial

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the special CQI on codeword 0 of rank 2.

Rand2Code1CQISpecial

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the special CQI on codeword 1 of rank 2.

RiBitNumber

Range: 0 to 2

Indicates the number of RI bits.

RiMcsOffsetIndex

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the MCS offset index of RI.


14-237


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

SubFrameOffset

Range: 0 to 159

Indicates the CQI subframe offset.

Transmit Mode

Range: 0 to 8


DRX Information This section describes the IEs related to the DRX Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the DRX by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

AnrEnable

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates whether the DRX is enabled for the ANR.

ContentionTimer

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the instantaneous state of the contention timer.

DrxCfgInd

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the DRX configuration indicator.

DrxCycleType

Range: 1 to 3

Indicates the DRX cycle type.

l 1 indicates the short period of DRX. l 2 indicates the long period of DRX. l 3 indicates the invalid period of DRX.

14-238

DrxInactivityTimer

Range: 0 to 2,560. Unit: ms

Indicates the value of the DRX inactivity timer.

DrxRetxTimer

Range: 1 to 33. Unit: ms

Indicates the value of the DRX retransmission timer.

DrxRetxTimer1

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the instantaneous state of the DRX retransmission timer that corresponds to HARQ channel 1.

DrxRetxTimer2

Range: 0 to 1


DrxRetxTimer3

Range: 0 to 1


DrxRetxTimer4

Range: 0 to 1



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DrxRetxTimer5

Range: 0 to 1


DrxRetxTimer6

Range: 0 to 1


DrxRetxTimer7

Range: 0 to 1


DrxRetxTimer8

Range: 0 to 1


DrxShortCycleTimer


Indicates the value of the DRX short cycle timer.

DrxStartedFlag

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates whether the DRX is enabled.

DrxStartOffset


Indicates the offset when the DRX cycle is started.

DrxStateBitmap

Range: 0 to 232

Indicates the DRX state timer.

DrxSubState

Range: 0 to 4

Indicates the DRX sub-state.

InactivityTimer

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the instantaneous state of inactivity timer.

LongDrxCycle


Indicates the long cycle of the DRX.

LTEType

Range: 1 to 3

Indicates the LTE type.

l 1 indicates FDD. l 2 indicates TDD. l 3 indicates the invalid LTE mode.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

OndurationTimer


Indicates the value of the continuous monitoring timer.

OndurationTimerState

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the instantaneous state of the continuous monitoring timer.

ShortDrxCycleFlg

Range: 0 to 640

Indicates whether the short cycle of the DRX is valid.

ShortDrxCycle


Indicates the short cycle of the DRX.


14-239


14 Appendix

EPS Bearer Information This section describes the IEs related to the EPS Bearer Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Bearer Context Type

-

Indicates the bearer context type.

CID Number

Range: 0 to 31

Indicates the context ID.

DLGuaranteedMax Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for downlink.

DLMaxRate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum bit rate for downlink.

EPSB ID

-

Indicates the evolved packet system bearer ID.

EPSB Number

Range: 1 to 11

Indicates the number of evolved packet system bearer.

Link EPSB ID

-

Indicates the evolved packet system link bearer ID.

QCI

-

Indicates the QoS class identifier.

ULGuaranteedMax Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for uplink.

ULMaxRate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum bit rate for uplink.

HARQ This section describes the IEs related to the HARQ of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

ReTx Index

-

l First Transfer: indicates the number of initial transmission successes (during a statistic period). l Nth RxTx: indicates the number of Nth retransmission successes (during a statistic period).

14-240

MAX ReTx Count

Range: 0 to 9

Indicates the maximum number of HARQ retransmissions.

Repetition

repetition or non-repetition

Indicates the HARQ transmission mode.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Period

-

Indicates the HARQ retransmission period. This IE is displayed only when Repetition is set to repetition.

UL IBLER

Range: 0 to 100; unit: %

Indicates the uplink initial block error rate (BLER).

UL RBLER


Indicates the uplink residual BLER.

UL SBLER


Indicates the uplink scheduling BLER.

UL HARQ ACK

-

Indicates the number of times that the UL HARQ ACK messages are transmitted. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the UL HARQ ACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the UL HARQ ACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period.

UL HARQ NACK

-

Indicates the number of times that the UL HARQ NACK messages are transmitted. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the UL HARQ NACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the UL HARQ NACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period.

Code0 DL HARQ ACK

-

Indicates the number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are transmitted on codeword 0. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period.


14-241


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Code0 DL HARQ NACK

-

Indicates the number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are transmitted on codeword 0. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period.

Code1 DL HARQ ACK

-

Indicates the number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are transmitted on codeword 1. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the DL HARQ ACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period.

Code1 DL HARQ NACK

-

Indicates the number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are transmitted on codeword 1. The following statistics are displayed separately: number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are successfully transmitted for the first time within a statistical period and the number of times that the DL HARQ NACK messages are successfully retransmitted from the first time to the ninth time within a statistical period.

HO Interrupt Delay This section describes the IEs related to the HO Interrupt Delay. You can obtain the information about the interruption delay due to the UE handover by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Unit: µs

Indicates the downlink interruption delay due to the MAC handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the uplink interruption delay due to the MAC handover.

MacHoDlInteruptTime MacHoUlInteruptTime

14-242


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Unit: µs

Indicates the start time stamp of the baseband response random access.

Unit: µs

Indicates the start time stamp of the MAC random access at layer 3.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the random access response (RAR) access message received by the MAC.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first ACK message that is received after the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the target cell after the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first user plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the target cell after the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first packet that is received after the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first signaling plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the target cell after the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first uplink authorized message that is received after the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the last ACK message that is received before the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the last packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the source cell before the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the last user plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the source cell before the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the last packet that is received before the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the last signaling plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is received by the source cell before the handover.

MacRcvFpgaSyncTime MacRcvHOReqTime

MacRcvRarTime MacRx1stAckTime MacRx1stCrcRightTime

MacRx1stDrbTime MacRx1stPktTime

MacRx1stSrbTime

MacRx1stUlgrantTime MacRxLastAckTime MacRxLastCrcRightTime

MacRxLastDrbTime MacRxLastPktTime

MacRxLastSrbTime

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-243


14 Appendix

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the last uplink authorized message that is received by the MAC before the handover.

MacSend1stPreambleTime

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first preamble sent by the MAC.

MacSendLastPreambleTime

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the last preamble sent by the MAC.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the MAC handover completion, that is, the time stamp when the RRC Request message of Message 3 is sent.

MacRxLastUlgrantTime

MacSendMsg3Time MacSendPreambleNum

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first user plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is sent after the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the first signaling plane data packet that the CRC is performed correctly and is sent after the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the user plane data packet that is sent before the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time stamp of the signaling plane data packet that is sent before the handover.

MacTx1stDrbTime

MacTx1stSrbTime MacTxLastDrbTime MacTxLastSrbTime OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktRb OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktSi OriginalCellRlcRxLastPktTi

-

Indicates the ID of the resource block of the last data packet that is received by the RLC of the source cell.

-

Indicates the size of the last data packet that is received by the RLC of the source cell.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time of the last data packet that is received by the RLC of the source cell.

Unit: µs

Indicates the contention time of the PDCP downlink data transmission.

Unit: µs

Indicates the delay in the PDCP downlink data transmission.

Unit: µs

Indicates the stop time of the PDCP downlink data transmission.

Unit: µs

Indicates the contention time of the PDCP uplink data transmission.

Unit: µs

Indicates the delay in the PDCP uplink data transmission.

PdcpHoDlDtContTime PdcpHoDlDtDelayTime PdcpHoDlDtStopTime PdcpHoUlDtContTime PdcpHoUlDtDelayTime

14-244

Indicates the number of preambles that are sent during the random access.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Unit: µs PdcpHoUlDtStopTime PdcpRxPktNum PdcpRxPktSize

Indicates the stop time of the PDCP uplink data transmission.

-

Indicates the sequence number of the first packet that is sent to the PDCP.

-

Indicates the size of the first packet sent to the PDCP.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time that the first packet is sent to the PDCP.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time that the RLC downlink handover is complete.

RlcHoDlInteruptTime

Unit: µs

Indicates the RLC downlink interruption time.

RlcHoUlInteruptTime

Unit: µs

Indicates the RLC uplink interruption time.

-

Indicates the sequence number of the first packet that is received by the RLC.

PdcpRxPktTime RlcDLHoCmpTime

RlcRxPduSn

Unit: µs RlcRxPduTime RlcRxPktSize RlcRxRbid

-

Indicates the size of the first packet that is received by the RLC.

-

Indicates the ID of the resource block of the first packet that is received by the RLC.

-

Indicates the ID of the resource block of the first data packet that is sent on the uplink of the RLC after the handover.

RlcUlFirstRlcPktRbId Unit: µs RlcUlFirstRlcPktTime RlcUlLastRlcPktRbId

Indicates the time that the first data packet is sent on the uplink of the RLC after the handover. Indicates the ID of the resource block of the last data packet that is sent on the uplink of the RLC before the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time that the last data packet is sent on the uplink of the RLC before the handover.

Unit: µs

Indicates the time that the handover command is received on the uplink of the RLC.

RlcUlLastRlcPktTime RlcULRxHoIndTime

Indicates the time that the first PDU that is received by the RLC.

IPerf Data This section describes the IEs related to the IPerf Data. You can obtain the information about the data reported by the test terminal during the Iperf test.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-245


14 Appendix

In the case of the Iperf test, C mode refers to that the Probe sends data to the core network (CN) through the client. S mode refers to that the Probe receives data from the CN through the server. C/S mode refers to that the Probe sends data to and receives data from the CN at the same time. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Bandwidth

Unit: Mbit/s


Begin Time

-

Indicates the start time of data transmission.

End Time

-

Indicates the end time of data transmission.

ID

-

Indicates the data transmission ID, which is used to identify a data transmission service.

Jitter

-

Indicates the jitter.

Lost Datagrams

-

Indicates the number of lost data packets.

Lost Ratio


Indicates the ratio of lost packets, that is, the ratio of lost data packets to the total data packets.

Server UDP

-

Indicates the downlink user datagram protocol (UDP) data transmission in S mode.

TCP or Client UDP

-

Indicates the uplink and downlink TCP data transmission in C/S mode or the uplink UDP data transmission in C mode.

Total Datagrams

-

Indicates the total number of transmitted data packets.

Transmit Bytes

-

Indicates the number of transmitted bytes.

Least Mean Square Painting This section describes the IEs related to the Least Mean Square Painting of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the least mean square painting by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Description

LS Painting

Indicates the least mean square painting.

Logical Channel Statistics This section describes the IEs related to the Logical Channel Statistics of the LTE network. You can obtain the logical channel statistics by referring to the following descriptions.

14-246

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Logical Channel ID

Range: 0 to 32

Indicates the logical channel ID.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

RLC Mode

The value 0 indicates the AM mode; the value 1 indicates the UM mode; the value 2 indicates the TM mode.

Indicates the radio link control (RLC) mode.

EPSB ID

Range: 0 to 15.

Indicates the carrier address.

Logical Channel PRI

Range: 1 to 16

Indicates the logical channel priority.

Logical Channel Group ID

Range: 0 to 3


Logical Channel Group PRI

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Indicates the logical channel group priority.

Logical Channel PBR

0, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256

Indicates the prioritized bit rate (PBR) of a logical channel.

BuckSizeDuration

50, 100, 150, 300, 500, or 1000

Indicates the buck size duration.

DLRLCReceivePduLength

-

Indicates the total bytes of packet data units (PDUs) that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer.

DLRLCRepeatPduLength

-

Indicates the total bytes of duplicate PDUs that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer, including the bytes of PDUs whose sequence number (SN) is smaller than VR(R).

DLRabmReceiveSduLength

-

Indicates the total bytes of data that a UE receives on the downlink at the application layer.

DLPDCPReceiveSduLength

-

Indicates the total bytes of signaling data units (SDUs) that a UE receives on the downlink at the PDCP layer.

DLRLCDropRate

Unit: %

Indicates the packet loss rate of SDUs that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer.

DLRLCReceiveControlPduNumber

-

Indicates the number of status report PDUs that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer.

DLRLCReceiveControlPduLength

-

Indicates the total bytes of status report PDUs that a UE receives on the downlink at the RLC layer.


14-247


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DlControlPduNumber

-

Indicates the number of intervals between receptions of status reports on the downlink by a UE.

DLRLCRxControlPduTimeSpace

-

Indicates the interval between receptions of status reports on the downlink by a UE.

ULRLCTxControlPduNumber

-

Indicates the number of status report PDUs that a UE triggers on the uplink.

ULRLCTxControlPduLength

-

Indicates the total bytes of status report PDUs that a UE triggers on the uplink.

ULPDCPDropSduBySduTimer

-

Indicates the data volume of discarded packets based on the SDU timer that a UE receives on the uplink at the PDCP layer.

ULRLCTxNewPduLength

-

Indicates the total bytes of PDUs that a UE transmits on the uplink at the RLC layer for the first time.

ULRLCReTxPduLength

-

Indicates the total bytes of PDUs that a UE retransmits on the uplink at the RLC layer.

ULRLCWindowUseRate

-

Indicates the usage of the transmit window where a UE transmits data on the uplink at the RLC layer.

UlControlPduNumber

-

Indicates the number of intervals between sendings of status reports on the uplink by a UE.

ULRLCTxControlPduTimeSpace

-

Indicates the interval between sendings of status reports on the uplink by a UE.

MAC Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the MAC Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the MAC parameters related to the PDSCH and PUSCH by referring to the following descriptions.

14-248

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

ActiveDemultFailNumber

-

Indicates the number of service data units received on the downlink at the MAC layer that fail to be demultiplexed when PDSCHs are in activated state.

ActiveDemultySuccessNumber

-

Indicates the number of service data units received on the downlink at the MAC layer that are demultiplexed successfully when PDSCHs are in activated state.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

ActivePDSCHCrcCorrectNumber

-

Indicates the number of times that the correct cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) are performed on the service data units received on the downlink at the MAC layer when PDSCHs are in activated state.

ActivePDSCHCrcErrorNumber

-

Indicates the number of times that the incorrect cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) are performed on the service data units received on the downlink at the MAC layer when PDSCHs are in activated state.

AntennaPortNumber

-

Indicates the number of antenna ports at the MAC layer.

DLSystemRBNumber

-

Indicates the number of system resource blocks that use the downlink bandwidth at the MAC layer.

ParseDCI0SuccessNumber

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the number of DCI0s that are successfully parsed by the uplink at the MAC layer.

PDSCHCrcCorrectNumber

-

Indicates the number of times that the correct CRCs are performed on the data packets received on the downlink at the MAC layer regardless of the states of PDSCHs.

PDSCHCrcErrorNumber

-

Indicates the number of times that the incorrect CRCs are performed on the data packets received on the downlink at the MAC layer regardless of the states of PDSCHs.

PDSCHTotalDataNumber

-

Indicates the total number of data packets received on the downlink PDSCHs at the MAC layer.

PUSCHDynamicNumber

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the number of data packets that are dynamically scheduled on uplink PUSCHs.

PUSCHSemiStaticNumber

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the number of data packets that are semi-statically scheduled on uplink PUSCHs.

ReceiveDCI0Number

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the number of DCI0s that are received on the uplink at the MAC layer.

SendPUCCHSuccessNumber

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the number of data packets that are successfully sent on the uplink PUCCHs at the MAC layer.

SendPUSCHSuccessNumber

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the number of data packets that are successfully sent on the uplink PUSCHs at the MAC layer.


14-249


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

TATimerLength

-

Indicates the value of the timer for the tracing area (TA) at the MAC layer.

ULSubCarrierRBNumber

-

Indicates the number of sub-carriers in each resource block on the uplink at the MAC layer.

ULSymbolNumber

-

Indicates the number of symbols for each timeslot on uplink channels at the MAC layer.

ULSystemRBNumber

-

Indicates the number of system resource blocks that use the uplink bandwidth at the MAC layer.

MCS This section describes the IEs related to the MCS of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the modulation coding scheme (MCS) by referring to the following descriptions.

14-250

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Code0Count

Range: 0 to 1,000

Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS on codeword 0 during a period.

Code0Mod

-

Indicates the modulation coding scheme of codeword 0, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.

Code0RBCou nt

Range: 0 to 100,000

Indicates the number of resource blocks in each MCS on codeword 0 during a period.

Code1Count

Range: 0 to 1,000

Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS on codeword 1 during a period.

Code1Mod

-

Indicates the modulation coding scheme of codeword 1, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.

Code1RBCou nt

Range: 0 to 100,000

Indicates the number of resource blocks in each MCS on codeword 1 during a period.

Count

Range: 0 to 1,000

Indicates the scheduling times of each MCS during a period.

Modulation

-

Indicates the modulation, such as QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM.

RBCount

Range: 0 to 100,000

Indicates the number of resource blocks in each MCS during a period.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

MIMO This section describes the IEs related to the MIMO of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the multiple input multiple output (MIMO) by referring to the following descriptions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Description

1T1R

Indicates the single-antenna port that contains one transmitter and one receiver.

1T2R

Indicates the single-antenna port that contains one transmitter and two receivers.

2T2R SFBC

Indicates the space frequency block code for two transmitters and two receivers.

2T2R OL SM

Indicates the open-loop spatial multiplexing for two transmitters and two receivers.

2T2R CL Rank2

Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 2 for two transmitters and two receivers.

MultiUser

Indicates the multi-user MIMO.

2T2R CL Rank1

Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for two transmitters and two receivers.

Single Port5

Indicates the single-transmitter port (port 5).

Single Port56

Indicates the dual-transmitter ports (port 5 and port 6).

4T2R SFBC

Indicates the space frequency block code for four transmitters and two receivers.

4T2R OL SM

Indicates the open-loop spatial multiplexing for four transmitters and two receivers.

4T2R CL Rank1

Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for four transmitters and two receivers.

4T2R CL Rank2

Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and two receivers.

4T4R SFBC

Indicates the space frequency block code for four transmitters and four receivers.

4T4R OL Rank2

Indicates the open-loop multiplexing rank 2 for four transmitters and four receivers.

4T4R OL Rank3


4T4R OL Rank4


BF Port7

Indicates the single-stream beam forming port (port 7).


14-251


14 Appendix

IE Name

Description

BF Port8

Indicates the single-stream beam forming port (port 8).

BF Port78

Indicates the double-stream beam forming ports (port 7 and port 8).

4T4R CL Rank1

Indicates the closed-loop multiplexing rank 1 for four transmitters and four receivers.

4T4R CL Rank2


4T4R CL Rank3


4T4R CL Rank4


PMI

Indicates the PreCoding Matrix Index (PMI), and the value range is from 0 to 15.

NAS Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the NAS Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the NAS parameters by referring to the following descriptions.

14-252

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

EMM Service State

-

Indicates the evolved packet core (EPC) mobility management state.

IP Type

IPv4 or IPv6

Indicates the IP address type.

IPv4Address

-

Indicates the IPv4 address.

IPv6Address

-

Indicates the IPv6 address.

PdnNumber

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the number of packet data networks (PDNs).

PLMN

-

Indicates the registered public land mobile network (PLMN).

PLMN Select Mode

-

Indicates the PLMN selection mode.

Register State

-

Indicates the registration state.

RRC Connect State

-

Indicates the RRC connection state.

SecurityModeCon trol

-

Indicates the security mode command switch.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

PDCP Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the PDCP Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) parameters by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DiscardTimerLength

-

Indicates the value of the discard timer configured for the PDCP.

DL Count

-

Indicates the downlink PDCP entity count.

MaxCid

-

Indicates the maximum connection ID of the robust header compression (ROHC) context.

PDCPRohcProfile

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the ROHC profile information is not configured. 1 indicates that the ROHC profile information is configured.

Indicates the information about the ROHC profile configured for the PDCP.

PDCPSnBitLength

Range: 0 to 2

Indicates the bit length of the sequence number configured for the PDCP.

l 0 indicates 5 bits. l 1 indicates 7 bits. l 2 indicates 12 bits. RB ID

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the radio bearer ID of the PDCP.

RLC Mode

0 or 1. 0 indicates the RLC AM mode. 1 indicates the RLC UM mode.

Indicates the RLC mode of the PDCP.

StateReportFlag

0 or 1. 0 indicates that the state report is not sent during the handover. 1 indicates that the state report is sent during the handover.

Indicates the state report flag that is sent during the PDCP handover.

UL Count

-

Indicates the uplink PDCP entity count.

PHY Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the PHY Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the LTE physical channel parameters by referring to the following descriptions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-253


14 Appendix

14-254

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Adjust Point

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the adjustment point that is traced periodically.

CFI1 Number

-

Indicates the number of times that the control format indicator (CFI) of the physical control format indicator channel (PCFICH) is 1.

CFI2 Number

-

Indicates the number of times that the CFI of the PCFICH is 2.

CFI3 Number

-


CFI4 Number

-


DCI DL Number

-

Indicates the number of downlink control information (DCI) on the downlink public dedicated control channel (PDCCH).

DCI UL Number

-

Indicates the number of DCI on the uplink PDCCH.

PHICH Ack Number

-

Indicates the number of ACK messages sent on the physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH).

PHICH Nack Number

-

Indicates the number of NACK messages sent on the physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH).

FirstPathFailNumber

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically fails to be determined.

FirstPathFailThreeNumber

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically fails to be determined for three consecutive times.

FirstPathFailThreeSwitchNumber

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically fails to be determined for three consecutive times but is in handover state.

FirstPathNumber

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically is determined.

FirstPathStrValue

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the threshold that the first path is traced periodically.

FirstPathSuccessNumber

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the number of times that the first path that is traced periodically is determined successfully.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

FirstPathValue

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the value of the first path that is traced periodically.

MaxPathPosition

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the position of the maximum path that is traced periodically.

MaxPathValue

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the value of the maximum path that is traced periodically.

PLMN Information This section describes the IEs related to the PLMN Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) information by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Equivalent PLMN List

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the equivalent PLMN list.

Forbiden PLMN List

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the forbidden PLMN list.

Power Control This section describes the IEs related to the Power Control of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the power control by referring to the following descriptions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Alpha Factor

Range: 0 to 7. The values of 0 to 7 correspond to the alpha factors 0, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9, and 1.

Indicates the alpha factor of power control shrinking.

CurrentFiValue

-

Indicates the current Fi adjust value getting from the table according to the TPC value.

CurrGiValue

-

Indicates the current Gi adjust value getting from table according to the TPC value.

DeltaFPUCCH

-

Indicates the delta F_PUCCH.

DeltaTFi

-

Indicates the delta TFI on the Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH).

DynNominal PUCCH

-

Indicates the dynamic nominal Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUCCH) power.

DynNominalPUSC H

-

Indicates the dynamic nominal PUSCH power.


14-255


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DynUEPUCCH

-

Indicates the dynamic UE PUCCH power.

DynUEPUSCH

-

Indicates the dynamic UE PUSCH power.

FiType

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the accumulated type. 1 indicates the absolute type.

Indicates the power control adjust type.

Format

Range: 1 to 6

Indicates the command format of the PUCCH.

Max TxPower



PathLoss

Unit: dB

Indicates the path loss of the PUSCH or PUCCH.

PUCCHHn

-

Indicates the PUCCH H(n).

RB Number

-

Indicates the resource block.

SumFiValue

-

Indicates the accumulation value of all Fi adjust value.

SumGiValue

-

Indicates the accumulation value of all Gi adjust value.

TPCValue

Value: 0, 1, 2, or 3

Indicates the adjust value index of the power control on PUSCH that is used to calculate CurrGiValue .

PRB This section describes the IEs related to the PRB of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the resource block by referring to the following descriptions.

14-256

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DL RB Count

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the scheduling times of downlink resource block.

RB Index

Range: 1 to 100

Indicates the resource block index.

UL RB Slot0 Count

Range: 1 to 1000

Indicates the scheduling times of uplink resource block on slot 0.

UL RB Slot1 Count

Range: 1 to 1000

Indicates the scheduling times of uplink resource block on slot 1.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Radio Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the Radio Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the transmit power and signal-to-interference plus noise ratio (SINR) of all the channels by referring to the following descriptions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

PCI

Range: 0 to 503

Indicates the physical cell ID.

RSRP

Range: -132 to -40; unit: dBm

Indicates the measurement value of the reference signal received power (RSRP), which is used for deciding the uplink quality during the handover.

RSRQ

Range: -20 to 0; unit: dB

Indicates the measurement value of the reference signal received quality (RSRQ), which is used for deciding the uplink quality during the handover.

RSSI


Indicates the measurement value of the received signal strength indicator (RSSI), which is used for deciding the uplink quality during the handover.

PUSCH Power

Range: -40 to 23; unit: dBm

Indicates the transmit power of the physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH).

PUCCH Power


Indicates the transmit power of the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH).

RACH Power


Indicates the transmit power of the random access channel (RACH).

SRS Power


Indicates the transmit power of the channel for a UE to send sounding reference signals (SRSs).

Power Headroom


Indicates the power headroom of a UE.

PDCCH DL Grant Count

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the total number of granted downlink public dedicated control channels (PDCCHs).

PDCCH UL Grant Count

Range: 0 to 1000

Indicates the total number of granted uplink PDCCHs.

Average SINR


Indicates the average SINR.

Rank1 SINR


Indicates the target SINR of Rank 1.

Rank2 SINR1


Indicates the target SINR on codeword 0 of Rank 2.


14-257


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Rank2 SINR2



Rank3 SINR1



Rank3 SINR2



Rank4 SINR1



Rank4 SINR2



DrsRank1SINR


Indicates the target SINR of dedicated reference signals of Rank 1.

DrsRank2SINR1


Indicates the target SINR of dedicated reference signals on codeword 0 of Rank 2.

DrsRank2SINR2


Indicates the target SINR of dedicated reference signals on codeword 1 of Rank 2.

RxChCorFactor

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the Rx channel correlation factor.

TxChCorFactor

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the Tx channel correlation factor.

Rank Indicator

Range: 1 to 2

Indicates the rank value.

DMRS HOP

Range: 0 to 30

Indicates the demodulation reference signal (DMRS) hopping group. This IE is displayed after the frequency hopping test is performed. You can choose Test > LTE SendCommand to control a terminal to perform the DMRS frequency hopping test.

Random Access Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the Random Access Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the random access message by referring to the following descriptions.

14-258

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

ContentionMessagePayload

-

Indicates the contention message payload.

MACStatAfter

-

Indicates the state of the MAC layer after the random access.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

MACStatePrevious

-

Indicates the state of the MAC layer before the random access.

Message3Payload

-

Indicates the Message3 (RRC Request) payload.

Message5ScheduledUlGrant

Range: 0 to 19

Indicates the Message5 (RRC Request Complete) scheduled on the uplink.

Message5ScheduledUlGrantPayload

-

Indicates the payload of Message5 (RRC Request Complete) scheduled on the uplink.

RaCauseType

-

Indicates the random access cause type.

RandomAccessNumber

-

Indicates the random access number.

RarMessagePayload

-

Indicates the RAR message payload.

RaType

0 or 1. 0 indicates the contention based random access. 1 indicates the noncontention based random access.

Indicates the random access type.

ReceiveContentionMessage

Range: 0 to 19

Indicates the received contention messages.

ReceiveRarMessage

Range: 0 to 19

Indicates the received radio random access messages.

SendMessage3Message

Range: 0 to 19

Indicates the Message3 (RRC Request) sent during the random access.

RB Configuration Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the RB Configuration Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the resource block (RB) configuration parameters by referring to the following descriptions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

BuckSizeDuration

50, 100, 150, 300, 500, or 1000

Indicates the buck size duration.

ControlPduLength

-

Indicates the length of a control protocol data unit (PDU).

EPSB ID

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the evolved packet system bearer ID.


14-259


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Logical Channel Group ID

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the logical channel group ID.

Logical Channel Group PRI

-

Indicates the logical channel group priority.

Logical Channel ID

Range: 0 to 32


Logical Channel PBR

Value: 0, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, or 0xFFFF. Unit: ms.

Indicates the prioritized bit rate of a logical channel.

Logical Channel PRI

Range: 1 to 16

Indicates the logical channel priority.

ReTxPduLength

-

Indicates the length of the PDU to be retransmitted.

RLC Mode

Range: 0 to 2

Indicates the RLC mode.

l 0 indicates the acknowledge mode. l 1 indicates the unacknowledge mode. l 2 indicates the transparent mode. RxSduLength

-

Indicates the length of the received service data unit (SDU).

SendSduLength

-

Indicates the length of the sent SDU.

RLC Parameters This section describes the IEs related to the RLC Parameters of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the radio link control channel parameters by referring to the following descriptions.

14-260

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Entity State

-

Indicates the entity state.

Logical Channel ID

Range: 0 to 31


MACNotifySendNumber

-

Indicates the number of protocol data units (PDUs) that the MAC layer instructs the uplink RLC to send.

RxMACPdu

-

Indicates the number of MAC PDUs received on downlink RLC channels.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

RxPDCPSdu

-

Indicates the number of PDCP service data units (SDUs) received on uplink RLC channels.

Transmit Type

Range: 0 to 2

Indicates the transmission type.

l 0 indicates the acknowledge mode. l 1 indicates the unacknowled ge mode. l 2 indicates the transparent mode.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

TxPduToMAC

-

Indicates the number of PDUs sent from the uplink RLC channel to the MAC layer.

TxSduToPDCP

-

Indicates the number of PDUs sent from the downlink RLC to the PDCP.

VR(h)

-

Indicates the highest receive state variable, that is, the sequence number of the received PDU that follows the PDU with the maximum sequence number in AM mode.

VR(mr)

-

Indicates the maximum acceptable receive state variable, which is equal to the sum of VR(r) and the receive window size.

VR(ms)

-

Indicates the maximum transmit state variable, that is, the sequence number of the maximum PDU (ACK) of the transmit state report.

VR(r)

-

Indicates the receive state variable. As the lower limit of the AM receive window, it indicates the sequence number of the first PDU that is not completely received or disordered.

VR(uh)

-

Indicates the UM highest received state variable. As the upper limit of the receive window, it indicates the sequence number of the received PDU that follows the PDU with the maximum sequence number in UM mode.

VR(ur)

-

Indicates the UM receive state variable, that is, the sequence number of the first PDU that needs to be re-ordered in UM mode.

VR(ux)

-

Indicates the UM t-reordering state variable, that is, the sequence number of the PDU that triggers the re-ordering timer in UM mode.


14-261


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

VR(x)

-

Indicates the t-Reordering state variable, that is, the sequence number of the PDU that triggers the re-ordering timer in AM mode.

VT(a)

-

Indicates the acknowledgment state variable, that is, the sequence number of the next PDU to be confirmed in AM mode.

VT(ms)

-

Indicates the maximum send state variable, that is, the sequence number of the maximum sent PDU in AM mode. The value of this parameter is equal to the sum of VT(a) and the send window size.

VT(s)

-

Indicates the send state variable, that is, the sequence number of the next PDU to be sent in AM mode.

VT(us)

-

Indicates the send state variable, that is, the sequence number of the next PDU to be sent in UM mode.

RRC Information This section describes the IEs related to the RRC Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the radio resource control by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name PUSCH Configure Parameter

14-262

Range/Unit

Description

64QAM Enable

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the 64QAM is disabled. 1 indicates that the 64QAM is enabled.

Indicates whether the 64 quadrature amplitude modulation is enabled.

CyclicShift

Range: 1 to 7

Indicates the cyclic shift.

DeltaOffsetAckIndex

Range: 0 to 10

Indicates the delta offset acknowledgment index.

DeltaOffsetCqiIndex

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the delta offset channel quality indicator (CQI) index.

DeltaOffsetRiIn dex

Range: 0 to 12

Indicates the delta offset rank indicator (RI) index.

GroupAssignPU SCH

Range: 0 to 29

Indicates the group that is assigned to the PUSCH.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

RACH Configure Parameter

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Range/Unit

Description

GroupHoppingE nabled

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the group hopping is disabled. 1 indicates that the group hopping is enabled.

Indicates whether the group hopping is enabled.

Hopping Mode

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the hopping mode is Inter-SubFrame. 1 indicates that the hopping mode is Inter&IntraSubFrame.

Indicates the hopping mode.

SubBandNumbe r

Range: 1 to 4

Indicates the number of subbands.

PUSCHHoppin gOffset

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the PUSCH hopping offset.

SequenceHoppi ngEnabled

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the sequence hopping is disabled. 1 indicates that the sequence hopping is enabled.

Indicates whether the sequence hopping is enabled.

MACContentio nTimer

Range: 8 to 64. Step: 8. Unit: subframe.

Indicates the timer for contention resolution in TS 36.321 [6]. The unit is subframe. Value sf8 corresponds to 8 subframes, sf16 corresponds to 16 subframes.

MaxHarqMessa ge3Tx

Range: 1 to 8

Indicates the maximum number of Msg3 HARQ transmissions in TS 36.321 [6], which is used for contention based random access.

MessagePower OffsetGroupB

Range: 0xFFFFFFFF, 0, 5, 8, 10, 12, 15, 18. Unit: dB.

Indicates the threshold for preamble selection in TS 36.321 [6]. The unit is dB. Value minusinfinity corresponds to infinity. Value dB0 corresponds to 0 dB, dB5 corresponds to 5 dB.


14-263


14 Appendix

IE Name

SRS Configure Parameter

14-264

Range/Unit

Description

MessageSizeGr oupA

56, 144, 208, or 256

Indicates the size of the random access preambles group A or B.

PreambleInitialReceivedTargetPower

Range: -120 to -90. Unit: 2

Indicates the preamble initial received target power.

PreambleTransmitMax

3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 20, 50, 100, or 200

Indicates the maximum number of transmitted preambles.

PowerRamping Step

0, 2, 4, or 6

Indicates the power ramping step.

RaPRACHMask Index

-

Indicates the random access physical random access channel (PRACH) mask index.

RaPreambleGro upANumber

Range: 0 to 60. Step: 4

Indicates the number of nondedicated random access preambles that correspond to group A.

RaPreambleInde x

-

Indicates the dedicated random access preamble index.

RaPreambleNu mber

Range: 4 to 60. Step: 4

Indicates the total number of random access preambles.

RaResponseWin dowSize

2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 10

Indicates the duration of the random access response window.

CyclicShift

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the cyclic shift.

Duration

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the normal duration. 1 indicates the extended duration.

Indicates the duration of physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel (PHICH).

FreqencyDomai nPosition

Range: 0 to 23

Indicates the frequency domain position.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

SimultaneousAnAndSRS

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the messages cannot be transmitted on a channel simultaneously. 1 indicates that the messages can be transmitted on a channel simultaneously.

Indicates whether the sounding reference signal (SRS) and format 1a1b messages can be transmitted on a channel simultaneously.

SRSBandwidth

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the SRS bandwidth.

l 0 indicates UU_BW0. l 1 indicates UU_BW1. l 2 indicates UU_BW2. l 3 indicates UU_BW3. l 4 indicates UU_BW4. l 5 indicates UU_BW5. l 6 indicates UU_BW6. l 7 indicates UU_BW7.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

SRSConfigInde x

Range: 0 to 1023

Indicates the SRS configured index.

SRSHoppingBa ndwidth

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the SRS hopping bandwidth.

SRSMaxUpPts

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the maximum uplink pilot timeslot restriction is disabled. 1 indicates that the maximum uplink pilot timeslot restriction is enabled.

Indicates the maximum uplink pilot timeslot of the SRS.


14-265


14 Appendix

IE Name

PUCCH Configure Parameter

Range/Unit

Description

SRSSubframeC onfig

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the number of configured subframes of the SRS.

SRSUEReleated Bandwith

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the UE-related bandwidth of the SRS.

TransmissionCo mb

0 or 1


DeltaPUCCHSh ift

1, 2, or 3

Indicates the delta PUCCH shift.

EnableFlg

Value: 1 or 2. 1 indicates that the enable flag is disabled. 2 indicates that the enable flag is enabled.

Indicates the enable flag.

N1PUCCHAn

Range: 0 to 2047

Indicate the PUCCH resource value.

N1PUCCHAnR ep

Range: 0 to 2047

Indicates that the UE send the ACK and NACK messages repeatedly with a RepetitionFactor.

NcsAn

Range: 0 to 7

Indicates the number of cyclic shifts.

NrbCqi

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the bandwidth calculated on the basis of the resource block.

RepetitionFacto r

Range: 0 to 3

Indicates the repetition factor that affects the value of N1PUCCHAnRep.

l 0 indicates N2_REPET_F ACTOR. l 1 indicates N4_REPET_F ACTOR. l 2 indicates N6_REPET_F ACTOR. l 3 indicates SPARE1_REP ET_FACTOR.

14-266


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

PRACH Configure Parameter

Range/Unit

Description

TddAckNackFe edbackMode

0 or 1. 0 indicates that the feedback mode of ACK and NACK messages is bundling. 1 indicates that the feedback mode of ACK and NACK messages is multiplexing.

Indicates the feedback mode of the ACK and NACK messages in TDD mode.

HighSpeedFlag

0 or 1. 0 indicates the low speed (restricted). 1 indicates the high speed (unrestricted).

Indicates the high speed flag.

PRACHConfigI ndex

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the PRACH configuration index.

PRACHFreqencyOffset

Range: 0 to 104

Indicates the PRACH frequency offset.

RootSequenceIn dex

Range: 0 to 837

Indicates the root sequence index.

ZeroCorrelation ZoneConfig

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the configuration value of the zero correlation zone.

RRU Measurement This section describes the IEs related to the RRU Measurement of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the remote radio unit (RRU). IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

RF

0 or 1

Indicates the radio frequency unit.

RTWP_ChA


Indicates the received total power of the wideband on main A. Received total (RT) indicates the total power of the wideband signals that a base station receives. Wideband power (WP) indicates the power of the wideband including the noise floor and self interference noise.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-267


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

RTWP_ChB


Indicates the received total power of the wideband on diversity B. Received total (RT) indicates the total power of the wideband signals that a base station receives. Wideband power (WP) indicates the power of the wideband including the noise floor and self interference noise.

Range: -110 to +40. Unit: dBm.

Tx Power


RSRP Measurement This section describes the IEs related to the RSRP Measurement of the LTE network. You can obtain the measurement value of the reference signal received power (RSRP) of each antenna by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

RSRP Antenna0


Indicates the RSRP measurement value of antenna 0.

RSRP Antenna1



RSRP Antenna2



RSRP Antenna3



DrsRSRP Antenna0


Indicates the RSRP measurement value of the dedicated channel of antenna 0.

DrsRSRP Antenna1



DrsRSRP Antenna2



DrsRSRP Antenna3



Service Data Flow Information This section describes the IEs related to the Service Data Flow Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the service data flow by referring to the following descriptions. 14-268


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Bearer Context Type

-

Indicates the bearer context type.

Context ID

Range: 0 to 31

Indicates the context ID.

DLGuaranteedMaxRate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for downlink.

DLMaxRate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum bit rate for downlink.

EPSB ID

-

Indicates the evolved packet system (EPS) bearer ID.

FlowLabelType

-

Indicates the IPv6 flow label type.

LocalPortHighLimit

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the maximum local port number.

LocalPortLowLimit

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the minimum local port number.

PacketFilterID

Range: 0 to 15

Indicates the packet filter identifier.

Precedence

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the packet filter priority.

ProtocolID

-

Indicates the protocol ID.

QCI

-

Indicates the QoS class identifier.

RemoteIpv4Address

-

Indicates the remote IPv4 address.

RemoteIpv4Mask

-

Indicates the remote IPv4 mask.

RemoteIpv6Address

-

Indicates the remote IPv6 address.

RemoteIpv6Mask

-

Indicates the remote IPv6 mask.

RemotePortHighLimit

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the maximum remote port number.

RemotePortLowLimit

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the minimum remote port number.

SdfNumber

Range: 1 to 11

Indicates the number of service data flow.

SdfPfNumber

-

Indicates the number of service data flow packet filter.

SingleLcPort

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the single local port number.

SingleRmtPort

Range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the single remote port number.


14-269


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

TypeOfService

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the service type.

TypeOfServiceMask

Range: 0 to 255

Indicates the service type mask.

ULGuaranteedMaxRate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum guaranteed bit rate for uplink.

ULMaxRate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum bit rate for uplink.

Serving and Neighboring Cells This section describes the IEs related to the Serving and Neighboring Cells of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the serving cell, listed cell, and detected cell by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

PCI

Range: 0 to 503

Indicates the physical cell ID.

RSRP


Indicates the reference signal received power.

RSRQ


Indicates the reference signal received quality.

RSSI



EARFCN

-

Indicates the E-UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number.

Frequency Offset

Unit: Hz

Indicates the frequency offset.

SINR PDF This section describes the IEs related to the SINR PDF of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the signal-to-interference and noise ratio (SINR) of Rank 1 and Rank 2 by referring to the following descriptions.

14-270

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Average SINR


Indicates the average SINR.

DrsRank1SINR


Indicates the dedicated reference signal target SINR of rank 1.

DrsRank2SINR1


Indicates the dedicated reference signal target SINR on codeword 0 of rank 2.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DrsRank2SINR2


Indicates the dedicated reference signal target SINR on codeword 1 of rank 2.

RANK1 SINR


Indicates the target SINR on Rank 1.

RANK2 SINR1



RANK2 SINR2



Throughput This section describes the IEs related to the Throughput of the LTE network. You can obtain the throughput of the medium access control (MAC), packet data convergence protocol (PDCP), and radio link control (RLC) by referring to the following descriptions. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

MAC DL Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink throughput at the MAC layer.

MAC UL Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink throughput at the MAC layer.

PDCP DL Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink throughput at the PDCP layer.

PDCP UL Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink throughput at the PDCP layer.

PHY DL Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink throughput at the physical layer.

PHY UL Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink throughput at the physical layer.

RLC DL Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the downlink throughput at the RLC layer.

RLC UL Throughput

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the uplink throughput at the RLC layer.

Tracking Area Information This section describes the IEs related to the Tracking Area Information of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the tracking area by referring to the following descriptions.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-271


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Forbiden TA List

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the forbidden tracking area.

TA List

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the tracking area list.

UE State This section describes the IEs related to the UE State of the LTE network. You can obtain the information about the status of the non-access stratum, RRC, and MS by referring to this section.

14-272

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

EMM State

-

Indicates the evolved packet system (EPS) mobility management state.

EMM Sub State

-

Indicates the EPS mobility management sub state.

EMM Update

-

Indicates the EPS mobility management update.

RRC State

Idle, Connected, or Unkown

Indicates the RRC connection state.

DRX State

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates the non-DRX state. 1 indicates the DRX state.

Indicates the discontinuous reception mechanism state.

Cell Allowed Access

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that Indicates the cell allowed access. the cell access is not allowed. 1 indicates that the cell access is allowed.

Cell Barred

Value: 0 or 1. 0 indicates that the cell is not barred. 1 indicates that the cell is barred.

Indicates the cell barred.

Cell Reserved

-

Indicates the cell reserved.

Camped PCI

Range: 0 to 503

Indicates the camped physical cell identity.

IMSI

-


Version

-


UE Category

-

Indicates the user equipment category.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Antenna Selection

Range: 0 to 4

Indicates the antenna selection.

l 0 indicates the closed loop. l 1 indicates the open loop. l 2 indicates the singleantenna transmission. l 3 indicates the power aiding. l 4 indicates that the antenna is invalid. Feature Group Indicators

-

Indicates the feature group indicators.

Timing Advance

Range: 0 to 63

Indicates the timing advance (TA).

Synchronous State

-

Indicates the downlink synchronization state of a UE.

MME Code

-

Indicates the mobility management entity code.

MME GroupId

-

Indicates the mobility management entity group ID.

MTMSI

-

Indicates the M-temporary mobile subscriber identity.

AFC Period

-

Indicates the automatic frequency control period.

AFC Frequency Read Value

-

Indicates the automatic frequency control frequency read value.

PLMN

-

Indicates the public land mobile network.

TAC

-

Indicates the tracking area code.

14.3.6 Information Elements of Scanners This describes the IEs of the PCTel, Anritsu, and Rohde & Schwarz scanners. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the views of these scanners.

GSM Information Elements of Scanners This describes the IEs of the GSM scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the GSM scanner view.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-273


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

ARFCN

-

Indicates the ARFCN.

BSIC

-


C/A

Unit: dB

Indicates the carrier-to-adjacent (ratio).

C/I

Unit: dB

Indicates the carrier-to-interference (ratio).

Center Frequency

-


Frequency

Unit: MHz

Indicates the carrier frequency.

Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the level strength of each frequency.

RSSI

Unit: dBm


RxLev

Unit: dBm

Indicates the received signal level.

Spectrum Channel

-

Indicates the tested ARFCN of spectrum analysis.

WCDMA Information Elements of Scanners This describes the IEs of the WCDMA scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the WCDMA scanner view.

14-274

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Aggregate Ec/Io

Unit: dB

Indicates the aggregate Ec/Io.

Center Frequency

-


Channel Code

-

Indicates the primary and secondary scrambling codes.

Delay Spread

-

Indicates the spread delay.

Dev.Drift

-

Indicates the received signals of time slices, which are obtained by using the standard method.

Drift

-

Indicates the received signals of time slices.

Ec

Unit: dBm

Indicates the energy per chip.

Ec/Io

Unit: dB



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Eps/Io

-

Indicates the peak value of the Ec/Io of the primary scrambling code.

Ess/Io

-

Indicates the peak value of the Ec/Io of the secondary scrambling code.

Finger No

-

Indicates the number of a finger.

Io

Unit: dBm

Indicates the total power spectral density of the received bandwidth.

ISCP

-

Indicates the interference signal code power.

p Total

-

Indicates the total received power of the current ARFCN.

Power

Unit: dBm

Indicates the level strength of each frequency.

RSSI

Unit: dBm


Scrambling Code

-

Indicates the scrambling code.

SIR

-

Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio.

Spectrum Channel

-


Time

-

Indicates the time sequence offset.

Time Offset

-

Indicates the time sequence offset or pilot delay.

CDMA Information Elements of Scanners This describes the IEs of the CDMA scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the CDMA scanner view.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Aggregate Ec/Io

Unit: dB

Indicates the aggregate Ec/Io.

Channel

-


Delay Spread

Unit: chip

Indicates the spread delay.

Ec/Io

Unit: dB

Indicates the ratio of the pilot energy per chip to the total power spectral density of the received bandwidth.

Io

Unit: dBm

Indicates the total power of the specified bandwidth


14-275


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Pilot Delay

-

Indicates the pilot delay.

Power

-

Indicates the power.

Protocol

-

Indicates the network system.

RSSI

Unit: dBm


Spectrum Channel

-


WiMAX Information Elements of Scanners This describes the IEs of the WiMAX scanner. You can refer to the description when browsing the IEs in the WiMAX scanner view. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

CINR

Unit: dB

Indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio of the preamble numbered N. Here, N refers to the preamble index.

RSSI

Unit: dBm

Indicates the received signal strength indicator of the preamble numbered N. Here, N refers to the preamble index.

14.3.7 Packet Service Testing Information Elements This describes the packet service testing information elements. You can refer to this part when browsing the information about information elements in the packet service views.

App Throughput This describes meanings of the IEs related to the App Throughput test for the packet service. The following table provides the information about the throughput ratio at the application layer of the packet service.

14-276

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Rx App Rate


Indicates the downlink throughput rate at the application layer, that is, the current throughput for data received at the application layer.

Tx App Rate


Indicates the uplink throughput rate at the application layer, that is, the current throughput for data sent at the application layer.

TCP Retransmit Ratio


Indicates the retransmission ratio at the TCP layer.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Attach Detach This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Attach Detach test for the packet service. The following table provides the information about the Attach or Detach service of the packet service. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Attach Success Rate


Indicates the attach success rate.

Detach Success Rate


Indicates the detach success rate.

Attach Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the attach time.

Detach Time

Unit: ms

Indicates the detach time.

FTP Service Quality Evaluation This describes meanings of the IEs related to the FTP Service Quality Evaluation test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the FTP service of the packet service.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Progress


Indicates the upload or download progress.

Download/Upload Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the upload or download rate.

Time Elapsed

-

Indicates the upload or download elapsed time.

Current Load Size

Unit: kbyte

Indicates the size of the file uploaded or downloaded currently.

Total Load Size

Unit: kbyte

Indicates the total size of all uploaded or downloaded files.

Download File Size

Unit: kbyte

Indicates the size of the downloaded file.

Download Total Count

-

Indicates the total number of download attempts.

Download Failure Count

-

Indicates the number of download failures.

Download Failure Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the download failure rate.

Upload File Size

Unit: kbyte

Indicates the size of the uploaded file.

Upload Total Count

-

Indicates the total number of upload attempts.


14-277


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Upload Failure Count

-

Indicates the number of upload failures.

Upload Failure Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the upload failure rate.

Download time

Unit: s

Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the download duration.

Download Avg rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the average download rate.

Upload time

Unit: s

Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the upload duration.

Upload Avg rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the average upload rate.

Max Rate Up

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum rate on the uplink.

Min Rate Down

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the minimum rate on the downlink.

Guar Rate Up

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the guaranteed rate on the uplink.

Guar Rate Down

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the guaranteed rate on the downlink.

HTTP Service Quality Evaluation This describes meanings of the IEs related to the HTTP Service Quality Evaluation test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the HTTP service of the packet service.

14-278

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Progress


Indicates the test progress.

Page download rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the page download rate.

Max Rate Up

Unit: kbit/s


Max Rate Down

Unit: kbit/s


Guar Rate Up

Unit: kbit/s


Guar Rate Down

Unit: kbit/s



Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

DNS Parse Time

Unit: s

Indicates the duration for parsing the domain name server (DNS).

Page size

Unit: byte

Indicates the page size.

Buffer

-

Indicates the buffer.

Page access failure rate


Indicates the failure rate of accessing pages.

URL

-

Indicates the IP address of the HTTP server.

Page download time

Unit: ms

Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the page download duration.

Avg rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the statistical value (such as minimum value, maximum value, average value, and standard deviation) of the average page download rate.

Ping Service Quality Evaluation This describes meanings of the IEs related to the Ping Service Quality Evaluation test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the Ping service of the packet service.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Packet Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the size in bytes of the packet sent with the Ping command. Valid only during Ping sessions.

IP

-

Indicates the server IP address that is pinged.

Status

-

Indicates the status of the current ping test.

Packet Loss Rate


Indicates the packet loss rate.

Ping time

Unit: ms

Indicates the duration of the ping test.

Max Rate Up

Unit: kbit/s


Max Rate Down

Unit: kbit/s


Guar Rate Up

Unit: kbit/s


Guar Rate Down

Unit: kbit/s



14-279


14 Appendix

PS Common Indicators This describes meanings of the IEs related to the PS Common Indicators test for the packet service. The following table provides the information about the PDP activation for the packet service. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

PDP Activation Success Rate


Indicates the PDP activation success rate.

PDP Activation Time

Unit: s

Indicates the PDP activation time.

WAP Download This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Download test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP download service of the packet service.

14-280

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Progress

Unit: %

Indicates the test progress of the WAP download.

Download Rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the download rate.

Time Elapsed

Unit: ms

Indicates the elapsed download time.

Current Load Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the size of the file downloaded currently.

Total Load Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the total size of downloaded files.

File Size

Unit: byte

Indicates the size of the downloaded file.

Login failure rate

Unit: %

Indicates the failure rate of logging in to the WAP gateway.

Download Total Count

-

Indicates the total number of download attempts.

Download Failure Count

-

Indicates the number of download failures.

Download Failure Rate

Unit: %

Indicates the download failure rate.

Max rate down

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the maximum download rate.

Guar rate down

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the guaranteed download rate.

Download time

Unit: ms

Indicates the download time.

Download Avg rate

Unit: kbit/s

Indicates the average download rate.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

WAP Gateway Connection This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Gateway Connection test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP gateway connection service of the packet service. IE Name

Description

WAP Gateway Connection

ID

Indicates the ID of the number of WAP gateway connection tests. The ID starts from 1.

Time

Indicates the time for the WAP gateway connection.

Status

Indicates the status of the WAP gateway connection test.

WAP Logon This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Logon test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP login service of the packet service. IE Name

Description

WAP Logon

ID

Indicates the ID of the number of WAP login tests. The ID starts from 1.

Time

Indicates the WAP login time.

Status

Indicates the status of the WAP login test.

WAP Page Refresh This describes meanings of the IEs related to the WAP Page Refresh test for the packet service. The following table provides the information related to the WAP page refreshing service of the packet service. IE Name

Description

WAP Page Refresh

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

ID

Indicates the ID of the number of WAP page refreshing tests. The ID starts from 1.

Time

Indicates the time for refreshing the WAP page.

Status

Indicates the status of the WAP page refreshing test.


14-281


14 Appendix

14.3.8 Speech Quality Evaluation Information Elements This describes meanings of the IEs related to Speech Quality Evaluation. The following table provides information about IEs related to the speech quality service. IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

Index

-


Data Time

-

Indicates the time calculated according to the speech evaluation.

PESQ P.862.1

Range: 1 to 4.5

Indicates an algorithm of the perceptual evaluation of speech quality.

KPI

-

Indicates the key performance indicator.

Min

-

Indicates the minimum value of the speech evaluation.

Max

-

Indicates the maximum value of the speech evaluation.

Avg Value

-

Indicates the average value of the speech evaluation.

Std Deviation

-

Indicates the standard deviation of the speech evaluation.

14.3.9 Noise Test Information Elements This describes the meanings of the IEs related to Noise Test KPI. The following table provides the information noise test information elements.

14-282

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

MOS Score

-

Indicates the MOS score obtained through the PESQ 862.1 algorithm.

Noise Level

Unit: dB

Indicates the noise level of the noise sample file or recorded speech result file measured in the non-speech phase. The smaller the value is, the less the noise is.

Sample Noise File

-

Indicates the name of the noise sample file used in the noise test.

SNR

Unit: dB

Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the noise sample file or recorded speech result file. The SNR can be calculated through the following formula: SpeechLevel - NoiseLevel.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

IE Name

Range/Unit

Description

SNRI

Unit: dB

The signal-to-noise ratio improvement (SNRI) can be calculated through the following formula: Result File SNR - Sample File SNR. The larger the value is, the more the noises are eliminated.

Speech Activity

Range: 0 to 1

Indicates the speech activity of the noise sample file or recorded speech result file.

Speech Level

Unit: dB

Indicates the speech level of the noise sample file or recorded speech result file.

TNLR

Unit: dB

Indicates the total noise level reduction (TNLR) in the non-speech phase. The TNLR can be calculated through the following formula: Result File NoiseLevel Sample File NoiseLevel.

14.4 Keyboard Shortcuts This describes certain keyboard shortcuts of the Probe.

General Shortcuts

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Function

Shortcut

Open the online help.

F1

Open the project.

Ctrl + O

Save the project.

Ctrl + S

Open the engineering parameter view.

Ctrl + E

Open the outdoor map window.

Ctrl + M

Enlarge the map area.

=

Shrink the map area.

-

Open the Device Configure window to configure external devices.

F8

Add external devices.

Ctrl + D

Connect the external device automatically.

F2

Disconnect the external device.

Ctrl + F2

Open the Test Plan Control dialog box to configure or view the test plan.

F9

Start or stop the logfile recording.

F10


14-283


14 Appendix

Function

Shortcut

Pause or resume the logfile recording.

F11

Start the test plan.

F5

End the test plan.

Ctrl + F5

Insert filemark

F12

Switch worksheets on the operation interface.

Ctrl + Tab

Replay Shortcuts Function

Shortcut

Close the logfile.

Ctrl + H

Open the logfile.

Ctrl + L

Play the logfile.

Enter

Stop the logfile.

Ctrl + F6

Shortcuts for synchronization Function

Shortcut

Check the signaling in the L2 Messages or L3 Messages view.

Up/Down

Move the Line Chart view and update the data in the view.

Left/Right

Synchronize the points in the map.

Left/Right

14.5 PSTN SQE Server This provides the guidelines for using the PSTN SQE Server and methods for speech quality evaluation. The PSTN SQE Server is an important component of the speech evaluation solution of Huawei GENEX series. The PSTN SQE Server is deployed on the PSTN as the application management program and is used to test the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink of the GSM and WCDMA networks. 14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the overview of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server is used to test the independent speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink. The following contents help you understand the features, rationale, scenarios, system structure, and basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server. 14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server 14-284


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

This section describes how to install the PSTN SQE Server and other assistants. To complete the installation of the PSTN SQE Server, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard. 14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server The PSTN SQE Server adopts the standard PESQ algorithm and implements the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink on the radio network with the Probe and PHU. 14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the interfaces for using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test and describes corresponding parameters. 14.5.5 FAQs This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the PSTN SQE Server and the corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills. 14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the properties of the SQE test item. You can refer to this part when using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test, and then perform the related operations. 14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the predefined events of the PSTN SQE Server. You can refer to this part when configuring events of the speech quality evaluation.

14.5.1 Overview of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the overview of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server is used to test the independent speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink. The following contents help you understand the features, rationale, scenarios, system structure, and basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server.

Introduction to the PSTN SQE Server This describes features of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server supports the speech quality evaluation tests on multiple networks and provides user-friendly interfaces.

Features l

Speech quality evaluation test on multiple networks such as GSM and WCDMA.

l

Speech quality evaluation test for outgoing and incoming calls. – Speech quality evaluation test for outgoing calls The PSTN SQE Server can set modes of the speech quality evaluation test for outgoing calls and perform the speech quality evaluation test by configuring the specified destination number. – Speech quality evaluation test for incoming calls The PSTN SQE Server can set modes of the speech quality evaluation test for incoming calls, listen to incoming calls, and give responses to incoming calls. – Pre-synchronization of speech evaluation After a call is set up, the PSTN SQE Server can perform the pre-synchronization test to synchronize two parties for the normal speech evaluation test.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-285


14 Appendix

– Recording function Supporting the automatic recording during the speech evaluation test. For the concepts of recording, see Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server. – Playing function Supporting the automatic playing during the speech evaluation test. For the concepts of playing, see Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server. l

Supporting the half-duplex interactive speech evaluation. Thus, the speech quality on the uplink and downlink can be tested in real time. The two interactive speech evaluation modes are as follows: – The PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample, and the PHU records the speech sample. Then, the PHU plays a speech sample, and the PSTN SQE Server records the speech sample. – The PHU plays a speech sample, and the PSTN SQE Server records the speech sample. Then, the PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample, and the PHU records the speech sample.

l

Real-time display of key events on the PSTN such as calling, recording, and playing events. Thus, you can troubleshoot problems in time. For details, see 14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server.

l

Simultaneous test for multiple channels. The PSTN SQE Server can perform the synchronous speech evaluation test for a maximum of eight channels.

l

Recording and storing logfiles (.gen file) in real time. The logfile records the MOS values calculated by the specified channel according to different protocols such as PESQ.862, PESQ.862.1, PESQ LQ, and PESQ Ie. You can import the logfile to the GENEX Assistant to generate the analysis reports of speech evaluation.

Application Scenarios The PSTN SQE Server can be used in each phase of network lifecycles such as the network establishment, expansion, maintenance, and optimization and is applicable to the performance evaluation test and speech quality problem localization. l

Performance evaluation test During the network establishment, expansion, or optimization, the PSTN SQE Server can be used to evaluate the speech quality performance of each network, thus providing the network establishment or optimization with information.

l

Speech quality problem localization on the radio network During the network maintenance or optimization, the PSTN SQE Server and the UEs of the GENEX Probe collect data. The PSTN SQE Server records the uplink MOS. The Probe records the downlink MOS and quickly locates the speech quality problems on the uplink and downlink with the GENEX Assistant.

System Structure The PSTN SQE Server consists of a voice card, and PC that is installed with the PSTN SQE Server and a voice card driver. The voice card supports a maximum of eight speech channels. Figure 14-1 shows the system structure of the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-3 describes each entity shown in Figure 14-1. 14-286


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Figure 14-1 System structure of the PSTN SQE Server

Table 14-3 Description of system structure of the PSTN SQE Server Entity

Description

PC

Refers to a desktop, where the drivers for the PSTN SQE Server and voice card are installed. NOTE The PC must has at least one PCI for installing a voice card.

Voice card

Provides an RJ-11 interface, which is used to connect to the PSTN. The voice card supports the speech call, call answer, recording, and playing functions. The type of the voice card supported by the PSTN SQE Server is Dialogic Diva Analog -2P/-4P/-8P.

RJ-11

Refers to the interface that is provided by the voice card and is used to connect to the PSTN.

PSTN

Refers to the public switched telephone network.

Working Principles of the PSTN SQE Server This describes working principles of the PSTN SQE Server. The PSTN SQE Server supports the speech quality evaluation test on the uplink and downlink. By interacting with the PHU test terminal, the PSTN SQE Server performs the speech quality evaluation test. During the test, the PSTN SQE Server or Probe records the speech result files, performs the MOS analysis in real time, and then displays the MOS values. Thus, you can easily locate the speech quality problems on the radio network.

Speech Evaluation on the Uplink The PHU test terminal plays a speech sample through the air interface. Then, the PSTN SQE Server receives the played speech sample through the PSTN and records the speech sample in the destination file. Thus, the uplink MOS value is obtained according to the speech result file and the speech sample through the PESQ algorithm, as shown in Figure 14-2. Table 14-4 describes Figure 14-2. Figure 14-2 Speech evaluation on the uplink

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-287


14 Appendix

Table 14-4 Speech evaluation on the uplink Entity

Description

Probe

Controls the dial-up of the PHU for playing a speech sample.

PHU test terminal

Plays a speech sample through the air interface. Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, and Huawei U6100 are supported.

PSTN SQE Server

Receives the played speech sample through the PSTN, and then records the speech sample in the destination file.

Speech Evaluation on the Downlink The PSTN SQE Server plays a speech sample through the PSTN. Then, the PHU test terminal receives the played speech sample through the air interface and records the speech sample in the destination file. Thus, the downlink MOS value is obtained according to the speech result file and the speech sample through the PESQ algorithm, as shown in Table 14-5. Figure 14-3 describes Table 14-5. Figure 14-3 Speech evaluation on the downlink

Table 14-5 Speech evaluation on the downlink Entity

Description

Probe

Compares the speech result file with the speech sample and obtains the downlink MOS value through the PESQ algorithm.

PHU test terminal

Receives the played speech sample through the air interface, and then records the speech sample in the destination file. Huawei U120e, Huawei U1205, and Huawei U6100 are supported.

PSTN SQE Server

14-288

Plays a speech sample through the PSTN.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Basic Concepts of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server, including the logfile, project, test task, PESQ, and MOS. These concepts help you better conduct the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test. Table 14-6 lists the basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-6 Basic concepts of the PSTN SQE Server Basic Concepts

Description

Logfile

The logfile is the record of the collected information during the drive test. The test data is stored in a file during the drive test. This file is called logfile (.gen file). Through the logfile, you can easily browse and analyze data.

Project

The PSTN SQE Server is used to manage test items based on the project. A maximum of eight speech channels can be configured in a project. Multiple test tasks can be configured for each speech channel.

Test task

A test task consists of test items provided by the system. You can configure test tasks as required. The test task can provide guidelines for the speech quality test during the drive test.

Event

The PSTN SQE Server provides the events of the speech quality evaluation. These events indicate the status of the speech quality evaluation test. You can browse predefined events in the SpeechView window.

Channel

This is an emulation interface of a voice card, which is used to connect to the telephone cable of the PSTN.

PESQ

This is an international standard algorithm of the perceptual evaluation of speech quality. You can evaluate the speech quality by comparing the original speech sample with the fading speech file. The result of the evaluation is the MOS value.

MOS

The MOS is a subjective evaluation method adopting the ITU-T P.830 protocol. According to the requirements of the P.830 protocol, a specified talker and listener in the specified environment analyze the speech quality by collecting the objective feelings of the tested person in different scenarios.

Recording

The PSTN SQE Server receives the speech sample played on the test terminal through the PSTN, and then records the speech sample in the destination file.

Playing

The PSTN SQE Server plays the speech sample through the PSTN network.

Main Interface of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. The main interface consists of the menu bar, toolbar, operation interface, status bar, and entries to the related operations by using on the PSTN SQE Server.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-289


14 Appendix

Figure 14-4 shows the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-7 describes the items shown in Figure 14-4. Figure 14-4 Main interface of the PSTN SQE Server

Table 14-7 Description of the main interface

14-290

No.

Name

Description

1

Menu bar

Indicates the main menu of the system. For details, see Menu Bar.

2

Toolbar

Provides the shortcut icons for common operations. For details, see Toolbar.

3

Operation interface

Displays different view windows and configuration windows. For details, see Operation Interface.

4

Status bar

Displays the keyboard status such as the status of the Caps Lock, Num Lock, and Scroll Lock keys.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Menu Bar The menu bar of the PSTN SQE Server displays main menus of the system and is designed based on the main functions of the PSTN SQE Server to facilitate your operations. Table 14-8 describes the menu bar and the corresponding functions of the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-8 Description of the menu bar Main Menu

Description

File

Provides the entries for operations related to the project management. For details, see Table 14-9.

Configuration

Provides the entries for configuring speech channels, creating test tasks, and configuring test plans. For details, see Table 14-10.

View

Provides the entries for operations related to the view management. For details, see Table 14-11.

Test

Provides the entries for performing and stopping test tasks. For details, see Table 14-12.

Help

Provides the entries for the system help and license management. For details, see Table 14-13.

Table 14-9 Description of the File menu Menu Item

Description

New

This menu item is used to create a project.

Open

This menu item is used to open a project under the specified path.

Save

This menu item is used to save a project.

Save as

This menu item is used to save a current project as another one.

Close

This menu item is used to close a project.

Table 14-10 Description of the Configuration menu

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Menu Item

Description

Hardware Config

This menu item is used to configure a speech channel.

Test Plan Editor

This menu item is used to create a test task.

Test Plan Configuration Editor

This menu item is used to configure a test plan.


14-291


14 Appendix

Table 14-11 Description of the View menu Menu Item

Description

Speech/TV

This menu item is used to display the view for monitoring test data.

Table 14-12 Description of the Test menu Menu Item

Description

Start Run

This menu item is used to start a test task.

Stop Run

This menu item is used to stop a test task.

Table 14-13 Description of the Help menu Menu Item

Description

Contents

This menu item is used to view the online help of the PSTN SQE Server.

License Info

This menu item is used to view license information.

Update License

This menu item is used to update the license.

View ESN

This menu item is used to obtain the ESN code.

About PSTN SQE Server

This menu item is used to view the version information about the PSTN SQE Server.

Toolbar To enter windows fast or perform relevant operations, you can click corresponding icons on the toolbar of the main interface for the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-14 describes the icons on the toolbar. Table 14-14 Description of the toolbar Icon

14-292

Name

Description

Create a project.

This icon is used to create a project.

Open a project.

This icon is used to open a project (.xml file).

Save a project.

This icon is used to save the current project.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Icon

Name

Description


This icon is used to configure a speech channel. Click this icon to configure a speech channel in the displayed Hardware Config window.

Create a test task.

This icon is used to create a test task. Click this icon to create a test task in the displayed Test Plan Editor window.

Configure a test task.

This icon is used to configure a test plan. Click this icon to configure a test plan in the displayed Test Plan Configuration Editor window.

Monitor a test.

This icon is used to monitor a test. Click this icon to monitor a test in the displayed SpeechView view in real time.

Start a test task.

This icon is used to start a test task.

Stop a test task.

This icon is used to stop a test task.

Help Content

This icon is used to view the version information about the PSTN SQE Server.

Operation Interface To enter windows fast, you can click corresponding icons in the navigation pane of the operation interface for the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-15 describes the icons in the navigation pane. Table 14-15 Description of the navigation pane of the operation interface Icon

Name

Description

Hardware Config

This icon is used to configure a speech channel. Click this icon to configure a speech channel in the displayed Hardware Config window.

Test Plan Editor

This icon is used to create a test task. Click this icon to create a test task in the displayed Test Plan Editor window.

Test Plan This icon is used to configure a test plan. Configuration Editor Click this icon to configure a test plan in the displayed Test Plan Configuration Editor window.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-293


14 Appendix

Icon

Name

Description

SpeechView

Click this icon to monitor a test in the SpeechView view in real time.

Operation Procedure of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the procedure for using the PSTN SQE Server. In the speech evaluation project, the PSTN SQE Server creates test tasks to perform the speech quality evaluation test. You can familiarize yourself with the procedure for using the PSTN SQE Server. Table 14-16 describes the operation procedures. Table 14-16 Operation procedures

14-294

Step

Operation

Description

Reference

1

Configure a voice card

Refers to configuring the relevant parameters of the voice card. Thus, the voice card can run properly.

For details, see Configuring a Voice Card.

2

Create a speech evaluation project.

Refers to creating a project for the speech evaluation.

For details, see Creating a Speech Evaluation Project.

3


Refers to configuring available speech channels in the PSTN SQE Server.

For details, see Configuring a Speech Channel.

4

Create a test task.

Refers to creating a test task for the UE, which is used for the speech evaluation test.

For details, see Creating a Test Plan.

5

Configure a test task.

Refers to selecting the corresponding channel for a test task and setting properties of the Option.

For details, see Configuring a Test Plan.

6

Perform a test task.

Refers to starting a test task and recording a logfile. During the test, you can browse the logfile in real time.

For details, see Starting a Test Plan.

7

Browse the speech evaluation view in real time.

Refers to browsing the test data in the SpeechView view.

For details, see Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

14.5.2 Installing the PSTN SQE Server This section describes how to install the PSTN SQE Server and other assistants. To complete the installation of the PSTN SQE Server, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted by the installation wizard.

Context After the PSTN SQE Server is installed, you must connect the dongle to the PC to obtain the license so that you can use the relevant functions authorized by the license.

Preparations Before Installing the PSTN SQE Server Before installing the PSTN SQE Server, you must check whether the installation requirements are met. The installation requirements are as follows: l

The software package of the Probe is available.

l

The configuration of PC meets the requirement of the installation.

l

The voice card and the corresponding driver are required.

Hardware Requirements of the PSTN SQE Server Table 14-17 describes the requirements for PC configuration. Table 14-17 Hardware requirements of the PSTN SQE Server Configuration Items

Configuration Requirements

CPU

The Intel T2500 2.00 GHz Dual-Core processor is recommended.

Memory

The minimum memory is 1 GB.

Hard disk

It is recommended that the available hard disk space be 10 GB or greater.

PC port

l If a dongle plugs into the PC, at least a USB port is required. l At least one PCI slot is required for installing a voice card.

Operating system

Windows XP Professional SP2.

Software Requirements of the PSTN SQE Server Table 14-18 describes the software and the corresponding configurations recommended for the speech quality evaluation.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-295


14 Appendix

Table 14-18 Software requirements of the PSTN SQE Server Configuratio n Items

Obtaining Methods

Configuration Requirements

Remarks

Operating system

-

Microsoft Windows XP Professional SP2.

Mandatory

GENEX Probe V200R003 software package

l Huawei website: http:// support.huawei.com

You need to have an account with http:// support.huawei.com. In addition, you are authorized to download the GENEX Probe V200R003 software package or purchase the GENEX Probe V200R003 software.

Mandatory

Installation package of the Dialogic Diva voice card driver

l Huawei website: http:// support.huawei.com

You need to have an account with http:// support.huawei.com. In addition, you are authorized to download the Dialogic Diva voice card driver or purchase the GENEX Probe V200R003 software.

If the voice card driver is not installed, you cannot use the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate the speech quality.

The GENEX Probe V200R003 is purchased.

Mandatory

l GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CDROM

l GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CDROM l Dialogc website: http:// www.dialogic.com/ support/software.

License

The license is integrated in the dongle.

Installing the PSTN SQE Server Main Program During the installation of the Probe, the system installs the PSTN SQE Server by default. You can install the PSTN SQE Server as required.

Prerequisite Check whether the computer meets the hardware requirements for installing the PSTN SQE Server. For details, see Preparations Before Installing the PSTN SQE Server.

Context It is recommended that you install the GENEX Probe and PSTN SQE Server on two PCs.

Procedure Step 1 Obtain the GENEX Probe V200R003 installation program.

14-296


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

If ...

Then ...



The installation CD-ROM of GENEX Probe V200R003 is available.

Perform Step 2.

Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe. The installation interface is displayed. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, choose I accept the terms of the license agreement. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 In the dialog box as shown in Figure 14-5, specify User Name and Company Name. Figure 14-5 Customer Information

NOTE

l Anyone who uses this computer (all users): Authorize all users of this computer to use the Probe. l Only for me (user): Authorize only the current user to use the Probe.

Step 7 Click Next. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-297


14 Appendix

Step 8 Select the Custom installation mode. Then select PSTN SQE Server. Step 9 Click Browse to select the installation directory. Step 10 Click Next. Step 11 After the installation is complete, you can select Yes, I want to restart my computer now or No, I will restart my computer later. Then click Finish. It is recommended that you select Yes, I want to restart my computer now. Step 12 Check whether the PSTN SQE Server is installed successfully. Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > PSTN SQE Server and check whether the shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server exists. If ...

Then ...

The shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server exists.

The PSTN SQE Server is installed successfully.

The shortcut for the PSTN SQE Server does not exist.

Perform Step 1 through Step 12 again.

----End

Plugging in a Dongle The dongle is a device that provides the user with the authorization to use the GENEX series products. License is integrated with the dongle. Therefore, you must plug the dongle into the computer before using the Probe to collect data or using the PSTN SQE Server to evaluate speech quality. If you only use the Probe to replay data, the dongle is not required.

Procedure Step 1 Plug in the dongle. If ...

Then ...

The software is being used for the first time Plug the dongle into the USB port of the PC. and the dongle is available. The dongle expires.

Perform Step 2 through Step 5 to obtain a valid license and update the license for the dongle.

Step 2 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > corresponding software name (such as Probe or PSTN SQE Server) to run the main program. Step 3 On the displayed main interface, choose Help > View ESN. Step 4 Send the ESN to Huawei technical support engineer and wait for a new license. 14-298


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Normally, the new license will be delivered in two to three days. Step 5 Update the new license for the dongle. 1.

On the main interface, choose Help > Update License.

2.

In the Open dialog box, select the new license.

3.

Click Open.

4.

In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click OK.

CAUTION When updating the new license for the dongle, ensure that only the dongle for the corresponding software is plugged into the computer. Step 6 Optional: Choose Help > License Info to check the authorization information of the dongle. ----End

Follow-up Procedure If the dongle can not be used normally, the dongle driver should be installed. You can obtain the dongle driver through the following modes: l

Huawei website: http://support.huawei.com

l

GENEX Probe V200R003 software installation CD-ROM

Installing the Driver for a Voice Card This describes how to install the driver for a voice card. To ensure that the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server can correctly recognize the Dialogic Diva voice card, you must install the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card on the PC.

Prerequisite 1.

All applications are already closed.

2.

The Dialogic Diva voice card has been connected to the PC through the PCMCIA slot.

3.

You must log in to the PC where the driver for the voice card is installed as an administrator.

4.

If the PC where the PSTN SQE Server is installed is already installed with another driver for the voice card, uninstall it, and then install the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card.

Procedure Step 1 Obtain the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-299


14 Appendix

If ...

Then ...

The driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is Decompress the downloaded driver downloaded from http://support.huawei.com or installation package, and then perform http://www.dialogic.com/support/software Step 2. The installation CD-ROM of is available

Perform Step 2.

Step 2 Double-click Setup.exe to start the installation. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 Select the installation mode in the displayed dialog box. l Default Installation: Diva API/CAPI will be installed.: refers to the default installation. It is recommended that you install the driver for the voice card in default installation mode. l Customized installation: Specify services which should be installed.: refers to the customized installation. If you select this installation mode, you can specify the services to be installed. l Secure installation: Exclude specific services from installation and conf: refers to the security installation. If you select this installation mode, you can set the security properties for different services. Step 5 Click Next. Step 6 Optional: Select Install WIBU-KEY software to install the WIBU-KEY software. It is recommended that you do not install the WIBU-KEY software. Step 7 Click Next. Step 8 Click Install. Step 9 After the installation is complete, click Finish. Step 10 Restart the PC. Step 11 Check whether the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is installed successfully. Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva to check whether the software information about the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card exists. If ...

Then ...

The software information about the driver The driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card is for the Dialogic Diva voice card exists installed successfully. The software information about the driver Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 until the driver for the Dialogic Diva voice card does not for the Dialogic Diva voice card is installed exist successfully.

14-300


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix NOTE

After the installation is complete, choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Manual Diva Boards to view details about how to install the driver for the voice card.

----End

Follow-up Procedure After the installation is complete, you need to correctly configure the voice card. Thus, the voice card can run properly. For details, see Configuring a Voice Card.

14.5.3 Using PSTN SQE Server The PSTN SQE Server adopts the standard PESQ algorithm and implements the speech quality evaluation on the uplink and downlink on the radio network with the Probe and PHU.

Configuring a Voice Card This describes how to configure a voice card. After the driver for a voice card is installed, you need to correctly configure the voice card. Thus, the voice card can run properly.

Prerequisite The driver for the voice card is already installed..

Procedure Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Configuration Manager. The Active Configuration - Dialogic(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager window is displayed. Step 2 In the left pane of the Active Configuration - Dialogic(R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager

window, click

.

Step 3 Configure properties in the displayed dialog box. From the Country Selection drop-down list, select the country where you stay. Other properties are set by default. on the toolbar of the Active Configuration - Dialogic Step 4 After configuring the properties, click (R) Diva(R) Configuration Manager window to save and activate the property configuration. Step 5 After the properties are activated successfully, click OK in the displayed Activate Configuration dialog box. Step 6 In the displayed Update successful dialog box, perform either of the following operations: l Click Yes. The PC is restarted and the activated configuration takes effect. l Click No. The activated configuration does not take effect and the voice card cannot work normally. ----End Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-301


14 Appendix

Creating a Speech Evaluation Project This describes how to create a speech evaluation project. All operations of the PSTN SQE Server are based on a project. Therefore, you need to create a project or open an existing project before the speech evaluation test is performed.

Context In the PSTN SQE Server, you can open only one project at a time. To switch the current project to another one, you must close the open project.


on the toolbar or choose File > New to create a project.

NOTE

You can click

on the toolbar or choose File > Open to open an existing project.

Step 2 Configure parameters. You can configure the speech channels, create test tasks, and configure test tasks for a project. For details, see corresponding chapters. Step 3 Optional: Save the current project as required. If You Need To ...

Then ...

Directly save the current project

Click

Save the current project as another one

Choose File > Save As.

on the toolbar or choose File > New.

----End

Follow-up Procedure You can close or delete a project through the File menu of the main interface or through the icons on the toolbar. For details about the main interface, see Main Interface of the PSTN SQE Server.

Configuring a Speech Channel This describes how to configure a speech channel. Before performing a test, you need to connect the telephone cable to the PSTN correctly to make the channel of a voice card available, and then configure a speech channel.

Prerequisite l

The telephone cable is already connected to the channel of the voice card in the PC.

l

A speech evaluation project is already created or open. NOTE

After the telephone cable is connected to the interface of the voice card in the PC, the software can automatically recognize the ID of the available speech channel. You can directly configure Source Number and Description for this channel.

14-302


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Context A maximum of eight channels can be configured in a project.

Procedure Step 1 Click on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Hardware Config. The Hardware Config window is displayed. Step 2 Select corresponding channel nodes in the list on the left of the Hardware Config window and configure Source Number and Description in the right area. ----End

Creating a Test Plan This describes how to create a test plan. The PSTN SQE Server can be used for the test in different test environments and provide the test items for the speech quality evaluation. You can set test items for the speech quality evaluation and create test tasks for the UE, thus guiding the speech test.

Procedure on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Test Plan Editor. The Test Plan Editor Step 1 Click window is displayed. Step 2 Click at the lower left corner of the TestPlanList area in the displayed Test Plan Editor window to create a test plan list. For the description of the parameters related to the Test Plan Editor window, see Parameters for Creating a Test Plan. Step 3 Enter Name and Description at the upper corner of the Test Plan Editor window. Step 4 Click Set to save the setting. at the left corner Step 5 Select a test plan list from the Test Plan Editor window, and then click of the TestPlan Config area to add a test plan to the test plan list and configure corresponding parameters. The test plan is named SQE by default. For details about SQE, see 14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server. ----End

Configuring a Test Plan This describes how to configure a test plan. You need to select corresponding Channel and set the Option property for each created test plan before the test plan is started.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-303


14 Appendix

Prerequisite l

The telephone cable is already connected to the PSTN, and related parameters are already configured. For details about how to configure a speech channel, see Configuring a Speech Channel.

l

At least one test plan is already created. For details about how to create a test plan, see Creating a Test Plan.

Procedure Step 1 Click on the toolbar or choose Configuration > Test Plan Configuration Editor. The Test Plan Configuration Editor window is displayed. The list names of created test tasks are automatically displayed in the Test Plan Configuration Editor window. Step 2 In the displayed Test Plan Configuration Editor window, select corresponding Channel and set the Option property for each test plan list. For details about the Option property, see Parameters for Configuring a Test Plan. NOTE

The Option property involves two fields: Yes and No. To perform the selected test plan, you must set Option to Yes.

----End

Starting a Test Plan This describes how to start a test plan. After a speech channel is connected properly, corresponding parameters are already configured, and a test plan is configured, you can record the logfile and start a test plan.

Prerequisite l

The telephone cable is already connected to the PSTN, and related parameters are already configured. For details about how to configure a speech channel, see Configuring a Speech Channel.

l

At least one test plan is already created. For details about how to create a test plan, see Creating a Test Plan.

l

The corresponding channel is already selected for a test plan and Option is set to Yes.

l

The Ring Back Tone service on the test terminal is stopped.

l

Click

Procedure on the toolbar or choose Test > StartRun. The test plan is started.

When the test plan is started, the PSTN SQE Server records a logfile (.gen file) automatically. The default saving path is software installation directory\Huawei GENEX \Probe 2.3\PSTN SQE Server\Data. ----End 14-304


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Monitoring the Execution State of a Test Plan This describes how to monitor the execution state of a test plan in the Event list of the SpeechView window during a test. This helps you view and analyze the test.

Prerequisite At least one test plan is performed. For details, see Starting a Test Plan.

Procedure l

Click on the toolbar or choose View > Speech/TV. The SpeechView window is displayed. View the execution state of the test plan in the Event list.

----End

Stopping a Test Plan This describes how to stop a test plan. You need to stop a test after it is finished.

Procedure l

Click

on the toolbar or choose Test > StopRun. The test plan is stopped.

----End

Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time This describes how to browse the speech evaluation view in real time. You can browse the test data in the SpeechView view during the test.

Prerequisite At least one test task is performed. For details, see Starting a Test Plan.

Context The SpeechView view is displayed in a chart and in a list. In the chart view, the changes of the MOS parameters are displayed in a histogram. In the list view, the changes are displayed in a table.

Procedure l

on the toolbar or choose View > Speech/TV. The SpeechView view is displayed. Click You can browse the test data in this view. NOTE

Select the Channel No drop-down list of the SpeechView view. You can view the MOS information about different channels.

----End Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-305


14 Appendix

14.5.4 Interface Reference of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the interfaces for using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test and describes corresponding parameters.

Interface Description: Create a Test Plan This describes the Test Plan Editor interface and helps you understand the interface components and functions of the components and shortcut icons. Figure 14-6 shows the Test Plan Editor interface. Table 14-19 provides the description of Figure 14-6. Figure 14-6 Test Plan Editor interface

Table 14-19 Description of the Test Plan Editor interface

14-306

Name

Description

TestPlanList area

Displays a test plan list.

TestPlanList Information area

Displays the names of and information about test plan lists.

TestPlan Config area

Displays test tasks.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Name

Description

Toolbar of the TestPlanList area

Provides the short icons for creating, deleting, and moving test plan lists. For details, see Table 14-20.

Toolbar of the TestPlan Config area

Provides the short icons for creating, deleting, and moving test tasks. For details, see Table 14-20.

Table 14-20 Description of the Test Plan Editor Toolbar Icon

Name

Description

Create

This icon is used to create a test plan list or a test plan.

Move up

This icon is used to move the selected test plan list or test plan upwards.

Move down

This icon is used to move the selected test plan list or test plan downwards.

Delete

This icon is used to delete the selected test plan list or test plan.

Parameters for Configuring a Speech Channel This describes the parameters for configuring a speech channel. You can refer to this part when configuring a speech channel and setting parameters. Parameter

Description

Channel

Refers to an emulation interface of the voice card, which is connected to the PSTN through a telephone cable and is used for the speech call or speech listening. The system automatically obtains available channels and displays them in Channel.

ChannelID

Refers to a ID of the selected channel.

SourceNumber

Refers to the source number of the selected channel.

Description

Refers to the description of the selected channel.

Parameters for Creating a Test Plan This describes the parameters for creating a test plan. You can refer to this part when creating a test plan and setting parameters.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-307


14 Appendix

Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a test plan list.

Description

Indicates the description of a test plan list.

ID

Indicates the ID of a test plan.

Name

Indicates the name of a test plan.

Property

Indicates the property name of a test item.

Value

Enables you to set values of Property.

Parameters for Configuring a Test Plan This describes the parameters for configuring a test plan. You can refer to this part when configuring a test plan and setting parameters. Parameter

Description

Name

Indicates the name of a test plan list.

ChannelID

Indicates the channel ID that is used to select a test plan list.

Option

Involves two fields: Yes and No. If this parameter is set to Yes, the selected test plan lists are executable. If this parameter is set to No, the selected test plan lists are inexecutable.

Parameters for Browsing the Speech Evaluation View in Real Time This describes the parameters for browsing the speech evaluation view. You can refer to this part when browsing the speech evaluation parameters and setting parameters. Parameter

Description

Speech MOS

Speech Events 14-308

Time

Indicates the time of the current MOS.

Algorithm

Indicates the algorithm used for the current MOS.

Count

Indicates the number of the times of recording the MOS.

Current MOS

Indicates the current MOS value.

Avg MOS

Indicates the average MOS value.

Max MOS

Indicates the maximum MOS value.

Min MOS

Indicates the minimum MOS value.

EventTime

Indicates the time of the current event.


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Parameter

Description EventName

Indicates the name of the current event.

DeviceID

Indicates the device ID.

ChannelID

Indicates the channel ID.

14.5.5 FAQs This describes the problems that may occur during the use of the PSTN SQE Server and the corresponding causes. This also describes how to solve these problems. This also describes the using skills.

What Should I Do When the PSTN SQE Server Searching for the Channel Fails? Symptom The PSTN SQE Server cannot search for the channel after the telephone cable of the PSTN is connected to the PC.

Possible Causes l

The telephone cable of the PSTN is not properly connected to the PC.

l

The driver for the voice card is installed incorrectly.

Procedure Step 1 Check whether the telephone cable of the PSTN is connected to the PC properly. Step 2 Reinstall the driver for the voice card. ----End

What Should I Do When Invalid MOS Values Are Generated? Symptom l

Symptom I: The SQE (MS-PSTN) test fails to be performed.

l

Symptom II: The SpeechView of the PSTN SQE Server contains invalid MOS values, that is, certain MOS values are smaller than 2.5.

Possible Causes Table 14-21 lists the fault causes. Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-309


14 Appendix

Table 14-21 Fault cause Fault Symptom

Possible Cause

Symptom I

l The version number of the Probe is incorrect. l The used test terminal is not Huawei U120e PHU, Huawei U1205 PHU or Huawei U6100 PHU. l The version number of the PHU is incorrect. l The RBT service of the PHU is not disabled.

Symptom II

The invalid MOS value may be caused by network problems if the following reasons are excluded. l The speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are different. l Other operations are performed on the keypad of the test MS. l An extension may be connected to the PSTN telephone cable that is connected to the PSTN SQE Server. l The configuration of the PC installed with the PSTN SQE Server does not meet the requirement.

Procedure Step 1 Check the version number of the Probe. Use the Probe V200R002C01SPC010 or a later version. On the main interface of the Probe, choose Help > About PROBE to view the version number of the Probe. Step 2 Check the version number of the PHU. Use the PHU V100R002C01B010SPC110 or a later version. For details on how to view the version number of the PHU, see the help of the PHU. Step 3 Check whether the speech samples used by the Probe and PSTN SQE Server are the same. 1.

. The Test Plan Control window is displayed. On the main interface of the Probe, click View the value of the Sample Type property of the SQE (MS-PSTN) test item.

2.

. The Test Plan Editor window On the main interface of the PSTN SQE Server, click is displayed. View the values of the Sample Time and Language Of Sample properties of the SQE test item. If the time of playing the speech sample and the language type of the speech sample are different, reconfigure the two properties of the SQE (MS-PSTN) and SQE test items.

----End

14-310


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

How to Uninstall the Driver for a Voice Card Question How to uninstall the driver for a voice card?

Answer After the driver for the voice card is uninstalled, the voice card cannot be used properly, and the PSTN SQE Server cannot automatically recognize the available channel. Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > Dialogic Diva > Uninstall. The window for uninstalling the driver for the voice card is displayed. Step 2 Click Next. Step 3 Click Uninstall. Step 4 Click Finish after the driver is uninstalled. ----End

How to Uninstall the Main Program Question How to uninstall the main program?

Answer After the Probe main program is uninstalled, the PSTN SQE Server and system templates are deleted but the operation logs and recorded logfiles are left.

Step 1 Choose Start > All Programs > GENEX Drive Test Solution > GENEX Probe 2.3 > Uninstall Probe. The uninstalling interface is displayed. Step 2 Choose Remove. Step 3 Click Next. Step 4 In the displayed dialog box for confirmation, click Yes. Step 5 After the installation is complete, click Finish. ----End

14.5.6 Test Items of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the properties of the SQE test item. You can refer to this part when using the PSTN SQE Server to perform the speech quality evaluation test, and then perform the related operations. NOTE

The Ring Back Tone service on the test terminal must be stopped before the SQE test is performed.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14-311


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

Call Mode

The value can be either of the following call modes:


l Outgoing, refers to the outgoing call mode. l Incoming, refers incoming call mode.

to

the

The default value is Outgoing. Destination Number


Indicates number.

the

destination

Source Number

You can set this property when Call Mode is set to Incoming.

Indicates the source number.

Call Type

The value can be either of the following call types:

Indicates a call type.

l Call By Call, refers to a short call. The number of calls cannot exceed the preset value. l Continuous Call, refers to a long call. The number of calls is unlimited. The default value is Call by Call. Call Duration

You can set this property when Call Type is set to Call by Call. The default value is 120, and the unit is second.


Call Interval


Indicates the interval between two calls, that is, the time from the previous call disconnection to the beginning of the next call.

Call Count



The default value is 5. Setup Time


Indicates the maximum time for call setup. After a call is originated, if the call cannot be set up within the defined period, the call setup fails.

Exception Interval

14-312



Indicates the call exception interval, that is, the time from the previous call drop to the beginning of the next call.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


14 Appendix

Property

Value/Range/Unit

Description

MOS Direction

-

Indicates the MOS direction. The Half duplex mode, that is the half duplex interaction mode is supported by the PSTN SQE Server.

Language Of Sample

-

Indicates the speech type of a speech sample. The English speech type is supported by the PSTN SQE Server.

Sample Time

The unit is second.

Indicates the duration of playing a speech sample. The 5s duration is supported by the PSTN SQE Server.

MOS Algorithm

The value can be any of the following algorithms:

Indicates the algorithm of the speech quality evaluation.

l PESQ.862.1 l PESQ.862 l PESQ LQ l PESQ Ie The default value is PESQ.862.1.

14.5.7 Predefined Events of the PSTN SQE Server This describes the predefined events of the PSTN SQE Server. You can refer to this part when configuring events of the speech quality evaluation.

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)

Name

Meaning

Description

OutgoingCall

Outgoing call

This event occurs when the channel originates a call.

CallAlerting

Call alerting

This event occurs when the channel receives an incoming call.

CallAnswer

Call answer

This event occurs when the channel receives an incoming call.

CallConnected

Call connected

This event occurs when the channel is connected to an incoming call successfully.

CallSetupFail

Call setup failure

This event occurs when the channel receives the call disconnected event but does not receive the CallConnected event.


14-313


14 Appendix

14-314

Name

Meaning

Description

CallComplete

Call complete

This event occurs when the channel receives the call disconnected event reported from the voice card in the case of a normal channel call connection.

StartRecord

Recording start

Recording starts on the channel.

Recording

Recording

The channel is in recording state.

RecordComplete

Recording complete

Recording is complete on the channel.

StartPlay

Playing start

Playing starts on the channel.

Playing

Playing

The channel is in playing state.

PlayComplete

Playing complete

Playing is complete on the channel.

StartSync

Synchronization test start

This event occurs when the synchronization test is performed for the channel and PHU after the channel is connected to a call.

SyncComplete

Synchronization test complete

This event occurs when the synchronization test is successfully performed for the channel and PHU.

SyncFailed

Synchronization test failure

This event occurs when the synchronization test fails to be performed for the channel and PHU.

ChannelDisconnected

Channel disconnected

The channel of the voice card is disconnected from the PSTN.

PlayException

Playing exception

Failures and exceptions occur during the playing.

RecordException

Record exception

Failures and exceptions occur during the recording.

TestStop

Test stop

This event occurs when the test is stopped.

VoiceQuality

MOS

-


Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


15 Technical Support

15

Technical Support

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office, customer care center or company headquarters. Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: Administration Building, Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Hotline telephone: 0755-28560000; 4008302118 Fax: 0755-28560111 Email: [email protected] or [email protected]

Issue 04 (2011-02-15)


15-1

GENEX Probe User Guide-(V200R003_04)

Recommend Documents